JP6737175B2 - Amusement machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

As a kind of gaming machine, a pachinko machine and a slot machine are known. In these gaming machines, a configuration is known in which a player is provided with a profit by shifting a game state to a special control state based on the satisfaction of a predetermined shift condition.

Regarding pachinko machines, specifically, a configuration that shifts to a special control state by a winning result in an internal lottery based on the entry of a game ball into the ball entry part provided in the game area, or a predetermined entry A configuration is known in which a game ball enters a part and shifts to a special control state. Then, when the special control state is entered, for example, opening and closing of the ball entrance device provided in the game area is started, and the game ball is paid out based on the ball entering the ball entrance device (for example, See Patent Document 1).

JP, 2005-009055, A

Here, it is necessary for the game to be favorably played in the gaming machine as exemplified above, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-described circumstances and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably playing a game.

In order to solve the above problems, the invention according to claim 1 is a predetermined detection means for detecting a game ball,
A game value giving means that is electrically connected to the predetermined detecting means and executes a process for giving a game value to a game;
A process execution unit that is electrically connected to the game value providing unit and executes a predetermined process;
In a gaming machine equipped with
The game value adding means,
First reference information storage means for storing reference information, which is information used for the processing for giving the game value and is referred to for detection by the predetermined detection means,
After the predetermined supply of electric power to the gaming machine is started and before the execution of the predetermined process for advancing the game is started, the reference information stored in the first reference information storage means is used. First transmitting means for transmitting a reference information signal corresponding to information to the processing executing means,
Second transmitting means for transmitting, to the processing executing means, a predetermined information signal based on ball entry information, which is information acquired based on the detection by the predetermined detecting means,
Equipped with
The processing execution means,
Second reference information storage means for storing reference information corresponding to the reference information signal transmitted from the game value giving means,
Execution means for executing the predetermined processing based on the predetermined information signal transmitted from the second transmission means and the reference information stored in the second reference information storage means;
Processing result information storage means for storing processing result information which is information relating to processing results of the predetermined processing by the execution means;
Equipped with
The game value adding means is a main control means for controlling the progress of the game,
Said processing execution means Ri presentation control means der for controlling the execution of the effect,
The predetermined process is a process corresponding to the state of the gaming machine and is a process different from the payout of the game balls .

According to the present invention, it becomes possible to appropriately play a game .

It is a perspective view showing a pachinko machine in the first embodiment. It is a perspective view which decomposes|disassembles and shows the main structures of a pachinko machine. It is a front view showing a configuration of a game board. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content on the display surface of (a)-(j) symbol display device. (A), (b) It is an explanatory view for explaining the display contents on the display surface of the symbol display device. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the structure regarding the discharge of the game ball which flowed down the game area. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is an explanatory view for explaining the contents of various counters used for win/win lottery. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the low probability table for 1st special figures, (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the high probability table for 1st special figures, (c) It is an explanatory view. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the low probability table for 2 special figures, and (d) is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the high probability table for 2nd special figures. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the allocation table for 1st special drawings, (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the allocation table for 2nd special drawings. It is a flow chart which shows the main processing performed by the master side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by the main side CPU. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the structure which makes the detection result of a ball detection sensor input into a main side CPU. It is a flow chart which shows the entrance detection processing performed by the main side CPU. It is a block diagram for explaining an electric configuration of a payout control device and various devices that communicate with the payout control device. It is a flow chart which shows timer interruption processing performed by a payment side CPU. It is a block diagram for explaining an electric configuration of a management IC. It is an explanatory view for explaining the composition of the input port of the management side I/F. It is an explanatory view for explaining the composition of a correspondence memory. It is an explanatory view for explaining the composition of a history memory. It is a flowchart which shows the process for recognition performed by the main side CPU. It is a flow chart which shows the management processing performed by the management side CPU. (A) ~ (d) is a time chart showing a state in which information on the correspondence between the first to fifteenth buffers and the types of signals is stored in the correspondence memory. It is a flow chart which shows management output processing performed by the master side CPU. It is a flow chart which shows history setting processing performed by a management side CPU. 8A to 8E are time charts showing how history information is stored in the history memory. 7 is a flowchart showing a data output process executed by the main CPU. 7 is a flowchart showing an external output process executed by the management-side CPU. It is a front view of the game board which expands and shows the area|region where the special electric winning device was provided. It is a perspective view of an opening/closing member. (A), (b) is a perspective view of the passage forming member and the opening/closing member, showing how the inlet of the fourth discharge passage portion is opened/closed by the opening/closing member. FIG. 6 is a plan view of an opening/closing member and a drive unit for special electric power. (A), (b) It is the sectional view on the AA line of FIG. (A) ~ (e) is a time chart showing how the winning of the second working opening occurs in the opening/closing execution mode. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the execution mode of (a), (b) opening/closing execution mode. (A1)-(b3) It is a time chart for demonstrating the execution aspect of the opening/closing execution mode which is performed when the result of a small hit is used as a trigger. It is a flowchart which shows the universal figure universal communication control process performed by the main side CPU. It is a flow chart which shows the special figure special electric power control processing performed by the main side CPU. It is a flow chart which shows reservation information acquisition processing performed by a master side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure fluctuation|variation start process performed by the main side CPU. It is a flow chart which shows the special figure finalization processing performed by the master side CPU. It is a flow chart which shows special electric power starting processing performed by the main side CPU. It is a flow chart which shows processing during special electric power release performed by the main side CPU. It is a flow chart which shows processing during special electric power closing performed by the main side CPU. It is a flow chart which shows special electric power end processing performed by a master side CPU. It is an explanatory view for explaining the composition of the input port of the management side I/F in the second embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process for recognition performed by the main side CPU. It is a flow chart which shows the management processing performed by the management side CPU. (A) ~ (h) is a time chart showing a state in which information on the correspondence between the first to twelfth buffers and the types of signals is stored in the correspondence memory. It is a block diagram for demonstrating the electric constitution of the management IC in 3rd Embodiment. It is an explanatory view for explaining the composition of the input port of the management side I/F. It is a flow chart which shows blackout information storage processing performed by the main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the power failure response process performed by the management side CPU. 7 is a flowchart showing an external output process executed by the management-side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the power failure response process performed by the management side CPU in 4th Embodiment. (A) It is a flowchart which shows the trigger specific process performed by the main side CPU in 5th Embodiment, and (b) is a flowchart which shows the arithmetic process performed by the management side CPU. It is a flow chart which shows the opportunity specific processing performed by the main side CPU in a 6th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the arithmetic processing performed by the management side CPU in 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the history setting process performed by the management side CPU in 8th Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the structure of the memory for history in 9th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows history setting processing performed by a management side CPU. It is a block diagram for explaining the electric composition of MPU of the main control unit in a 10th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the entrance detection processing performed by the main side CPU. It is a block diagram for explaining the electric composition of the main control unit in an 11th embodiment. It is an explanatory view for explaining the composition of the input port of the management side I/F. It is an explanatory view for explaining the composition of a history memory. It is a flow chart which shows history setting processing performed by a management side CPU. 7 is a flowchart showing an external output process executed by the management-side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the parameter management process performed by the main side CPU. It is a block diagram for demonstrating the structure of the signal path which transmits the detection result of each ball detection sensor in 12th Embodiment to the main side CPU and management IC. (A1)-(c2) It is a time chart for demonstrating the execution aspect of the opening/closing execution mode in 13th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows special electric power starting processing performed by the main side CPU. It is a flow chart which shows processing during special electric power release performed by the main side CPU. It is a flow chart which shows processing during special electric power closing performed by the main side CPU. It is a front view of the game board in the 14th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the entrance detection processing performed by the main side CPU. (A) ~ (e) is a time chart showing how a game ball enters the first special entrance or the second special entrance in the opening/closing execution mode. It is a front view of the game board in a 15th embodiment. (A), (b) It is the sectional view on the AA line of FIG. (A) It is the BB sectional drawing of FIG. 78, (b) It is the AA sectional view of FIG. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the low probability table for 1st special figures, (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the high probability table for 1st special figures, (c) It is an explanatory view. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the low probability table for 2 special figures, and (d) is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the high probability table for 2nd special figures. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the execution mode of (a), (b) opening/closing execution mode. It is a flowchart which shows the special electric open setting process performed by the main CPU. It is a front view of the game board in a 16th embodiment. (A) It is a flowchart which shows the special electric open setting process performed by the main CPU, and (b) is a flowchart which shows the special electric close setting process executed by the main CPU. (A)-(d) It is a time chart which shows a mode that a 1st special electric prize winning device and a 2nd special electric prize winning device are opened and closed. It is a longitudinal cross-sectional view of the game board for explaining the configuration of the special electric winning device in the seventeenth embodiment. 6 is a flowchart showing a flow-down prevention control process executed by a main CPU. (A) ~ (d) is a time chart for explaining the relationship between the open/closed state of each special electric winning device and the operating position of the flow-down prevention member. (A)-(c) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the relationship between the open/closed state of each special electric winning device and the operation position of a downflow prevention member. It is a front view of the game board in the 18th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows acquisition processing of reservation information on the universal figure side performed by the master side CPU. (A), (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content of a symbol display device. (A) ~ (e) is a time chart showing a state in which the reservation information on the universal figure side is acquired. It is a front view of the game board in a 19th embodiment. (A), (b) It is the sectional view on the AA line of FIG.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine, which is a type of gaming machine (hereinafter referred to as "pachinko machine"), will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a perspective view of a pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the main components of the pachinko machine 10. Note that, in FIG. 2, for convenience, the configuration in the game area PA of the pachinko machine 10 is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 forming an outer shell of the pachinko machine 10, and a gaming machine body 12 rotatably attached to the outer frame 11 forward. Have. The outer frame 11 is formed by connecting wooden plate members to four sides and has a rectangular frame shape. The pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall by attaching and fixing the outer frame 11 to the island facility. The outer frame 11 is not an essential component of the pachinko machine 10, and the island frame of the game hall may be equipped with the outer frame 11.

As shown in FIG. 2, the gaming machine main body 12 includes an inner frame 13, a front door frame 14 arranged in front of the inner frame 13, and a back pack unit 15 arranged behind the inner frame 13. ing. The inner frame 13 of the gaming machine body 12 is rotatably supported by the outer frame 11. Specifically, the inner frame 13 is rotatable forward when the left side is the rotation base end side and the right side is the rotation front end side when viewed from the front.

A front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13, and can be turned forward with the left side as a rotation base end side and the right side as a rotation front end side in a front view. A back pack unit 15 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13, and is rotatable rearward with the left side being the rotation base end side and the right side being the rotation front end side in front view.

In addition, the gaming machine main body 12 is provided with a locking device at its rotating front end, and has a function of locking the gaming machine main body 12 with respect to the outer frame 11 in a locked state, and The door frame 14 has a function of locking the inner frame 13 so that the door frame 14 cannot be opened. Each of these locked states is released by performing an unlocking operation using the unlocking key on the cylinder lock 17 exposed on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10.

Next, the configuration of the front side of the gaming machine body 12 will be described.

The inner frame 13 is mainly composed of a resin base 21 whose outer shape is substantially the same as that of the outer frame 11. A substantially elliptical window hole 23 is formed in the center of the resin base 21. A game board 24 is detachably attached to the resin base 21. The game board 24 is made of plywood, and the game area PA formed on the front surface of the game board 24 is exposed to the front surface side of the inner frame 13 through the window hole 23 of the resin base 21.

Here, the configuration of the game board 24 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 3 is a front view of the game board 24.

An inner rail portion 25 and an outer rail portion 26 are attached to the game board 24 so as to partition a part of the outer edge of the game area PA, and the inner rail portion 25 and the outer rail portion 26 guide the means. The guide rail as is configured. The game ball launched from the game ball launching mechanism 27 (see FIG. 2) attached below the window 23 in the resin base 21 is guided to the upper part of the game area PA by the guide rail.

By the way, the game ball launching mechanism 27 includes a launch rail 27a extending toward the guide rail, a ball feeding device 27b for supplying game balls stored in an upper plate 55a described later onto the launch rail 27a, and a launch rail 27a. And a solenoid 27c which is an electric actuator for firing the game ball supplied to the guide rail toward the guide rail. By rotating the firing operation device (or operation handle) 28 provided on the front door frame 14, the solenoid 27c is drive-controlled, and the game ball is fired.

The game board 24 is formed with a plurality of large and small openings penetrating in the front-rear direction. A general winning opening 31, a special electricity winning device 32, a first operating opening 33, a second operating opening 34, a through gate 35, a variable display unit 36, a special drawing unit 37, a universal drawing unit 38, etc. are provided in each opening. ing. A total of four general winning openings 31 are provided, and one is provided for each other.

Even if the ball enters the through gate 35, the payout of the game ball is not executed. On the other hand, when the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33 and the second operating opening 34 occur, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out. Regarding the number of prize balls, specifically, when one game ball enters the first operation port 33 or when one game ball enters the second operation port 34. The payout of one prize ball is executed, and when one game ball is inserted into the general winning opening 31, the payout of ten prize balls is executed and the special prize winning device 32 is displayed. When one of the game balls is entered, the payout of 15 prize balls is executed.

The number of prize balls is arbitrary, and for example, the number of prize balls may be smaller in the second operating port 34 than in the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 may be the first operating port. The number of prize balls may be larger than 33.

In addition, an out port 24a is provided at the bottom of the game board 24, and game balls that have not entered various winning ports are discharged from the game area PA through the out port 24a. Further, on the game board 24, a large number of nails 24b are planted in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the game balls, and various members such as a wind turbine are provided.

Here, the entry ball means that the game ball passes through a predetermined opening, and not only the mode in which the game ball is discharged from the game area PA after passing through the opening, but also the game area PA after passing through the opening. A mode in which the game area PA continues to flow down without being discharged is also included. However, in the following description, in order to be clearly distinguished from the game ball entering the outlet 24a, a general prize hole 31, a special electric prize winning device 32, a first operating port 33, a second operating port 34, and a through gate 35. Entering a game ball into is also referred to as a prize.

The variable display unit 36 includes a symbol display device 41 having a rectangular display surface, and a center frame 36a so as to surround the periphery of the display surface of the symbol display device 41. In the center frame 36a, the parts along the upper side, the left side and the right side of the display surface of the symbol display device 41 project forward of the board surface of the game board 24, and the variable display unit 36 is located in the center of the game area PA. It is provided. As a result, the game area PA includes an upper area PA1 located above the variable display unit 36, a left area PA2 located to the left of the variable display unit 36, and a right area PA3 located to the right of the variable display unit 36. , A lower area PA4 located below the variable display unit 36. In other words, the game ball shot in the game area PA first reaches the upper area PA1, but the game ball that reaches the upper area PA1 is in the order of the upper area PA1→the left area PA2→the lower area PA4. It flows down or flows down in the order of the upper area PA1→the right area PA3→the lower area PA4, and the game ball flowing down one of the left area PA2 and the right area PA3 does not flow down the other.

The first operation port 33 and the second operation port 34 are installed in the lower area PA4 which is an area below the variable display unit 36 in the game area PA. The lower area PA4 is continuous with the left area PA2, which is an area on the left side of the variable display unit 36 in the game area PA, and downstream thereof, and is the area on the right side of the variable display unit 36 in the game area PA. It is continuous with the right side area PA3 and its downstream side. Therefore, the game ball flowing down from any position in the upper area PA1 which is an area above the variable display unit 36 in the game area PA can reach the first operation opening 33 or the second operation opening 34. .. For example, the game ball can reach the first actuation port 33 or the second actuation port 34 even when the rotation operation of the firing operation device 28 is performed so as to reach the maximum operation amount. In addition, when a shooting operation is performed aiming at winning in the first working opening 33, not only winning in the first working opening 33 but also winning in the second working opening 34 may occur. When a shooting operation is performed aiming at winning in the second operating port 34, not only winning in the second operating port 34 but also winning in the first operating port 33 may occur.

The first working port 33 and the second working port 34 are unitized as a working port device in a state in which the first working port 33 is arranged vertically and the second working port 34 is arranged vertically. There is. When the first operating port 33 is not provided with a member for varying the frequency of entering the game balls into the first operating port 33, and the left side area PA2 is compared in a predetermined manner in which the game balls flow down, The probability of the game ball entering the first actuation opening 33 at is the same regardless of the game state. Therefore, the player can perform a shooting operation aiming to enter the game ball into the first operating port 33 in any situation.

The lower frame portion 36b, which is a lower portion of the display surface of the symbol display device 41 in the center frame 36a, is provided with a stage portion 36c so as to extend laterally above the first operating port 33, In the left frame portion 36d, which is the left side portion of the symbol display device 41 in the variable display unit 36, a warp passage that allows the game ball flowing down the left side area of the variable display unit 36 to be guided to the stage portion 36c. An inlet portion 36e is formed. The central portion of the stage portion 36c in the lateral direction is above the first actuation port 33 in the vertical direction, and the leading portion 36f for guiding the game ball to the lower portion of the stage portion 36c by its own weight. Are formed. In this case, it is difficult to enter the game ball led to the stage portion 36c into the first operating port 33 from the area other than the lead portion 36f, but it is difficult to enter the game ball, but the lead portion 36f. The game ball led out from below to the stage portion 36c enters the first operating port 33 with a high probability.

The second working port 34 is provided with a general electric accessory 34a as a guide piece composed of a pair of left and right movable pieces. In the closed state of the universal electric accessory 34a, the game ball cannot enter the second operating port 34, and when the universal electric object 34a is in the open state, it is possible to enter the second operating port 34.

A through gate 35 is provided on the upstream side in the flow-down direction of the game ball with respect to the second operation port 34, more specifically, on the right side area PA3. The through gate 35 has a through hole (not shown) penetrating in the vertical direction, and the game ball winning the through gate 35 flows down in the game area PA after winning. As a result, the game ball that has won the through gate 35 can enter the second operating port 34.

Based on the winning of the through-gate 35, the general electric accessory 34a of the second operating port 34 is switched from the closed state to the open state. Specifically, an internal lottery is triggered by winning the prize in the through gate 35, and a public figure display of the general figure unit 38 provided in the lower right corner, which is an area in the game area PA where the game balls do not pass. The variable display of the pattern is performed in the section 38a. Then, when the result of the internal lottery is the electric power combination opening winning, the stop result corresponding to the result is displayed, and the variable display of the universal graphic display portion 38a is ended, the operation shifts to the universal electric open state. In the general electric open state, the general electric accessory 34a is opened in a predetermined manner.

The universal figure display section 38a is composed of a segment display in which a plurality of segment light emitting sections are arranged in a predetermined manner, but the invention is not limited to this, and a liquid crystal display device or an organic EL display device is provided. , Other types of display devices such as CRTs or dot matrix displays. Further, as the pattern variably displayed on the universal figure display unit 38a, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are variably displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of symbols are variably displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are variably displayed, or A configuration in which a plurality of colors are switched and displayed can be considered.

In the universal figure unit 38, a universal figure hold display section 38b is provided at a position adjacent to the universal figure display section 38a. The maximum number of game balls that have won in the through gate 35 is four, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by lighting the universal figure reservation display section 38b.

A winning lottery is carried out with the winning of the first working opening 33 or the second working opening 34 as a trigger. Then, the lottery result is clearly shown through the display effect on the symbol display device 41 of the special drawing unit 37 and the variable display unit 36.

More specifically, the special figure unit 37 is provided with a first special figure display section 37a and a second special figure display section 37b. In the first special figure display portion 37a, a variation display of the pattern is performed by a winning lottery triggered by the winning of the first operating opening 33. Then, the result corresponding to the lottery result is displayed. Further, in the second special figure display portion 37b, the winning display to the second working port 34 is performed as a trigger to perform a variable display of the pattern. Then, the result corresponding to the lottery result is displayed. The first special figure display portion 37a and the second special figure display portion 37b are configured by segment display devices in which a plurality of segment light emitting portions are arranged in a predetermined manner, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, it may be configured by a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a CRT, a dot matrix display device, or another type of display device. Further, as the patterns displayed on the first special figure display portion 37a and the second special figure display portion 37b, a plurality of types of characters are displayed, a plurality of types of symbols are displayed, and a plurality of types of characters are displayed. A configuration in which is displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of colors are displayed, or the like can be considered.

In the special figure unit 37, a first special figure reservation display section 37c and a second special figure reservation display section 37d are provided at positions adjacent to the first special figure display section 37a and the second special figure display section 37b. .. The maximum number of game balls that have won in the first operation port 33 is reserved, and the reserved number is displayed by turning on the first special figure reservation display portion 37c. Further, the maximum number of game balls winning the second operating port 34 is reserved, and the reserved number is displayed by turning on the second special figure reservation display portion 37d.

In detail about the symbol display device 41, the symbol display device 41 is configured as a liquid crystal display device including a liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by a display control device described later. The symbol display device 41 is not limited to the liquid crystal display device, and may be another display device having a display screen such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device or a CRT, and is a dot matrix display device. May be.

In the symbol display device 41, when the variable display of the pattern is performed on the first special symbol display portion 37a based on the winning of the first operating port 33, the variable display of the symbol is performed in accordance with it, and the second operating port is also displayed. When the variable display of the pattern is performed on the second special figure display portion 37b based on the winning of 34, the variable display of the pattern is performed accordingly. In addition, in the symbol display device 41, not only the display effect triggered by the winning of the first operation port 33 or the second operation port 34, but also the display effect in the opening/closing execution mode which is shifted after the winning is won. Be seen.

Display contents when the variable display of the symbols is performed on the symbol display device 41 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 4 and 5. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing individually the symbols variably displayed on the symbol display device 41, and FIG. 5 is a diagram showing the display surface of the symbol display device 41.

As shown in FIGS. 4(a) to 4(j), the symbol, which is a kind of symbol, is composed of nine types of main symbols to which the numbers "1" to "9" are respectively attached and a shell-shaped symbol. It is composed of sub-patterns. More specifically, the numbers of "1" to "9" are respectively attached to nine types of character designs such as octopus to constitute the main design.

As shown in FIG. 5A, on the display surface of the symbol display device 41, three symbol rows Z1, Z2, Z3 of the upper stage, the middle stage and the lower stage are set as a plurality of display areas. Each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is configured by arranging a main symbol and a sub symbol in a predetermined order. Specifically, in the upper symbol row Z1, nine types of main symbols “1” to “9” are arranged in descending order of numbers, and one sub symbol is arranged between each main symbol. .. In the lower symbol row Z3, nine types of main symbols “1” to “9” are arranged in ascending order of numbers, and one sub symbol is arranged between each main symbol.

That is, the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are composed of 18 symbols. On the other hand, in the middle symbol row Z2, nine types of main symbols "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending order of numbers, and then between the main symbol "9" and the main symbol "1". The main symbols of "4" are additionally arranged, and one sub-symbol is arranged between these main symbols. That is, only in the middle symbol row Z2, 10 main symbols are arranged and configured by 20 symbols. Then, on the display surface, the symbols in each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 are variably displayed so as to scroll in a predetermined direction with periodicity.

As shown in FIG. 5(b), on the display surface, three symbols are stopped and displayed for each symbol row, and as a result, a total of 9 symbols of 3×3 are stopped and displayed. It has become. Further, as shown in FIG. 5A, five effective lines, that is, a left line L1, a middle line L2, a right line L3, a right downward line L4, and a right upward line L5 are set on the display surface.

When the variable display of the symbols is performed on the display surface based on the winning in the first operation port 33 or the second operation port 34, the symbols in each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 are cyclically scrolled in a predetermined direction. The variable display starts at. Then, the variable display is switched to the standby display in the order of the upper symbol row Z1 → the lower symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2, and finally the state ends with the predetermined symbols still displayed in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. .. Further, when the variable display of the symbols ends, if the result of the internal lottery is the 16R high-accuracy result described later, a combination of "7" symbols is formed on any of the activated lines, and the result of the internal lottery is In the case of any of 2R high-accuracy result, 4R high-accuracy result, 6R high-accuracy result and 10R high-accuracy result, which will be described later, a combination of the same odd symbols other than the "7" symbol on any of the activated lines. If the result of the internal lottery is 2R low-accuracy result, 4R low-accuracy result, 6R low-accuracy result, 10R low-accuracy result or 16R low-accuracy result, which will be described later, it will be displayed on any of the effective lines. A combination of the same even symbols is formed, and if the result of the internal lottery is any of the first small hit result, the second small hit result and the third small hit result, which will be described later, on any of the effective lines. A predetermined symbol combination (for example, "3.4.1") that is neither the same symbol combination nor the reach symbol combination is formed.

It should be noted that the display is started on any one of the special figure display portions 37a, 37b and the symbol display device 41 based on the winning of any one of the operation ports 33, 34, and a predetermined result is displayed and until it is finished. Corresponds to one of the game times. Further, the manner of variable display of the symbols in the symbol display device 41 is not limited to the above, but is arbitrary, and the number of symbol columns, the direction of variable display of symbols in the symbol column, the number of symbols in each symbol column, etc. Can be changed as appropriate. Further, the picture variably displayed on the picture display device 41 is not limited to the above-mentioned picture, and for example, only numbers may be variably displayed as the picture.

When a big hit is won in the winning lottery based on the winning of the first working opening 33, the opening/closing execution mode in which the special electric winning device 32 can be won is performed. In addition, even when a big hit or a small hit is won in the winning lottery based on the winning of the second working opening 34, the opening/closing execution mode in which the special electric winning device 32 can be won can be performed. As shown in FIG. 3, the special electric winning device 32 is provided in the right area PA3 in the game area PA. Therefore, the game ball flowing down the left side area PA2 cannot win the special electric prize winning device 32, and for example, the right side area such as when the turning operation of the firing operation device 28 is performed so as to reach the maximum operation amount. When the shooting operation is performed such that the game ball flows down the PA3, it is possible to win the special electric prize winning device 32. The configuration of the special power winning device 32 will be described in detail later.

FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration related to the discharge of the game balls flowing down the game area PA.

As described above, the game balls that enter the general winning opening 31, the special electricity winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, the second operating opening 34, and the out opening 24a are discharged from the game area PA. In other words, the game ball shot from the game ball launching mechanism 27 and flowing into the game area PA is any one of the general winning opening 31, the special electricity winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, the second operating opening 34, and the outlet 24a. By entering the ball, it will be discharged from the game area PA. The game ball that has entered the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, the second operating opening 34, or the out opening 24a is guided to the back side of the game board 24.

On the back surface of the game board 24, discharge passage portions 42 to 48 are formed corresponding to the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, the second operating opening 34, and the out opening 24a. .. The game balls that have flowed into the discharge passages 42 to 48 are guided to the lower end of the game board 24 on the back side of the game board 24 by flowing down the flowed out discharge passages 42 to 48, and to the discharge ball collecting portion (not shown). Be recovered. Then, the game balls collected by the discharge ball collecting section are discharged to the ball circulating device of the island facility in which the pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall.

Various detection sensors 42a to 48a for detecting a game ball are provided in the respective discharge passage portions 42 to 48. The discharge passage portions 42 to 48 and the detection sensors 42a to 48a will be described below. Since the four general winning openings 31 are provided as described above, the discharge passage portions 42 to 44 are provided corresponding to each of the four. In this case, one detection sensor 42a is provided for each of the first discharge passage portion 42 corresponding to the leftmost general winning opening 31 and the second discharge passage portion 43 corresponding to the right general winning opening 31 adjacent thereto. 43a is provided. Specifically, the first winning opening detection sensor 42a is provided such that the detection range exists in the middle position of the first discharge passage portion 42, and the detection range is formed in the middle position of the second discharge passage portion 43. The second winning opening detection sensor 43a is provided so as to exist. The game ball that has entered the leftmost general winning opening 31 is detected by the first winning opening detection sensor 42a while passing through the first discharge passage portion 42, and the game that entered the general winning opening 31 on the right side thereof. The ball is detected by the second winning opening detection sensor 43a while passing through the second discharge passage portion 43. Further, a third discharge passage portion 44 formed so as to join at the middle position with respect to the two right general winning openings 31 is provided. The third discharge passage portion 44 has an entrance side area corresponding to each of the two general winning openings 31, and also has one exit side area due to the entrance side areas joining in the middle. doing. The third winning opening detection sensor 44a is provided so that the detection range exists at an intermediate position of the outlet side region of the third discharge passage portion 44. The game ball that has entered one of the two right winning openings 31 on the right side is detected by the third winning opening detection sensor 44a while passing through the third discharge passage portion 44.

The fourth discharge passage portion 45 is provided so as to correspond to the special electric winning device 32. The special electricity detection sensor 45a is provided so that the detection range exists at the midway position of the fourth discharge passage portion 45, and the game ball entering the special electricity prize winning device 32 is in the middle of passing through the fourth discharge passage portion 45. It is detected by the special electric detection sensor 45a. The fifth discharge passage portion 46 is provided so as to correspond to the first operation port 33. The first working port detection sensor 46a is provided so that the detection range is present at an intermediate position of the fifth discharging passage portion 46, and the game sphere that has entered the first working opening 33 moves through the fifth discharging passage portion 46. During the passage, it is detected by the first working port detection sensor 46a. The sixth discharge passage portion 47 is provided so as to correspond to the second operation port 34. The second working port detection sensor 47a is provided so that the detection range exists in the middle of the sixth discharging passage part 47, and the game ball entering the second working port 34 moves through the sixth discharging passage part 47. During the passage, it is detected by the second working port detection sensor 47a. The seventh discharge passage portion 48 is provided so as to correspond to the outlet 24a. The outlet detection sensor 48a is provided so that the detection range exists in the middle of the seventh discharge passage portion 48, and the game ball entering the outlet 24a is in the middle of passing through the seventh discharge passage portion 48. It is detected by the outlet detection sensor 48a.

In addition, the game ball detected by any one of the various detection sensors 42a to 48a will not be detected by the other detection sensors 42a to 48a. Further, a gate detection sensor 49a is also provided for the through gate 35, and a game ball passing through the through gate 35 while flowing down the game area PA is detected by the gate detection sensor 49a.

An electromagnetic induction type proximity sensor is used as each of the various detection sensors 42a to 49a, but any sensor can be used as long as it can individually detect a game ball. Further, the various detection sensors 42a to 49a are electrically connected to a main control device 60 described later, and the detection results of the various detection sensors 42a to 49a are output to the main control device 60. Specifically, the various detection sensors 42a to 49a output a LOW level signal when the game ball is not detected, and output a HI level signal when the game ball is detected. The relationship between HI and LOW is not limited to this, and may be reversed.

As shown in FIG. 2, the front door frame 14 is provided so as to cover the entire front surface side of the inner frame 13 in which the game board 24 having the above configuration is attached to the resin base 21. As shown in FIG. 1, the front door frame 14 is provided with a window portion 51 that allows almost the entire game area PA to be viewed from the front. The window 51 has a substantially elliptical shape, and a window panel 52 is fitted therein. The window panel 52 is made of glass and is colorless and transparent, but the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be made of synthetic resin and is colorless and transparent, and the game area PA is provided from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the window panel 52. If it is visible, it may be formed to be colored and transparent.

A display light emitting portion 53 is provided above the window portion 51. Further, a pair of left and right speaker units 54 for outputting a sound effect according to the game state are provided. Further, below the window portion 51, an upper bulge portion 55 and a lower bulge portion 56 which bulge toward the front side are arranged in parallel vertically. An upper plate 55a that opens upward is provided inside the upper bulging portion 55, and a lower plate 56a that also opens upward is provided inside the lower bulging portion 56. The upper plate 55a has a function of temporarily storing the game balls paid out from the payout device 76, which will be described later, and guiding them to the game ball launching mechanism 27 side while aligning them in a line. In addition, the lower plate 56a has a function of storing game balls that have become redundant in the upper plate 55a.

Next, the configuration of the back side of the gaming machine body 12 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 2, on the back surface of the inner frame 13 (specifically, the game board 24), a main controller 60 that controls the main control of the game is mounted. The main controller 60 has a main control board 61 housed in a board box 60a. The substrate box 60a may be provided with a trace means for leaving a trace of the opening, or may be provided with a trace structure for leaving a trace of the opening. Examples of the trace means include a structure of a joint portion that inseparably joins a plurality of case bodies that constitute the substrate box 60a and requires destruction of a predetermined portion at the time of separation, or that an adhesive layer remains on an object to be adhered at the time of peeling. A configuration may be considered in which a sealing sticker that leaves a trace of being peeled off is attached so as to straddle the boundary between a plurality of case bodies. Further, as the trace structure, a configuration in which an adhesive is applied to the boundaries between the plurality of case bodies that form the substrate box 60a can be considered.

The back pack unit 15 is installed so as to cover the back surface side of the inner frame 13 including the main controller 60. The back pack unit 15 includes a back pack 72 formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and the payout mechanism unit 73 and the control device assembly unit 74 are attached to the back pack 72.

The payout mechanism unit 73 includes a tank 75 to which game balls supplied from the island facility of the game hall are sequentially replenished, and a payout device 76 for paying out the game balls stored in the tank 75. The game ball paid out from the payout device 76 is discharged to the upper plate 55a or the lower plate 56a through a payout passage provided on the downstream side of the payout device 76. The payout mechanism unit 73 is provided with a main power supply of, for example, 24 V AC, and a back pack substrate having a power switch for performing ON and OFF operations of the power supply.

The control device gathering unit 74 generates and outputs a payout control device 77 having a function of controlling the payout device 76, a predetermined electric power required by various control devices and the like, and accompanies the player's operation of the firing operation device 28. It is provided with a power supply/launching control device 78 for controlling the launch of a game ball. The payout control device 77 and the power supply/launch control device 78 are arranged in front and back so that the payout control device 77 is behind the pachinko machine 10.

<Electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10>
FIG. 7 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main controller 60 includes a main control board 61 that controls the main game, and a power failure monitor board 67 that monitors the power supply. An MPU 62 is mounted on the main control board 61. The MPU 62 contains a main side ROM 64, a main side RAM 65, and a management IC 66 in addition to the main side CPU 63, which is an arithmetic processing unit including a control unit and an arithmetic unit. In addition to the above-described elements, the MPU 62 contains an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, various counter circuits as a random number generator, and the like.

The main-side ROM 64 is a memory such as a NOR flash memory and a NAND flash memory that does not require external power supply for storage storage (that is, a non-volatile storage unit), and is used as a read-only memory. The main ROM 64 stores various control programs executed by the main CPU 63 and fixed value data.

The main RAM 65 is a memory (that is, a volatile storage means) such as an SRAM and a DRAM that needs power supply from the outside to retain the storage, and is used for both reading and writing. The main RAM 65 can be randomly accessed and has a shorter read time than the main ROM 64 when compared with the same data capacity. The main RAM 65 temporarily stores various data and the like for execution of the control program stored in the main ROM 64.

The management IC 66 is a management device that manages the entry mode of the game ball in the game area PA based on the information supplied from the main CPU 63. Although the details will be described later, while the management IC 66 grasps the entry history of the game ball into the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, the second operating opening 34, and the out opening 24a, The frequency of entering the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, and the second operating opening 34 is ascertained according to the obtained winning history.

The MPU 62 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. To the input side of the MPU 62, the power failure monitoring board 67 and the payout controller 77 provided in the main controller 60 are connected. A power supply/launch control device 78 having a function of supplying operating power is connected to the power failure monitoring board 67, and operating power is supplied to the MPU 62 via the power failure monitoring board 67.

Various sensors such as various ball detection sensors 42a to 49a are connected to the input side of the MPU 62. The various ball detection sensors 42a to 49a are, as already described, the first winning hole detection sensor 42a, the second winning hole detection sensor 43a, the third winning hole detection sensor 44a, the special electricity detection sensor 45a, and the first working opening detection sensor. 46a, a second operation port detection sensor 47a, an out port detection sensor 48a, and a gate detection sensor 49a. Based on the detection results of these ball detection sensors 42a to 49a, the main CPU 63 determines whether or not each ball has entered the ball. In the main CPU 63, various kinds of lottery are executed based on the winning of the first operating opening 33, and various kinds of drawing are executed based on the winning of the second operating opening 34.

A power failure monitoring board 67, a payout control device 77, and a voice emission control device 81 are connected to the output side of the MPU 62. In the payout control device 77, for example, a prize ball command is output based on the fact that a game ball has entered a prize ball-corresponding ball part in which the occurrence of a ball corresponds to the payout of a game ball in the ball entering part. It Various commands such as a variation command, a type command, and an opening command are output to the sound emission control device 81.

On the output side of the MPU 62, a special electric drive unit 32b for opening/closing an opening/closing member 202 of the special electric prize winning device 32, and a general electric drive unit 34b for opening/closing the general electric officer 34a of the second operating port 34. The special drawing unit 37 and the general drawing unit 38 are connected. Incidentally, the special figure unit 37 is provided with a first special figure display section 37a, a second special figure display section 37b, a first special figure reservation display section 37c and a second special figure reservation display section 37d. Are all connected to the output side of the MPU 62. Similarly, the universal figure unit 38 is provided with a universal figure display section 38a and a universal figure hold display section 38b, all of which are connected to the output side of the MPU 62. Various driver circuits are provided on the main control board 61, and the MPU 62 executes drive control of various drive units and various display units through the driver circuits.

That is, in the opening/closing execution mode, the drive control of the drive unit 32b for special electricity is executed in the main CPU 63 so that the special electricity winning device 32 is opened and closed. In addition, when the general electric utility article 34a is in the universal electric open state, the main CPU 63 executes drive control of the general electric vehicle drive unit 34b so that the general electric vehicle object 34a is opened and closed. .. Further, at the time of each game, the main CPU 63 executes the display control of the special figure display portion 37a. Further, in the case of clearly indicating the lottery result of whether or not to open the general electric accessory 34a, the main CPU 63 executes the display control of the general figure display unit 38a. Further, when a winning is generated in the first operation port 33 or the second operation port 34, or when the variable display is started in the special figure display portions 37a, 37b, the special CPU reservation display portion 37c, 37c in the main CPU63,. When the display control of 37d is executed and a prize is given to the through gate 35, or when the variable display is started on the general figure display section 38a, the main CPU 63 executes the display control of the general figure hold display section 38b. To be done.

The power failure monitoring board 67 relays the main control board 61 and the power supply/launch control device 78 and monitors the voltage of DC stable 24V which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply/launch control device 78. The payout control device 77 controls the payout device 76 to pay out prize balls or loan balls based on the prize ball command received from the main control device 60.

The power supply/launch control device 78 is connected to, for example, a commercial power supply (external power supply) in a game hall or the like. Then, based on the external power supplied from the commercial power source, the main control board 61, the payout control device 77, and the like are generated with necessary operating power, and the generated operating power is supplied. By the way, the power supply/launch control device 78 is provided with a power supply unit for power interruption such as a backup capacitor, and even when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is in the OFF state, the power supply unit for power interruption is mainly used. Electric power for storage is supplied to the main RAM 65 of the control device 60 and the payout control device 77. The power supply/launch control device 78 is responsible for the launch control of the game ball launch mechanism 27, and the game ball launch mechanism 27 is driven when a predetermined launch condition is satisfied.

The sound emission control device 81 drives and controls the display light emission part 53 and the speaker part 54 provided on the front door frame 14 and controls the display control device 82 based on various commands received from the main control device 60. Is. The display control device 82 executes the display control of the symbol display device 41 based on the command received from the voice emission control device 81.

<Electrical configuration for performing various lottery in the main CPU 63>
Next, an electrical configuration for the main CPU 63 to perform various kinds of lottery will be described with reference to FIG.

Main side CPU63 uses the various counter information at the time of the game, jackpot occurrence lottery, setting of display of special symbol display portions 37a, 37b, setting of symbol display of symbol display device 41, setting of display of general symbol display portion 38a, etc. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8, the winning random number counter C1 used in the lottery for winning, the jackpot type counter C2 used in determining the jackpot type, and the symbol display device 41 are The reach random number counter C3 used for the reach generation lottery when the deviation fluctuates, the random number initial value counter CINI used for setting the initial value of the hit random number counter C1, and the variable display in the special figure display portions 37a, 37b and the symbol display device 41. The fluctuation type counter CS that determines the period is used. Furthermore, the ordinary electric random number counter C4 used in the lottery for determining whether or not to make the ordinary electric accessory 34a of the second operation port 34 in the ordinary electric open state is used. The counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS and C4 are provided in various counter areas 65b of the main RAM 65.

Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to "0". Each counter is updated at short time intervals. The information corresponding to the winning random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 is provided as acquisition information storage means in the main RAM 65 when a prize is awarded to the first operating opening 33 or the second operating opening 34. The special figure reservation area 65a is stored. The special figure reservation area 65a includes a first special figure reservation area 85, a second special figure reservation area 86, and a special figure execution area 87.

The first special figure reservation area 85 is provided with a first area 85a, a second area 85b, a third area 85c and a fourth area 85d, and a hit random number counter C1 according to the winning history of the first operating port 33, Numerical information of the jackpot type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 is stored in any of the areas 85a to 85d as pending information on the special drawing side. In this case, in the first area 85a to the fourth area 85d, when the winning of the first working opening 33 occurs a plurality of times in succession, the first area 85a→the second area 85b→the third area 85c→the third area 85c Numerical information is sequentially stored in the order of the four areas 85d. Since the four areas 85a to 85d are provided in this manner, the winning history of the game balls to the first operating port 33 can be reserved and stored up to a maximum of four. Note that the number that can be reserved and stored in the first special figure reservation area 85 is not limited to four, and may be any number, and may be another plurality such as two, three, or five or more. , May be singular.

The second special figure reservation area 86 includes a first area 86a, a second area 86b, a third area 86c, and a fourth area 86d, and the hit random number counter C1 is matched with the winning history of the second working port 34. Numerical value information of the jackpot type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 is stored in any of the areas 86a to 86d as reserved information on the special drawing side. In this case, in the first area 86a to the fourth area 86d, when the winning to the second working port 34 is continuously generated a plurality of times, the first area 86a→the second area 86b→the third area 86c→the second area 86a. Numerical information is sequentially stored in the order of the four areas 86d. Since the four areas 86a to 86d are provided in this way, the winning history of the game balls to the second operating port 34 is stored up to four at maximum. The number that can be reserved and stored in the second special figure reservation area 86 is not limited to four and is arbitrary, and may be two, three, or five or more other numbers. , May be singular.

In the special figure execution area 87, when the variable display is started in any of the special figure display portions 37a and 37b, the holding information of the target for the special figure right/wrong determination or distribution determination is stored. Area. Specifically, when the variable display of the first special figure display portion 37a is started, the reservation information stored in the first area 85a of the first special figure reservation area 85 is moved to the special figure execution area 87. To be done. On the other hand, when the variable display of the second special figure display portion 37b is started, the reservation information stored in the first area 86a of the second special figure reservation area 86 is moved to the special figure execution area 87.

The information corresponding to the ordinary electric random number counter C4 is stored in the ordinary figure holding area 65c when a prize is awarded to the through gate 35. The universal figure holding area 65c includes a first area 88a, a second area 88b, a third area 88c, and a fourth area 88d, and numerical information of the universal electric random number counter C4 according to the winning history of the through gate 35. Is stored in any of the areas 88a to 88d as the reservation information on the universal figure side. In this case, in the first area 88a to the fourth area 88d, when the winning to the through gate 35 occurs a plurality of times in succession, the first area 88a→the second area 88b→the third area 88c→the fourth area. Numerical information is stored in time series in the order of 88d. By providing the four areas 88a to 88d in this manner, the winning history of the game balls to the through gate 35 is stored up to four at maximum. Note that the number that can be reserved and stored in the universal figure reservation area 65c is not limited to four, and may be any number, and may be two or three, or five or more, and a single number. May be An execution area 89 for a general figure is provided in the general figure reservation area 65c. The universal figure execution area 89 is an area in which the pending information of the target for performing the universal electric open lottery process is stored when the variable display is started on the universal figure display unit 38a. Specifically, when the variable display of the universal figure display section 38a is started, the suspension information stored in the first area 88a of the universal figure suspension area 65c is moved to the universal figure execution area 89.

Each of the above counters will be described in detail.

First, the ordinary electric random number counter C4 will be described. The ordinary electric random number counter C4 is configured so that, for example, it is sequentially incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 250, and returns to "0" after reaching the maximum value. The ordinary electric random number counter C4 is regularly updated and is stored in the ordinary figure holding area 65c of the main side RAM 65 at the timing when the game ball is won in the through gate 35. Then, at a predetermined timing, a lottery is performed as to whether or not to control the general electric power accessories 34a to be in an open state by the stored value of the general electric power random number counter C4.

The pachinko machine 10 has only one support mode. Therefore, the probability of being in the ordinary electricity open state winning in the ordinary electricity open lottery process using the ordinary electricity random number counter C4 and the manner of determining the variable display period when the variable display of the pattern is executed in the universal figure display portion 38a are It is constant irrespective of the gaming state, and the number of times the universal utility product 34a is in the open state in the universal power open state, one opening period of the universal power product 34a, and the number of the universal power product 34a in the universal power open state. In the case where the open state occurs a plurality of times, the execution mode of the drive control of the general electric vehicle 34a such as the closing period from the end of one open state to the start of the next open state is constant regardless of the gaming state. Is. As a result, it is not necessary to change the display control mode of the universal figure display unit 38a and the drive control mode of the general electric auditors object 34a according to the type of support mode, and thus the program capacity for executing these controls Also, the data capacity can be suppressed. Since there is only one support mode, the normal game state in this embodiment is a game state in which the win/loss lottery mode is a low probability mode, and the high probability state in this embodiment is a win/win lottery mode with a high probability. It is a game state that is a mode.

Next, the winning random number counter C1 will be described. The hit random number counter C1 is configured to be sequentially incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 599, for example, and returned to "0" after reaching the maximum value. In particular, when the hit random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the hit random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the random number counter C1 (value=0 to 599). The hit random number counter C1 is periodically updated, and is stored in the special figure holding area 65a of the main side RAM 65 at the timing when the game ball wins the first operating opening 33 or the second operating opening 34. Then, it is judged whether or not the hit number is stored in the random number counter C1.

The value of the random number that is won at the time of the win/no win determination is stored in the main ROM 64 as a win/loss table. In the hit/miss table, a big hit result, a small hit result, and a miss result are set as the hit/miss results. The jackpot result is a win/loss result that can be a trigger to shift to the open/close execution mode in which the special electric winning device 32 is controlled to open/close, and a trigger to shift to the win/loss lottery mode. The small hit result is a win/loss result that does not trigger a shift to the win/win lottery mode while triggering a shift to the open/close execution mode in which the special electric winning device 32 is controlled to open/close. The disengagement result is a win/fail result that does not trigger the shift to the opening/closing execution mode and further does not trigger the shift in the win/loss lottery mode.

The opening/closing execution mode executed when the jackpot result is a round number defining mode executed with a predetermined number of round games as the upper limit. The round game continues until either one of the conditions that the number of times the special electric prize winning device 32 is opened and closed is the upper limit number and that a predetermined upper limit number of game balls are won in the special electric prize winning device 32 is satisfied. It is a game. In this embodiment, the special electric prize winning device 32 is opened and closed once in one round game, and the opening duration in each round game is set to 29 seconds. Also, the upper limit number of winnings to the special electric winning device 32 is set to 10. In the situation where the firing operation device 28 is operated by the player, the game ball firing mechanism 27 is drive-controlled so that one game ball is fired toward the game area PA in 0.6 seconds, so that a round game is performed. The opening continuation period of is set to a time longer than the product of the firing cycle of the game ball and the upper limit number of winnings in one round game. Therefore, in each round game, it can be expected that the special electric prize winning device 32 will win the game balls of the prize winning upper limit number or more. Also, the number of round games executed in the round number defining mode differs depending on the type of jackpot result.

The opening and closing execution mode executed when the small hit result is set, the round game is not set, the number of times of opening and closing the special electricity winning device 32 is the upper limit number, and the predetermined upper limit number of game balls This is the opening/closing number defining mode that ends when either one of the conditions for winning the special electric prize winning device 32 is satisfied. A plurality of types of opening continuation periods in one opening of the special electric winning device 32 in the opening/closing number defining mode are set. These opening durations are set to be longer than the game ball firing cycle (specifically 0.6 seconds), but the game ball firing cycle and the winning upper limit number (specifically 10) There is a period that is less than the product, and a period that is greater than or equal to the product of the game cycle of the game balls and the upper limit number of winnings (specifically, 10). In the opening/closing execution mode executed when the small hit result is obtained, the number of balls held by the player can be increased, though the number is smaller than that in the opening/closing execution mode executed when the big hit result is obtained.

As the win/loss table, as shown in the explanatory views of FIGS. 9A to 9D, the first reservation information stored in the first special figure reservation area 85 based on the winning of the first operating port 33 is displayed. A win/loss table for the first special figure used for the win/fail judgment, and a second win/failure table for the second hold information stored in the second special figure hold area 86 based on the winning of the second operating port 34 The hit/miss table for special maps is set. Further, the winning and winning table for the first special figure includes a low probability winning and hitting table and a high probability hitting table, and similarly, the winning and failing table for the second special figure also has a low probability hitting table and a high probability hitting table. There is a win/fail table. That is, in the pachinko machine 10, different win/loss tables are referred to in the first hold information and the second hold information, and in any case, the low probability mode and the high probability mode are used as the win/loss lot selection mode in the win/no judgment. Existing.

Explaining each win/loss table in detail, in the low certainty win/loss table for the first special figure, as shown in FIG. )) and the other values are random numbers that result in a deviation. That is, when the win/no win lottery mode is the low probability mode and the win/no win determination is performed on the first hold information, either the big hit result or the miss result can be obtained, but the small hit result does not occur.

As shown in FIG. 9B, the number of random number values that result in a big hit is set in the high-accuracy/probability table for the first special figure is larger than that in the low-probability/probability table for the first special figure. Specifically, the number is 20 (for example, “5”, “34”, “65”, “130”, “163”, “192”, “220”, “245”, “276”, “305”. , “334”, “365”, “392”, “420”, “470”, “495”, “520”, “558”, “575”, “599”). In this case, the value group of the hit random number counter C1 which is a big hit in the situation of the low probability mode is included in the value group of the hit random number counter C1 which is a big hit in the situation of the high probability mode. The other random number values are random number values that result in deviation. In other words, when the winning/unwinning lottery mode is the high-probability mode and the winning/unwinning determination is performed with respect to the first hold information, either the big hit result or the miss result is obtained, but the small hit result is not obtained.

In the low probability table for the second special figure, as shown in FIG. 9C, the value of the random number that is the jackpot result is the same as in the low probability table for the first special figure. On the other hand, the values of the random numbers other than the random numbers that are the jackpot results are the values of the random numbers that are the jackpot results. In other words, when the winning/winning lottery mode is the low probability mode and the winning/winning determination processing is performed on the second holding information, the result is either a big hit result or a small hit result. Further, as the small hit result, a first small hit result, a second small hit result, and a third small hit result are set. Although the details of the first small hit result, the second small hit result, and the third small hit result will be described later, the execution modes of the opening/closing execution mode are different. The winning probabilities of these first to third small hit results are 199/600, which are the same.

As shown in FIG. 9D, the random number values that result in the big hits in the high probability table for the second special figure are the same as those in the high probability table for the first special figure. Therefore, the number of random number values resulting in the jackpot is larger than that in the low probability table for the second special figure. On the other hand, the values of the random numbers other than the random numbers that are the jackpot results are the values of the random numbers that are the jackpot results. That is, when the win/no win lottery mode is the high-probability mode and the win/no win determination is performed on the second hold information, the result is either a big hit result or a small hit result. Similar to the low probability table for the second special figure, the first small hit result, the second small hit result, and the third small hit result are set as the small hit results. The winning probabilities of the first to third small hit results are 193/600 or 194/600, which are substantially the same.

As described above, when the second hold information triggers the hit determination, the small hit result is generated, so that the small hit result is generated and the small hit result is dealt with. The open/close execution mode is likely to occur. Then, the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to the small hit result is generated, so that the player can slightly increase the number of balls he holds.

If the high-probability mode has a higher probability of a jackpot result than the low-probability mode, the number and value of the winning random numbers are arbitrary, and in the low-probability mode the jackpot result The value group of the hit random number counter C1 may or may not include only a part of the value group of the hit random number counter C1 which is a big hit in the high probability mode. ..

The jackpot type counter C2 is configured to be sequentially incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 29, and returned to "0" after reaching the maximum value. The jackpot type counter C2 is regularly updated, and is stored in the special figure holding area 65a at the timing when the game ball wins the first operating opening 33 or the second operating opening 34.

In this pachinko machine 10, a plurality of jackpot results are set. These jackpot results are set by setting a difference between two conditions, that is, the number of times the round game is executed in the open/close execution mode and the win/loss lottery mode in the win/loss lottery means after the opening/closing execution mode. There is.

As shown in the explanatory views of FIG. 10A and FIG. 10B, the sorting table includes 2R low accuracy results, 2R high accuracy results, 4R low accuracy results, and 4R as types of jackpot results. The high-accuracy result, the 6R low-accuracy result, the 6R high-accuracy result, the 10R low-accuracy result, the 10R high-accuracy result, the 16R low-accuracy result, and the 16R high-accuracy result are set.

The 2R low-accuracy result and the 2R high-accuracy result have two round game executions in the open/close execution mode, and the 4R low-accuracy result and 4R high-accuracy result have four round game executions in the open/close execution mode and the 6R low As for the certainty result and 6R high certainty result, the number of times of round game execution in opening and closing execution mode becomes 6, 10R low certainty result and 10R high certainty result becomes ten times of round game execution in opening and closing execution mode, 16R low certainty result The 16R high-accuracy result indicates that the number of round games executed in the open/close execution mode is 16 times. The 2R low-accuracy result, 4R low-accuracy result, 6R low-accuracy result, 10R low-accuracy result, and 16R low-accuracy result are the win/loss lottery mode after completion of the opening/closing execution mode, In either case, the low probability mode is set. This low-probability mode is at least continued until the next big jackpot result is reached, and the switching execution mode is accordingly changed. On the other hand, the 2R high-accuracy result, the 4R high-accuracy result, the 6R high-accuracy result, the 10R high-accuracy result and the 16R high-accuracy result have the win/loss lottery mode after the end of the opening/closing execution mode, In either case, the high probability mode is set. This high-probability mode continues at least until the next big hit result and the switching to the open/close execution mode.

As the distribution table, as shown in FIGS. 10A and 10B, the first special feature used in the distribution determination of the first holding information acquired based on the winning of the first operating port 33. A distribution table for the drawing and a distribution table for the second special map used for the distribution determination of the second hold information acquired based on the winning of the second operation port 34 are set.

Explaining each distribution table in detail, as shown in FIG. 10A, the distribution table for the first special figure has 2R low-accuracy results and 2R high-accuracy results as types of jackpot results to be distributed. As a result, 4R low-accuracy result, 4R high-accuracy result, 6R low-accuracy result, 6R high-accuracy result, 10R low-accuracy result, 10R high-accuracy result, 16R low-accuracy result and 16R high-accuracy result are set. In the distribution table for the first special map, "0 to 1" corresponds to the 2R low accuracy result, "2 to 5" corresponds to the 2R high accuracy result, and "6 to 7" is 4R. Corresponds to low accuracy results, "8-11" corresponds to 4R high accuracy results, "12-13" corresponds to 6R low accuracy results, and "14 to 17" corresponds to 6R high accuracy results. It corresponds to the result, "18-19" corresponds to the 10R low-accuracy result, "20-23" corresponds to the 10R high-accuracy result, and "24-25" corresponds to the 16R low-accuracy result. Corresponding, "26-29" corresponds to the 16R high accuracy result. In this case, the probabilities of 2R low-accuracy result, 4R low-accuracy result, 6R low-accuracy result, 10R low-accuracy result and 16R low-accuracy result are respectively about 6.7%, and 2R high-accuracy result, 4R high-accuracy result, The probability of obtaining a 6R high-accuracy result, a 10R high-accuracy result, and a 16R high-accuracy result is about 13%, respectively. On the other hand, in the distribution table for the second special figure, as shown in FIG. 10B, 16R low-accuracy result and 16R high-accuracy result are set as the types of jackpot results to be distributed. In the distribution table for the second special figure, "0-9" corresponds to the 16R low-accuracy result, and "10-29" corresponds to the 16R high-accuracy result. In this case, the probability of a 16R low accuracy result is about 33%, and this probability is 2R low accuracy result, 4R low accuracy result, 6R low accuracy result, 10R low accuracy result and It is the same as the probability that any of the 16R low accuracy results will be selected. In addition, the probability of being a 16R high-accuracy result is about 67%, and this probability is 2R high-accuracy result, 4R high-accuracy result, 6R high-accuracy result, 10R high-accuracy result and 16R high-accuracy result in the distribution table for the first special figure. It is the same as the probability that any of the highly accurate results will be selected.

The distribution table for the first special figure and the distribution table for the second special figure have the same probability of becoming the high-probability mode after the opening/closing execution mode in the case of a big hit. On the other hand, the average number of round games executed is greater in the distribution table for the second special figure than in the distribution table for the first special figure. Therefore, as a type of jackpot result that can be selected when the jackpot is won, a prize is won in the second jack 34 than in the case where the prize is put in the first jack 33 and the internal lottery is performed. It is more advantageous for the player if the internal lottery is performed.

Next, the reach random number counter C3 will be described. The reach random number counter C3 is configured to be sequentially incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 238, for example, and after reaching the maximum value, returns to "0". Here, in the pachinko machine 10, an expected effect is set as a kind of display effect in the symbol display device 41. The expected effect is provided with a symbol display device 41 capable of performing variable display of symbols, and in a game machine in which a final stop result is a given response result in a game time that is a predetermined jackpot result, the symbol display device 41 The display state for making the player think that the variation display state is likely to be the above-mentioned assignment correspondence result in the stage before the stop result is derived and displayed after the variable display of the symbol is started. In addition, as for the assignment correspondence result, specifically, a combination of symbols having the same number is stopped and displayed on any of the activated lines.

Two types of expected display are set: a reach display and a notice display for expecting the occurrence of the reach display or the result of the assignment response in the stage before the reach display occurs.

In the reach display, the symbols are stopped and displayed for some of the plurality of symbol strings displayed on the display surface of the symbol display device 41, thereby displaying a combination of reach symbols, and the remaining symbols in that state. A display state in which variable display of symbols is displayed in a row is included. Also, in the state where the reach symbol combination is displayed as described above, while performing the variable display of the symbols in the remaining symbol columns, the reach effect is displayed by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on the background screen. , A combination of reach patterns is displayed in a reduced size or hidden, and a reach effect is included by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on substantially the entire display surface.

In the notice display, in a situation in which the symbols are variably displayed in all the symbol columns after the variable display of the symbols is started on the display surface of the symbol display device 41, or in a part of the symbol columns, a plurality of symbols are displayed. In the situation where the symbols are variably displayed in the symbol column, a mode in which the character is displayed separately from the symbols on the symbol column is included. Further, it also includes a background screen having a predetermined mode different from the previous modes and a pattern on the symbol row having a predetermined mode different from the previous modes. Such advance notice display can occur at both game times when the reach display is performed and when the reach display is not performed, but the reach display is higher than the case where the reach display is not performed. It is set to occur with a probability.

The reach display is executed regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3 in the game time when the same symbol combination is finally stopped and displayed. Further, the game number corresponding to the small hit result is not executed regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3. Further, in the game times corresponding to the result of deviation, it is executed when the reach random number counter C3 obtained at a predetermined timing by referring to the reach table stored in the main ROM 64 corresponds to the occurrence of the reach display. ..

On the other hand, the decision as to whether or not to display the advance notice is made in the sound emission control device 81, not in the main control device 60. In this case, the sound emission control device 81 is more likely to generate a notice display in the game times corresponding to any of the jackpot results than in the game times corresponding to the miss result, and displays a notice display with a low appearance rate. The lottery process for displaying the advance notice is executed so as to satisfy at least one of the conditions that is likely to occur. By the way, this lottery result is reflected when the effect for game use is executed on the symbol display device 41.

Next, the fluctuation type counter CS will be described. The fluctuation type counter CS is configured to be incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 198, for example, and return to "0" after reaching the maximum value. The fluctuation type counter CS is used when the main CPU 63 determines the fluctuation display period in the special figure display portions 37a and 37b and the fluctuation display period of the symbol in the symbol display device 41. The fluctuation type counter CS is repeatedly updated, and is acquired at the time of starting fluctuation display on the special figure display portions 37a and 37b and determining a fluctuation pattern at the start of fluctuation of the symbol by the symbol display device 41.

<Regarding the processing configuration of the main CPU 63>
Next, each process executed by the main CPU 63 for advancing a game will be described. The processing of the main CPU 63 is roughly classified into a main processing that is started when the power is turned on and a timer interrupt processing that is started regularly (in this embodiment, at a cycle of 4 msec).

<Main processing>
First, the main process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, power-on wait processing is executed (step S101). In the power-on wait process, for example, the main process is activated, and a predetermined wait time (specifically, 1 sec) elapses without waiting for the next process. During the execution period of the power-on wait process, the operation start and initial setting of the symbol display device 41 are completed. After that, access to the main RAM 65 is permitted (step S102), and the internal function register of the main CPU 63 is set (step S103).

After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erasing switch provided in the power supply/launch control device 78 is manually operated (step S104), and it is further determined whether or not the power failure flag of the main RAM 65 is set to "1". The determination is made (step S105). In addition, a checksum calculation process for calculating a checksum is executed (step S106), and it is determined whether or not the checksum matches the checksum saved at the time of power-off, that is, the validity of the stored and held data ( Step S107).

In the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the game hall is opened, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch is pressed, the process proceeds to step S108. Also, when the power-off occurrence information is not set, or when an abnormality in the stored and held data is confirmed by the checksum, the process similarly proceeds to step S108. In step S108, the main RAM 65 is cleared. Then, it progresses to step S109.

On the other hand, if the RAM erasing switch is not pressed, on condition that the power failure flag is set to "1" and the checksum is normal, the process of step S108 is not executed and step S109 is executed. Proceed to. In step S109, power-on setting processing is executed. In the power-on setting process, a predetermined area of the main RAM 65 such as initialization of a power failure flag is set to an initial value, and a command corresponding to the current game state is transmitted to the voice emission control device 81. Further, after the processing of step S109 is executed, the recognition processing for causing the management IC 66 to recognize various information (step S110), and the data output for outputting various data to the reading device connected to the MPU 62. The process is executed (step S111). Details of these recognition processing and data output processing will be described later.

Although the main CPU 63 is configured to periodically execute the timer interrupt process, the generation of the timer interrupt process is prohibited when the main process is started. The state in which the generation of the timer interrupt process is prohibited is released at the timing before the process of step S111 is completed and the process of step S112 is executed, and the execution of the timer interrupt process is permitted. As a result, when the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, the data output process of step S111 ends and the timer interrupt process is not executed until the stage before the process of step S112 is started. Therefore, the processing for advancing the game in the main CPU 63 is not started until this situation is reached.

After that, the process proceeds to the residual process of steps S112 to S115. That is, the main CPU 63 is configured to periodically execute the timer interrupt process, but a residual time is generated between one timer interrupt process and the next timer interrupt process. This remaining time will vary depending on the processing completion time of each timer interrupt processing, but the remaining processing of steps S112 to S115 is repeatedly executed using this irregular time. In this respect, it can be said that the residual process of steps S112 to S115 is an irregular process that is irregularly executed.

In the residual processing, first, in step S112, interrupt prohibition is set in order to prohibit the occurrence of timer interrupt processing. In a succeeding step S113, a random number initial value updating process for updating the random number initial value counter CINI is executed, and at the same time, a fluctuation counter updating process for updating the fluctuation type counter CS is executed in step S114. In these updating processes, the current numerical value information is read from the corresponding counter of the main RAM 65, the process of adding 1 to the read numerical value information is performed, and then the process of overwriting the counter of the reading source is executed. In this case, when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to "0". Then, in step S115, the setting of interrupt permission for switching from the state in which the generation of the timer interrupt process is prohibited to the state in which the timer interrupt processing is permitted is performed. After executing the process of step S115, the process returns to step S112, and the processes of steps S112 to S115 are repeated.

<Timer interrupt processing>
Next, the timer interrupt processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The timer interrupt process is executed periodically (for example, every 4 msec cycle).

First, power failure information storage processing is executed (step S201). In the power failure information storage processing, it is monitored whether or not a power failure signal corresponding to the occurrence of the power cutoff is received from the power failure monitoring board 67, and when the occurrence of the power failure is identified, the power failure processing is executed and an infinite loop is executed. Become. In the power failure process, the power failure flag of the main RAM 65 is set to "1", the checksum is calculated, and the calculated checksum is saved.

After that, random number update processing for lottery is executed (step S202). In the lottery random number updating process, the winning random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the universal electric random number counter C4 are updated. Specifically, after the current numerical value information is sequentially read from the hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the universal electric random number counter C4, and the read numerical information is incremented by 1, respectively, A process of overwriting the counter of the reading source is executed. In this case, when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to "0". After that, in step S203, the random number initial value updating process is executed as in step S113, and at the same time, the fluctuation counter updating process is executed in step S204 as in step S114.

Then, the fraud detection process of monitoring whether or not a predetermined event set as a fraudulent monitoring target has occurred is executed (step S205). In the fraud detection process, the occurrence of a plurality of types of events is monitored, and by confirming that a predetermined event has occurred, the game stop flag provided in the main RAM 65 is set to "1". In a succeeding step S206, it is determined whether or not the progress of the game is stopped by determining whether or not "1" is set in the game stop flag. When a negative determination is made in step S206, the processing of step S207 and thereafter is executed.

In step S207, port output processing is executed. In the port output process, when the output information has been set in the previous timer interrupt process, a process for outputting to the various driving units 32b and 34b corresponding to the output information is executed. For example, when the information to switch the special electric prize winning device 32 to the open state is set, the output of the drive signal to the special electric drive unit 32b is started, and the information to switch to the closed state is set. Stops the output of the drive signal. Further, when the information for switching the universal electric accessory 34a of the second operation port 34 to the open state is set, the output of the drive signal to the drive unit 34b for the general electric power is started to switch to the closed state. When the information is set, the output of the drive signal is stopped.

Then, the reading process is executed (step S208). In the reading process, signals other than the power failure signal and the winning signal are read, and the read information is stored for use in future processes.

After that, a ball detection process is executed (step S209). In the entrance detection process, the signals received from the entrance detection sensors 42a to 49a are read, and based on the read results, the outlet 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special prize winning device 32, and the first operating opening 33. The presence or absence of a ball entering the second operating port 34 and the through gate 35 is specified. The details of the incoming ball detection process will be described later.

After that, a timer update process for collectively updating the numerical information of a plurality of types of timer counters provided in the main RAM 65 is executed (step S210). In this case, the configuration is such that the timer counters that are updated by subtracting the stored numerical value information are aggregated and handled, but both the subtraction timer counter update and the addition timer counter update are aggregated and performed. It may be configured.

After that, a firing control process for controlling the firing of the game ball is executed (step S211). In the situation where the firing operation to the firing operating device 28 is continued, one gaming ball is fired at a predetermined firing cycle of 0.6 sec. In a succeeding step S212, as input state monitoring processing, based on the information read in the reading processing of step S208, disconnection confirmation of each of the ball detection sensors 42a to 49a and opening confirmation of the gaming machine main body 12 and the front door frame 14 are performed. I do.

After that, the special figure special power control processing for performing the game time execution control and the opening/closing execution mode execution control is executed (step S213), and the display control of the general figure display unit 38a and the drive control of the general electric accessory 34a are performed. A general/universal/universal electric vehicle control process for performing the operation is executed (step S214). The processing contents of the special figure special electric power control processing and the universal figure normal electric power control processing will be described in detail later.

In a succeeding step S215, based on the processing results of the immediately preceding steps S213 and S214, the output information for reflecting the increased/decreased number of the hold information related to the special figure display units 37a, 37b on the special figure hold display units 37c, 37d. In addition to the setting, the output information for reflecting the increased/decreased number of the hold information related to the universal figure display section 38a on the universal figure hold display section 38b is set. In step S215, output information for updating the display contents of the special figure display portions 37a and 37b is set based on the processing results of the immediately preceding steps S213 and S214, and the display of the general figure display portion 38a is performed. Set the output information to update the contents.

After that, the contents of the command and the signal received from the payout control device 77 are confirmed, and the payout state receiving process for performing the process corresponding to the confirmation result is executed (step S216). Further, a payout output process for setting the prize ball command as an output target is executed (step S217). Also, the external information setting process for controlling the start and end of the output of the external signal according to the processing results of the various processes executed in the timer interrupt process this time is executed (step S218). After that, the management output process for outputting the information corresponding to the result of entering the game ball in the game area PA to the management IC 66 is executed (step S219). Details of the management output process will be described later.

<Incoming detection processing>
Next, in the main CPU 63, based on the detection results of the respective ball detection sensors 42a to 49a, the outlet 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special electricity winning device 32, the first working opening 33, the second working opening 34, and the through. A configuration for specifying whether or not a game ball enters the gate 35 will be described. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a configuration in which the detection results of the ball entrance detection sensors 42a to 49a are input to the main CPU 63.

The main CPU 63 is provided with an input port 63a. The input port 63a is configured as an 8-bit parallel interface so that it can simultaneously handle eight types of signals. Areas in which information of "0" or "1" is stored according to the voltage of each signal are provided in a one-to-one correspondence with each terminal. That is, the 0th bit D0 to the 7th bit D7 are provided as the area. Further, although more than eight kinds of signals are input to the input port 63a, the signal group to be input to the input port 63a depends on the driver IC in order to limit the simultaneous input to eight kinds. It can be switched through the switching control.

In the incoming ball detection process (step S209) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 12), the signal group to be input to the input port 63a is set to the signal group from each of the incoming ball detection sensors 42a to 49a. In the situation where such a setting is made, the 0th bit D0 stores information corresponding to the detection signal from the first winning opening detection sensor 42a, and the first bit D1 corresponds to the detection signal from the second winning opening detection sensor 43a. The information corresponding to the detection signal from the third winning a prize detection sensor 44a is stored in the second bit D2, and the information corresponding to the detection signal from the special electric power detection sensor 45a is stored in the third bit D3. , The fourth bit D4 stores information corresponding to the detection signal from the first working port detection sensor 46a, and the fifth bit D5 stores information corresponding to the detection signal from the second working port detection sensor 47a. The 6-bit D6 stores information corresponding to the detection signal from the outlet detection sensor 48a, and the 7th bit D7 stores information corresponding to the detection signal from the gate detection sensor 49a.

When the passage of the game ball is not detected, each of the ball detection sensors 42a to 49a outputs a LOW level signal indicating that the game ball is not being detected, and detects the passage of the game ball. In that case, a HI level signal indicating that the detection is being performed is output as the detection signal. The input port 63a stores "0" information for the corresponding bit when receiving the LOW level signal, and "1" for the corresponding bit when receiving the HI level signal. Stores the information of. That is, in the situation where passage of the game ball is not detected by the ball detection sensors 42a to 49a, information of "0" corresponding to the information indicating non-detection is stored for the corresponding bit, and the passage of the game ball is detected. In the detected state, information of "1" corresponding to the information indicating that the bit is being detected is stored for the corresponding bit.

FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing the incoming ball detection process executed in step S209 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 12).

When it is confirmed that the state in which the information of “0” is stored in the 0th bit D0 is changed to the state in which the information of “1” is stored, one piece is detected by the first winning opening detection sensor 42a. It is determined that a game ball has been detected (step S301: YES). In this case, "1" is set to the first output flag provided in the main RAM 65 (step S302), and the value of the 10 prize ball counter provided in the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S303). .. The first output flag is used by the main CPU 63 to specify that the information output indicating that one gaming ball has been detected by the first winning opening detection sensor 42a should be executed for the management IC 66. It is a flag. The ten prize ball counter is a counter for the main CPU 63 to specify the number of times that the payout of ten game balls should be executed. When the value of the counter for 10 award balls is 1 or more, the 10 award ball command is output to the award controller 77 in the payout output process of step S217 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 12), and the 10 award balls are paid out. When the command is output once, the value of the counter for 10 prize balls is decremented by 1. When the payout control device 77 receives the 10 prize ball command, it drives and controls the payout device 76 so that 10 game balls are paid out.

When it is confirmed that the state in which the information of "0" is stored in the first bit D1 is switched to the state in which the information of "1" is stored, one piece is detected by the second winning opening detection sensor 43a. It is determined that a game ball has been detected (step S304: YES). In this case, "1" is set to the second output flag provided in the main RAM 65 (step S305), and the value of the 10 award ball counter provided in the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S306). .. The second output flag is used for the main CPU 63 to specify that the information output indicating that one gaming ball has been detected by the second winning hole detection sensor 43a should be executed for the management IC 66. It is a flag.

When it is confirmed that the situation in which the information of "0" is stored in the second bit D2 is switched to the situation in which the information of "1" is stored, one piece is detected by the third winning opening detection sensor 44a. It is determined that a game ball has been detected (step S307: YES). In this case, "1" is set to the third output flag provided in the main RAM 65 (step S308), and the value of the 10 award ball counter provided in the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S309). .. The third output flag is used by the main CPU 63 to specify that the information output indicating that one gaming ball has been detected by the third winning opening detection sensor 44a should be executed for the management IC 66. It is a flag.

When it is confirmed that the state in which the information of "0" is stored in the third bit D3 is switched to the state in which the information of "1" is stored, one game ball is detected by the special electric detection sensor 45a. It is determined that it has been detected (step S310: YES). In this case, the special electricity prize flag provided in the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S311), and the fourth output flag provided to the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S312). The value of the counter for 15 prize balls provided in the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S313). The special electric prize flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify that one game ball has entered the special electric prize device 32 in the opening/closing execution mode. In the special map special electric power control processing (step S213) of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 12), by confirming that the special electric prize winning flag is set to "1", one game ball is inserted into the special electric prize winning device 32. It is specified that a ball has occurred, and the remaining possible number of balls to enter the special electric prize winning device 32 in the round game or the opening/closing execution mode is subtracted by one. When the process of subtracting 1 from the number of possible balls to enter is executed, the special electric prize flag is cleared to "0". The fourth output flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify that the information output indicating that one game ball is detected by the special electric power detection sensor 45a should be executed to the management IC 66. .. The counter for 15 prize balls is a counter for the main CPU 63 to specify the number of times the payout of 15 game balls should be executed. When the value of the counter for 15 award balls is 1 or more, the 15 award ball command is output to the payout control device 77 in the payout output process of step S217 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 12), and the 15 award balls are paid out. When the command is output once, the value of the 15 award ball counter is decremented by 1. When the payout control device 77 receives the 15 prize ball command, it drives and controls the payout device 76 so that 15 game balls are paid out.

When it is confirmed that the state in which the information of “0” is stored in the fourth bit D4 is switched to the state in which the information of “1” is stored, the first operating port detection sensor 46a detects one It is determined that a game ball has been detected (step S314: YES). In this case, the first operation winning flag provided in the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S315), and the fifth output flag provided to the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S316). Further, the value of the one prize ball counter provided in the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S317). The first operation winning flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify that one game ball has entered the first operation opening 33. In the special figure special electric control process (step S213) of the timer interruption process (FIG. 12), by confirming that the first operation winning flag is set to "1", the special area holding area 65a holds the holding area RE. On condition that the number of stored pending information is less than the upper limit of 4, a process of newly storing pending information is executed. In the special electric special electric power control processing (step S213), it is confirmed that the first operation winning flag is set to "1", and when the processing corresponding to the confirmation is executed, the first operation winning flag is cleared to "0". To do. The fifth output flag is used for the main CPU 63 to specify that the information output indicating that one gaming ball has been detected by the first working opening detection sensor 46a should be executed for the management IC 66. It is a flag. The one prize ball counter is a counter for the main CPU 63 to specify the number of times that one gaming ball should be paid out. When the value of the one prize ball counter is 1 or more, the one prize ball command is output to the payout control device 77 in the payout output process of step S217 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 12), and the one prize ball is obtained. When the command is output once, the value of the one prize ball counter is decremented by one. When the payout control device 77 receives the one prize ball command, it drives and controls the payout device 76 so that one game ball is paid out.

When it is confirmed that the state in which the information of “0” is stored in the fifth bit D5 is switched to the state in which the information of “1” is stored, the second working port detection sensor 47a detects one It is determined that a game ball has been detected (step S318: YES). In this case, "1" is set to the second operation winning flag provided in the main RAM 65 (step S319), and "1" is set to the sixth output flag provided in the main RAM 65 (step S320). Further, the value of the one prize ball counter provided in the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S321). The second operation winning flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify that one game ball has entered the second operating port 34. In the special figure special electric control process (step S213) of the timer interruption process (FIG. 12), it is confirmed that the second operation winning flag is set to "1", and thus the special figure holding area 65a has a holding area RE. On condition that the number of stored pending information is less than the upper limit of 4, a process of newly storing pending information is executed. In the special electric special electric power control processing (step S213), it is confirmed that the second operation winning flag is set to "1", and when the processing corresponding to the confirmation is executed, the second operation winning flag is cleared to "0". To do. The sixth output flag is used for the main CPU 63 to specify that the information output indicating that one gaming ball has been detected by the second working opening detection sensor 47a should be executed for the management IC 66. It is a flag.

When it is confirmed that the state in which the information of "0" is stored in the sixth bit D6 is switched to the state in which the information of "1" is stored, one game ball is detected by the out-mouth detection sensor 48a. Is detected (step S322: YES). In this case, "1" is set to the seventh output flag provided in the main RAM 65 (step S323). The seventh output flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify that the information output indicating that one gaming ball has been detected by the outlet detection sensor 48a should be executed for the management IC 66. is there.

When it is confirmed that the situation where the information of "0" is stored in the seventh bit D7 is switched to the situation where the information of "1" is stored, one game ball is detected by the gate detection sensor 49a. It is determined that it has been detected (step S324: YES). In this case, the gate winning flag provided in the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S325). The gate winning flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify that one game ball has entered the through gate 35. In the universal figure control process (step S214) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 12), by confirming that the gate winning flag is set to "1", the universal map stored in the universal figure holding area 65c is confirmed. On the condition that the number of pieces of holding information on the side is less than the upper limit number of 4, the processing for storing the numerical information of the current Poden random number counter C4 as the holding information on the side of the drawing in the drawing holding area 65c is executed. To do. It is confirmed that the gate winning flag is set to "1" in the normal/universal electric power control process (step S214), and when the process corresponding to the confirmation is executed, the gate winning flag is cleared to "0".

Since the timer interrupt process (FIG. 12) is activated in a 4 msec cycle as already described, when the detection of one game ball is started by one of the ball detection sensors 42a to 49a, the ball is detected. In the situation where the detection sensor 42a to 49a continues to detect the one game ball, the main CPU 63 specifies that the game ball detection sensor 42a to 49a has detected one game ball. Done. Therefore, it suffices if each one of the first to seventh output flags is provided.

<Structure for paying out game balls>
Next, the content of processing executed by the payout control device 77 will be described. First, electrical configurations of the payout control device 77 and various devices that communicate with the payout control device 77 will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG. 15.

The payout control device 77 includes an MPU 91. The MPU 91 includes a payout side CPU 92, which is an arithmetic processing unit including a control unit and a calculation unit, as well as a payout side ROM 93, a payout side RAM 94, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, and the like.

The payout-side ROM 93 is a memory such as a NOR flash memory and a NAND flash memory that does not require external power supply for storage and storage (that is, non-volatile storage means), and is used as a read-only memory. The payout-side ROM 93 stores various control programs executed by the payout-side CPU 92 and fixed value data.

The payout side RAM 94 is a memory (that is, a volatile storage means) such as an SRAM and a DRAM that needs to be supplied with electric power from the outside to retain the storage, and is used for both reading and writing. The payout side RAM 94 can be randomly accessed and has a shorter read time than the payout side ROM 93 when compared with the same data capacity. The payout side RAM 94 temporarily stores various data and the like for execution of the control program stored in the payout side ROM 93.

The payout side CPU 92 can perform bidirectional communication with the main side CPU 63. Upon receipt of the prize ball command from the main CPU 63, the payout side CPU 92 drives and controls the payout device 76 so that the number of game balls corresponding to the prize ball command is paid out. Further, the payout side CPU 92 monitors whether or not the payout of the game balls can be normally performed, and when it is specified that the payout of the game balls is not normally possible, the payout side RAM 94 is displayed. The payout device 76 is stopped even in the situation where the number of unpaid prize balls is stored. Further, the payout side CPU 92 transmits to the main side CPU 63 a payout restriction command indicating that the normal payout is not possible. When the main CPU 63 receives the payout restriction command, the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting unit 53, and the speaker unit 54 perform a notification indicating that it is not possible to normally pay out the game balls. As described above, the notification command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 81. As a state in which it is not possible to normally pay out the game balls, the lower plate 56a is filled with the game balls, the tank 75 has no balls filled with the game balls, and the payout device 76. Is not operating normally, there is a payout abnormal state, a main body open state in which the gaming machine main body 12 is opened from the outer frame 11, and a front door open state in which the front door frame 14 is opened from the inner frame 13. ..

An unillustrated full tank detection sensor is provided at an intermediate position of the game ball passage leading from the payout device 76 to the lower tray 56a, and the detection result of the full tank detection sensor is input to the payout side CPU 92. The payout side CPU 92 specifies that the gaming ball is in a full state when the gaming ball is continuously detected by the full tank detection sensor, and the state in which the gaming ball is continuously detected by the full tank detection sensor is released. In this case, it is specified that the full tank state has been released.

A ball non-detection sensor (not shown) is provided at an intermediate position of the game ball passage leading from the tank 75 to the payout device 76, and the detection result of the ball non-detection sensor is input to the payout side CPU 92. The payout side CPU 92 specifies that there is no ball when the game ball is not continuously detected by the ball non-detection sensor, and when the state where the game ball is not continuously detected by the ball no detection sensor is released. Specify that the ball-free state has been released.

The payout device 76 is provided with a payout detection sensor (not shown) for detecting the game balls paid out from the payout device 76, and the detection result of the payout detection sensor is input to the payout side CPU 92. The payout side CPU 92 specifies that one game ball has been paid out from the payout device 76 when the game ball is detected by the payout detection sensor. Further, the payout side CPU 92 specifies that the payout detection sensor is in the payout abnormal state when the payout detection sensor does not continuously detect the game ball despite the drive control of the payout device 76 so that the game ball is paid out. , When the state in which the game ball is not continuously detected by the payout detection sensor is released, it is specified that the abnormal payout state has been released.

A front door opening sensor 95 is provided on the front surface of the inner frame 13 (see FIG. 2), and the detection result of the front door opening sensor 95 is input to the payout side CPU 92. In this case, when the front door frame 14 is closed with respect to the inner frame 13, the front door opening sensor 95 transmits a close detection signal to the payout side CPU 92, and the front door frame 14 is opened with respect to the inner frame 13. In the case of, the front door opening sensor 95 transmits an opening detection signal to the payout side CPU 92. The payout side CPU 92 specifies that the front door frame 14 is in the closed state when receiving the closing detection signal from the front door opening sensor 95, and when receiving the opening detection signal from the front door opening sensor 95. The front door frame 14 is specified to be in the open state. Further, the payout-side CPU 92 transmits a front door opening command to the main CPU 63 at the timing specified that the front door frame 14 has changed from the closed state to the open state, and specifies that the front door frame 14 has changed from the open state to the closed state. The front door closing command is transmitted to the main CPU 63 at the timing. The main CPU 63 specifies that the front door frame 14 is in the open state when receiving the front door opening command, and specifies that the front door frame 14 is in the closing state when receiving the front door closing command.

A main body opening sensor 96 is provided on the front surface of the back pack unit 15 (see FIG. 2 ), and the detection result of the main body opening sensor 96 is input to the payout side CPU 92. In this case, when the gaming machine body 12 is closed with respect to the outer frame 11, the body opening sensor 96 transmits a closing detection signal to the payout side CPU 92, and the gaming machine body 12 is opened with respect to the outer frame 11. In some cases, the main body opening sensor 96 transmits an opening detection signal to the payout side CPU 92. The payout side CPU 92 specifies that the gaming machine main body 12 is in the closed state when receiving the closing detection signal from the main body opening sensor 96, and determines when the opening detection signal is received from the main body opening sensor 96. It specifies that the main body 12 is in the open state. Further, the payout side CPU 92 transmits a main body opening command to the main CPU 63 at a timing specified that the gaming machine main body 12 has changed from the closed state to the open state, and specifies that the gaming machine main body 12 has changed from the open state to the closed state. A main body closing command is transmitted to the main CPU 63 at a timing. The main CPU 63 identifies that the gaming machine body 12 is in the open state when receiving the body opening command, and identifies that the gaming machine body 12 is in the closing state when receiving the body closing command.

The timer interrupt process executed by the payout CPU 92 will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. The timer interrupt process is repeatedly activated at a predetermined cycle (for example, 2 msec).

First, a full tank process is executed (step S401). In the process for full tank, as described above, it is determined whether or not the tank is in the full tank state based on the detection result of the full tank detection sensor, and in the case of the full tank state, the process for stopping the payout of the game balls. And the command indicating that the tank is full is transmitted to the main CPU 63. In addition, when the full tank state is released, processing for enabling the payout of gaming balls is executed, and at the same time, a command indicating that the full tank state has been released is transmitted to the main CPU 63.

After that, the ball non-use process is executed (step S402). In the ball non-use process, as described above, it is determined whether or not the ball is in a non-ball state based on the detection result of the ball non-detection sensor, and in the case of the non-ball state, a process for stopping the payout of the game ball Along with the execution, a command indicating that there is no ball is transmitted to the main CPU 63. Further, when the non-sphere state is released, processing for enabling payout of the game ball is executed, and a command indicating that the non-sphere state is released is transmitted to the main CPU 63.

After that, the payout abnormality monitoring processing is executed (step S403). In the payout abnormality monitoring processing, as described above, it is determined whether or not there is a payout abnormal state based on the detection result of the payout detection sensor, and in the case of the payout abnormal state, processing for stopping the payout of gaming balls is executed. At the same time, a command indicating that the dispensing is abnormal is sent to the main CPU 63. Also, when the payout abnormal state is canceled, processing for enabling the payout of gaming balls is executed, and a command indicating that the payout abnormal state has been canceled is transmitted to the main CPU 63.

Then, the front door opening monitoring process is executed (step S404). In the front door opening monitoring process, as described above, it is specified whether or not the front door frame 14 is in the open state based on the detection result of the front door open sensor 95, and when the front door frame 14 is in the open state, While executing the process of stopping the payout of the game balls, it sends a front door opening command to the main CPU 63. In addition, when the front door frame 14 is closed, processing for enabling payout of game balls is executed, and a front door closing command is transmitted to the main CPU 63.

After that, the main body opening monitoring process is executed (step S405). In the main body opening monitoring process, as described above, based on the detection result of the main body opening sensor 96, it is determined whether or not the gaming machine main body 12 is in the open state, and when the gaming machine main body 12 is in the open state, the game ball The process of stopping the payout of the main body is executed and the main body opening command is transmitted to the main CPU 63. In addition, when the gaming machine main body 12 is closed, processing for enabling the payout of gaming balls is executed, and a main body closing command is transmitted to the main CPU 63.

After that, the command reading process is executed (step S406). In the command reading process, a process of reading the prize ball command transmitted by the main CPU 63 is executed. Then, the prize ball command is stored in the payout side RAM 94. Then, after executing the prize ball setting processing for adding the number corresponding to the received prize ball command to the unpaid prize ball number information in the payout side RAM 94 (step S407), the payout device 76 pays out the game balls. The payout control process for controlling the execution of is executed (step S408). In the payout control process, when the unpaid prize ball number information stored in the payout side RAM 94 has a value of 1 or more, the payout device 76 is driven and controlled, and the payout detection sensor detects one game ball. In this case, 1 is subtracted from the value of the prize ball number information. Then, when the value of the prize ball number information becomes "0", the drive control of the payout device 76 is stopped. After that, the external information setting process for controlling the start and end of the output of the external signal according to the processing results of the various processes executed in the timer interrupt process this time is executed (step S409).

<Structure for external output to hall computer HC>
Next, a configuration for externally outputting information from the pachinko machine 10 to the hall computer HC provided in the game hall will be described.

As shown in FIG. 2, the back pack unit 15 is provided with an external terminal board 97. The external terminal board 97 is provided with a large number of external terminals. Some of the external terminals are electrically connected to the main CPU 63 and some of the external terminals are provided. A plurality of external terminals are electrically connected to the payout side CPU 92. Since the main side CPU 63 and the payout side CPU 92 are electrically connected to the external terminal board 97 in this way, as shown in FIG. It is possible to output.

One external terminal of the external terminal board 97 is electrically connected to the front door open sensor 95, and one external terminal of the external terminal board 97 is electrically connected to the main body open sensor 96. In detail regarding the configuration of this electrical connection, a signal relay board 98 is provided at an intermediate position of a signal path from the front door opening sensor 95 to the payout side CPU 92. The signal relay board 98 is provided with a branch path SL2 branching from the signal path SL1 from the front door opening sensor 95 toward the payout side CPU 92. The branch path SL2 is connected to the external terminal for opening the front door of the external terminal board 97. Therefore, the electric signal corresponding to the detection result of the front door opening sensor 95 is input not only to the payout side CPU 92 but also to the external terminal for opening the front door of the external terminal board 97. As a result, a signal indicating whether or not the front door frame 14 is in the open state can be externally output to the hall computer HC without the control of the payout side CPU 92.

For details of the main body opening sensor 96, the signal relay board 98 is provided with a branching path SL4 branched from the signal path SL3 from the main body opening sensor 96 toward the payout side CPU 92. The branch path SL4 is connected to the external terminal for opening the main body of the external terminal board 97. Therefore, the electric signal corresponding to the detection result of the main body opening sensor 96 is input not only to the payout side CPU 92 but also to the external terminal for opening the main body of the external terminal board 97. As a result, a signal indicating whether or not the gaming machine main body 12 is in the open state can be externally output to the hall computer HC without the control of the payout side CPU 92.

Next, the contents of information externally output to the hall computer HC from the main CPU 63 and the payout CPU 92 will be described. First, the content of information output from the main CPU 63 to the hall computer HC will be described.

In the external information setting process (step S218) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 12), the main CPU 63 sets the output of information to each external terminal assigned to the main CPU 63 in the external terminal board 97. As information output from the main CPU 63 to the external terminal board 97, information indicating that the opening/closing execution mode is in effect, information indicating that the win/loss lottery mode is in the high probability mode, and one game time have ended. And a predetermined number (for example, 100) of game balls from the game area PA through any of the outlet 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special electricity winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, and the second operating opening 34. The information indicating that the game ball has been discharged, the information indicating that the game ball has entered the first operating port 33, and the information that the game ball has entered the second operating port 34 are included. ..

In the external information setting process (step S409) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 16), the payout side CPU 92 sets the output of information to each external terminal assigned to the payout side CPU 92 in the external terminal board 97. The information output from the payout side CPU 92 to the external terminal board 97 includes information indicating that 10 gaming balls have been paid out.

In the hall computer HC, according to various information received from the pachinko machine 10 through the external terminal board 97, it is possible to grasp the execution mode of paying out the game balls in the pachinko machine 10 or the like. For example,
・The payout rate which is the ratio of the number of payouts of the game balls generated until 100 game balls are discharged from the game area PA of the pachinko machine ・The payout in the normal game state which is not the open/close execution mode or the high probability mode Rate (hereinafter, this ball output rate is referred to as "B")
-Ball output rate in open/close execution mode-ball output rate in high probability mode-number of game times executed until 100 game balls are ejected from the game area PA of the pachinko machine 10 (hereinafter, this ratio will be referred to as " S))
B-S x "the number of prize balls for winning in the first operating opening 33 and the second operating opening 34"
-The number of game balls entering the first operation port 33, which has occurred until 100 game balls are ejected from the game area PA of the pachinko machine 10 (hereinafter, this ratio is referred to as "S1")
-The number of game balls entering the second operation port 34 that have occurred until 100 game balls have been discharged from the game area PA of the pachinko machine 10 (hereinafter, this ratio is referred to as "S2")
B-(S1 x "number of prize balls for winning in first working port 33" + S2 x "number of prize balls for winning in second working port 34")
Is calculated. As a result, the hall computer HC can manage the entering mode of the game ball in the game area PA of the pachinko machine 10. The number of prize balls is the number of game balls to be paid out when one game ball enters the corresponding ball input section.

<Structure for managing the winning mode of the game ball>
Next, a configuration for managing the winning mode of the game ball using the management IC 66 will be described. First, the electrical configuration of the management IC 66 will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG.

As described above, the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 includes the main CPU 63, the main ROM 64, the main RAM 65, and the management IC 66. The MPU 62 also includes an I/F 101 and a reading terminal 102 in addition to these.

The I/F 101 is an interface for transmitting/receiving a signal to/from a device external to the MPU 62. The I/F 101 is electrically connected to the main CPU 63 via the internal bus 103. The detection result from the sensors such as the ball detection sensors 42a to 49a and the command from the payout side CPU 92 are input to the MPU 62 through the input port of the I/F 101, and based on the input detection result and the content of the command. As described above, the main CPU 63 executes various processes. Further, when a signal is output to a device such as the drive unit 32b for special electric power as a result of execution of various processes in the main CPU 63, the signal is output through the output port of the I/F 101, and When a command is output to the payout side CPU 92 and the sound emission control device 81 as a result of the CPU 63 performing various processes, the command output is performed through the output port of the I/F 101.

The reading terminal 102 is a terminal for electrically connecting a reading device, which is an external device of the pachinko machine 10, to the MPU 62, and is provided such that a connection terminal portion is exposed on the surface of the MPU 62. .. However, as already described, the main control board 61 on which the MPU 62 is mounted is housed in the board box 60a, and the reading terminal 102 faces the wall portion of the board box 60a so as not to be exposed to the outside of the main control device 60. ing. Therefore, in order to electrically connect the reading device to the reading terminal 102, it is necessary to open the substrate box 60a and expose the MPU 62. This makes it possible to prevent the electrical connection of the reading device to the reading terminal 102 from being illegally made. It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to this, and an opening for exposing the reading terminal 102 to the outside of the main controller 60 is formed in the board box 60a so that the board box 60a can be read without breaking the board box 60a. The reading device may be electrically connected to the terminal 102.

The management IC 66 includes a management-side I/F 111, a management-side CPU 112, a management-side ROM 113, a management-side RAM 114, an RTC 115, a correspondence memory 116, and a history memory 117. These devices are connected to each other through an internal bus 66a provided in the management IC 66 so as to be capable of bidirectional communication.

The management-side I/F 111 receives various signals from the main CPU 63 via the signal path group 118 for unidirectional communication built in the MPU 62, and the signal path group 119 for unidirectional communication built in the MPU 62. It is an interface for transmitting various signals to the reading terminal 102 via the interface. Various signals from the main CPU 63 are input to the input port of the management-side I/F 111, and various signals to the reading terminal 102 are output from the output port of the management-side I/F 111. The main CPU 63 is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 via a bidirectional communication signal path group 120 built in the MPU 62.

The management side CPU 112 is an arithmetic processing device including a control unit and an arithmetic unit. The management-side ROM 113 is a memory such as a NOR flash memory and a NAND flash memory that does not require external power supply for storage and storage (that is, nonvolatile storage means), and is used as a read-only memory. The management-side ROM 113 stores various control programs executed by the management-side CPU 112 and fixed value data. The management-side RAM 114 is a memory (that is, a volatile storage unit) such as an SRAM and a DRAM that needs to be supplied with electric power from the outside to retain the storage, and is used for both reading and writing. The management-side RAM 114 is capable of random access and has a shorter read time than the management-side ROM 113 when compared with the same data capacity. The management-side RAM 114 temporarily stores various data and the like for execution of the control program stored in the management-side ROM 113.

The RTC 115 is a real-time clock, and is configured to constantly measure date information and time information and output the measured date information and time information according to an instruction from the management CPU 112. The RTC 115 is provided with a backup power supply, and it is possible to measure the date information and the time information even while the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off.

The correspondence relationship memory 116 is a memory such as an SRAM and a DRAM that requires external power supply to retain the memory (that is, a volatile storage unit), and is used for both reading and writing. The correspondence memory 116 stores information on the correspondence between the buffers 122a to 122p provided in the input port 121 of the management-side I/F 111 and the types of signals input to the buffers 122a to 122p. Used for. Details of the contents of the correspondence memory 116 will be described later.

The history memory 117 is a memory such as a NOR flash memory and a NAND flash memory that does not require external power supply for storage and storage (that is, nonvolatile storage means), and is used for both reading and writing. The history memory 117 is used to store information regarding the entry of a game ball received from the main CPU 63 through the management-side I/F 111. Details of the contents of the history memory 117 will be described later.

Next, the configuration of the input port 121 provided in the management-side I/F 111 will be described. FIG. 18 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the input port 121 of the management-side I/F 111.

The input port 121 is provided with a plurality of buffers 122a to 122p. Specifically, first to sixteenth buffers 122a to 122p are provided. One type of signal can be input to each of the first to sixteenth buffers 122a to 122p through the signal paths 118a to 118p, and each of the first to sixteenth buffers 122a to 122p is an input target signal. Information of "0" is stored as the first data when is at the LOW level, and information of "1" is stored as the second data when the signal to be input is at the HI level. The relationship between the LOW and HI and the first data and the second data may be reversed.

The first signal corresponding to the detection result of the first winning opening detection sensor 42a is input to the first buffer 122a. In this case, the main CPU63 outputs the first signal of the LOW level in the situation where a new game ball is not detected by the first winning hole detection sensor 42a, and one game by the first winning hole detection sensor 42a. When the sphere is detected, the HI level first signal is output for a specific period. This specific period is a period sufficient for the management-side CPU 112 to specify that the HI-level first signal is input to the first buffer 122a.

The second signal corresponding to the detection result of the second winning opening detection sensor 43a is input to the second buffer 122b. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs the second signal of the LOW level in a situation where a new game ball is not detected by the second winning opening detection sensor 43a, and one game is played by the second winning opening detection sensor 43a. When the sphere is detected, the HI level second signal is output for a specific period. This specific period is a period sufficient for the management-side CPU 112 to specify that the HI-level second signal is input to the second buffer 122b.

The third signal corresponding to the detection result of the third winning opening detection sensor 44a is input to the third buffer 122c. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs a third signal of LOW level in a situation where a new game ball is not detected by the third winning hole detection sensor 44a, and one game is played by the third winning hole detection sensor 44a. When the sphere is detected, the HI level third signal is output for a specific period. This specific period is a period sufficient for the management-side CPU 112 to specify that the third signal of the HI level is input to the third buffer 122c.

The fourth signal corresponding to the detection result of the special electric power detection sensor 45a is input to the fourth buffer 122d. In this case, when the main CPU 63 outputs the fourth signal of LOW level in a situation where a new game ball is not detected by the special electric detection sensor 45a, and one game ball is detected by the special electric detection sensor 45a. And outputs a fourth signal of HI level for a specific period. This specific period is a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to specify that the HI level fourth signal is input to the fourth buffer 122d.

The fifth signal corresponding to the detection result of the first working port detection sensor 46a is input to the fifth buffer 122e. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs a LOW level fifth signal in a situation where a new game ball is not detected by the first working opening detection sensor 46a, and one game is played by the first working opening detection sensor 46a. When the sphere is detected, the HI level fifth signal is output for a specific period. This specific period is a period sufficient for the management-side CPU 112 to specify that the HI-level fifth signal is input to the fifth buffer 122e.

The sixth signal corresponding to the detection result of the second operating port detection sensor 47a is input to the sixth buffer 122f. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs a LOW level sixth signal in a situation where a new game ball is not detected by the second working opening detection sensor 47a, and one game is played by the second working opening detection sensor 47a. When the sphere is detected, the HI level sixth signal is output for a specific period. This specific period is a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to specify that the HI level sixth signal is input to the sixth buffer 122f.

The seventh signal corresponding to the detection result of the outlet detection sensor 48a is input to the seventh buffer 122g. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs a LOW level seventh signal in a situation where a new game ball is not detected by the out-mouth detecting sensor 48a, and one game ball is detected by the out-mouth detecting sensor 48a. In that case, the seventh signal of HI level is output for a specific period. This specific period is a period sufficient for the management-side CPU 112 to specify that the HI-level seventh signal is input to the seventh buffer 122g.

An eighth signal corresponding to whether the open/close execution mode is in operation is input to the eighth buffer 122h. In this case, the main CPU 63 continuously outputs the eighth signal of LOW level in the situation not in the opening/closing execution mode, and continuously outputs the eighth signal of HI level in the situation in the opening/closing execution mode.

The ninth signal corresponding to whether or not the high probability mode is in operation is input to the ninth buffer 122i. In this case, the main CPU 63 continuously outputs the LOW-level ninth signal in the situation other than the high-probability mode, and continuously outputs the HI-level ninth signal in the high-probability mode.

A tenth signal corresponding to whether or not the front door frame 14 is open is input to the tenth buffer 122j. In this case, the main CPU 63 continuously outputs the LOW level tenth signal when the front door frame 14 is closed, and continues the HI level tenth signal when the front door frame 14 is open. And output.

An output instruction signal for causing the management-side CPU 112 to recognize the trigger for outputting the history information stored in the history memory 117 to the reading terminal 102 is input to the sixteenth buffer 122p. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs a LOW level output instruction signal in a situation where it is not necessary to output history information, and outputs a HI level output instruction signal for a specific period when it is necessary to output history information. To do. The specific period is a period sufficient for the management-side CPU 112 to specify that the HI level output instruction signal is input to the sixteenth buffer 122p.

The eleventh buffer 122k, the twelfth buffer 122l, the thirteenth buffer 122m, the fourteenth buffer 122n, and the fifteenth buffer 122o can input signals from the main CPU 63, but normal signals are not input in the pachinko machine 10. It is blank. In this way, as the input port 121 of the management-side I/F 111, the number of buffers 122a to 122p, which are larger than the types of signals output from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 in the pachinko machine 10, are provided. The management IC 66 can be used for a model different from the pachinko machine 10. This makes it possible to improve the versatility of the management IC 66. Incidentally, signal paths 118a to 118p are formed between the main CPU 63 and each of the first to sixteenth buffers 122a to 122p in a one-to-one correspondence with the first to sixteenth buffers 122a to 122p. However, the configuration is not limited to this, and the signal paths 118k to 118o may not be formed between the buffers 122k to 122o to be blanked.

It is decided in the design stage of the management IC 66 that the output instruction signal is input to the sixteenth buffer 122p in the input port 121 of the management side I/F 111, and the management side CPU 112 receives no instruction from the main side CPU 63. Can specify that the output instruction signal is input to the 16th buffer 122p. On the other hand, what kind of signal is input to the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o has not been determined at the design stage of the management IC 66, and these kinds of signals are instructed by the main CPU 63. As a result, the CPU 112 on the management side specifies. Although the details of the types of these signals in the management-side CPU 112 will be described later, when the control is started in the main-side CPU 63 and the management-side CPU 112 in accordance with the supply of operating power to the MPU 62, the main-side CPU 63 transfers to the management-side CPU 112. This is performed by transmitting the type identification command. In this case, the information on the types of various signals provided by the type identification command is stored in the correspondence memory 116, and when the types of various signals are specified by the management side CPU 112 in the situation where the operating power is supplied, The information stored in the correspondence memory 116 is referred to.

FIG. 19 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the correspondence memory 116. In the correspondence memory 116, first to fifteen correspondence areas 123a to 123o are provided in a one-to-one correspondence with the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o provided in the input port 121 of the management-side I/F 111. It is provided.

In the first correspondence area 123a, information indicating the general winning opening 31 is stored as information for the management-side CPU 112 to specify the type of signal input to the first buffer 122a. In addition, in the first correspondence area 123a, information indicating that it is the general winning opening 31 and information on the number of gaming balls to be paid out when one gaming ball enters the general winning opening 31 (10 pieces) Is stored. In the second correspondence area 123b, information indicating the general winning opening 31 is stored as information for the management-side CPU 112 to specify the type of signal input to the second buffer 122b. In addition, in the second correspondence area 123b, information indicating that it is the general winning opening 31 and information (10 pieces) of the number of gaming balls to be paid out when one gaming ball enters the general winning opening 31 are also provided. Is stored. In the third correspondence area 123c, information indicating the general winning opening 31 is stored as information for the management-side CPU 112 to specify the type of signal input to the third buffer 122c. In addition, in the third correspondence area 123c, information indicating that it is the general winning opening 31 and information (10 pieces) on the number of gaming balls to be paid out when one gaming ball enters the general winning opening 31 are also provided. Is stored.

In the fourth correspondence area 123d, information indicating the special electric prize winning device 32 is stored as information for the management-side CPU 112 to specify the type of signal input to the fourth buffer 122d. In addition, in the fourth correspondence area 123d, information indicating that it is the special electric prize winning device 32 and information on the number of game balls to be paid out when one game ball enters the special electric prize winning device 32 (15 pieces) Is stored. Information indicating the first operation port 33 is stored in the fifth correspondence area 123e as information for the management-side CPU 112 to specify the type of signal input to the fifth buffer 122e. Further, in the fifth correspondence area 123e, together with information indicating that it is the first operation port 33, information on the number of game balls to be paid out when one game ball enters the first operation port 33 (1 ) Is also stored. Information indicating the second operating port 34 is stored in the sixth correspondence area 123f as information for the management-side CPU 112 to specify the type of signal input to the sixth buffer 122f. Further, in the sixth correspondence area 123f, together with information indicating that it is the second operation port 34, information on the number of game balls to be paid out when one game ball enters the second operation port 34 (1 ) Is also stored. Information indicating the outlet 24a is stored in the seventh correspondence area 123g as information for the management-side CPU 112 to specify the type of signal input to the seventh buffer 122g.

Information indicating the open/close execution mode is stored in the eighth correspondence area 123h as information for the management-side CPU 112 to specify the type of signal input to the eighth buffer 122h. Information indicating the high-probability mode is stored in the ninth correspondence area 123i as information for the management-side CPU 112 to specify the type of signal input to the ninth buffer 122i. In the tenth correspondence area 123j, information indicating the front door frame 14 is stored as information for the management-side CPU 112 to specify the type of signal input to the tenth buffer 122j.

In the eleventh correspondence area 123k, as information for specifying the type of signal input to the eleventh buffer 122k by the management CPU 112, information indicating a blank that does not correspond to any is stored. In the twelfth correspondence area 123l, as information for specifying the type of signal input to the twelfth buffer 122l by the management side CPU 112, information indicating a blank that does not correspond to any is stored. In the thirteenth correspondence area 123m, as the information for specifying the type of the signal input to the thirteenth buffer 122m by the management side CPU 112, information indicating a blank that does not correspond to any is stored. In the fourteenth correspondence area 123n, as information for specifying the type of signal input to the fourteenth buffer 122n by the management-side CPU 112, information indicating a blank that does not correspond to any is stored. In the fifteenth correspondence area 123o, as information for specifying the type of signal input to the fifteenth buffer 122o by the management CPU 112, information indicating a blank that does not correspond to any is stored.

As described above, what kind of signal is input to the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o is specified by the management side CPU 112 by receiving an instruction from the main side CPU 63. The management IC 66 can be used for a model different from the pachinko machine 10. This makes it possible to improve the versatility of the management IC 66.

Also, instead of outputting the information for recognizing the signal type each time the signal corresponding to the storage of history information is output to the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o, the signal type is recognized in advance. And the information for specifying the types of signals input to the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o on the management side CPU 112 based on the output information is stored in the correspondence relationship memory 116. It is a configuration. As a result, compared with the configuration in which the information for recognizing the type of the signal is output each time the signal output corresponding to the storage of the history information is output to the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o It is possible to suppress the amount of information output from the side CPU 63 to the management side CPU 112.

In addition, the output of information for specifying the type of signal input to the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o by the management-side CPU 112 is performed at the start of supply of operating power. As a result, when the game is started on the pachinko machine 10, it becomes possible for the management-side CPU 112 to specify the types of signals input to the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o.

In addition, information setting that the output instruction signal is input to the 16th buffer 122p is performed at the design stage of the management IC 66. As a result, the kind of signal input to the sixteenth buffer 122p is specified for the output instruction signal that is surely used not only by the pachinko machine 10 but also by other types of pachinko machines that use the management IC 66. It is possible to omit the processing for. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load of the processing for specifying the type of the signal.

Next, the history memory 117 of the management IC 66 will be described. FIG. 20 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the history memory 117.

The history memory 117 is provided with a history area 124 for sequentially storing history information. In the history area 124, a plurality of pieces of pointer information are set in serial numbers, and a history information storage area 125 is set in a one-to-one correspondence with each pointer information. The history information storage area 125 can store a combination of RTC information and correspondence information. In this case, each history information storage area 125 has a data capacity of 2 bytes, a data capacity of 1 byte is allocated as an area for storing RTC information, and an area for storing correspondence information. A data capacity of 1 byte is assigned. When it is necessary to store the correspondence information in accordance with the signals input to the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o (actually, the first to tenth buffers 122a to 122j of the pachinko machine 10) First, the date information and the time information measured by the current RTC 115 are stored in the area for storing the RTC information of the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information which is the current writing target. After that, the correspondence information corresponding to the buffers 122a to 122o that triggered the information storage this time is read from the correspondence areas 123a to 123o corresponding to the buffers 122a to 122o in the correspondence memory 116, and the read correspondence information is read. Is stored in the area for storing the correspondence information of the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information which is the current writing target.

Regarding the correspondence information stored in the history information storage area 125, specifically, the first to seventh buffers 122a to 122g are input with the signals corresponding to the detection results of the ball detection sensors 42a to 48a as described above. Therefore, the information corresponding to the types of the ball detection sensors 42a to 48a is stored in the first to seventh correspondence areas 123a to 123g in the correspondence memory 116. More specifically, the information corresponding to the type of the ball entering portion corresponding to each of the ball detecting sensors 42a to 48a is stored in the first to seventh correspondence areas 123a to 123g. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the first to third winning opening detection sensors 42a to 44a are all for detecting the game balls that have entered the general winning opening 31, so these first to third winning openings are provided. Information indicating the general winning opening 31 is stored in each of the first to third correspondence areas 123a to 123c corresponding to the detection sensors 42a to 44a. Further, information indicating that it is the special electricity winning device 32 is stored in the fourth correspondence area 123d, and information indicating that it is the first operation port 33 is stored in the fifth correspondence area 123e. The sixth correspondence relationship area 123f stores information indicating the second operation port 34, and the seventh correspondence relationship area 123g stores information indicating the outlet port 24a. When the buffers 122a to 122o that have triggered the information storage this time are any of the first to seventh buffers 122a to 122g, the information about the type of the ball entering portion corresponding to the buffers 122a to 122g is the first to the first. It is read from any of the seventh correspondence areas 123a to 123g, and the read information on the type of the ball entering portion is stored as it is in the area for storing the correspondence information of the history information storage area 125.

On the other hand, a signal indicating whether the eighth buffer 122h is in the open/close execution mode is input, a signal indicating whether the ninth buffer 122i is in the high probability mode is input, and the tenth buffer 122j is the previous buffer 122j. A signal indicating whether the door frame 14 is open is input. Therefore, the eighth correspondence area 123h stores information indicating the open/close execution mode, the ninth correspondence area 123i stores information indicating the high probability mode, and the tenth correspondence area 123j. Stores information indicating that it is the front door frame 14.

As described above, the main CPU 63 continuously outputs the LOW level eighth signal in the situation where the open/close execution mode is not set, and continuously outputs the HI level eighth signal in the situation where the open/close execution mode is set. The side CPU 112 identifies that the opening/closing execution mode has started when the eighth signal changes from the LOW level to the HI level, and identifies that the opening/closing execution mode has ended when the eighth signal changes from the HI level to the LOW level. It becomes possible. Then, regardless of whether the eighth signal changes from the LOW level to the HI level or when the HI level changes to the LOW level, the management-side CPU 112 generates a trigger to store the correspondence information in the history information storage area 125. Identify as done. That is, when the eighth signal changes from the LOW level to the HI level, not only the information indicating the open/close execution mode read from the eighth correspondence area 123h, but also the start information is stored together with the history information storage area 125. It is stored in the area for storing the correspondence information of. Further, when the eighth signal changes from the HI level to the LOW level, not only the information indicating the open/close execution mode read from the eighth correspondence area 123h but also the end information is also recorded together with the history information storage area 125. It is stored in the area for storing the correspondence information of.

As described above, the main CPU 63 continuously outputs the LOW-level ninth signal in the situation other than the high-probability mode, and continuously outputs the HI-level ninth signal in the situation of the high-probability mode. The side CPU 112 identifies that the high-probability mode has started when the ninth signal changes from the LOW level to the HI level, and identifies that the high-probability mode has ended when the ninth signal changes from the HI level to the LOW level. It becomes possible. Then, regardless of whether the ninth signal changes from the LOW level to the HI level or when the HI level changes to the LOW level, the management-side CPU 112 generates a trigger to store the correspondence information in the history information storage area 125. Identify as done. That is, when the ninth signal changes from the LOW level to the HI level, not only the information indicating the high-probability mode read from the ninth correspondence area 123i but also the start information is stored together with the history information storage area 125. It is stored in the area for storing the correspondence information of. When the ninth signal changes from the HI level to the LOW level, not only the information indicating the high-probability mode read from the ninth correspondence area 123i but also the end information is recorded together with the history information storage area 125. It is stored in the area for storing the correspondence information of.

As described above, the main CPU 63 continuously outputs the LOW level tenth signal when the front door frame 14 is in the closed state, and outputs the HI level tenth signal when the front door frame 14 is in the open state. Because the continuous output is performed, the management-side CPU 112 specifies that the front door frame 14 has been opened when the tenth signal changes from the LOW level to the HI level, and when the tenth signal changes from the HI level to the LOW level. It is possible to specify that the front door frame 14 is closed. Then, both when the tenth signal changes from the LOW level to the HI level and when the HI level changes to the LOW level, the management-side CPU 112 causes the history information storage area 125 to store the correspondence information. Identify as done. That is, when the tenth signal changes from the LOW level to the HI level, not only the information indicating the front door frame 14 read from the tenth correspondence area 123j but also the opening start information is stored together with the history information. It is stored in the area for storing the correspondence information of the area 125. Further, when the tenth signal changes from the HI level to the LOW level, not only the information indicating the front door frame 14 read from the tenth correspondence area 123j but also the opening end information is stored together with the history information. It is stored in the area for storing the correspondence information of the area 125.

The history information storage area 125 can store all history information generated during the 10 consecutive business days in which the game balls are continuously emitted from the pachinko machine 10 from opening to closing. It is provided for a few minutes. For example, if the history information is generated 60,000 times a day, 600,000 or more history information storage areas 125 are provided. As a result, all history information can be stored and held in the history memory 117 for at least 10 days.

The history memory 117 is provided with a pointer area 126 in addition to the history area 124. The pointer area 126 stores information for the management CPU 112 to specify the pointer information that is the current write target in the history memory 117. Specifically, at the shipping stage of the pachinko machine 10, information for designating the pointer information “0” as the writing target is set in the pointer area 126. Then, each time one piece of history information is newly stored in the history information storage area 125, the information in the pointer area 126 is updated so that the value of the pointer information to be written is incremented by one. If the history information is stored in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the last-order pointer information and the last-order pointer information is written, the pointer information of “0” is set as the pointer. The information in the usage area 126 is updated. As a result, when a history information storage trigger occurs that exceeds the number of history information items that can be stored, new history information is overwritten in order from the history information storage area 125 in which old history information is stored. Become.

Further, when history information is read from the history memory 117 by the reading device, all the history information storage area 125 is cleared to “0” and the pointer information of “0” is set as a writing target. The information in the pointer area 126 is updated. As a result, it is possible to prevent the history information that was once read from becoming read again.

Next, a specific processing configuration for managing the winning mode of the game ball using the management IC 66 will be described. First, a processing configuration for storing information on the correspondence between the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o provided in the input port 121 of the management-side I/F 111 and the types of signals in the correspondence memory 116 will be described. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing the recognition process executed by the main CPU 63. The recognition process is executed in step S110 in the main process (FIG. 11).

First, "15" is set to the recognition output counter provided in the main RAM 65 (step S501). The recognition output counter indicates the remaining necessary number of information outputs for causing the management CPU 112 to recognize which kind of signal each buffer 122a to 122p of the input port 121 in the management I/F 111 corresponds to. This is a counter for the main CPU 63 to specify. As described above, 15 of the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o are targets of signal type recognition, so "15" is set in the recognition output counter.

After that, the output process of the identification start command is executed (step S502). The main CPU 63 outputs various commands to the management CPU 112 so that the management CPU 112 can recognize which type of signal the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o correspond to. When outputting this command, the first to eighth signals input to the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h are used. That is, using the first to eighth signals (that is, the first to eighth signal paths 118a to 118h) used to instruct the management side CPU 112 to store the history information, the first to fifteenth buffers 122a are used. The command output for causing the management CPU 112 to recognize which type of signal corresponds to 122o is performed. This reduces the number of signal paths as compared with a configuration in which a signal path for performing the command output is provided separately from the signal paths 118a to 118p for outputting signals to the first to sixteenth buffers 122a to 122p. It becomes possible to simplify the configuration. The identification start command has an 8-bit data capacity, and the data of each bit is input to the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h as the first to eighth signals, respectively. Further, in the output process of the identification start command, the output state of the ninth signal is switched to the HI level at the timing when the output of the identification start command is started in order to make the management CPU 112 recognize that the new command has been transmitted. Further, the output period of the identification start command and the period of maintaining the output state of the ninth signal at the HI level are set to a period sufficient for the management-side CPU 112 to recognize the output state of the identification start command and the ninth signal. Has been done. By receiving the identification start command, the management-side CPU 112 should start the processing for storing the information on the correspondence between the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o and the types of signals in the correspondence memory 116. Identify.

Thereafter, the type identification command corresponding to the current value of the recognition output counter of the main RAM 65 is read from the main ROM 64 (step S503). In this case, the first buffer 122a corresponds to the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o such that the signal type setting target is first, and then the n+1th buffer is the signal type setting target. The signal type recognition setting is set. Therefore, if the recognition output counter is “15” to “13”, the type identification command indicating the general winning opening 31 and the number of prize balls is read out, and if the recognition output counter is “12”, the special prize winning is awarded. The type identification command indicating the device 32 and the number of prize balls is read out, and if the recognition output counter is "11", the type identification command indicating the first operation port 33 and the number of prize balls is read out. If the recognition output counter is "10", it is the second operation port 34, and the type identification command indicating the number of prize balls is read, and if the recognition output counter is "9", it is the out port 24a. The type identification command shown is read out, and if the recognition output counter is "8", the type identification command indicating the open/close execution mode is read out. If the recognition output counter is "7", the high probability mode is indicated. The type identification command shown is read out, and if the recognition output counter is "6", the type identification command indicating the front door frame 14 is read out, and if the recognition output counter is "5" to "1", it is blank. A type identification command indicating that there is is read.

Then, the output process of the read type identification command is executed (step S504). The type identification command has an 8-bit data capacity similarly to the identification start command, and the data of each bit is input to the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h as the first to eighth signals, respectively. Further, in the output processing of the identification type command, the output state of the ninth signal is switched to the HI level at the timing when the output of the identification type command is started so that the management side CPU 112 recognizes that a new command has been transmitted. Further, the output period of the identification type command and the period of maintaining the output state of the ninth signal at the HI level are set to a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to recognize the output state of the identification type command and the ninth signal. Has been done. By receiving the identification type command, the management-side CPU 112 responds to the identification type command in the correspondence relationship areas 123a to 123o corresponding to the buffers to be set this time among the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o. Information to be stored.

After that, the value of the recognition output counter of the main RAM 65 is decremented by 1 (step S505), and it is determined whether the value of the recognition output counter after the decrement is 1 is "0" (step S506). When the value of the recognition output counter is 1 or more (step S506: NO), a process for outputting a type identification command corresponding to the value of the recognition output counter after subtraction of 1 is executed (step S503 and Step S504).

On the other hand, when the value of the recognition output counter is “0” (step S506: YES), the output process of the identification end command is executed (step S507). The identification end command has an 8-bit data capacity, and the data of each bit is input to the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h as the first to eighth signals, respectively. Further, in the output processing of the identification end command, the output state of the ninth signal is switched to the HI level at the timing when the output of the identification end command is started in order to make the management CPU 112 recognize that the new command has been transmitted. Further, the output period of the identification end command and the period of maintaining the output state of the ninth signal at the HI level are set to a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to recognize the output state of the identification end command and the ninth signal. Has been done. Upon receiving the identification end command, the management-side CPU 112 identifies that the processing for storing the information on the correspondence relationship between the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o and the signal type in the correspondence relationship memory 116 is completed. To do.

Next, the management processing executed by the management CPU 112 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The management process is started when the supply of operating power to the management-side CPU 112 is started. The processing speed of the management CPU 112 is higher than that of the main CPU 63, and the next timer interrupt processing (FIG. 12) is started after the main CPU 63 starts one timer interrupt processing (FIG. 12). By the time the process starts, the combination of the processes in and after step S606 in the management process is executed 16 times or more.

When the identification start command is received from the main CPU 63 (step S601: YES), the value of the setting target counter provided in the management RAM 114 is cleared to "0" (step S602). The setting target counter is a counter for the management-side CPU 112 to specify the type of the buffers 122a to 122o for which the signal type is set. The first buffer 122a is the target for setting the signal type first, and then the n+1th buffer is the target for setting the signal type after the nth buffer.

After that, on condition that the type identification command is received from the main CPU 63 (step S603: YES), the correspondence relationship setting process is executed (step S604). In the correspondence relation setting process, of the first to fifteenth correspondence relation areas 123a to 123o of the correspondence relation memory 116, in the correspondence relation area corresponding to the current value of the setting target counter of the management side RAM 114, the type identification received this time is identified. Stores the signal type information set in the command. Then, the value of the setting target counter of the management RAM 114 is incremented by 1 (step S605).

If a negative determination is made in step S603, or if the processing of step S605 is executed, it is determined whether or not an identification end command has been received from the main CPU 63 (step S606). When the identification end command has not been received (step S606: NO), the process returns to step S603, and on condition that the type identification command is newly received from the main CPU 63 (step S603: YES), the steps S604 and S605 are executed. Execute the process again.

When the identification end command is received from the main CPU 63 (step S606: YES), the processes of steps S607 and S608 are repeatedly executed. Although details will be described later, in step S607, history setting processing for storing history information corresponding to the type of signal received from the main CPU 63 in the history memory 117 is executed. In step S608, an external output process for outputting the history information stored in the history memory 117 to the reading terminal 102, which will be described in detail later, is executed.

FIG. 23 is a time chart showing a state in which information on the correspondence between the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o and the types of signals input to these buffers 122a to 122o is stored in the correspondence memory 116. 23A shows a period during which a command is output from the main CPU 63 to the management CPU 112 using the first to eighth signals (that is, the first to eighth signal paths 118a to 118h), and FIG. 23B shows the period during which the output state of the ninth signal is at the HI level, and FIG. 23C shows the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o and the types of signals input to these buffers 122a to 122o. 23D shows the execution period of the identification state in which the process for identifying the correspondence is executed, and FIG. 23D shows the timing at which the management CPU 112 executes the correspondence setting process (step S604).

As the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 and the management CPU 112 is started, the output of the identification start command using the first to eighth signals is started at the timing of t1 as shown in FIG. It Also, at the timing of t1, the output state of the ninth signal is changed from the LOW level to the HI level as shown in FIG. After that, at the timing of t2 in which the output of the identification start command is continued, the output state of the ninth signal is changed from the HI level to the LOW level as shown in FIG. The management-side CPU 112 confirms that the output state of the ninth signal has been changed from the HI level to the LOW level, thereby specifying that the command has been transmitted from the main-side CPU 63, and the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h. The contents of the command received from the main CPU 63 are grasped by confirming the information of. In this case, since the identification start command has been received, the management-side CPU 112 enters the identification state by making a positive determination in step S601 of the management processing (FIG. 22). Thereafter, at the timing of t3, the output of the identification start command is stopped as shown in FIG.

After that, at the timing of t4, as shown in FIG. 23A, the output of the first type identification command using the first to eighth signals is started. Further, at the timing of t4, the output state of the ninth signal is changed from the LOW level to the HI level as shown in FIG. After that, at the timing of t5 in which the output of the type identification command is continued, the output state of the ninth signal is changed from the HI level to the LOW level as shown in FIG. 23(b). The management-side CPU 112 identifies that the command has been transmitted from the main-side CPU 63 by confirming that the output state of the ninth signal has been changed from the HI level to the LOW level, and the first-eighth buffers 122a to 122h By confirming the information, the content of the command received from the main CPU 63 is grasped. In this case, since the first type identification command has been received, the management-side CPU 112 executes the correspondence setting process at the timing of t5 as shown in FIG. In the correspondence relationship setting process, information indicating the general winning opening 31 and information on the number of prize balls are stored in the first correspondence area 123a of the correspondence memory 116. Thereafter, at the timing of t6, the output of the type identification command is stopped as shown in FIG.

After that, in each of the timing of t7 to the timing of t9, the timing of t10 to the timing of t12, the timing of t13 to the timing of t15, and the timing of t16 to the timing of t18, similarly to the timing of t4 to the timing of t6, The management side CPU 112 executes the correspondence relationship setting process corresponding to the type identification command output from the side CPU 63. In this case, the correspondence setting process corresponding to the fifteenth type identification command is completed from the timing t16 to the timing t18.

After that, at the timing of t19, as shown in FIG. 23A, the output of the identification end command using the first to eighth signals is started. Also, at the timing of t19, the output state of the ninth signal is changed from the LOW level to the HI level as shown in FIG. After that, at the timing of t20 in which the output of the identification end command is continued, the output state of the ninth signal is changed from the HI level to the LOW level as shown in FIG. The management-side CPU 112 identifies that the command has been transmitted from the main-side CPU 63 by confirming that the output state of the ninth signal has been changed from the HI level to the LOW level, and the first-eighth buffers 122a to 122h By confirming the information, the content of the command received from the main CPU 63 is grasped. In this case, since the identification end command is received, the identification state of the management-side CPU 112 ends as shown in FIG. 23C at the timing of t20. After that, at the timing of t21, the output of the identification end command is stopped as shown in FIG.

In order to instruct the management-side CPU 112 to store history information, the management-side CPU 112 is configured to recognize whether or not the command is output using the ninth signal as described above. Even if the command is output using the first to eighth signals (that is, the first to eighth signal paths) used, it is clear to the management side CPU 112 that the command is being output. It becomes possible to recognize.

Next, a processing configuration for storing history information in the history memory 117 will be described. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the management output process executed by the main CPU 63. The management output process is executed in step S219 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 12).

First, "10" is set in the managed counter provided in the main RAM 65 (step S701). The management target counter specifies, by the main CPU 63, whether or not there is a management target that is not a target for specifying whether or not the signal output state to the management side CPU 112 should be changed in this management output process. At the same time, it is a counter for the main CPU 63 to specify which management target should change the signal output state to the management CPU 112. In the one-time management output process, the main CPU 63 specifies whether or not the signal output state to the management CPU 112 should be changed. There are a total of 10 whether the open/close execution mode is executed, the high probability mode is executed, and the front door frame 14 is opened/closed. Therefore, “10” is first set in the managed counter.

Then, it is determined whether or not the output state of the signal to the management-side CPU 112 regarding the management target corresponding to the current value of the management target counter is the HI level (step S702). If it is not at the HI level (step S702: NO), it is determined whether or not the value of the managed counter is 4 or more, so that the entry detection sensors 42a having seven managed objects corresponding to the value of the managed counter are detected. ~ 48a is specified (step S703).

When an affirmative determination is made in step S703, it is determined whether the output flag of the main RAM 65 corresponding to the value of the managed counter is set to "1" (step S704). Specifically, if the value of the managed counter is "10" and corresponds to the first winning opening detection sensor 42a, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the first output flag, When the value of the managed counter is “9” and corresponds to the second winning hole detection sensor 43a, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the second output flag, and the value of the managed counter is determined. Is “8” and corresponds to the third winning opening detection sensor 44a, it is determined whether or not the third output flag is set to “1”, and the value of the managed counter is “7”. If it corresponds to the special electric power detection sensor 45a, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the fourth output flag, and the value of the managed counter is "6", and the first working opening detection sensor 46a. If it corresponds to the second output port detection sensor 47a, it is determined whether or not the fifth output flag is set to "1". In this case, it is determined whether or not the sixth output flag is set to "1". If the value of the managed counter is "4" and it corresponds to the outlet 24a, the seventh output flag is set to " It is determined whether "1" is set. As described above, the first to seventh output flags are set to "1" in the incoming ball detection process (FIG. 14).

When "1" is set in the output flag corresponding to the value of the managed counter (step S704: YES), the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the managed counter among the first to seventh signals is set to the HI level. Is set (step S705). After that, the output flag corresponding to the value of the managed counter is cleared to "0" (step S706).

When a negative determination is made in step S703, it is determined whether or not a trigger for switching the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the managed counter to the HI level has occurred (step S707). Specifically, when the value of the managed counter is “3”, it is determined whether or not the transition to the open/close execution mode has occurred, and when the value of the managed counter is “2”, it is high. It is determined whether or not the transition to the probability mode has occurred, and when the value of the managed counter is "1", it is determined whether or not the front door frame 14 is in the open state. When an affirmative determination is made in step S707, the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the managed counter is set to the HI level (step S708).

When an affirmative determination is made in step S702, it is determined whether or not a trigger for switching the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the managed counter to the LOW level has occurred (step S709). Specifically, when the value of the management target counter is 4 or more and the current management target is any of the ball detection sensors 42a to 48a, the value of the management target counter among the first to seventh signals is set. It is determined whether or not the HI output continuation period (specifically, 10 msec) has elapsed since the output state of the corresponding signal was switched from the LOW level to the HI level. This HI output continuation period is set to a period longer than the longest processing interval of the history setting process (step S607) of the management process (FIG. 22) in the management side CPU 112, and the output of the signal switched from the LOW level to the HI level It is a period during which the state can be reliably specified by the management CPU 112. When the value of the managed counter is "3" and the current managed object is the open/close execution mode, it is determined whether the open/close execution mode has ended, and the value of the managed counter is "2". When the current management target is the high-probability mode, it is determined whether or not the high-probability mode has ended, and when the value of the management target counter is “1” and the current management target is the front door frame 14. Determines whether the front door frame 14 is closed. When the trigger for switching the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the managed counter to the LOW level occurs (step S709: YES), the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the managed counter is set to the LOW level ( Step S710).

If a negative determination is made in step S704, the process of step S706 is executed, a negative determination is made in step S707, the process of step S708 is executed, a negative determination is made in step S709, or When the process of S710 is executed, the value of the managed counter of the main RAM 65 is decremented by 1 (step S711). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the managed counter after the subtraction of 1 is "0" (step S712). When the value of the management target counter is 1 or more (step S712: NO), the processes of step S702 and subsequent steps are executed for the management target corresponding to the new management target counter value.

Next, the history setting process executed by the management CPU 112 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The history setting process is executed in step S607 of the management process (FIG. 22).

First, the number of buffers to be confirmed in the management CPU 112 among the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o is set in the confirmation counter provided in the management RAM 114 (step S801). Specifically, of the first to fifteenth correspondence relation areas 123a to 123o in the correspondence relation memory 116, the number of correspondence relation areas in which information other than information indicating blank is stored is specified, and the identification is performed. The information of the number that was set is set in the check target counter. As described above, the pachinko machine 10 stores the information other than the information indicating that it is blank in the first to tenth correspondence areas 123a to 123j, so that "10" is set in the confirmation target counter in step S801. To do.

After that, it should be confirmed whether the numerical value information stored in the buffer corresponding to the current value of the check target counter among the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o has been changed from "0" to "1". Then, it is determined whether or not the output state of the input signal from the main CPU 63 to the buffer has been switched from the LOW level to the HI level (step S802). When the value of the check target counter is “n”, the nth buffers 122a to 122o are the check targets of the numerical information. For example, if the value of the check target counter is “10”, the tenth buffer 122j is the check target of the numerical information, and if the value of the check target counter is “5”, the fifth buffer 122e is the check target of the numerical information. ..

When an affirmative determination is made in step S802, the RTC information that is the date information and the time information is read from the RTC 115 (step S803). Then, the writing process to the history memory 117 is executed (step S804). In the writing process, the pointer area 126 of the history memory 117 is referred to identify the pointer information of the history area 124 that is the current writing target, and the pointer information corresponding to the pointer information of the writing target is specified. The RTC information read in step S803 is written in the history information storage area 125 of the history area 124. Further, the correspondence information is read from the correspondence areas 123a to 123o corresponding to the current value of the check target counter, and the correspondence information is written in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. When the correspondence information is any one of the information indicating the open/close execution mode, the information indicating the high probability mode, and the information indicating the front door frame 14, the writing is performed. Not only the correspondence information but the start information is written in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the target pointer information. In addition, when the value of the check target counter is “n”, the n-th correspondence area 123a to 123o is a target for reading correspondence information. For example, if the value of the check target counter is “10”, the tenth correspondence area 123j is the target for reading the correspondence information, and if the value of the check target counter is “5”, the fifth correspondence area 123e is the correspondence relationship. It is a target for reading information.

When the value of the check target counter is any of the outlet 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special electricity winning device 32, the first working opening 33, and the second working opening 34 by executing the writing process as described above. In the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written, the RTC information, the outlet 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special electricity winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, and the second operating opening 34 are stored. And the combination of the correspondence information indicating that any of the above is stored as history information. When the value of the check target counter is one of the open/close execution mode, the high probability mode, and the front door frame 14, the RTC information is stored in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. The combination of the correspondence information indicating the open/close execution mode, the high probability mode, and the front door frame 14 and the start information is stored as the history information.

After that, the target pointer is updated (step S805). In the update processing, the numerical information stored in the pointer area 126 of the history memory 117 is read and 1 is added. It is determined whether or not the pointer information after the addition of 1 exceeds the maximum value of the pointer information in the history area 124. If the maximum value is not exceeded, the pointer information after adding 1 is overwritten in the pointer area 126 as new pointer information to be written. If the maximum value is exceeded, the pointer area 126 is cleared to "0" so that the pointer information to be written becomes the first pointer information.

If a negative determination is made in step S802, or if the process of step S805 is executed, it is determined whether or not the signal output has been switched to the LOW level in the correspondence areas 123a to 123o corresponding to the current value of the check target counter. It is determined whether or not the correspondence information to be confirmed is stored (step S806). Specifically, when the value of the current check target counter is "8" to "10", the corresponding correspondence areas 123h to 123j are information indicating the open/close execution mode, and the high probability mode. Since either the information indicating that the front door frame 14 is stored or the information indicating that the front door frame 14 is stored, a positive determination is made in step S806.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S806, the numerical information stored in the buffer corresponding to the current value of the check target counter among the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o is changed from "1" to "0". By checking whether or not the output state of the input signal from the main CPU 63 to the buffer is switched from the HI level to the LOW level, it is determined whether or not it is (step S807). If an affirmative decision is made in step S807, the RTC information is read out (step S808), as in step S803, and write processing to the history memory 117 is executed (step S809). In the writing process, the RTC information read in step S808 is written in the history information storage area 125 of the history area 124 corresponding to the pointer information that is the writing target. Further, the correspondence information is read from the correspondence areas 123a to 123o corresponding to the current value of the check target counter, and the correspondence information is written in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. Further, not only the correspondence information but also the end information is written in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. By executing the writing process in this way, when the value of the check target counter is any of the open/close execution mode, the high probability mode, and the front door frame 14, the pointer information corresponding to the write target is corresponded. In the history information storage area 125, a combination of RTC information, correspondence information indicating any one of the open/close execution mode, the high probability mode, and the front door frame 14, and the end information is stored as history information. It becomes a state. After that, similar to step S805, the target pointer update processing is executed (step S810).

If a negative determination is made in step S806, a negative determination is made in step S807, or the process of step S810 is executed, the value of the check target counter of the management side RAM 114 is decremented by 1 (step S811). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the check target counter after the subtraction of 1 is "0" (step S812). When the value of the check target counter is 1 or more (step S812: NO), the process from step S802 is performed on the check target corresponding to the new check target counter value.

Next, how the history information is stored in the history memory 117 will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. 26A shows a period in which the HI level signal is input to any of the first to seventh buffers 122a to 122g, and FIG. 26B shows the HI level signal being input to the eighth buffer 122h. 26C shows a period in which the HI level signal is input to the ninth buffer 122i, and FIG. 26D shows a HI level signal in the tenth buffer 122j. FIG. 26E shows the writing timing of history information in the history memory 117.

At the timing of t1, the output state of the signal input to any of the first to seventh buffers 122a to 122g is switched from the LOW level to the HI level as shown in FIG. Therefore, the history information is written in the history memory 117 at the timing of t1 as shown in FIG. Then, at the timing of t2, the signal switched to the HI level at the timing of t1 is switched to the LOW level as shown in FIG. However, since the signal is a signal input to any of the first to seventh buffers 122a to 122g and the switching of the LOW level is not the storage target of the history information, at the timing of t2, FIG. As shown in e), writing of history information is not executed.

Thereafter, at each of the timing of t3, the timing of t5, the timing of t6, the timing of t9, the timing of t10, the timing of t13, and the timing of t14, as shown in FIG. The output state of the signal input to any of .about.122g is switched from the LOW level to the HI level. Therefore, at each of these timings, the history information is written as shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 26B, the output state of the signal input to the eighth buffer 122h becomes the HI level from timing t4 to timing t7. The eighth buffer 122h corresponds to the presence/absence of the open/close execution mode. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 26E, the timing t4, which is the timing when the output state of the signal input to the eighth buffer 122h switches to the HI level, and the timing when the output state of the signal switches to the LOW level. The history information is written at each timing t7. In this case, the history information written at the timing of t4 includes start information, and the history information written at the timing of t7 includes end information. As a result, by checking the history information in the history memory 117, it is possible to grasp the execution period of the open/close execution mode.

Further, history information is written in the history memory 117 in the order of passage of time. Therefore, whether the history information indicating that a ball has entered the outlet 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, or the second operating opening 34 is in the opening/closing execution mode. It becomes possible to distinguish whether or not. Further, since the history information includes RTC information, by comparing the RTC information, any of the outlet 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special electricity winning device 32, the first working opening 33, and the second working opening 34 can be obtained. It is possible to distinguish whether or not the history information indicating that a ball has entered is in the opening/closing execution mode.

As shown in FIG. 26C, the output state of the signal input to the ninth buffer 122i becomes the HI level from the timing t8 to the timing t11. The ninth buffer 122i corresponds to the presence/absence of occurrence of the high probability mode. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 26E, the timing t8 when the output state of the signal input to the ninth buffer 122i switches to the HI level and the timing when the output state of the signal switches to the LOW level. The history information is written at each timing t11. In this case, the history information written at the timing of t8 includes start information, and the history information written at the timing of t11 includes end information. As a result, the execution period of the high probability mode can be grasped by checking the history information in the history memory 117.

Further, history information is written in the history memory 117 in the order of passage of time. Therefore, whether the history information indicating that a ball has entered the out outlet 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special electricity winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, or the second operating opening 34 is in the high probability mode. It becomes possible to distinguish whether or not. Further, since the history information includes RTC information, by comparing the RTC information, any of the outlet 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special electricity winning device 32, the first working opening 33, and the second working opening 34 can be obtained. It is possible to distinguish whether or not the history information indicating that a ball has entered the car is in the high probability mode.

As shown in FIG. 26D, the output state of the signal input to the tenth buffer 122j becomes the HI level from the timing t12 to the timing t15. The tenth buffer 122j corresponds to whether or not the front door frame 14 is opened. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 26E, the timing of t12, which is the timing when the output state of the signal input to the tenth buffer 122j switches to the HI level, and the timing when the output state of the signal switches to the LOW level. The history information is written at each timing of t15. In this case, the history information written at the timing of t12 includes start information, and the history information written at the timing of t15 includes end information. As a result, by confirming the history information in the history memory 117, it is possible to grasp the period during which the front door frame 14 is in the open state.

Further, history information is written in the history memory 117 in the order of passage of time. Therefore, history information indicating that a ball has entered into any of the outlet 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, and the second operating opening 34 is opening the front door frame 14. It becomes possible to distinguish whether or not it is. Further, since the history information includes RTC information, by comparing the RTC information, any of the outlet 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special electricity winning device 32, the first working opening 33, and the second working opening 34 can be obtained. It is possible to distinguish whether or not the history information indicating that a ball has entered the car is opening the front door frame 14.

Next, a processing configuration for outputting the history information stored in the history memory 117 to the reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 of the MPU 62 will be described. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the data output process executed by the main CPU 63. The data output process is executed in step S111 in the main process (FIG. 11).

In the data output process, first, it is determined whether or not a connection signal indicating that the reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 is received from the reading terminal 102 (step S901). The reading device is configured to output a connection signal when it is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102, and when the reading signal is received through the reading terminal 102, a positive determination is made in step S901. do.

When a negative determination is made in step S901, this data output processing is ended as it is. In this case, in order to execute the data output process, it is necessary to restart the supply of operating power to the MPU 62. Thus, in order to output the history information to the outside, it is necessary to start supplying the operating power to the MPU 62 with the reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102. .. Since the power supply operation unit for performing the stop operation and the start operation of the supply of the operating power to the MPU 62 is provided on the back surface of the back pack unit 15, the outer frame 11 is used to perform the stop operation and the start operation. It is necessary to open the gaming machine main body 12 to expose the back surface of the back pack unit 15. Under such circumstances, in order to output the history information to the outside, it is necessary to start supplying the operating power to the MPU 62 with the reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102. With such a configuration, it becomes possible to make it difficult to perform the operation of reading the history information even if a person other than the game hall manager performs the operation.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S901, it is determined whether or not a control information confirmation signal is received from the reading terminal 102, so that the current connection of the reading device to the reading terminal 102 is the main ROM 64. It is determined whether or not the control information (program and data) is confirmed (step S902). The reading device has a configuration capable of confirming both control information and history information. When the confirmation of the control information is selected by manual operation on the reading device, the reading device confirms the control information. The signal is transmitted, and when the confirmation of the history information is selected by the manual operation of the reading device, the signal for history confirmation is transmitted from the reading device. The present invention is not limited to this, and the control information confirmation reading device and the history confirmation reading device may be separate. In this case, when a reading device for confirming control information is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102, a signal for confirming control information is transmitted from the reading device and the reading terminal 102 reads for history confirmation. When the device is electrically connected, a signal for history confirmation is transmitted from the reading device.

When a positive determination is made in step S902, an output process for confirming control information is executed (step S903). In the output process, a program and data are read as control information from the main ROM 64, and the read control information is output to the reading terminal 102. This makes it possible to read the control information with a reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102, and confirm whether the control information is authentic or normal. It becomes possible to do.

When a negative determination is made in step S902, an output instruction signal is transmitted to the management CPU 112 (step S904). Specifically, the output state of the output instruction signal is switched from LOW level to HI level. This HI level output state is continued for a specific period. The specific period is a period sufficient for the management-side CPU 112 to specify that the HI level output instruction signal is input to the sixteenth buffer 122p. When the output state of the output instruction signal is switched to the HI level, the management side CPU 112 executes the process for outputting the history information. The process will be described in detail later.

When the process of step S903 is executed or the process of step S904 is executed, it is determined whether or not the electrical connection of the reading device to the reading terminal 102 is continued (step S905). If it is continued (step S905: YES), the process stands by in step S905. As a result, it is possible to prevent the processing set in the execution order after the data output processing from being executed until the electrical connection of the reading device to the reading terminal 102 is released. When the electrical connection of the reading device to the reading terminal 102 is released (step S905: NO), this data output process ends.

Next, the external output process executed by the management-side CPU 112 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The external output process is executed in step S608 of the management process (FIG. 22).

When the output state of the output instruction signal received from the main CPU 63 is switched from the LOW level to the HI level (step S1001: YES), the process for outputting the history information after step S1002 is executed. Specifically, first, by counting the number of history information storage areas 125 in the history area 124 of the history memory 117 in which the correspondence information indicating the outlets 24a is stored, The number of entered balls is calculated (step S1002). In addition, by counting the number of history information storage areas 125 in which the correspondence information indicating the general winning opening 31 is stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, the entry into the general winning opening 31 is achieved. The number is calculated (step S1003). In addition, by counting the number of history information storage areas 125 in which the corresponding relationship information indicating the special electric prize winning device 32 is stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, the special electric prize winning device 32 is entered. The number is calculated (step S1004). In addition, by counting the number of history information storage areas 125 in which the corresponding relationship information indicating the first operating ports 33 is stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, the first operating ports 33 are stored. The number of entered balls is calculated (step S1005). In addition, by counting the number of history information storage areas 125 in the history area 124 of the history memory 117 in which the corresponding relationship information indicating the second operation ports 34 is stored, The number of entered balls is calculated (step S1006).

After that, in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, the history information storage area 125 in which the correspondence information indicating the front door frame 14 and the start information are stored, and the correspondence relationship indicating the front door frame 14 are stored. By referring to the history information storage area 125 existing in the period between the history information storage area 125 in which the information and the end information are stored, the out-door generated in the situation where the front door frame 14 is in the open state 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first working opening 33, and the second working opening 34, respectively, the number of balls entered is calculated (step S1007). In the history area 124 of the history memory 117, the history information storage area 125 in which the correspondence information indicating the front door frame 14 and the start information are stored, and the correspondence information indicating the front door frame 14 and The period between the end information and the history information storage area 125 is calculated from the RTC information stored in the history information storage area 125. In addition, in the entire pointer information that is the serial number, the history information storage area 125 in which the correspondence information indicating the front door frame 14 and the start information are stored, and the correspondence relation indicating the front door frame 14 are stored. When there are a plurality of sections with the history information storage area 125 in which the information and the end information are stored, the total number of incoming balls for the section is calculated. Further, although there is the history information storage area 125 in which the correspondence information indicating the front door frame 14 and the start information are stored, the RTC information corresponding to the time after the history information storage area 125 is present. When the correspondence information and the start information indicating the front door frame 14 are not stored in the history information storage area 125 in which is stored, the correspondence information and the start information indicating the front door frame 14 are stored. The history information in the history information storage area 125 in which RTC information corresponding to a time later than the history information storage area 125 is stored is treated as when the front door frame 14 is in the open state.

Then, various parameters are calculated using the calculation results of steps S1002 to S1007 (step S1008). Specifically, first, the number of incoming balls generated during the opening of the front door frame 14 calculated in step S1007 is subtracted from the number of incoming balls calculated in each of steps S1002 to S1006. Then, the following parameters are calculated using the respective numbers of incoming balls after the subtraction. The difference between the number of balls entered in the outlet 24a calculated in step S1007 and the number of balls entered in step S1002 is defined as the number of entered balls K1, and the number of entered balls calculated in step S1003 is calculated in step S1007. The difference in the number of entered balls of the general winning opening 31 is set as the number of entered balls K2, and the difference in the number of entered balls of the special electric prize winning device 32 calculated in step S1007 with respect to the number of entered balls is set as the entered ball number K3, The difference between the number of balls entered in the first operation port 33 calculated in step S1007 and the number of balls entered in step S1005 is defined as the number of balls entered K4, and the number of balls entered in step S1006 is calculated in step S1007. The difference in the number of entered balls at the second working port 34 is defined as the number of entered balls K5.
・First parameter: total payout number of game balls (K2 x "number of prize balls for winning in general prize hole 31" + K3 x "number of prize balls for winning in special electric prize device 32" + K4 x "first working hole The ratio of the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (K1+K2+K3+K4+K5) (hereinafter, this ratio) "D1")
-Second parameter: ratio of the total number K2 of game balls to the general winning opening 31 / the total number (K1+K2+K3+K4+K5) of game balls discharged from the game area PA-Third parameter: game balls to the special prize winning device 32 Ratio of the total number of entered balls K3/the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (K1+K2+K3+K4+K5) The fourth parameter: The total number of entered balls K4 into the first working opening 33/discharged from the game area PA Ratio of the total number of game balls played (K1+K2+K3+K4+K5) (hereinafter, this ratio is referred to as “D2”)
-Fifth parameter: ratio of the total number of game balls K5 entering the second operating port 34 / the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (K1 + K2 + K3 + K4 + K5) (hereinafter, this ratio is referred to as "D3")
-Sixth parameter: D1-(D2 x "number of prize balls for winning in the first operating port 33" + D3 x "number of prize balls for winning in the second operating port 34")
-Seventh parameter: (K3 x "number of prize balls for winning in special electric prize winning device 32" + K5 x "number of prize balls for winning in second working port 34")/total payout number of game balls (K2 x "general “Number of prize balls for winning in prize hole 31”+K3דNumber of prize balls for winning in special electric prize winning device 32”+K4דNumber of prize balls for prize in first operating port 33”+K5דSecond operating port 34” 8th parameter: K3 x "number of prize balls for winning in special electric prize winning device 32"/total number of game balls paid out (K2 x "for winning in general winning hole 31") "Number of prize balls" + K3 x "Number of prize balls for winning the special electric prize winning device 32" + K4 x "Number of prize balls for winning the first operating port 33" + K5 x "Number of prize balls for winning the second operating port 34" Then, using the oldest RTC information and the newest RTC information in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, the total required until all the history information targeted for the calculation this time is extracted. The time is calculated (step S1009). Then, the first output process is executed (step S1010). In the first output processing, all history information stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117 is sequentially output to the reading terminal 102. The various parameters calculated in step S1008 are sequentially output to the reading terminal 102, and the total time calculated in step S1009 is output to the reading terminal 102. As a result, the reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 reads each piece of information that is the output target in the first output process.

Thereafter, in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, the history information storage area 125 in which the correspondence information indicating the open/close execution mode and the start information are stored, and the correspondence information indicating the open/close execution mode and By referring to the history information storage area 125 existing in the period between the end information and the history information storage area 125, the outlet 24a and the general winning opening 31 generated in the open/close execution mode are referred to. , The special electric prize winning device 32, the first actuating port 33 and the second actuating port 34, respectively, the number of incoming balls is calculated (step S1011). A history information storage area 125 in which correspondence information indicating the open/close execution mode and start information are stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, and correspondence information and end information indicating the open/close execution mode. Is calculated from the RTC information stored in the history information storage area 125. Further, in the entire pointer information that is a serial number, the history information storage area 125 in which the correspondence information indicating the open/close execution mode and the start information are stored, and the correspondence information indicating the open/close execution mode and When there are a plurality of sections with the history information storage area 125 in which the end information is stored, the total number of incoming balls for the total of the sections is calculated. Further, although the history information storage area 125 in which the correspondence information indicating the open/close execution mode and the start information are stored exists, the RTC information corresponding to a time later than the history information storage area 125 is stored. When the stored history information storage area 125 does not store the correspondence relationship information and the start information indicating the open/close execution mode, the correspondence information and the start information indicating the open/close execution mode are stored. All history information in the history information storage area 125 in which RTC information corresponding to a time later than the history information storage area 125 is stored is treated as in the open/close execution mode.

After that, during the period of the open/close execution mode specified in step S1011, the outlet 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special electricity winning device 32, the first working opening 33, and the opening 24a generated in the situation where the front door frame 14 is in the open state, The number of balls entering each of the second working ports 34 is calculated (step S1012). The method of calculating the number of entered balls is the same as that in step S1007, except that the period of the open/close execution mode specified in step S1011 is premised.

Then, various parameters are calculated using the calculation results of steps S1011 and S1012 (step S1013). Specifically, first, the number of incoming balls generated during the opening of the front door frame 14 calculated in step S1012 is subtracted from each number of incoming balls calculated in step S1011. Then, the following parameters are calculated using the respective numbers of incoming balls after the subtraction. The difference in the number of balls entered into the outlet 24a calculated in step S1012 with respect to the number of balls entered into the outlet 24a calculated in step S1011 is defined as the number of entered balls K11. The difference in the number of balls of the general winning opening 31 calculated in step S1012 with respect to the number of balls is defined as the number of balls K12, and the special prize winning device calculated in step S1012 with respect to the number of balls of the special prize device 32 calculated in step S1011 The difference in the number of entered balls of 32 is defined as the number of entered balls K13, and the difference in the number of entered balls of the first operating port 33 calculated in step S1012 with respect to the number of entered balls of the first operating port 33 calculated in step S1011 is entered. The number K14 is defined as the number K14, and the difference between the number of balls entered in the second working port 34 calculated in step S1012 and the number of balls entered in the second working port 34 is set as number K15.
Eleventh parameter: total payout number of game balls (K12 x "number of prize balls for winning in general prize hole 31" + K13 x "number of prize balls for winning in special electric prize winning device 32" + K14 x "first operating port 33" Ratio of the number of prize balls for winning the prize”+K15דthe number of prize balls for winning the second operating port 34”)/the total number of the game balls discharged from the game area PA (K11+K12+K13+K14+K15) (hereinafter, this ratio is “ D11")
・Twelfth parameter: ratio of the total number of game balls K12 into the general winning opening 31/the total number of game balls (K11+K12+K13+K14+K15) discharged from the game area PA. ・Thirteenth parameter: Game balls to the special electric prize winning device 32. Ratio of the total number of entered balls K13/the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (K11+K12+K13+K14+K15)・Fourteenth parameter: The total number of entered balls K14 into the first operation port 33/discharged from the game area PA Ratio of the total number of game balls played (K11+K12+K13+K14+K15) (hereinafter, this ratio is referred to as “D12”)
Fifteenth parameter: the ratio of the total number of game balls K15 entering the second operation port 34/the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (K11+K12+K13+K14+K15) (hereinafter, this ratio is referred to as “D13”)
-Sixteenth parameter: D11-(D12 x "number of prize balls for winning in first operating port 33" + D13 x "number of prize balls for winning in second operating port 34")
17th parameter: (K13 x "number of prize balls for winning in special electric prize winning device 32" + K15 x "number of prize balls for winning in second working port 34")/total payout number of game balls (K12 x "general "Number of prize balls for winning in prize hole 31" + K13 x "Number of prize balls for winning in special electric prize winning device 32" + K14 x "Number of prize balls for prize in first operating port 33" + K15 x "Second operating port 34" 18th parameter: K13 x "number of prize balls for winning in special electric prize winning device 32"/total payout number of game balls (K12 x for winning in general winning hole 31) "Number of prize balls" + K13 x "Number of prize balls for winning the special electric prize winning device 32" + K14 x "Number of prize balls for winning the first operating port 33" + K15 x "Number of prize balls for winning the second operating port 34" )) After that, the second output process is executed (step S1014). In the second output processing, the various parameters calculated in step S1013 are sequentially output to the reading terminal 102. As a result, the reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 reads each piece of information to be output in the second output process.

After that, in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, the history information storage area 125 in which the correspondence information indicating the high probability mode and the start information are stored, and the correspondence information indicating the high probability mode and By referring to the history information storage area 125 existing in the period between the end information and the history information storage area 125, the outlet 24a and the general winning opening 31 generated in the high probability mode , The special electric prize winning device 32, the first actuating port 33 and the second actuating port 34, respectively, the number of incoming balls is calculated (step S1015). A history information storage area 125 in which the correspondence information indicating the high probability mode and the start information are stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, and the correspondence information and the end information indicating the high probability mode. Is calculated from the RTC information stored in the history information storage area 125. In addition, in the entire pointer information that is the serial number, the history information storage area 125 in which the correspondence information indicating the high probability mode and the start information are stored, and the correspondence information indicating the high probability mode and When there are a plurality of sections with the history information storage area 125 in which the end information is stored, the total number of incoming balls for the total of the sections is calculated. Further, although the history information storage area 125 in which the correspondence information indicating the high probability mode and the start information are stored exists, the RTC information corresponding to a time later than the history information storage area 125 is stored. When the stored history information storage area 125 does not store the correspondence information indicating the high probability mode and the start information, the correspondence information indicating the high probability mode and the start information are stored. All history information in the history information storage area 125 in which RTC information corresponding to a time later than the history information storage area 125 is stored is treated as in the high-probability mode.

Then, during the period of the high-probability mode specified in step S1015, the outlet 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special electricity winning device 32, the first working opening 33, and the like generated in the situation where the front door frame 14 is in the open state. The number of balls entering each of the second working ports 34 is calculated (step S1016). The method of calculating the number of entered balls is the same as that in step S1007, except that the period in the high-probability mode specified in step S1015 is assumed.

Then, various parameters are calculated using the calculation results of steps S1015 and S1016 (step S1017). Specifically, first, the number of incoming balls generated during the opening of the front door frame 14 calculated in step S1016 is subtracted from each number of incoming balls calculated in step S1015. Then, the following parameters are calculated using the respective numbers of incoming balls after the subtraction. In addition, the difference between the number of entered balls of the outlet 24a calculated in step S1016 and the number of entered balls of the outlet 24a calculated in step S1015 is defined as the number of entered balls K21, and the winning of the general winning opening 31 calculated in step S1015. The difference in the number of balls of the general winning opening 31 calculated in step S1016 with respect to the number of balls is defined as the number of balls entered K22, and the special prize winning device calculated in step S1016 with respect to the number of balls of the special prize winning device 32 calculated in step S1015. The difference in the number of entered balls of 32 is K23, and the difference in the number of entered balls of the first operating port 33 calculated in step S1016 with respect to the number of entered balls of the first operating port 33 calculated in step S1015 is entered. The number K24 is defined as the number K24, and the difference between the number of balls entered in the second operation port 34 calculated in step S1015 and the number of balls entered in the second operation port 34 is set as number K25.
21st parameter: total payout number of game balls (K22 x "number of prize balls for winning in general prize hole 31" + K23 x "number of prize balls for winning in special electric prize winning device 32" + K24 x "first operating port 33" The ratio of the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (K21+K22+K23+K24+K25) (hereinafter, this ratio is referred to as “the number of prize balls for winning the prize”+K25דthe number of prize balls for winning the second operating port 34”) D11")
-Twenty-second parameter: ratio of total number of game balls K22 to the general winning opening 31 / total number of game balls (K21+K22+K23+K24+K25) discharged from the game area PA-Twenty-third parameter: game ball to special prize winning device 32 Ratio of the total number of entered balls K23/the total number of game balls (K21+K22+K23+K24+K25) discharged from the game area PA. The 24th parameter: the total number of entered game balls K24 into the first working port 33/discharged from the game area PA. Ratio of the total number of game balls played (K21+K22+K23+K24+K25) (hereinafter, this ratio is referred to as “D22”)
25th parameter: ratio of the total number of game balls K25 entering the second operation port 34/the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (K21+K22+K23+K24+K25) (hereinafter, this ratio is referred to as “D23”)
-Twenty-sixth parameter: D21-(D22 x "number of prize balls for winning in first operating port 33" + D23 x "number of prize balls for winning in second operating port 34")
After that, the third output processing is executed (step S1018). In the third output processing, various parameters calculated in step S1017 are sequentially output to the reading terminal 102. As a result, in the reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102, each piece of information that is an output target in the third output process is read. After that, a clear process is executed (step S1019). In the clear processing, all the history information storage area 125 of the history memory 117 is cleared to “0” and the pointer area 126 is cleared to “0”. As a result, the history area 124 is in the initialized state.

<Structure of Tokuden winning device 32>
Next, the configuration of the special electric winning device 32 will be described. FIG. 29 is a front view of the game board 24 showing an enlarged area in which the special electric winning device 32 is provided.

The special power winning device 32 is provided in the right side area PA3 of the game area PA as described above. The position where the special electric prize winning device 32 is provided is an intermediate position in the vertical direction in the right side area PA3, and at the intermediate position, the special electric prize winning device 32 is the right part of the display surface of the symbol display device 41 in the center frame 36a. It extends laterally from a certain right frame portion 36g to the right end portion of the game area PA. Since the special electric winning device 32 is provided so as to extend in the lateral direction in this way, the game ball flowing down the right side area PA3 will surely pass through the region where the special winning device 32 is provided.

The special electric prize winning device 32 includes a passage forming body 201 in which an upstream region of the fourth discharge passage portion 45 is formed, an opening/closing member 202 for preventing or allowing a game ball to enter the fourth discharge passage portion 45, and an opening/closing member. And a guide member 203 for guiding the movement of 202. The passage forming body 201 is integrated with the right frame portion 36g of the center frame 36a and protrudes forward of the pachinko machine 10 from the board surface of the game board 24. The upstream region 45c of the fourth discharge passage portion 45 is formed in the passage forming body 201 such that the inlet portion 45b exists in the right wall portion 201a of the passage forming body 201.

The entrance portion 45b of the fourth discharge passage portion 45 is open to the right, and a game ball flowing down the right side area PA3 can enter. The upstream region 45c of the fourth discharge passage portion 45 is inclined downward to the left in the region continuing from the inlet portion 45b, but on the downstream side thereof, the game ball is led to the back side of the game board 24. The passage direction is changed and the passage direction is changed so as to guide the game ball below the game board 24. The outlet portion of the upstream region 45c of the fourth discharge passage portion 45 is present on the back side of the game board 24, and the downstream region 45d of the fourth discharge passage portion 45 provided on the back side of the game board 24. It is connected to the entrance. The downstream region 45d of the fourth discharge passage portion 45 extends vertically below the game board 24. With the above configuration, the game balls that have entered the fourth discharge passage portion 45 are discharged below the game board 24 on the back side of the game board 24. As described above, the special discharge detection sensor 45a for detecting the game ball entering the fourth discharge passage part 45 (that is, the game ball entering the special charge winning device 32) is provided in the fourth discharge passage part 45. However, the special-electricity detection sensor 45 a is installed in the passage forming body 201.

The opening/closing member 202 is provided so as to open/close the inlet portion 45b of the fourth discharge passage portion 45. 30 is a perspective view of the opening/closing member 202, and FIG. 31 is a perspective view of the passage forming body 201 and the opening/closing member 202 showing how the opening/closing member 202 opens and closes the inlet portion 45b of the fourth discharge passage portion 45. FIG. 32 is a plan view of the opening/closing member 202 and the drive unit 32b for special electric power.

The opening/closing member 202 is made of a synthetic resin, is horizontally long, and has a base portion 211 having an outer quadrangular shape and having a predetermined width in the front-rear direction of the pachinko machine 10, and a side portion of the base portion 211, as shown in FIG. And a blocking portion 212 which is vertically formed on one end side in the direction and integrally formed with the base portion 211. An opening portion 213 is formed in the base portion 211 so as to vertically penetrate the base portion 211. The opening 213 is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape, and the dimension of the pachinko machine 10 in the front-rear direction is set to be larger than the diameter of the game ball and smaller than twice the diameter of the game ball. Further, the lateral dimension of the opening 213 is set to be a multiple of the diameter of the game ball or more, and specifically, set to be larger than 5 times the diameter of the game ball and smaller than 6 times the diameter of the game ball. Has been done. Although the position where the opening 213 is formed is a position biased to the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 in the base portion 211, it is an intermediate position in both the front-back direction and the lateral direction of the base portion 211. Has a plate-like portion around the opening 213.

In the base portion 211, a blocking portion 212 is formed so as to stand upright from the peripheral portion on the left side of the opening portion 213. The blocking portion 212 is formed in a plate shape, and a pair of front and back plate surfaces face in the lateral direction. The blocking portion 212 has a plate surface area such that the entrance portion 45b of the fourth discharge passage portion 45 is prevented from flowing in a game ball as shown in FIG. 31(a), more specifically, the entrance portion 45b. The size is set so that it can be completely closed.

As shown in FIGS. 29 and 31, the opening/closing member 202 is supported by the passage forming body 201 and the guide member 203 in a state of being slidable in the front-back direction of the pachinko machine 10. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 29, the guide member 203 is provided so as to extend laterally from the right end portion of the game area PA to the front of the passage forming body 201. The passage forming body 201 and the guide member 203 are provided with slide through holes 221 that penetrate the game board 24 in the front-rear direction of the pachinko machine 10. The slide through hole 221 is formed to be slightly larger than the outer edge portion of the opening/closing member 202 in front view. The opening/closing member 202 is inserted into the slide through hole 221, and the opening/closing member 202 is slidable in the front-back direction of the pachinko machine 10 along the slide through hole 221.

In the state of being inserted into the slide through hole 221, the blocking portion 212 of the opening/closing member 202 is located close to the right side plate surface of the right wall portion 201a in which the inlet portion 45b of the fourth discharge passage portion 45 is formed in the passage forming body 201. Will be faced with. The distance between the right side plate surface of the right wall portion 201a and the blocking portion 212 is set to be less than the radius of the game ball, but the blocking portion 212 allows the game ball to enter the fourth discharge passage portion 45. The distance is arbitrary as long as it can be blocked, and the plate surface on the right side of the right wall portion 201a and the blocking portion 212 are in contact with each other, and the blocking portion 212 moves to the right wall portion 201a when the opening/closing member 202 moves. It may be configured to slide on the right plate surface.

The opening/closing member 202 has a closed position in which the inlet portion 45b of the fourth discharge passage portion 45 is closed by the blocking portion 212 as shown in FIG. 31(a), and a fourth discharge passage portion as shown in FIG. 31(b). The blocking portion 212 moves to the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 with respect to the entrance portion 45b of the forty-five 45, and the entrance portion 45b can be moved to the open position where it is opened to the right. Further, as shown in FIG. 32, a drive unit 32b for special electric power for slidingly moving the opening/closing member 202 in the front-rear direction of the pachinko machine 10 is provided on the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 of the opening/closing member 202. The drive unit 32b for special electric power is a solenoid that is an electric actuator. In a non-driving state in which the drive signal is not output from the main CPU 63 to the special electric drive unit 32b, the output unit 226 of the special electric drive unit 32b is generated by the urging force of the urging member 225 of the special electric drive unit 32b. Are arranged at the protruding position. On the other hand, in the drive state in which the drive signal is output from the main CPU 63 to the drive unit 32b for special electric power, a force pulling the output unit 226 to the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 is applied, and thus the output unit 226. Moves to the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 against the urging force of the urging member 225 and is arranged in the retracted position. The tip of the output section 226 is connected to the rear end of the opening/closing member 202. Therefore, when the special electric drive unit 32b is in the non-driving state and the output unit 226 is arranged in the projecting position, the opening/closing member 202 is arranged in the closed position as shown in FIG. When the drive part 32b is in the driven state and the output part 226 is arranged in the retracted position, the opening/closing member 202 is arranged in the open position as shown in FIG. 31(b). Since the main body 227 of the drive unit 32b for special electric power is present on the rear side of the game board 24 and the output unit 226 is connected to the rear end of the opening/closing member 202, the special electric power is supplied from the front of the pachinko machine 10. The drive portion 32b for use is invisible or hard to see.

33(a) and 33(b) in addition to FIGS. 31(a) and 31(b), regarding the appearance of the special electric prize winning device 32 in a situation where the opening/closing member 202 is arranged in each of the closed position and the open position. ) Will be described. 33A and 33B are cross-sectional views taken along the line AA of FIG. 31(a) and 33(a) show a state in which the opening/closing member 202 is arranged at the closed position, and FIGS. 31(b) and 33(b) show the opening/closing member 202 arranged at the open position. Shows the state. First, the case where the opening/closing member 202 is arranged at the closed position will be described.

When the opening/closing member 202 is arranged in the closed position, the inlet portion 45b of the fourth discharge passage portion 45 is closed by the blocking portion 212 of the opening/closing member 202 as shown in FIGS. 31(a) and 33(a). .. As a result, when the opening/closing member 202 is located at the closed position, the game ball is prevented from entering the fourth discharge passage portion 45.

As described above, the opening 213 of the base portion 211 is present on the right side of the blocking portion 212 regardless of whether the opening/closing member 202 is placed in the closed position. Further, when the opening/closing member 202 is arranged in the closed position, the guide plate portion 214, which is a region of the base portion 211 on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 with respect to the opening portion 213, has a front end portion thereof on the window of the front door frame 14. They face each other at a position close to the panel 52. The distance between the tip of the guide plate portion 214 and the window panel 52 is less than the radius of the game ball. As a result, in the state where the opening/closing member 202 is arranged at the closed position, even if the game ball placed on the guide plate portion 214 tries to flow downward from the front end portion of the guide plate portion 214, It is blocked by the window panel 52.

The left end portion of the guide plate portion 214 extends in the front-rear direction at a position below the inlet portion 45b of the fourth discharge passage portion 45 in the passage forming body 201 when the opening/closing member 202 is arranged in the closed position. It enters into the formed slide through hole 221. In this case, the upper surface of the guide plate portion 214 is inclined downward toward the rear of the pachinko machine 10 and downward toward the left. In this configuration, the passage forming body 201 projects toward the front side of the pachinko machine 10 with respect to the board surface of the game board 24, and the front end of the passage forming body 201 faces the window panel 52 of the front door frame 14 at a position close thereto. There is. The distance between the front end of the passage forming body 201 and the window panel 52 is less than the radius of the game ball. Thereby, in the state where the opening/closing member 202 is arranged in the closed position, even if the game ball attempts to move from the left end portion of the guide plate portion 214 to the left of the guide plate portion 214, it is blocked by the passage forming body 201. It The upper surface of the guide plate portion 214 is not only inclined downward to the left as described above, but is also inclined downward toward the rear side of the pachinko machine 10, so that the opening/closing member 202 is at the closed position. In the state where the game balls are placed on the guide plate portion 214, the game ball moves toward the opening portion 213 by its own weight and flows into the opening portion 213.

Here, as shown in FIG. 33A, the guide member 203 is provided so as to project forward of the pachinko machine 10 with respect to the board surface of the game board 24, and the portion projecting forward thereof is arranged at the closed position. It faces the base portion 211 of the opening/closing member 202 from above. The left-side region 232 of the front protruding portion excluding the receiving portion 231 on the right end side extends laterally along the opening 213 of the base portion 211 in a state where the opening/closing member 202 is arranged at the closed position. However, the amount of protrusion of the left side region 232 to the front side of the pachinko machine 10 is such that the opening 213 of the base portion 211 is not included in the facing range. This prevents the opening 213 from being blocked by the guide member 203 when the opening/closing member 202 is in the closed position. Further, since the front-rear dimension of the left side region 232 is less than the radius of the game ball, the game ball does not ride on the left side region 232.

On the other hand, in the guide member 203, the receiving portion 231 that is present on the right side of the opening 213 of the opening/closing member 202 projects toward the front of the pachinko machine 10 beyond the left side region 232, and the front end thereof is the front door frame 14. Facing each other at a position close to the window panel 52 of. The distance between the tip of the receiving portion 231 and the window panel 52 is less than the radius of the game ball. As a result, even if the game ball placed on the receiving portion 231 tries to flow downward from the front end portion of the receiving portion 231, it is blocked by the window panel 52. Since the receiving portion 231 is present at the right end portion of the game board 24, even if the game ball placed on the receiving portion 231 tries to flow downward from the right end portion of the receiving portion 231, it is the resin base 21. At, it will be blocked by a portion provided on the right side of the game board 24.

The upper surface of the receiving portion 231 is set to have a dimension in the front-rear direction and a dimension in the lateral direction both larger than the diameter of the game ball. In this case, as shown in FIG. 33A, the front area 233 on the upper surface of the receiving portion 231 is located on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 with respect to the opening 213 of the opening/closing member 202 arranged at the closed position. At the left edge of the front area 233, there is a restricting portion 234 for preventing the game balls on the front area 233 from falling from the left edge of the front area 233 to the left of the front area 233. It is integrally formed. Further, the front region 233 is inclined downward toward the rear side of the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, the game ball placed in the front area 233 on the upper surface of the receiving portion 231 moves to the rear area 235 on the upper surface of the receiving portion 231 by its own weight. The rear area 235 is inclined downward to the left, and there is no part that prevents the game ball from flowing down from the left end of the rear area 235 to the left of the rear area 235. Therefore, when the opening/closing member 202 is arranged in the closed position, the game ball placed on the rear side region 235 on the upper surface of the receiving portion 231 moves toward the opening 213 of the opening/closing member 202 by its own weight and moves toward the opening. It will flow into 213.

Next, a case where the opening/closing member 202 is arranged at the open position will be described. When the opening/closing member 202 is arranged in the open position, the inlet portion 45b of the fourth discharge passage portion 45 is closed by the blocking portion 212 of the opening/closing member 202 as shown in FIGS. 31(b) and 33(b). It is open to the right without any. Thereby, it becomes possible to enter the game ball into the fourth discharge passage portion 45.

When the opening/closing member 202 is arranged at the open position, the entire opening 213 of the base portion 211 of the opening/closing member 202 is arranged inside the slide through hole 221, and the inlet portion 45 b of the fourth discharge passage portion 45. The guide plate portion 214 in the base portion 211 of the opening/closing member 202 is present on the right side of. In this case, the guide plate portion 214 extends in the lateral direction between the inlet portion 45b of the fourth discharge passage portion 45 and the rear region 235 of the receiving portion 231 of the guide member 203, as shown in FIG. Will be extended to. Then, as described above, since the upper surface of the receiving portion 231 is inclined downward toward the left end portion of the rear side region 235, the game ball placed on the upper surface of the receiving portion 231 is directed toward the guide plate portion 214 by its own weight. As it moves, the upper surface of the guide plate portion 214 is inclined downward to the left, so that the game ball placed on the upper surface of the guide plate portion 214 is loaded by its own weight into the entrance portion 45b of the fourth discharge passage portion 45. Will be moved toward. That is, in a state where the opening/closing member 202 is arranged in the open position, the game ball placed on the upper surface of the receiving portion 231 or the upper surface of the guide plate portion 214 is directed toward the inlet portion 45b of the fourth discharge passage portion 45 by its own weight. It moves and enters the entrance 45b. Therefore, when the opening/closing member 202 is arranged in the open position, not only is it possible to enter the game ball into the inlet portion 45b of the fourth discharge passage portion 45, but also the inlet of the fourth discharge passage portion 45. The game ball entering the portion 45b is guided by the opening/closing member 202.

When the opening/closing member 202 is arranged in the open position, the opening/closing member 202 moves to the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 more than when the opening/closing member 202 is arranged in the closed position. The distance between the window panel 52 and the window panel 52 becomes wider. Then, this distance is equal to or larger than the diameter of the game ball. Therefore, depending on the flow direction or the momentum of the flow of the game balls flowing down toward the special electric winning device 32 in the right side area PA3, the game balls enter the space between the guide plate portion 214 and the window panel 52, and the space concerned. It is possible that a game ball will flow down below the special electric prize winning device 32 by flowing down. That is, even when the opening/closing member 202 is arranged in the open position, the game ball that has reached the position of the special electric prize winning device 32 flows down below the special electric prize winning device 32 without winning the special electric prize winning device 32. Things can happen. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the game ball placed on the guide plate portion 214 is formed by integrally forming the protruding portion that protrudes upward over the entire front end portion of the guide plate portion 214. It may be configured such that it cannot or does not easily fall downward from the front end of the portion 214.

Next, referring again to FIG. 29, a configuration for setting the flow mode of the game balls in the right side area PA3 to a predetermined mode will be described.

On the upstream side of the special electric prize winning device 32 in the right side area PA3, a game ball flowing down the upstream side of the right side area PA3, the right end side of the special electric prize winning apparatus 32, more specifically, the receiving portion 231 of the guide member 203 and the same. Guidance means is provided for guiding to the surrounding area. As the guide means, a guide nail group 241 including a plurality of nails 24b is provided. In the guide nail group 241, a plurality of nails 24b are arranged in the right downward direction so as to form a guide portion that is inclined downward from the right frame portion 36g of the center frame 36a toward the receiving portion 231 of the guide member 203. Is formed of. In this case, the distance between the nail 24b at the left end of the guide nail group 241 and the right frame portion 36g is set to be less than the radius of the game ball, and the distance between the adjacent nails 24b in the guide nail group 241 is also set. It is set less than the radius of the game ball. Therefore, the game ball reaching the guide nail group 241 is guided toward the receiving portion 231 of the guide member 203 by the guide portion by the guide nail group 241.

The game ball guided to the upper surface of the receiving portion 231 is guided to the opening 213 in the base portion 211 of the opening/closing member 202 by the upper surface of the receiving portion 231 as already described when the opening/closing member 202 is arranged in the closed position. Then, it flows into the opening 213. Therefore, in the situation where the opening/closing member 202 is arranged in the closed position, the game ball that has flowed down the right side area PA3 and reached the special electricity winning device 32 flows into the area near the receiving portion 231 in the opening 213 of the base portion 211. And flows downward toward the special electric prize winning device 32.

Here, as described above, the through gate 35 is provided in the right side area PA3, but the through gate 35 is arranged on the downstream side of the special prize winning device 32 and closer to the passage forming body 201 of the special prize winning device 32. .. Further, between the special electric prize winning device 32 and the through gate 35, only the game ball flowing down from the position near the passage forming body 201 of the special electric prize winning device 32 to the lower side of the special electric prize winning device 32 can enter the through gate 35. A regulation nail group 242 is provided to ensure that As a result, the game ball reaching the special prize winning device 32 is prevented from passing through the through gate 35 in a state where the opening/closing member 202 is arranged at the closed position.

On the other hand, when the opening/closing member 202 is arranged at the open position, the game ball that has reached the special electric winning device 32 is on the guide plate portion 214 of the base portion 211 as described above, and the inlet portion of the fourth discharge passage portion 45. It will flow down toward 45b. In this case, when the arrangement of the opening/closing member 202 in the open position is maintained until the game ball placed on the guide plate portion 214 reaches the entrance portion 45b of the fourth discharge passage portion 45, the game ball is The ball will enter the entrance portion 45b. On the other hand, when the opening/closing member 202 moves from the open position to the closed position before reaching the entrance portion 45b, the game ball on the guide plate portion 214 at that time is the guide plate portion 214. After moving to the front side of the pachinko machine 10 following the movement of the pachinko machine 10 of FIG. Become. Therefore, when the opening/closing member 202 moves from the open position to the closed position with the game ball existing in the predetermined range X near the passage forming body 201 on the guide plate portion 214, the game ball is the passage forming body. At a position closer to 201, the special electric prize winning device 32 flows downward, and the through gate 35 is passed. Then, the game ball passes through the through gate 35 to acquire the holding information on the universal figure side, which causes a trigger to open the universal electric accessory 34a of the second operating port 34. In other words, the trigger for entering the through gate 35, that is, the trigger for opening the universal utility wing 34a of the second operating port 34 is generated only in the opening/closing execution mode.

With reference to the time chart of FIG. 34, the manner in which the winning of the second operating port 34 occurs in the opening/closing execution mode will be described. 34(a) shows the execution period of the opening/closing execution mode, FIG. 34(b) shows the opening/closing state of the special electric prize winning device 32, and FIG. 34(c) shows the timing when a prize is awarded to the through gate 35. FIG. 34(d) shows the execution period of the open state of the second operating port 34, and FIG. 34(e) shows the timing at which the winning of the second operating port 34 occurs. It should be noted that, in the case of the universal power open state, the open state of the second operating port 34 occurs a plurality of times, but in FIG. 34, the open state of the second operating port 34 occurs only once for convenience of description. As described below.

At the timing of t1, the opening/closing execution mode is started as shown in FIG. In the opening/closing execution mode, as shown in FIG. 34(b), a round game is executed in each period of timing t2 to timing t3, timing t7 to timing t9, timing t13 to timing t15, and so on. The device 32 is opened.

In each of the round games from the timing of t2 to the timing of t3 and the round game from the timing of t7 to the timing of t9 in each of the round games, the timing of t3 and the timing of t9 when the special electric prize winning device 32 is changed from the open state to the closed state. In each of the above, a game ball is placed on the guide plate portion 214 of the opening/closing member 202 of the special electric winning device 32. When the opening/closing member 202 moves from the open position to the closed position at each of the timings of t3 and t9, and the special electric prize winning device 32 is changed from the open state to the closed state, it is placed on the guide plate portion 214. The game ball drops into the opening 213 of the opening/closing member 202. The dropped game ball wins the through gate 35 at each of the timings t4 and t10 as shown in FIG. 34(c). As a result, the reservation information on the general figure side is acquired, and the variable display of the pattern is started on the general figure display unit 38a. Then, as the variable display of the pattern is ended, as shown in FIG. 34(d), the normal operation of the second operating port 34 is performed over each of the timing from t5 to the timing from t8 and the timing from t11 to the timing from t14. The accessory 34a is opened. As described above, even a game ball flowing down the right side area PA3 can reach the position where the second operating port 34 is provided, so that the special electric winning device 32 is directed toward the right side area PA3 to win the game ball. By continuing the firing of the game sphere, a win is generated in the second operating port 34 at the timing of t6 and the timing of t12 as shown in FIG. 34(e). As a result, the second hold information is acquired. Since the start of a new game time is blocked during the execution of the opening/closing execution mode, the execution of the hit/miss determination processing for the acquired second hold information and the start of the game time triggered by the second hold information are: It is performed after the current open/close execution mode ends.

On the other hand, in the round game from the timing of t13 to the timing of t15, the game ball is placed on the guide plate portion 214 of the opening/closing member 202 of the special prize winning device 32 at the timing of t15 when the special prize winning device 32 is changed from the open state to the closed state. No, or even if the game ball is placed on the guide plate portion 214, the game ball does not fall to a position where it can enter the through gate 35. Therefore, no prize is awarded to the through gate 35 with respect to the end of the round game.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 34(a), the opening/closing execution mode occurs at the timing of t16. At the timing when the opening/closing execution mode ends, the general-purpose-side holding area 65c is in a state where the general-purpose-side holding information is held and stored. As a result, the opening of the second operation port 34 is started at the timing of t17, which is the timing after the end of the opening/closing execution mode, as shown in FIG. 34(d), and this opening period continues until the timing of t19. Then, during this period, the shooting operation is performed so that the game balls flow down the left side area PA2 or the right side area PA3, so that the winning to the second working opening 34 is performed at the timing of t18 as shown in FIG. 34(e). appear. In this case, if the upper limit number of pieces of the second holding information is not held and stored in the second special figure holding area 86 at this point, the second holding information is newly acquired. Then, the second hold information becomes a target of execution of the hit/miss determination processing and also serves as a trigger for starting a new game time.

<Execution mode of opening/closing execution mode>
Next, an execution mode of the open/close execution mode will be described. 35(a) and 35(b) are explanatory views for explaining an execution mode of the opening/closing execution mode.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the jackpot result is 2R low-accuracy result, 2R high-accuracy result, 4R low-accuracy result, 4R high-accuracy result, 6R low-accuracy result, 10R low-accuracy result, 10R low-accuracy result, 10R high-accuracy result. As a result, there are 16R low-accuracy results and 16R high-accuracy results. In each of the opening/closing execution modes that occur when these jackpot results are obtained, the interval period between each round game is set to 3 seconds, as shown in FIG. In addition, in each of these opening/closing execution modes, the maximum prize winning number for the special electric prize winning device 32 in each round game is set to 10, and the open duration of each round game is set to 29 seconds. In each round game, the special electric prize winning device 32 is opened and closed once.

On the other hand, the number of round games that occur in these open/close execution modes is different. Specifically, the number of round games is set to 2 times in the 2R low accuracy result and the 2R high accuracy result, and the number of round games is set to 4 times in the 4R low accuracy result and the 4R high accuracy result. , 6R low-accuracy result and 6R high-accuracy result set the number of round games to 6 times, 10R low-accuracy result and 10R high-accuracy result set the number of round games to 10 times, 16R low-accuracy result In the result and the 16R high-accuracy result, the number of round games is set to 16 times. As the number of round games executed increases, the number of balls entered into the special electric prize winning device 32 in one open/close execution mode increases. Therefore, the jackpot result in which the number of round games executed is more advantageous to the player.

In addition, as the number of times of executing the round game increases, the number of times the opening/closing member 202 of the special prize winning device 32 slides between the open position and the closed position increases. As described above, at the timing when the opening/closing member 202 slides from the open position to the closed position, the game ball placed on the guide plate portion 214 of the opening/closing member 202 can win the through gate 35. Therefore, as the number of times the opening/closing member 202 slides between the open position and the closed position increases, the frequency of winning the through-gate 35 increases, and the winning of the through-gate 35 causes the second winning. This causes a trigger that the universal electric accessory 34a of the operating port 34 is opened. Then, when the second hold information acquired by the winning of the second operating opening 34 is the target of execution of the win/loss determination process, one of the big hit result and the small hit result occurs, so it is certain. The open/close execution mode will occur. From this point as well, the jackpot result in which the number of times of executing the round game is large is more advantageous to the player.

Each of the low-probability result and the high-probability result is set as the jackpot result in which the number of times of executing the round game is the same. That is, the 2R low-accuracy result and the 2R high-accuracy result are set as the jackpot result in which the round game is executed twice. In addition, a 4R low-accuracy result and a 4R high-accuracy result are set as a jackpot result in which a round game is executed four times. In addition, 6R low accuracy result and 6R high accuracy result are set as the jackpot result in which the round game is executed 6 times. In addition, a 10R low-accuracy result and a 10R high-accuracy result are set as the jackpot result in which the round game is executed 10 times. In addition, a 16R low-accuracy result and a 16R high-accuracy result are set as a jackpot result in which a round game is executed 16 times. As a result, as a big hit result that the number of round games that occur in the open/close execution mode is the same, a low probability result that the win/loss lottery mode after the open/close execution mode becomes a low probability mode and a win/loss lottery mode after the open/close execution mode are high. There is a highly accurate result that is a probability mode. Therefore, regarding the number of round games that occur in the open/close execution mode, there are jackpot results in which the profit mode of the player is the same, but the setting mode of the win/loss lottery mode is different, and the player expects about the types of jackpot results. There are many types of targets.

As described above, in the present embodiment, there are the first small hit result, the second small hit result, and the third small hit result as the small hit result. As shown in FIG. 35(b), the open/close execution modes that occur when the result of these small hits is set to 10 as the upper limit number of winning prizes. On the other hand, the number of times the special electric prize winning device 32 is opened in the opening/closing execution mode and the opening duration of the special electric prize winning device 32 at each opening are different for each small hit result.

FIG. 36 is a time chart for explaining an execution mode of the opening/closing execution mode which is executed when a small hit result is obtained. 36(a1), FIG. 36(a2) and FIG. 36(a3) show the execution period of the open/close execution mode, and FIG. 36(b1), FIG. 36(b2) and FIG. 36(b3) show the special electric prize winning device 32. It shows the period of open state. Further, FIGS. 36(a1) and 36(b1) show execution modes of the opening/closing execution mode executed when the first small hit result is obtained, and FIGS. 36(a2) and 36(b2) show FIG. 36(a3) and FIG. 36(b3) show execution modes of the opening/closing execution mode executed when the second small hit result is obtained, and are executed when the third small hit result is obtained. The execution mode of the opening/closing execution mode is shown.

In the case of the first small hit result, when the opening/closing execution mode is executed from the timing of t1 to the timing of t4 as shown in FIG. 36(a1), the timing of t2 as shown in FIG. 36(b1). The special electric prize winning device 32 is opened only once over the timing of t3. The opening duration of the special electric winning device 32 in this one opening is set to 10 seconds as shown in FIG. 35(b). The game ball has a firing cycle of 0.6 seconds, and the winning upper limit number of game balls to the special electric prize winning device 32 in the opening/closing execution mode is 10. Therefore, the opening duration is the game ball firing cycle and the winning limit. The period is longer than the product of the number.

In the case of the second small hit result, when the opening/closing execution mode is executed from the timing of t1 to the timing of t20 as shown in FIG. 36(a2), the timing of t2 as shown in FIG. 36(b2). The special electric prize winning device 32 is opened once over each of the timing of t11, the timing of t12 to the timing of t13, the timing of t14 to the timing of t15, the timing of t16 to the timing of t17, and the timing of t18 to the timing of t19. .. That is, in the case of the second small hit result, the special electric winning device 32 is opened five times. The opening duration of the special electric winning device 32 at each opening is set to 2 seconds as shown in FIG. 35(b). Since the game ball has a firing cycle of 0.6 seconds and the maximum number of winning game balls to the special electric prize winning device 32 in the opening/closing execution mode is 10, the opening duration of each opening time is the game ball firing cycle. The period is shorter than the product of the upper limit number of winnings. However, the total opening duration of each opening is longer than the product of the shooting cycle of the game balls and the maximum winning number. Further, the total opening duration of each opening is equal to the opening duration of one opening in the opening/closing execution mode in the first small hit result.

In the case of the third small hit result, when the opening/closing execution mode is executed from the timing of t1 to the timing of t40 as shown in FIG. 36(a3), the timing of t2 as shown in FIG. 36(b3). timing t21, timing t22 to timing t23, timing t24 to timing t25, timing t26 to timing t27, timing t28 to timing t29, timing t30 to timing t31, timing t32 to timing t33. The special power winning device 32 is opened once at each of the timing, the timing of t34 to the timing of t35, the timing of t36 to the timing of t37, and the timing of t38 to the timing of t39. That is, in the case of the third small hit result, the number of times the special electric winning device 32 is opened is 10. The opening duration of the special electric prize winning device 32 at each opening is set to 1 second as shown in FIG. 35(b). Since the game ball has a firing cycle of 0.6 seconds and the maximum number of winning game balls to the special electric prize winning device 32 in the opening/closing execution mode is 10, the opening duration of each opening time is the game ball firing cycle. The period is shorter than the product of the upper limit number of winnings. However, the total opening duration of each opening is longer than the product of the shooting cycle of the game balls and the maximum winning number. Further, the total opening duration of each opening times is equal to the opening duration of one opening times of the opening/closing execution mode in the first small hit result, and the total opening duration of each opening times in the second small hit result is continuous. Equal to the period.

As described above, in the opening/closing execution mode of each small hit result, the smaller the number of times of opening, the longer the opening continuation period of each opening. The longer the one-time open duration of the special electric prize winning device 32, the easier the winning of the special electric prize winning device 32. On the other hand, the greater the number of times the special electric prize winning device 32 is opened, the more the chance that the special electric prize winning device 32 changes from the open state to the closed state when the game ball is placed on the guide plate portion 214 of the opening/closing member 202. Therefore, the winning of the prize in the through gate 35 is likely to occur. Therefore, in the first small hit result, the special electric prize winning device 32 is most likely to be won, but the through gate 35 is the least likely to occur. In the third small hit result, the special electric prize winning device 32 is most likely to be won. Although difficult, a prize is most likely to be generated in the through gate 35, and both the special prize winning device 32 and the through gate 35 are appropriately generated in the second small hit result. As a result, the player who expects the occurrence of a prize in the special electric prize winning device 32 expects the first small hit result, and the player who expects the occurrence of a prize in the through gate 35 expects the third small hit result. Will be done. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the target expected by the player. In addition, even if any of the first small hit result, the second small hit result, and the third small hit result occurs, there are respective merits, so that it is possible to increase the player's attention to each small hit result. Become.

In each of the second small hit result and the third small hit result, the special electric winning device 32 is opened a plurality of times, but the interval period of each opening time is the same for 3 seconds. There is. In addition, the game ball can reach the predetermined range X on the guide plate 214 by the passage of 1 second while the opening/closing member 202 is placed in the open position.

<Universal control system processing>
Next, a processing configuration for switching the second operating port 34 between an open state and a closed state and a processing configuration for switching the special electricity winning device 32 between an open state and a closed state will be described. First, a processing configuration for switching the second operating port 34 between the open state and the closed state will be described. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the universal figure universal communication control process executed by the main CPU 63. The general/universal/universal control process is executed in step S214 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 12).

First, a process of acquiring reservation information on the universal figure side is executed (step S1101). In the acquisition process, if a prize has been awarded to the through-gate 35 and it is not in a situation where the upper limit number of pieces of holding information on the universal figure side has been acquired in the universal figure holding area 65c, the normal charge random number counter C4 determines whether or not it is. Numerical information is stored in the universal figure reservation area 65c. In this case, the reservation information on the universal figure side is stored in the order of the first area 88a→the second area 88b→the third area 88c→the fourth area 88d.

After that, the numerical information of the universal figure universal communication counter provided in the main side RAM 65 is read (step S1102), and the universal figure universal communication address table provided in the main side ROM 64 is read (step S1103). Then, the start address corresponding to the numerical information of the POU/DET counter is acquired from the P/U address table (step S1104), and the process jumps to the process indicated by the acquired start address (step S1105).

The universal figure/universal counter is a counter for the main CPU 63 to know which of the processes of steps S1106 to S1110 in the universal figure/general control process should be executed. In the address table, the start address in the program for executing each process of step S1106 to step S1110 is set in association with the numerical information of the Uzu-Uden counter. When the value of the universal figure/universal counter is “0”, the process jumps to the universal figure variation start processing in step S1106, and when the value of the universal figure/universal counter is “1”, the universal figure variation in step S1107 is executed. If the value of the universal/university/general-electricity counter is “2”, the process jumps to the general-purpose diagram finalizing process of step S1108, and if the value of the universal/university/general-electricity counter is “3”. The routine jumps to the normal-during-universal-opening process in step S1109. If the value of the universal-university-universal-charge counter is "4", the process jumps to the normal-universal-closing process in step S1110.

In the universal figure fluctuation starting process of step S1106, the universal figure pending information stored in the universal figure pending area 65c is reserved, provided that the universal page pending information is pending stored in the universal figure pending area 65c. The process of shifting is executed. Specifically, the reservation information on the side of the universal figure stored in the first area 88a of the universal figure reservation area 65c is shifted to the execution area 89 for the universal figure, and then the second area 88b→the first area 88a, The reservation information on the universal figure side is shifted so that the third area 88c→the second area 88b and the fourth area 88d→the third area 88c. Then, the universal electric drawing lottery process is executed using the newly-held information on the universal figure side that has been newly shifted to the universal figure execution area 89 as the lottery value. In this embodiment, as already described, there is only one support mode. Therefore, the probability that the normal electric open state wins in the normal electric open lottery process is constant regardless of the game state such as whether the open/close execution mode is in the open/closed execution mode or whether the win/no win lottery mode is the high probability mode. Therefore, specifically, the probability of being 9/10 is that the general electric open state is won.

However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the probability of winning the general electric open state may be higher or lower than this. Further, the configuration may be such that the universal communication open state is surely generated once with respect to one piece of pending information on the universal figure side, instead of executing the universal communication open lottery process. In this case, it is possible to increase the frequency of occurrence of the universal power open state.

In the universal figure variation start processing, when the universal electric open lottery processing is executed, processing for starting the variable display of the picture on the universal figure display portion 38a is executed. In this case, the information on the variable display period during which the pattern is variably displayed on the universal figure display unit 38a is set on the universal figure universal timer counter provided in the main RAM 65. The value set in the universal figure/universal timer counter is decremented by 1 each time the timer update process (step S210) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 12) is executed. In this embodiment, as already described, there is only one support mode. Therefore, the variable display period of the variable display of the picture on the universal figure display section 38a is constant regardless of the game state such as whether the open/close execution mode is in progress and whether the win/loss lottery mode is the high probability mode. Specifically, it is set to 5 seconds. Then, when the variable display of the picture on the universal figure display unit 38a is started, the value of the universal figure universal communication counter is updated from "0" to "1". As a result, the process to be executed in the next processing time of the universal figure/universal control process becomes the universal figure changing process.

However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the variable display period of the variable display of the picture in the normal figure display portion 38a may be longer or shorter than this. Further, a plurality of types of variable display periods of the variable display of the pattern on the public figure display unit 38a may be set, and the variable display period to be executed may be determined by lottery. Further, in the configuration in which the universal communication open lottery process is not executed and the universal communication open state is surely generated once for one piece of retained information on the universal graphic side, the pattern on the universal graphic display portion 38a is displayed. The variable display is not executed, and the general-purpose side hold information is newly acquired in a situation where the general-purpose side is not open, or the general-purpose side hold information is retained and stored. When the process ends, a new universal communication open state may be started with the holding information on the universal map side as an execution trigger. On the contrary, even in the configuration in which the universal communication open state surely occurs once for one piece of the reservation information on the side of the universal figure, the variable display of the pattern is executed on the universal figure display portion 38a, The configuration may be such that the universal power open state is started after the variable display of the pattern is executed.

In the universal figure changing process in step S1107, a process for updating the display of the pattern on the universal figure display portion 38a is executed. Further, when the value set in the universal figure universal communication timer counter of the main RAM 65 in the universal figure variation start process is “0”, the information of the fixed period on the universal figure side is displayed in the universal figure of the main RAM 65. In order to display the picture corresponding to the result of the ordinary electric open lottery processing that triggered the execution of the variable display time of the current picture on the ordinary electric figure display unit 38a on the ordinary electric figure display unit 38a, Execute the process. Then, the value of the Uzu-Uden counter is updated from "1" to "2". As a result, the process to be executed in the next processing time of the universal figure universal communication control process becomes the universal figure finalizing process.

In the processing for confirming the universal figure in step S1108, when the value of the universal figure universal power timer counter is “0”, the result of the universal power lottery processing that triggered the execution of the variable display of the pattern this time is Judgment is made as to whether or not the ordinary electric open state is won. If it is not a winning state, the value of the universal figure universal counter is cleared to "0". As a result, the process to be executed in the next processing time of the universal figure/universal control process becomes the universal figure variation start process.

In the case of the general electric open state winning, a process for making the general electric open state is executed. Specifically, "3" is set in the universal power release counter provided in the main RAM 65. The normal power release number counter is a counter for the main CPU 63 to specify the remaining number of times that the general power accessory 34a is in the open state in the normal power open state. Further, the numerical information of the opening duration period (specifically, 2 seconds) in the case where the ordinary electric accessory 34a is brought into the opened state once is set in the ordinary electric figure timer counter. Also, "10" is set in the Poden winning counter. Moreover, the output of the drive signal to the drive unit 34b for general electricity is started so that the general electricity accessory 34a is opened. The ordinary electric prize winning counter is a counter for the main CPU 63 to identify the remaining game balls that can be won in the second operating port 34 in the ordinary electric open state. The value of the Poden winning counter is decremented by 1. Then, when the value of the ordinary electric prize winning counter becomes “0”, the ordinary electric current open state is ended regardless of the remaining number of open times and the remaining open duration of the ordinary electric power accessory 34a at that time. .. After that, the value of the Uzu-Uden counter is updated from "2" to "3". As a result, the process to be executed in the next processing time of the universal figure/universal electric power control process is the universal electric power open process. Here, in this embodiment, as already described, there is only one type of support mode. Therefore, the number of times that the general electric outlet 34a is opened in the general electric open state, the opening duration in the case where the general electric outlet 34a is opened once, and the second operation port 34 in the general electric open state The winning upper limit number of game balls is constant regardless of the game state such as whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is in progress and whether or not the win/loss lottery mode is the high probability mode.

In the normal electric power open process of step S1109, when a prize is generated in the second operating port 34, the value corresponding to the winning number is subtracted from the value of the normal electric prize counter of the main RAM 65. When the value of the ordinary electric prize winning counter is "0", the value of the ordinary electric power open counter is cleared to "0", and the value of the ordinary electric figure universal electric timer counter is cleared to "0". By stopping the output of the drive signal to the drive unit 34b for use, the general electric utility object 34a is closed, and the value of the general/universal electric power counter is cleared to "0". As a result, the process to be executed in the next processing time of the universal figure/universal control process becomes the universal figure variation start process. Further, even if the value of the ordinary electric prize winning counter is not "0", if the value of the ordinary figure ordinary electric power timer counter is "0", the drive signal is output to the drive unit 34b for ordinary electric power. To stop the normal electric accessory 34a in the closed state, and subtract 1 from the value of the general electric open counter of the main RAM 65. Then, when the value of the ordinary electric power opening counter is not "0", the numerical information of the closing duration of the electric power accessory 34a is set in the universal electric power timer counter, and then the value of the universal electric power counter is set to " Update from "3" to "4". As a result, the process to be executed in the next processing time of the universal diagram/general electric power control process is the regular electric power system closing process. When the value of the universal communication open frequency counter is "0", the value of the universal communication universal communication counter is cleared to "0" without setting the value to the universal communication universal communication timer counter. As a result, the process to be executed in the next processing time of the universal figure/universal control process becomes the universal figure variation start process.

In the processing for closing the universal electric power in step S1110, the output of the drive signal to the drive portion 34b for general electric power is started on the condition that the value of the universal electric power distribution timer counter is "0". Numerical information of the open duration (specifically, 2 seconds) in the case where the electric utility object 34a is opened and the general electric object 34a is opened once is set in the universal figure universal electric timer counter. Then, the value of the Uzu/Uden counter is updated from “4” to “3”. As a result, the process to be executed in the next processing time of the universal figure/universal electric power control process is the universal electric power open process.

By executing the normal electric power control processing as described above, the variable display of the pattern is performed on the normal figure display portion 38a upon the occurrence of the winning of the through gate 35. Then, in the normal electric power open lottery process, when the normal electric power open state winning is achieved, the general electric power accessory 34a of the second operating port 34 becomes the open electric power state. It becomes possible to win the game ball to the second operation port 34 by opening the normal operation state and the second operation port 34 in the open state, and the second hold information by the game ball winning in the second operation port 34. Is stored in the second special figure reservation area 86.

<Special map special power control processing>
Next, a processing configuration for switching the special electric winning device 32 between the open state and the closed state will be described. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing a special figure special power control process executed by the main CPU 63. The special figure special power control process is executed in step S213 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 12).

First, a process of acquiring pending information is executed (step S1201). In the reservation information acquisition processing, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 39, a winning is generated in the first working opening 33 (step S1301: YES), and further, the first special figure reservation area 85 is stored. If the number of pieces of 1-hold information is less than the upper limit storage number (step S1302: YES), a process for acquiring the first hold information is executed. It should be noted that the determination as to whether or not a prize has been generated in the first operation port 33 is performed by determining whether or not "1" is set in the first operation prize flag of the main RAM 65. As described above, the first operation winning flag is set to "1" in step S315 of the ball detection process (FIG. 14). If an affirmative determination is made in step S1301, the first operation winning flag is cleared to "0".

In the process for obtaining the first pending information, first, the main RAM 65 is provided so that the main CPU 63 can grasp the number of unprocessed first pending information stored in the first special figure pending area 85. The value of the first special figure reservation counter is incremented by 1 (step S1303). Incidentally, the display content of the first special figure reservation display section 37c in the special figure unit 37 is adjusted according to the value of the first special figure reservation counter. As a result, the display content of the first special figure reservation display section 37c corresponds to the number of the first reservation information stored in the first special figure reservation area 85. After that, the respective values of the hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 are stored in the first storage area of the first special figure storage area 85, that is, the storage number corresponding to the storage number obtained by adding 1 in step S1303. It is stored in the area (step S1304). Then, the first hold command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 81 (step S1305). When the voice emission control device 81 receives the first hold command, it transmits a command corresponding to the first hold command to the display control device 82. In the symbol display device 41, an image display for notifying the number of the first reservation information stored in the first special figure reservation area 85 is performed, and the display control device 82 displays a command corresponding to the first reservation command. Upon reception, the content of the image display is updated to the content corresponding to the increase in the number of the first hold information by one. In addition, when the game time is started with the first hold information as a trigger, the content of the image display is updated to the content corresponding to the decrease in the number of the first hold information by one.

If a negative determination is made in step S1301, a negative determination is made in step S1302, or if the process of step S1305 is executed, a winning for the second operating port 34 has occurred (step S1306: YES). ), further on the condition that the number of pieces of the second hold information stored in the second special figure hold area 86 is less than the upper limit storage number (step S1307: YES), a process for obtaining the second hold information is executed. Execute. It should be noted that the determination as to whether or not a win has occurred in the second operation opening 34 is performed by determining whether or not "1" is set in the second operation winning flag of the main RAM 65. As described above, the first operation winning flag is set to "1" in step S319 of the ball detection process (FIG. 14). If an affirmative determination is made in step S1306, the second operation winning flag is cleared to "0".

In the process for acquiring the second hold information, first, the main RAM 65 is provided so that the main CPU 63 can grasp the number of unprocessed second hold information stored in the second special figure hold area 86. The value of the second special figure reservation counter is incremented by 1 (step S1308). Incidentally, the display content of the second special figure reservation display portion 37d in the special figure unit 37 is adjusted according to the value of the second special figure reservation counter. As a result, the display content of the second special figure reservation display section 37d corresponds to the number of the second reservation information stored in the second special figure reservation area 86. After that, the respective values of the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 are stored in the first storage area of the second special figure reservation area 86, that is, the storage number corresponding to the reserved storage number obtained by adding 1 in step S1308. It is stored in the area (step S1309). Then, the second hold command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 81 (step S1310). When the voice emission control device 81 receives the second hold command, it transmits a command corresponding to the second hold command to the display control device 82. In the symbol display device 41, an image display for notifying the number of the second holding information stored in the second special figure holding area 86 is displayed, and the display control device 82 displays a command corresponding to the second holding command. Upon reception, the content of the image display is updated to the content corresponding to the increase in the number of the second hold information by one. In addition, when the game time is started with the second hold information as a trigger, the content of the image display is updated to the content corresponding to the decrease in the number of the second hold information by one.

After the hold information acquisition process (step S1201) is executed, the numerical information of the special figure special power counter provided in the main RAM 65 is read (step S1202), and the special figure special power address table provided in the main ROM 64 is read. It is read (step S1203). Then, the start address corresponding to the numerical information of the special figure special telephone address table is obtained from the special figure special telephone address table (step S1204), and the process jumps to the process indicated by the obtained start address (step S1205).

The special figure special telephone counter is a counter for the main CPU 63 to know which of the processes of steps S1206 to S1212 in the special figure special electricity control process should be executed. Indicates the start address in the program for executing each processing of step S1206 to step S1212 in correspondence with the numerical information of the special figure special power counter. When the value of the special figure special power counter is "0", the process jumps to the special figure variation start process of step S1206, and when the value of the special figure special power counter is "1", the special figure variation process in step S1207. If the value of the special figure special power counter is "2", the process jumps to the special figure fixing process of step S1208, and if the value of the special figure special power counter is "3", the special power of step S1209 is reached. If the value of the special map special electric power counter is "4", the process jumps to the special electric power releasing processing of step S1210. If the value of the special electric power special electric power counter is "5", the process jumps to step S1211. When the value of the special map special electric power counter is “6”, the process jumps to the special electric power closing process, and jumps to the special electric power ending process of step S1212. Hereinafter, each processing of step S1206 to step S1212 will be individually described.

<Special map fluctuation start processing>
First, the special figure variation start processing in step S1206 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. The special figure variation start processing is not executed in the situation where the game times have already been executed and the situation where the open/close execution mode has been executed.

In the special figure variation start process, when the second special information is not stored in the second special figure holding area 86 and the first special information is stored in the first special figure holding area 85 (step S1401: YES, step) S1402: NO), the first data setting process is executed (step S1403). In the first data setting process, the data stored in the first area 85a of the first special figure reservation area 85 is moved to the special figure execution area 87. Then, the process of shifting the data stored in the storage area of the first special figure reservation area 85 is executed. This data shift process is a process for sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas 85a to 85d to the lower area side, and clears the data in the first area 85a, and also to the second area 85b→ The data in each area is shifted such that the first area 85a, the third area 85c→the second area 85b, the fourth area 85d→the third area 85c. After that, the value of the first special figure reservation counter of the main RAM 65 is decremented by 1. As a result, the display content of the first special figure reservation display section 37c in the special figure unit 37 is changed to the content in which the first reservation information is reduced by one. Further, in the data setting process, the first lightening control command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 81, which indicates that the first holding information in the first special figure holding area 85 has decreased by one. When the voice emission control device 81 receives the first decrease time command, the voice emission control device 81 transmits a corresponding command to the display control device 82. As described above, the image display for notifying the number of the first reservation information stored in the first special figure reservation area 85 is being performed on the symbol display device 41, and the display control device 82 is the first decrease time command. By receiving the command corresponding to, the content of the image display is updated to the content corresponding to the decrease in the number of the first hold information by one.

On the other hand, when the second suspension information is stored in the second special diagram suspension area 86 (step S1401 and step S1402: YES), the first suspension information acquired earlier than the second suspension information is the first suspension information. Even if it is stored in the 1 special figure reservation area 85, the second data setting process is executed (step S1404). In the second data setting process, the data stored in the first area 86a of the second special figure reservation area 86 is moved to the special figure execution area 87. After that, a process of shifting the data stored in the storage area of the second special figure reservation area 86 is executed. This data shift process is a process for sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas 86a to 86d to the lower area side, and clears the data in the first area 86a, and also to the second area 86b→ The data in each area is shifted in the order of the first area 86a, the third area 86c→the second area 86b, the fourth area 86d→the third area 86c. After that, the value of the second special figure reservation counter of the main RAM 65 is decremented by 1. As a result, the display content of the second special figure reservation display portion 37d in the special figure unit 37 is changed to the content in which the second reservation information is reduced by one. Further, in the data setting process, the second lightening control command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 81, which indicates that the second holding information in the second special figure holding area 86 has decreased by one. When the voice emission control device 81 receives the second decrease time command, it transmits a command corresponding to the second decrease time command to the display control device 82. As described above, the image display for notifying the number of the second holding information stored in the second special figure holding area 86 is being performed on the symbol display device 41, and the display control device 82 is the second decreasing command. By receiving the command corresponding to, the content of the image display is updated to the content corresponding to the decrease of the number of the second hold information by one.

Here, when the second hold information is stored as described above, the second hold information is for special drawing even if the first hold information acquired earlier than the second hold information is stored. Is to be shifted to the execution area 87. As a result, the second hold information is preferentially digested as the start target of the game time rather than the first hold information.

When the process of step S1403 or step S1404 is executed, the hit/miss judgment process is executed (step S1405). In the win/loss determination process, if the win/loss lottery mode is the low-probability mode and the game time start target is the first hold information, the low probability win/loss table for the first special figure (see FIG. 9A) is stored in the main ROM 64. If the win/no win lottery mode is the high-probability mode and the game game start target is the first hold information, then the high probability win/loss table for the first special figure (see FIG. 9B) is read from the main ROM 64. If the win/win lottery mode is the low-probability mode and the game time start target is the second hold information, the low certainty win/loss table for the second special map (see FIG. 9C) is read from the main side ROM 64, and the win/fail is determined. If the lottery mode is the high-probability mode and the object of starting the game is the second hold information, the high probability table (see FIG. 9D) for the second special figure is read from the main ROM 64. After reading the hit/miss table, the information for hit/damage determination, that is, the numerical value information obtained from the hit random number counter C1 is read out from the pending information stored in the execution area 87 for special figures, and the read numerical value information is the hit/damage table. At, it is determined whether or not it matches any of the numerical information set as the jackpot result. Also, when the start target of the game time this time is the second holding information, if the numerical information set as the big hit result does not match, the first small hit result, the second small hit in the winning/losing table. It is determined whether or not any of the numerical information set for each of the result and the third small hit result matches the above-described information for determining the hit/miss.

When the result of the hit determination processing is the jackpot result (step S1406: YES), the sorting determination processing is executed (step S1407). In the distribution determination process, if the game time start target is the first hold information, the distribution table for the first special figure (see FIG. 10A) is read from the main ROM 64, and the game time start target is the first. If it is the 2-hold information, the distribution table for the second special figure (see FIG. 10B) is read from the main ROM 64. After the sorting table is read, the sorting determination information, that is, the numerical value information obtained from the jackpot type counter C2 is read from the pending information stored in the special figure execution area 87, and the sorting table is referred to. By doing so, it is possible to identify which kind of jackpot result the read numerical information corresponds to.

After executing the distribution determination process, "1" is set to the flag of the main RAM 65 corresponding to the type of the jackpot result identified in the distribution determination process (step S1408). After that, the stop result setting process for the jackpot result is executed (step S1409). Specifically, the stop information for the jackpot result stored in advance in the main side ROM 64 is information on the stop mode of the design which is finally stopped and displayed on the special figure display portions 37a and 37b which are the start targets of the game times this time. It is specified from the result table, and the specified information is stored in the main RAM 65. In the stop result table for the jackpot result, the types of stop modes of the pattern stopped and displayed on the first special figure display portion 37a or the second special figure display portion 37b are set differently for each type of the big jackpot result. In step S1409, the information on the stop mode of the pattern according to the type of the jackpot result identified in step S1408 is stored in the main RAM 65. It should be noted that the stop mode of the pattern may be set in a one-to-one correspondence with each jackpot result, or a plurality of types of stop modes of the pattern may be set for at least some of the jackpot results. A method of selecting a stop result for a big hit result in which a plurality of types of patterns are set is arbitrary, but the stop result may be selected according to the value of the big hit type counter C2, for example.

When the result of the hit determination processing is not a big hit result but one of the small hit results (step S1406: NO, step S1410: YES), the main RAM 65 corresponding to the kind of the small hit result identified in the hit determination processing. The flag is set to "1" (step S1411). After that, the stop result table for the small hit result stored in the main ROM 64 in advance is stored with the information on the stop mode of the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the second special figure display portion 37b which is the start target of the game time this time. The main RAM 65 stores the specified information. In the stop result table for the small hit result, the type of the stop mode of the pattern stopped and displayed on the second special figure display portion 37b is set to be different for each kind of the small hit result, and in step S1412. The information of the stop mode of the pattern according to the kind of the small hit result identified in step S1411 is stored in the main RAM 65. In addition, the stop mode of the pattern may be set in a one-to-one correspondence with each small hit result, or a plurality of types of stop patterns of the patterns may be set for at least some of the small hit results. .. A method of selecting a stop result for a small hit result in which a plurality of types of stop patterns are set is arbitrary, but the stop result may be selected according to the value of the hit random number counter C1, for example. Further, the information on the pattern mode selected in step S1412 is different from the information on the pattern mode selected in the case of the jackpot result.

When the result of the hit/miss determination process is neither a big hit result nor a small hit result (step S1410: NO), a stop result setting process for a deviation result is executed (step S1413). Specifically, in the game time this time, the information of the mode of the design to be finally stopped and displayed on the first special figure display portion 37a or the second special figure display portion 37b is stored in the main ROM 64 in advance as a result of the removal. The specified information is stored in the main RAM 65. The information on the aspect of the pattern selected in this case is different from the information on the aspect of the pattern selected in the case of the big hit result and the information of the aspect of the pattern selected in the case of the small hit result. One type is common to the special figure display portion 37a and the second special figure display portion 37b.

When the process of step S1409, step S1412, or step S1413 is executed, the variable display period identification process is executed (step S1414). In the identifying process, the numerical information of the fluctuation type counter CS is acquired. In addition, it is determined whether or not the reach effect is generated on the symbol display device 41 in this game time. Specifically, if any jackpot result occurs in the current game, it is determined that the reach effect will occur. Also, if any of the small hit results occur in the current game, it is determined that the reach effect does not occur. In addition, when neither the big hit result nor the small hit result occurs in this game time, the numerical information acquired from the reach random number counter C3 in the hold information stored in the execution area 87 for special figures causes the reach to occur. It is determined that the reach effect is generated when the numerical information is corresponding, and it is determined that the reach effect is not generated when the numerical information is not corresponding to the occurrence of the reach.

When it is determined that the reach effect is generated, the reach generation table stored in the main side ROM 64 is referred to, and the information of the variable display period corresponding to the numerical value information of the current variation type counter CS is acquired. The acquired information on the variable display period is set in the special map special power timer counter. When it is determined that the reach effect does not occur, the reach non-occurrence table stored in the main ROM 64 is referred to and the information of the variable display period corresponding to the numerical value information of the current variation type counter CS is displayed. get. In this case, each variable display period is set such that the variable display period when the reach effect occurs is longer than the variable display period when the reach effect does not occur. Then, the acquired information on the variable display period is set in the special figure special power timer counter. The value set in the special figure special electric timer counter is decremented by 1 each time the timer update processing (step S210) of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 12) is executed.

The variable display period when the reach is not generated is set so that the average period becomes shorter as the number of pieces of the hold information stored in the first special figure reservation area 85 or the second special figure reservation area 86 increases. In addition, in the situation where the win/loss lottery mode is the high-probability mode, the holding information stored in the first special map holding area 85 or the second special map holding area 86 is more than that in the situation where the win/win lottery mode is the low-probability mode. The variable display period when the reach is not generated is set so that a shorter variable display period is easily selected as compared with the case where the numbers are the same.

Further, the variable display period selected in the case of a small hit result may be shorter than the variable display period selected in the case of a big hit result, and the variable display period selected in the case of a small hit result The average value may be shorter than the average value of the variable display period selected when the result is the jackpot. In this case, it is possible to speed up the digestion of the game times when the second hold information becomes the start target of the game times and the small hit result occurs.

Here, in the situation where the win/loss lottery mode is the low probability mode, the maximum fluctuation display period selected when the second hold information is the start target of the game times in the situation where the win/loss lottery mode is the low probability mode The first hold information is set to a period equal to or shorter than the maximum variable display period selected when the game time is started. Further, in the situation where the win/loss lottery mode is the low-probability mode, the average period of the variable display period that is selected when the second holding information is the start target of the game times and does not result in the jackpot is the win/loss lottery mode. Is set to a period equal to or less than the average period of the variable display period that is selected when the first holding information is the start target of the game times and does not result in the big hit in the low probability mode. As a result, it is possible to prevent the digestion rate of the game times from deteriorating even when the second hold information is the start target of the game times in the low probability mode. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and in the case where the win/loss lottery mode is the low-probability mode, the variable display selected when the second suspension information is the start target of the game times and does not result in the jackpot. The average period of the period is the average period of the variable display period selected when the first holding information is the start target of the game times and the jackpot result is not obtained in the situation where the win/loss lottery mode is the low probability mode. The configurations may be set to be the same or substantially the same. In this case, the term “substantially the same” actually means that the average period is different, but the difference cannot be recognized by the player.

Further, in the situation where the win/loss lottery mode is the high-probability mode, the average period of the variable display period that is selected when the second holding information is the start target of the game times and does not result in the jackpot is the win/loss lottery mode. In the high probability mode, the first hold information is set to be shorter than the average period of the variable display periods selected when the game times are started and the jackpot result is not obtained. As a result, the digestion rate of the game times when the second hold information is the start target of the game times in the high probability mode is the first hold information is the start target of the game times in the high probability mode. It is possible to increase the digestion rate of the game times in the case of.

After the variation display period identification process is executed, the variation command and the type command corresponding to the game time which is the current start target are transmitted to the voice emission control device 81 (step S1415). The command for fluctuation includes the information of the fluctuation display period specified in step S1414, and the game time that is the start target is one of the first special figure display section 37a and the second special figure display section 37b. It includes information indicating whether it is supported. Further, the variation command includes information as to whether or not the reach effect is executed. The type command includes information as to whether or not the game number that is the start target of this time corresponds to the jackpot result, and if it corresponds to the jackpot result, it is a jackpot result of any kind. It includes information indicating whether or not. In addition, the type command includes information on whether or not the game number that is the start target of this time corresponds to the small hit result, and if it corresponds to the small hit result, which kind of It includes information indicating whether it is a small hit result.

After that, the variable display of the pattern is started on the display unit of the first special figure display unit 37a and the second special figure display unit 37b which is the start target of the current game time (step S1416). Then, the value of the special figure special power counter is incremented by 1 (step S1417). Since the value of the special figure special power counter is "0" when the special figure fluctuation start process is executed, the value of the special figure special power counter corresponds to the special figure fluctuation process (step S1207) by adding 1. It becomes "1".

When the voice emission control device 81 receives the variation command and the type command, the voice emission control device 81 executes a process for determining the execution content of the game reproduction effect corresponding to the commands. Then, the light emission control of the display light emitting unit 53 and the sound output control of the speaker unit 54 are executed according to the table corresponding to the processing result. As a result, the light emission effect in the display light emitting unit 53 and the sound output effect in the speaker unit 54 are executed over the variable display period of the current game. In addition, the voice emission control device 81 transmits to the display control device 82 a command corresponding to the content of execution of the game diversion effect determined this time. Upon receiving the command, the display control device 82 executes the display control of the symbol display device 41 according to the table corresponding to the command. Thereby, the display effect on the symbol display device 41 is executed over the variable display period of the current game.

In this case, when the current game time is the 16R high-accuracy result, the combination of symbols "7" is stopped and displayed on any of the activated lines. In addition, if the game time this time is any of 2R high-accuracy result, 4R high-accuracy result, 6R high-accuracy result and 10R high-accuracy result, the same odd number other than the "7" symbol on any of the activated lines. The combination of symbols is stopped and displayed. In addition, if the game time this time is any of 2R low-accuracy result, 4R low-accuracy result, 6R low-accuracy result, 10R low-accuracy result and 16R low-accuracy result, the same even number symbol on any of the activated lines. The combination of is displayed as a stop. Also, if the game time this time is one of the first small hit result, the second small hit result and the third small hit result, it is not the combination of the same symbol on any of the activated lines and the combination of the reach symbol. However, a predetermined symbol combination (for example, "3.4.1") is stopped and displayed. Thus, regardless of the first small hit result, the second small hit result, and the third small hit result, a predetermined combination of symbols that is common in the game-playing effect on the symbol display device 41 is stopped and displayed. By doing so, it is possible to make it difficult to understand which of the first small hit result, the second small hit result and the third small hit result is being dealt with, while clearly indicating the occurrence of the small hit result. Become. Therefore, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the opening/closing execution mode that occurs when a small hit result is obtained. Further, as described above, in the symbol display device 41, in the configuration in which the predetermined predetermined symbol combination that is common to any of the first small hit result, the second small hit result and the third small hit result is stopped and displayed, In the 2 special figure display portion 37b, the design corresponding to the type of the small hit result is stopped and displayed. Therefore, the manager of the game hall can specify which kind of small hit result has occurred by merely visually confirming the second special figure display portion 37b. Note that the present invention is not limited to this, and the symbol display device 41 may be configured to display the stop result corresponding to the type of the small hit result.

<Processing during special map change>
Next, the special figure changing process executed in step S1207 of the special figure special power control process (FIG. 38) will be described.

When the value of the special map special electric timer counter is 1 or more and the variation display period of the current game time has not elapsed, the display of the special map display portions 37a and 37b that are the execution targets of the current game time When it is the content update timing, data setting is performed to update the display content of the special figure display portions 37a and 37b. As a result, the display contents of the patterns on the control target special figure display portions 37a and 37b are updated to the display contents in the next order.

The mode at the time of starting the variable display of the patterns on the special figure display portions 37a, 37b and the updating mode of the variable display of the patterns are performed in a fixed mode regardless of the result of the judgment or the result of the sorting, and the pattern display device. It is performed in a fixed manner regardless of the content of the effect for game diversion in 41. For example, a display pattern in which the display content of the pattern is rotated once and the display order is constant is repeated by the occurrence of a predetermined plurality of update timings, and when the variable display period has passed, the display pattern is changed. Regardless of the order in which the display is performed, the stop result determined at the start of the game time is displayed. This makes it possible to simplify the processing configuration for controlling the display of the special figure display units 37a and 37b.

On the other hand, when the value of the special figure special power timer counter is “0”, that is, when the variable display period has elapsed, the final stop command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81. After that, the information of the stop mode of the picture of the special figure display parts 37a and 37b stored in the main side RAM 65 at the start of the game time is read. As a result, the variable display of the design is stopped in a state where the design corresponding to the game result of the current game is displayed on the control target special figure display portions 37a and 37b. After that, information on the final stop period (specifically, 0.5 sec) is set in the special figure special power timer counter. As a result, the measurement of the final stop period is started. After that, 1 is added to the value of the special figure special power counter. Since the value of the special figure special power counter is "1" when the special figure changing process is executed, the value of the special figure special power counter corresponds to the special figure fixing process (step S1208) by adding 1. It becomes "2".

When the voice emission control device 81 receives the final stop command, it transmits a command corresponding to the final stop command to the display control device 82. When the display control device 82 receives the command, it causes the symbol display device 41 to confirm and display the symbol combination corresponding to the stop result of the current game time over the final stop period.

<Processing during special map confirmation>
Next, the special figure special electric power control processing (FIG. 38), which is executed in step S1208, will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 41.

When the value of the special map special electric timer counter is "0" and the final stop period has elapsed (step S1501: YES), and the game result of this game time is a big hit result or a small hit result ( (Step S1502: YES), the value of the special figure special power counter is incremented by 1 (step S1503). Since the value of the special figure special power counter is “2” when the special figure finalizing process is executed, the value of the special figure special power counter is increased by 1 to correspond to the special power start process (step S1209) of “3”. It will be. On the other hand, when the game result of this game time is neither a big hit result nor a small hit result (step S1502: NO), the value of the special map special electric counter is cleared to "0" (step S1504). As a result, the value of the special figure special power counter becomes "0" corresponding to the special figure variation start process (step S1206).

<Special train start processing>
Next, the special electric power start processing executed in step S1209 of the special electric power control processing (FIG. 38) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

If it is before the start of the opening period of the opening/closing execution mode (step S1601: YES), if the current game result is a jackpot result, information corresponding to the opening period corresponding to the jackpot result (specifically, 5 seconds). Is set to the special map special electric timer counter, and if the game result this time is a small hit result, information (specifically 2 seconds) corresponding to the opening period corresponding to the small hit result is set to the special special electric timer counter. It is set (step S1602). Then, the opening command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 81 (step S1603). Thereby, the effect corresponding to the opening period is performed in the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting unit 53, and the speaker unit 54.

When it is after the start of the opening period of the opening/closing execution mode (step S1601: NO), the value of the special figure special power timer counter is “0”, that is, the opening period has elapsed (step S1604: If YES, the process of setting the number of times of opening and closing is executed (step S1605). In this case, if the game result of this time is a 2R low-accuracy result or a 2R high-accuracy result, "2" is set in the opening/closing counter provided in the main RAM 65, and the game result of this time is a 4R low-accuracy result or a 4R high-accuracy result. If it is a positive result, set the opening/closing counter of the main RAM 65 to "4". If the current game result is a 6R low accuracy result or a 6R high accuracy result, set "6" to the opening/closing counter of the main RAM 65. However, if the current game result is a 10R low-accuracy result or a 10R high-accuracy result, set "10" in the opening/closing counter of the main RAM 65, and the current game result is a 16R low-accuracy result or a 16R high-accuracy result. For example, "16" is set in the opening/closing counter of the main RAM 65. If the game result this time is the first small hit result, the opening/closing number counter of the main RAM 65 is set to "1". If the game result this time is the second small hit result, the opening/closing number counter of the main RAM 65 is set. Is set to "5", and if the current game result is the third small hit result, "10" is set to the opening/closing counter of the main RAM 65. The opening/closing number counter is a counter for the main CPU 63 to specify the remaining number of times the special power winning device 32 is opened/closed in the opening/closing execution mode.

After that, the open duration setting process is executed (step S1606). In the setting process, if the current game result is one of the big hit results, the information (specifically 29 seconds) of the open duration of the round game is set in the special figure special electric timer counter. In addition, in the setting process, when the game result this time is the first small hit result, the information (specifically, 10 seconds) of the opening duration for the first small hit result is set in the special map special electric timer counter. However, if the game result this time is the second small hit result, the information (specifically 2 seconds) of the opening duration for the second small hit result is set in the special map special electric timer counter, and the current game When the result is the third small hit result, the information (specifically, 1 second) of the opening duration for the third small hit result is set in the special figure special power timer counter.

After that, the setting process of the maximum winning number is executed (step S1607). In the setting process, "10" is set to the winning counter provided in the main RAM 65 regardless of which of the big hit results and which of the small hit results this time. The winning counter is a counter for the main CPU 63 to specify the remaining number of the winning upper limit number.

After that, a special electric open setting process is executed (step S1608). In the opening setting process, data setting is performed so that the special electric prize winning device 32 is in the opened state. As a result, the special power winning device 32 is opened. After that, the value of the special figure special power counter is incremented by 1 (step S1609). Since the value of the special map special electric power counter is "3" when the special electric power start processing is executed, the value of the special electric power special electric power counter is "4" corresponding to the special electric power open processing (step S1210) by adding 1. Becomes

<Processing during opening of special train>
Next, the special electric power releasing control processing (step S1210) of the special electric power control processing (FIG. 38) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 43.

When the value of the special figure special power timer counter is "0", that is, when the open continuation period has elapsed (step S1701: YES), the value of the open/close counter of the main RAM 65 is decremented by 1 (step S1702). After that, information on the interval period (specifically, 3 seconds) is set in the special figure special power timer counter (step S1703). Also, the closing setting process for special electric power is executed (step S1704). In the closing setting process, data is set so that the special electric prize winning device 32 is in the closed state. As a result, the special electric winning device 32 is closed. Then, the value of the special figure special power counter is incremented by 1 (step S1705). The value of the special map special power counter is "4" when the special power open processing is executed, so that the value of the special power special power counter is "5" corresponding to the special power close processing (step S1211) by adding 1. It becomes.

When the value of the special map special electric power timer counter is not "0", that is, when the opening continuation period has not elapsed (step S1701: NO), it is determined whether or not a special electric prize winning device 32 has won a prize ( Step S1706). The determination as to whether or not a prize has been awarded to the special electric prize winning device 32 is performed by determining whether the special electric prize flag of the main RAM 65 is set to "1". As described above, the special electric prize flag is set to "1" in step S311 of the ball detection process (FIG. 14). If an affirmative determination is made in step S1706, the special electric prize flag is cleared to "0".

When a prize has been generated in the special electric prize winning device 32 (step S1706: YES), the value of the prize counter of the main RAM 65 is decremented by 1 (step S1707). Then, if the value of the winning counter after the subtraction of 1 is "0" (step S1708: YES), if the game result that triggered the opening/closing execution mode this time is any of the jackpot results (step S1708). (S1709: NO), the previously described processing of steps S1702 to S1705 is executed. On the other hand, when the value of the winning counter is "0" (step S1708: YES), if the game result that triggered the opening/closing execution mode this time is any of the small hit results (step S1709). : YES), after clearing the value of the open/close counter of the main RAM 65 to “0” (step S1710), the processes of steps S1704 to S1705 already described are executed.

<Processing during closing of special train>
Next, the special electric power closing control processing (step S<b>1211) of the special electric power control processing (FIG. 38) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 44.

When the game result that triggered the opening/closing execution mode this time is one of the small hit results and a prize has been generated in the special electric prize winning device 32 (step S1801: YES), a prize in the main RAM 65 is won. The counter value is decremented by 1 (step S1802). The case of making an affirmative determination in step S1801 is a case where the game ball that entered the special electric prize winning device 32 is detected by the special electric prize detection sensor 45a immediately before the special electric prize winning device 32 changes from the open state to the closed state. .. When the value of the winning counter after subtracting 1 is "0" (step S1803: YES), the value of the opening/closing number counter of the main RAM 65 is cleared to "0" (step S1804).

When the value of the opening/closing counter of the main RAM 65 is not "0" in the special electric closing process (step S1805: NO), it is determined whether the value of the special figure special electric timer counter is "0". It is determined whether the interval period has elapsed (step S1806). If the interval period has passed (step S1806: YES), the game result that triggered the opening and closing execution mode this time is a jackpot result (step S1807: YES) A setting process is executed (step S1808). In the setting process, "10" is set in the winning counter of the main RAM 65.

If a negative determination is made in step S1807, or if the process of step S1808 is executed, the open duration setting process is executed (step S1809). In the setting process, if the game result that triggered the opening and closing execution mode this time is one of the jackpot results, the information (specifically 29 seconds) of the open duration of the round game is added to the special map special electric timer counter. Set to. Further, in the setting process, when the game result of this time is the second small hit result, the information (specifically, 2 seconds) of the opening continuation period for the second small hit result is set in the special map special electric timer counter. However, when the game result this time is the third small hit result, information (specifically, 1 second) of the opening duration for the third small hit result is set in the special map special electric timer counter.

After that, the special electric open setting process is executed (step S1810). In the opening setting process, data setting is performed so that the special electric prize winning device 32 is in the opened state. As a result, the special power winning device 32 is opened. After that, 1 is subtracted from the value of the special figure special power counter (step S1811). Since the value of the special map special power counter is "5" when the special power closing process is executed, 1 is subtracted from the value of the special power special power counter to "4" corresponding to the special power opening process (step S1210). It will be.

On the other hand, if the value of the opening/closing counter of the main RAM 65 is "0" (step S1805: YES), the ending period setting process is executed (step S1812). In this case, if the game result that triggered the opening/closing execution mode this time is a jackpot result, information (specifically 5 seconds) corresponding to the ending period corresponding to the jackpot result is set in the special map special electric timer counter. However, when the game result that triggered the opening and closing execution mode this time is a small hit result, information (specifically 2 seconds) corresponding to the ending period corresponding to the small hit result is stored in the special map special electric timer counter. set. After that, the ending command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81 (step S1813). Thereby, the effect corresponding to the ending period is performed in the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting unit 53, and the speaker unit 54. Then, the value of the special figure special power counter is incremented by 1 (step S1814). Since the value of the special map special power counter is "5" when the special power closing process is executed, the value of the special power special power counter is "6" corresponding to the special power end processing (step S1212) by adding 1. Becomes

<Tokuden termination processing>
Next, the special electric power ending processing executed in step S1212 of the special electric power control processing (FIG. 38) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

When the value of the special map special electric timer counter is “0”, that is, when the ending period has elapsed (step S1901: YES), the game result that triggered the opening/closing execution mode this time is a highly accurate result. If it is (step S1902 and step S1903: YES), "1" is set to the high-probability flag provided in the main RAM 65 (step S1904). The high-probability flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify which of the high-probability lottery mode and the low-probability mode is the win/loss mode, and is high when the value of the high-probability flag is "1". It is a probability mode, and when the value of the high probability flag is "0", it is a low probability mode. Therefore, by executing the processing of step S1904, the winning/winning lottery mode after the end of the current opening/closing execution mode becomes the high-probability mode. If the game result that triggered the opening/closing execution mode this time is any of the low certainty results (step S1902: YES, step S1903: NO), the high probability flag of the main RAM 65 is cleared to “0”. Yes (step S1905). As a result, the winning/winning lottery mode after the end of the present opening/closing execution mode becomes the low-probability mode.

On the other hand, if the game result that triggered the opening/closing execution mode this time is any of the small hit results (step S1902: NO), neither the process of step S1904 nor the process of step S1905 is executed. As a result, even if the game result becomes one of the small hit results and the opening/closing execution mode occurs, the win/loss lottery mode does not change before and after the opening/closing execution mode.

If a negative determination is made in step S1902, the process of step S1904 is executed, or the process of step S1905 is executed, a clear process is executed (step S1906). In the clear processing, various flags and various counters used in this game time and this opening/closing execution mode are cleared to “0”. However, the high-probability flag of the main RAM 65 is excluded from the target of clearing "0". After that, the value of the special figure special power counter is cleared to "0" (step S1907). As a result, the value of the special figure special power counter becomes "0" corresponding to the special figure variation start process (step S1206).

According to this embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are exhibited.

Since the game ball is paid out when the game ball enters any of the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, and the second operating opening 34, the player can select one of these entering portions. A game will be played while expecting a game ball to enter. In this configuration, the game ball enters the any of the outlet 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, and the second operating opening 34 (hereinafter, also referred to as a history target entering portion). If the occurrence occurs, the history information corresponding to it will be stored in the history memory 117 of the management IC 66. As a result, the pachinko machine 10 can store and hold information for managing the number of game balls or the frequency of entering the game balls into each history target ball entering unit, and use this managed information. As a result, it becomes possible to appropriately manage the entry mode of the game ball into each history target entry part. Further, since the history information is stored and held by the pachinko machine 10 itself, it becomes possible to prevent unauthorized access to the history information and unauthorized modification.

All the ball-in units for ejecting the game balls from the game area PA are targets for executing the history information storage process and are targets for management using the history information. As a result, it becomes possible to manage the ball entry frequency for any history-target ball entry section by using the history information. In addition, it is possible to manage the ratio of the number of game balls entering each history target ball portion to the number of game balls discharged from the game area PA using history information.

The history information includes RTC information, which is information corresponding to the timing at which the game ball enters the history-targeted ball entering section that has triggered the storage of the history information. With this, by using the history information, it is possible to grasp the entry history of the game ball into the history entry ball portion in detail.

In the history memory 117, not only the history information corresponding to the game ball entering the history-targeted ball portion, but also the history information indicating whether the opening/closing execution mode is in, or the high probability mode in History information indicating whether or not and history information indicating whether or not the front door frame 14 is open are stored. As a result, it is possible to manage whether or not the game sphere enters the history target ball-in part by distinguishing whether or not each of these situations is present.

The history information stored in the history memory 117 can be output to a reading device which is a device outside the pachinko machine 10. Thereby, it becomes possible to read the history information with the reading device and to analyze the entering mode of the game ball into the history target entering part using the read history information.

The MPU 62 is provided with a reading terminal 102, and a reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 can read a program from the main ROM 64. This makes it possible to confirm whether or not the program is normal. In this configuration, the history information stored in the history memory 117 is externally output by using the reading terminal 102 for externally outputting the program. This makes it possible to output history information to the outside while preventing the configuration from becoming complicated.

The information to be output from the reading terminal 102 is specified as a program or history information, and the information on the side corresponding to the specified result is externally output through the reading terminal 102. Thus, in the configuration in which the history information is externally output by using the reading terminal 102 for externally outputting the program, it is determined whether the information to be externally output is the program or the history information. It is specified on the side, and the specified information is output to the outside. Therefore, it is possible to read out only necessary information even if the reading terminal 102 is also used.

Based on the information received from the reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102, it is specified whether the information to be output from the reading terminal 102 is the program or the history information. This makes it possible to prevent the configuration related to the selection of information to be output to the outside from becoming complicated.

An MPU 62 having a main ROM 64 that stores a program in advance has a management IC 66 and a reading terminal 102. This allows the signal paths for the reading terminals 102 to be integrated in the MPU 62. Therefore, it is possible to obtain the excellent effect as already described while making it difficult to illegally access the signal path to the reading terminal 102.

The main CPU 63 that executes a process for paying out the game ball based on the entry of the game ball into any of the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, and the second operating opening 34. A management CPU 112 is provided separately from the management CPU 112, and the management CPU 112 executes processing for storing history information in the history memory 117. As a result, it is possible to manage the entry mode of the game ball into each history target entry part while preventing the processing load of the main CPU 63 from increasing excessively.

The main CPU 63 and the management CPU 112 are provided on the same chip as the MPU 62. This makes it possible to prevent unauthorized access to the communication path between the main CPU 63 and the management CPU 112.

The main CPU 63 uses the signal paths corresponding to the detection results of the ball detection sensors 42a to 48a and the signal paths corresponding to the ball detection sensors 42a to 48a, respectively, to buffer the input port 121 of the management IC 66. 122a to 122g. As a result, the type of information transmitted from the main CPU 63 corresponds to each of the buffers 122a to 122g (that is, each signal path), and the configuration for distinguishing each type of information in the management CPU 112 is simplified. It becomes possible to do.

The main CPU 63 provides information corresponding to whether the open/close execution mode is in progress, information corresponding to whether the high probability mode is in progress, and information corresponding to whether the front door frame 14 is open. The signal is transmitted to each of the buffers 122h to 122j of the input port 121 of the management IC 66 by using the signal path corresponding to each of these situations. As a result, the type of information corresponding to each of these situations corresponds to each of the buffers 122h to 122j (that is, each signal path), and the configuration for distinguishing each type of information in the management side CPU 112 is simplified. It becomes possible.

The main CPU 63 transmits to the management CPU 112 correspondence information indicating which type of information each buffer 122a to 122j (that is, each signal path 118a to 118j) corresponds to. As a result, it is not necessary to store the correspondence information in the management IC 66 in advance. Therefore, the versatility of the management IC 66 can be improved.

When the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, the correspondence information is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66. As a result, in a situation in which a game ball may enter the history-target entrance portion, the management IC 66 can identify the correspondence between the information transmitted from the main CPU 63 and the history-target entrance portion. It becomes possible to become.

Correspondence relationship information is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 by using the signal paths 118a to 118g for transmitting information indicating whether or not the game sphere has entered the history target entry portion. This makes it possible to simplify the configuration related to communication as compared with the configuration in which a dedicated signal path for transmitting the correspondence information is provided.

The management IC 66 is provided with a correspondence memory 116, and the correspondence information transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 is stored in the correspondence memory 116. As a result, each time the main CPU 63 transmits the information of the detection result of each of the entrance detection sensors 42a to 48a, the information that enables the management target IC 66 to identify the history target entrance part corresponding to the information of the transmission target. Eliminates the need to provide. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the amount of information of the detection result of each of the ball detection sensors 42a to 48a transmitted from the main CPU 63.

When the output state of the output instruction signal output from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 is switched from LOW level to HI level, information is output from the management IC 66 to the reading terminal 102. In this case, the fact that the signal path corresponding to the 16th buffer 122p corresponds to the output instruction signal can be specified by the management-side CPU 112 without receiving the correspondence information from the main-side CPU 63. .. This makes it possible to prevent the configuration related to the transmission of the correspondence information from becoming extremely complicated.

The management IC 66 is provided with buffers 122a to 122p capable of receiving information from the main CPU 63, the number of which is larger than the number of types of information required to be transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66. Has been. As a result, even when the number of types of the information increases or decreases according to the model of the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to deal with it without changing the configuration related to the buffers 122a to 122p. Therefore, the versatility of the management IC 66 can be improved.

When the history information is transmitted from the management IC 66 to the reading terminal 102, the correspondence information indicating the type of the history-target entrance portion corresponding to the history information is included in each history information. As a result, it is possible to specify the entry mode of the game ball into each history target entry part by using the read history information.

By using the history information stored in the history memory 117 in the management IC 66, various parameters (first to eighth, 11 to 18, 21-26 parameters) are calculated. As a result, it becomes possible to externally output various parameters that are the result of calculation using the history information.

Various parameters are calculated in a state where history information corresponding to the situation where the front door frame 14 is open is excluded. This makes it possible to derive various parameters in a normal situation where the front door frame 14 is in the closed state. Further, various parameters corresponding to the open/close execution mode and the high probability mode are calculated. As a result, it becomes possible for the manager of the game hall or the like to grasp the entering mode of the game ball according to each situation.

When various parameters are calculated, the history memory 117 is initialized by executing the clear processing of the history memory 117. As a result, the history information that exceeds the storage capacity of the history memory 117 becomes a storage target in the history memory 117, and the history information that should normally be stored and retained is erased by overwriting. It becomes possible to make it difficult to generate.

When various parameters are output to the reading terminal 102, the history information stored in the history memory 117 is also output to the reading terminal 102. This makes it possible to refer not only to the various parameters but also to the history information that is the basis for the calculation of the various parameters when reading the various parameters and analyzing the entry mode of the game ball in the game area PA.

The management-side CPU 112 calculates various parameters when the reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102. This makes it possible to reduce the frequency of calculating various parameters.

The main CPU 63 specifies that the reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102, and when the information of the output instruction is transmitted from the main CPU 63, various parameters are calculated by the management IC 66. , Various parameters of the calculation result are output to the reading terminal 102. As a result, various parameters can be output to the reading device outside the pachinko machine 10 based on the instruction from the main CPU 63.

Whether or not the reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 is specified by a process executed by the main CPU 63 at the time of starting the supply of operating power, and the reading device is electrically connected. When is specified, the output instruction information is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66. As a result, in the situation where the processing at the start of supply of operating power is being executed by the main CPU 63 or the like, that is, before the normal processing for advancing the game in the main CPU 63 is started, various The parameter calculation and the external output of various parameters as the calculation result are completed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the calculation of various parameters and the external output of the calculation results from being performed in a situation in which the game ball may enter the history target entrance portion, and the processing load of the management IC 66 is reduced. It is possible to reduce.

When the game ball enters the first operation port 33 or the second operation port 34, an external output corresponding to the game ball is output through the external terminal board 97, and the history information is stored in the history memory 117. .. With this, by using the information output to the outside through the external terminal board 97, the history while easily grasping the number and the frequency of entering the game balls into the first operating opening 33 and the second operating opening 34. By using the history information stored in the memory 117 for use, it is possible to accurately grasp the number of game balls and the frequency of entering the game balls into the history target ball-in portion.

The through gate 35 is provided at a position where the entry of the game ball is restricted in the game state which is not the open/close execution mode and the game ball can be entered in the open/close execution mode. As a result, by shifting to the opening/closing execution mode, it is possible not only to enter the game ball into the fourth discharge passage portion 45 of the special electric winning device 32, but also to enter the game ball into the through gate 35. Become. Therefore, it is possible to increase the profit of shifting to the opening/closing execution mode, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

When the game ball enters the through gate 35, the general-purpose side holding information is acquired, and when the general-purpose side holding information is acquired, the second operating port 34 is open with a high probability. Becomes When a game ball enters the second operating port 34, either the big hit result or the small hit result occurs, and the open/close execution mode occurs. That is, the opening and closing execution mode can be generated so that the game ball can enter the through gate 35, and the opening and closing execution mode can be generated again when the game ball enters the through gate 35. As a result, it is possible to create a situation in which the open/close execution modes continuously occur, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The opening/closing execution mode may occur based on the game ball entering the first operation port 33 in which the game ball may enter regardless of the game ball entering the through gate 35. Then, as described above, the opening/closing execution mode is generated, so that the game ball can enter the through gate 35, and the opening/closing execution mode can be generated again by the game ball entering the through gate 35. In this case, the player expects that the opening/closing execution mode will be started based on the entry of the game ball into the first operation opening 33 in the situation where the opening/closing execution mode is not set, and the through gate 35 in the opening/closing execution mode. It is expected that the open/close execution mode is continuously generated based on the entry of the game ball into the.

The probability that the opening/closing execution mode will occur when the game ball enters the through gate 35 is higher than the probability that the opening/closing execution mode will occur when the game ball enters the first operating port 33. This makes it possible to increase the player's expectation that the game ball will enter the through gate 35 in the opening/closing execution mode.

The expected value that the opening/closing execution mode occurs after the game ball enters the through gate 35 and the holding information on the universal figure side is acquired does not change according to the game state. As a result, the processing configuration can be simplified as compared with the configuration in which the expected value is changed according to the gaming state, and the expected value can be easily managed. However, in such a configuration in which the expected value does not change according to the game state, it becomes difficult to give a tonation to the game. On the other hand, as described above, since the game ball can enter the through gate 35 in the opening/closing execution mode, it is possible to give an intonation to the opportunity to obtain the hold information on the universal figure side. As a result, it becomes possible to add intonation to the game.

By entering the game ball into the through gate 35, it becomes possible to enter the game ball into the second operating port 34, and by entering the game ball into the second operating port 34, there is an opportunity to shift to the open/close execution mode. appear. As a result, in order to continuously generate the open/close execution mode, it is necessary to insert the game ball into the through gate 35 in the open/close execution mode and further insert the game ball into the second operation port 34. Become. Therefore, the uncertainty of continuous occurrence of the opening/closing execution mode is increased, and as a result, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

The special electricity winning device 32, the second operating port 34, and the through gate 35 are provided at positions where the game balls flowing down or flowing down the right side area PA3 can enter. Accordingly, by rotating the firing operation device 28 with the maximum operation amount so that the game ball flows down the right side area PA3, the special electric prize winning device 32 is won, the second working port 34 is won, and the through is performed. It is possible to collectively aim for the winnings to the gate 35.

When the special electric prize winning device 32 is switched from one of the open state and the closed state to the other, the game ball can enter the through gate 35. As a result, it becomes possible to increase the player's attention to the switching timing of this state. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the target of interest to the player in the opening/closing execution mode, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the opening/closing execution mode. Further, the through gate 35 is provided at a position where the game ball can flow in at a timing when the special electric winning device 32 switches from one of the open state and the closed state to the other. As a result, it is possible to achieve the above-mentioned excellent effects only by setting the positional relationship of the through gate 35 to the special electric winning device 32 to the above relationship.

When the opening/closing member 202 of the special electric prize winning device 32 moves from one of the open position and the closed position to the other, the game ball placed on the guide plate portion 214 of the opening/closing member 202 can enter the through gate 35. As a result, in the opening/closing execution mode, the player does not only determine whether or not the game ball enters the fourth discharge passage portion 45 of the special electric winning device 32, but the game ball is placed on the guide plate portion 214. In this state, attention is paid to whether or not the guide plate portion 214 moves from one of the open position and the closed position to the other, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the open/close execution mode.

At the timing when the special electric winning device 32 switches from the open state to the closed state, an opportunity to enter the game ball into the through gate 35 will occur. As a result, it is possible to increase the player's attention not only when the special electric winning device 32 is in the open state but also at the timing when it is switched to the closed state.

The guide plate portion 214 of the opening/closing member 202 is formed so that the game balls placed on the guide plate portion 214 flow down to the left along the guide plate portion 214. When the opening/closing member 202 moves from the open position to the closed position in a state where the game ball is mounted on the predetermined range X which is a part of the guide plate portion 214, the through gate 35 is mounted on the game ball. Is provided at a position where a ball can enter by dropping downward. In this case, in order for the game ball to enter the through gate 35, not only the game ball is placed on the guide plate portion 214 in the situation where the opening/closing member 202 is arranged in the open position, but also the game ball on which it is placed. It is necessary to move the opening/closing member 202 from the open position to the closed position at an exquisite timing when is in the predetermined range X. As a result, the player pays attention to the relationship between the position of the game ball on the guide plate portion 214 and the switching timing of the state of the opening/closing member 202, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the opening/closing execution mode. Becomes

A guide nail group 241 that guides the game ball that has flowed into the right side area PA3 to the right end side of the opening/closing member 202 is provided on the upstream side of the special electric winning device 32. The predetermined range X, which is a range in which the game balls can enter the through gate 35 in the guide plate portion 214, is set to be biased to the left end side of the opening/closing member 202. Thereby, in order for the game ball to enter the through gate 35, the opening/closing member 202 needs to move from the open position to the closed position at an exquisite timing during the flow of the game ball on the guide plate 214. is there. Therefore, the player pays attention to the movement of the game ball on the guide plate portion 214, and the interest of the game in the opening/closing execution mode can be improved.

In addition, the entrance portion 45b of the fourth discharge passage portion 45 in the special prize winning device 32 exists on the left side of the predetermined range X, which is the range in which the game ball can enter the through gate 35 in the guide plate portion 214. doing. As a result, the game ball, which is mounted on the guide plate portion 214 but has not reached the entrance portion 45b, enters the through gate 35. Therefore, the player's uncomfortable feeling that the game ball placed on the guide plate portion 214 does not win the special electric prize winning device 32 is changed to a profit feeling for the winning of the through gate 35. It becomes possible.

The jackpot result includes, for example, a 2R high-accuracy result and a 16R high-accuracy result, and an opening/closing execution mode triggered by the 2R high-accuracy result and an opening/closing execution triggered by the 16R high-accuracy result The ease with which a game ball enters the through gate 35 differs depending on the mode. As a result, a player who expects a game ball to enter the through gate 35 expects an opening/closing execution mode in which the game ball enters the through gate 35 is likely to occur, thereby improving the interest of the game. It becomes possible.

In the configuration that allows the game ball to enter the through gate 35 when the special electric winning device 32 is opened and closed, for example, the opening and closing execution mode and the 16R high accuracy result are triggered by the 2R high accuracy result. The number of times of opening and closing of the special electric prize winning device 32 is different between the opening and closing execution mode triggered by the fact. As a result, the expected value of entering the game ball into the through gate 35 becomes higher in the opening/closing execution mode in which the expected value of entering the game ball into the special electric winning device 32 becomes higher. Therefore, it is possible to further increase the player's expectation that an opening/closing execution mode in which the number of times of opening/closing the special electric winning device 32 is large occurs.

When a game ball enters the second operating port 34, not only a jackpot result but also a jackpot result can be obtained, and the probability of a jackpot result is higher than the probability of a jackpot result. As a result, the opening/closing execution mode is easily generated by causing the game ball to enter the second operation port 34. In this case, the ball can enter the through gate 35, which causes the second operating port 34 to open, in a predetermined situation. As a result, a player who expects a game ball to enter the second operation port 34 expects a predetermined situation to occur, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The predetermined situation is a situation in which the open/close execution mode is being executed. As a result, as described above, when the opening/closing execution mode occurs once, it is possible to cause a situation in which the opening/closing execution mode continuously occurs, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the low probability mode, the average period of the fluctuation display period of the game times executed based on the entry of the game ball into the second operation port 34 and which does not result in a jackpot is the first operation port 33 in the low probability mode. It is the same as, approximately the same as, or less than the average period of the variation display period of the game times that are executed based on the entry of the game balls into the game times and do not result in the jackpot. This makes it possible to prevent the digestibility of the former game times from becoming extremely worse than the digestibility of the latter game times. However, in the case where the configuration is provided and the frequency that the second operating port 34 is opened to the entry of the game ball into the through gate 35 is constant regardless of the game state, the low probability mode It is assumed that a game is played aiming at the entry of the game ball into the second operating port 34. On the other hand, in a situation where the opening/closing execution mode is not set, the game ball cannot enter the through gate 35. Therefore, in the low-probability mode, it is possible to aim the game ball into the first actuation opening 33 so that the game is played.

<Second Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, among the first to sixteenth buffers 122a to 122p of the input port 121 in the management-side I/F 111, the type of the signal whose input signal is determined in the design stage of the management IC 66 is the above-mentioned. This is different from the first embodiment. Further, the processing configuration executed by the main CPU 63 in order to specify the type of the input signal to the management CPU 112 is different from that of the first embodiment. The configuration different from that of the first embodiment will be described below. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 46 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the input port 121 of the management-side I/F 111 in this embodiment.

The same kind of signal as that of the first embodiment is input to the first to seventh buffers 122a to 122g and the 16th buffer 122p. Specifically, the first signal corresponding to the detection result of the first winning opening detection sensor 42a is input to the first buffer 122a, and the first signal corresponding to the detection result of the second winning opening detection sensor 43a is input to the second buffer 122b. Two signals are input, a third signal corresponding to the detection result of the third winning a prize mouth detection sensor 44a is input to the third buffer 122c, and a fourth signal corresponding to the detection result of the special electric power detection sensor 45a is input to the fourth buffer 122d. A signal is input, a fifth signal corresponding to the detection result of the first working port detection sensor 46a is input to the fifth buffer 122e, and a sixth signal corresponding to the detection result of the second working port detection sensor 47a is input to the sixth buffer 122f. The sixth signal is input, the seventh signal corresponding to the detection result of the outlet detection sensor 48a is input to the seventh buffer 122g, and the output instruction signal is input to the sixteenth buffer 122p.

On the other hand, in the first embodiment, the signal corresponding to the open/close execution mode is input to the eighth buffer 122h as the eighth signal, and the signal corresponding to the high probability mode is input to the ninth buffer 122i as the ninth signal. Although the signal corresponding to the door frame 14 is input to the tenth buffer 122j as the tenth signal, the buffers to which these signals are input are different in the present embodiment. Specifically, the signal corresponding to the open/close execution mode is input to the thirteenth buffer 122m as the open/close execution mode signal, and the signal corresponding to the high probability mode is input to the fourteenth buffer 122n as the high probability mode internal signal. The signal corresponding to the door frame 14 is input to the fifteenth buffer 122o as a door opening signal.

The opening/closing execution mode signal is input to the thirteenth buffer 122m, the high probability mode signal is input to the fourteenth buffer 122n, the door opening signal is input to the fifteenth buffer 122o, and the sixteenth buffer It is determined in the design stage of the management IC 66 that the output instruction signal is input to the buffer 122p, and the management-side CPU 112 receives the instructions from the main-side CPU 63 and allows the 13th-16th buffers 122m-122p to receive the instructions. It is possible to specify that each of the signals corresponding to each is input. On the other hand, what kind of signal is input to the first to twelfth buffers 122a to 122l has not been determined at the design stage of the management IC 66, and these kinds of signals are instructed by the main CPU 63. As a result, the CPU 112 on the management side specifies. The process for identifying the type of the signal is executed when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 and the management CPU 112 is started, as in the first embodiment.

FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing the recognition processing of this embodiment executed by the main CPU 63. The recognition process is executed in step S110 in the main process (FIG. 11) as in the first embodiment.

First, "12", which is the number of the first to twelfth buffers 122a to 122l to be the target of signal type recognition, is set in the recognition output counter of the main RAM 65 (step S2001). After that, the output process of the identification start signal is executed (step S2002). In the output process, the output states of the first signal input to the first buffer 122a, the open/close execution mode signal input to the thirteenth buffer 122m, and the high probability mode input signal input to the fourteenth buffer 122n are determined. Setting the HI level starts the output of the identification start signal. The period in which these signals are maintained at the HI level is set to a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to recognize the output state of these signals.

After that, the information on the output count corresponding to the current value of the recognition output counter of the main RAM 65 is read from the main ROM 64, and the read output count information is set in the output counter provided in the main RAM 65 ( Step S2003). The output number counter is a counter for the main CPU 63 to specify the output number of the type identification signal.

In the present embodiment, when making the management-side CPU 112 recognize the types of signals input to the first buffer 122a to the twelfth buffer 122l, the number of prize balls set for the incoming ball portion corresponding to the signal type. And the type identification signal is output the same number of times as. The management-side CPU 112 stores information corresponding to the number of times the type identification signal is received for each of the first buffer 122a to the twelfth buffer 122l in the first to twelfth correspondence areas 123a to 123l of the correspondence memory 116. .. That is, the type of the signal input to the first buffer 122a to the twelfth buffer 122l is grasped as the number of prize balls set for the ball entering portion corresponding to the type of the signal.

In step S2003, if the value of the recognition output counter is any of "12", "11" and "10", "10" corresponding to the number of prize balls of the general winning opening 31 is set in the output number counter. .. When the value of the recognition output counter is "9", "15" corresponding to the number of prize balls of the special electric winning device 32 is set in the output number counter. Further, when the value of the recognition output counter is “8”, “1” corresponding to the number of prize balls of the first operating port 33 is set in the output number counter. When the value of the recognition output counter is "7", "1" corresponding to the number of prize balls of the second operating port 34 is set in the output number counter. Further, when the value of the recognition output counter is "6", the payout of the game ball is not executed even though the game ball enters the out port 24a although it corresponds to the out port 24a. Set "0" to. Further, when the value of the recognition output counter is any one of "5" to "1", since the corresponding ball entry portion does not exist and is blank, "0" is set in the output number counter.

After that, the output process of the start trigger signal is executed (step S2004). In the output process, the output of the start trigger signal is started by setting the output state of the first signal input to the first buffer 122a to the HI level. The period during which the first signal is maintained at the HI level is set to a period sufficient for the management-side CPU 112 to recognize the output state of the first signal.

Then, on the condition that the value of the output counter of the main RAM 65 is not "0" (step S2005: YES), that is, on the condition that a value of 1 or more is set on the output counter in step S2003. It proceeds to step S2006. In step S2006, output processing of the type identification signal is executed. In the output process, the output state of the type identification signal is started by setting the output state of the second signal input to the second buffer 122b to the HI level. The period in which the second signal is maintained at the HI level is set to a period sufficient for the management-side CPU 112 to recognize the output state of the second signal.

Thereafter, the value of the output counter of the main RAM 65 is decremented by 1 (step S2007), and it is determined whether the value of the output counter after the decrement by 1 is "0" (step S2008). When the value of the output counter is 1 or more (step S2008: NO), the process returns to step S2006.

If an affirmative decision is made in step S2005, or if an affirmative decision is made in step S2008, output processing of the termination trigger signal is executed (step S2009). In the output process, the output of the termination trigger signal is started by setting the output state of the third signal input to the third buffer 122c to the HI level. The period in which the third signal is maintained at the HI level is set to a period sufficient for the management-side CPU 112 to recognize the output state of the third signal.

After that, the value of the recognition output counter of the main RAM 65 is decremented by 1 (step S2010), and it is determined whether the value of the recognition output counter after the decrement is 1 is "0" (step S2011). If the value of the recognition output counter is 1 or more (step S2011: NO), the process returns to step S2003 to execute processing for recognizing the type of signal corresponding to the value of the recognition output counter after subtraction by one. To do.

On the other hand, when the value of the recognition output counter is “0” (step S2011: YES), the output process of the identification end signal is executed (step S2012). In the output processing, the output states of the third signal input to the third buffer 122c, the open/close execution mode signal input to the 13th buffer 122m, and the high probability mode input signal input to the 14th buffer 122n are respectively determined. Setting the HI level starts the output of the identification end signal. The period in which these signals are maintained at the HI level is set to a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to recognize the output state of these signals.

Next, the management processing executed in the management CPU 112 in this embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The management process is started when the supply of the operating power to the management-side CPU 112 is started as in the first embodiment.

When the reception of the identification start signal from the main CPU 63 is completed (step S2101: YES), the value of the setting target counter of the management RAM 114 is cleared to “0” (step S2102). After that, on condition that the start trigger signal is received from the main CPU 63 (step S2103: YES), the process proceeds to step S2104. In step S2104, it is determined whether the type identification signal is received from the main CPU 63. When the type identification signal is received (step S2104: YES), the value of the reception number counter provided in the management side RAM 114 is incremented by 1 (step S2105). The reception counter is a counter for the management CPU 112 to specify the number of times the type identification signal has been received from the main CPU 63. The value of the reception number counter is cleared to "0" when a positive determination is made in step S2103.

If a negative determination is made in step S2104, or if the processing of step S2105 is executed, it is determined whether or not an end trigger signal has been received from the main CPU 63 (step S2106). When the termination trigger signal has not been received (step S2106: NO), the process returns to step S2104, and when the termination trigger signal has been received (step S2106: YES), the correspondence relationship setting process is executed (step S2107). In the correspondence relation setting process, among the first to twelfth correspondence relation areas 123a to 123l of the correspondence relation memory 116, the correspondence relation area corresponding to the current value in the setting target counter of the management RAM 114 is set in the reception number counter. Stores the value that is set. In this case, “10” corresponding to the number of prize balls of the general winning opening 31 is set in the first correspondence area 123a, the second correspondence area 123b, and the third correspondence area 123c, and the fourth correspondence area 123d is set. Is set to "15" corresponding to the number of prize balls of the special electric prize winning device 32, "1" corresponding to the number of prize balls of the first working port 33 is set to the fifth correspondence area 123e, and the sixth correspondence relationship In the area 123f, "1" corresponding to the number of prize balls of the second working port 34 is set. Also, "0" is set in the seventh to twelfth correspondence areas 123g to 123l. After that, the value of the setting target counter of the management side RAM 114 is incremented by 1 (step S2108).

When a negative determination is made in step S2103, or when the processing of step S2108 is executed, it is determined whether or not the reception of the identification end signal from the main CPU 63 is completed (step S2109). When the reception of the identification end signal is not completed (step S2109: NO), the process returns to step S2103, and on condition that the start trigger signal is received from the main CPU 63 (step S2103: YES), the processes after step S2104 are performed. Execute. When the reception of the identification end signal from the main CPU 63 is finished (step S2109: YES), the history setting process of step S2110 and the external output process of step S2111 are repeatedly executed.

FIG. 49 is a time chart showing a state in which information on the correspondence between the first to twelfth buffers 122a to 122l and the types of signals input to these buffers 122a to 122l is stored in the correspondence memory 116. 49A shows a period in which the output state of the first signal is at the HI level, FIG. 49B shows a period in which the output state of the second signal is at the HI level, and FIG. ) Indicates the period during which the output state of the third signal is at the HI level, FIG. 49(d) indicates the period during which the output state of the signal in the open/close execution mode is at the HI level, and FIG. FIG. 49(f) shows the correspondence between the first to twelfth buffers 122a to 122l and the types of signals input to these buffers 122a to 122l during the high probability mode during which the output state of the signal is at the HI level. 49(g) shows the timing at which the value of the reception counter of the management RAM 114 is incremented by 1, and FIG. 49(h) shows the management. The timing at which the correspondence setting process (step S2107) is executed by the side CPU 112 is shown.

As the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 and the management CPU 112 is started, at the timing of t1, as shown in FIGS. 49(a), 49(d) and 49(e), the first signal The output states of the open/close execution mode signal and the high probability mode signal are changed from the LOW level to the HI level. As a result, the output of the identification start signal from the main CPU 63 to the management CPU 112 is started. Then, at the timing of t2, the output states of the first signal, the open/close execution mode signal, and the high probability mode signal are changed from the HI level to the LOW bell. As a result, the output of the identification start signal from the main CPU 63 to the management CPU 112 is stopped. At the timing of t2, the management-side CPU 112 makes an affirmative decision in step S2101 of the management process (FIG. 48), and the identification state is entered as shown in FIG. 49(f).

After that, from the timing of t3 to the timing of t4, the output state of the first signal is maintained at the HI level as shown in FIG. 49(a). As a result, the start trigger signal is output to the management-side CPU 112. Then, from the timing of t5 to the timing of t7, the output state of the second signal is maintained at the HI level as shown in FIG. 49(b). As a result, the type identification signal is output to the management-side CPU 112 once. In this case, the value of the reception number counter of the management RAM 114 is incremented by 1 at the timing of t6 as shown in FIG.

After that, from the timing of t8 to the timing of t10, the output state of the third signal is maintained at the HI level as shown in FIG. 49(c). As a result, the termination trigger signal is output to the management-side CPU 112. In this case, at the timing of t9, as shown in FIG. 49(h), the management CPU 112 executes the correspondence setting process. Since the value of the reception counter is "1" at the timing when the correspondence setting process is executed, the correspondence information "1" is stored in the correspondence areas 123a to 123l in the correspondence memory 116, which are the setting objects of this time. Information is stored.

After that, from the timing t11 to the timing t12, the output state of the first signal is maintained at the HI level as shown in FIG. 49(a). As a result, the start trigger signal is output to the management-side CPU 112. Then, as shown in FIG. 49( b ), the timings of t13 to t15, t16 to t18, t19 to t21, and t22 to t24 are changed as shown in FIG. The output state of the signal is maintained at the HI level. As a result, the type identification signal is output to the management-side CPU 112 once. In this case, the value of the reception number counter of the management side RAM 114 is incremented by 1 as shown in FIG. 49(g) at each of the timing t14, the timing t17, the timing t20, and the timing t23.

After that, from the timing of t25 to the timing of t27, the output state of the third signal is maintained at the HI level as shown in FIG. 49(c). As a result, the termination trigger signal is output to the management-side CPU 112. In this case, at the timing of t26, the correspondence setting process is executed by the management-side CPU 112 as shown in FIG. 49(h). Since the value of the reception number counter is “10” at the timing when the correspondence setting process is executed, “10” is set as the correspondence information in the correspondence areas 123 a to 123 l of the current setting target in the correspondence memory 116. Information is stored.

After that, at the timing of t28, as shown in FIGS. 49(c), 49(d) and 49(e), the output states of the third signal, the open/close execution mode signal and the high probability mode signal are LOW level. To HI level. As a result, the main CPU 63 starts outputting the identification end signal to the management CPU 112. Then, at the timing of t29, the output states of the third signal, the open/close execution mode signal, and the high probability mode signal are changed from the HI level to the LOW bell. As a result, the output of the identification end signal from the main CPU 63 to the management CPU 112 is stopped. At the timing of t29, the management-side CPU 112 makes an affirmative decision in step S2109 of the management processing (FIG. 48), so that the identification state is canceled as shown in FIG. 49(f).

Note that, in the present embodiment, since information on the number of prize balls is stored as the correspondence information, the history information stored in the history memory 117 is stored in the history information, and the prize balls corresponding to the ball-entering portion that triggered the storage of the history information. Information on the number of pieces is included as correspondence information. In this configuration, when there are a plurality of types of ball entrances having the same number of prize balls, the ball entrances cannot be distinguished in the history information. Specifically, since the number of prize balls for each of the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 is one, it is possible to distinguish the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 in the history information. Can not. In such a situation, the number of prize balls of the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 may be different. Accordingly, even in the configuration in which the history information is stored as in the second embodiment, it is possible to distinguish the first operation port 33 and the second operation port 34 in the history information.

Further, in the present embodiment, “15” is set in the confirmation target counter of the management-side RAM 114 in step S801 of the history setting process. As a result, all the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o are to be confirmed.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, not only the output instruction signal, but also information corresponding to whether the open/close execution mode is in effect, information corresponding to whether the high probability mode is in effect, and the front door frame Regarding the information corresponding to whether 14 is open or not, it becomes possible for the management CPU 112 to identify the signal path corresponding to these information without receiving the correspondence information from the main CPU 63. ing. In this case, only the information corresponding to the detection result of each of the ball entrance detection sensors 42a to 48a is the information required to cause the management CPU 112 to recognize the correspondence between each information and each signal path 118a to 118g. Become. When causing the management-side CPU 112 to recognize the correspondence information, the same number of pulse signals as the number of prize balls corresponding to each of the ball detection sensors 42a to 48a are transmitted from the main-side CPU 63 to the management-side CPU 112 using the second signal. Is output to. This makes it possible to simplify the configuration related to the transmission of the correspondence information.

<Third Embodiment>
The present embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that the calculation of various parameters using history information is executed. The configuration different from that of the first embodiment will be described below. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 50 is a block diagram for explaining the electrical configuration of the management IC 66 in this embodiment. Similar to the first embodiment, the management IC 66 is provided with a management I/F 111, a management CPU 112, a management ROM 113, a management RAM 114, an RTC 115, a correspondence memory 116, and a history memory 117. These functions are the same as those in the first embodiment.

In addition to the above, the management IC 66 is provided with a calculation result memory 131. In the present embodiment, as will be described later in detail, when a calculation trigger occurs, various parameters are calculated by the management CPU 112 using the history information stored in the history memory 117 at that time. Then, the calculated various parameters are sequentially stored in the calculation result memory 131. The various parameters stored in the calculation result memory 131 are output to the reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102.

The timing for calculating various parameters occurs before the timing at which the reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102. As a result, it is possible to make the timing of calculating various parameters different from the timing of external output to the reading device, and it is possible to disperse the processing load.

Further, since the calculation result memory 131 for storing the calculation results of various parameters is provided, not only various parameters for one calculation occasion but also various parameters for multiple calculation occasions are collected. It becomes possible to remember. As a result, it is possible to shorten the time required to calculate various parameters at each calculation trigger.

FIG. 51 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the input port 121 of the management-side I/F 111 in this embodiment.

The same type of signal as that of the first embodiment is input to the first to tenth buffers 122a to 122j and the sixteenth buffer 122p. Specifically, the first signal corresponding to the detection result of the first winning opening detection sensor 42a is input to the first buffer 122a, and the first signal corresponding to the detection result of the second winning opening detection sensor 43a is input to the second buffer 122b. Two signals are input, a third signal corresponding to the detection result of the third winning a prize mouth detection sensor 44a is input to the third buffer 122c, and a fourth signal corresponding to the detection result of the special electric power detection sensor 45a is input to the fourth buffer 122d. A signal is input, a fifth signal corresponding to the detection result of the first working port detection sensor 46a is input to the fifth buffer 122e, and a sixth signal corresponding to the detection result of the second working port detection sensor 47a is input to the sixth buffer 122f. A sixth signal is input, a seventh signal corresponding to the detection result of the outlet detection sensor 48a is input to the seventh buffer 122g, a signal corresponding to the open/close execution mode is input to the eighth buffer 122h, and a ninth signal is input. A signal corresponding to the high probability mode is input to the buffer 122i, a signal corresponding to the front door frame 14 is input to the tenth buffer 122j, and an output instruction signal is input to the sixteenth buffer 122p.

In the present embodiment, in addition to the various signals described above, a calculation instruction signal is input to the fifteenth buffer 122o. The calculation instruction signal is a signal output from the main CPU 63 in order to provide the management CPU 112 with a calculation trigger for various parameters. The input of the operation instruction signal to the fifteenth buffer 122o is determined in the design stage of the management IC 66 similarly to the input of the output instruction signal to the sixteenth buffer 122p, and the instruction from the main CPU 63 is given. Without receiving this, the management-side CPU 112 can specify that the respective signals corresponding to the 15th to 16th buffers 122o to 122p are input. On the other hand, what kind of signal is input to the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n has not been determined at the design stage of the management IC 66, and these kinds of signals are instructed by the main CPU 63. As a result, the CPU 112 on the management side specifies. The process for identifying the type of the signal is executed when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 and the management CPU 112 is started, as in the first embodiment.

Next, a processing configuration for causing the management-side CPU 112 to execute the calculation of various parameters in response to the occurrence of a calculation trigger will be described. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing a power failure information storage process executed by the main CPU 63. The power failure information storage process is executed in step S201 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 12).

In the power failure information storage processing, when the power failure signal corresponding to the occurrence of the power shutdown is received from the power failure monitoring board 67 (step S2201: YES), the calculation instruction signal output processing is executed (step S2202). In the output process, the output state of the operation instruction signal input to the fifteenth buffer 122o in the input port 121 of the management-side I/F 111 is maintained at the HI level for a specific period. This specific period is a period sufficient for the management CPU 112 to recognize that the output state of the calculation instruction signal is at the HI level. After that, after the power failure process is executed in step S2203, an infinite loop is formed, and the operation waits until the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is completely stopped. In the power failure process, the power failure flag of the main RAM 65 is set to "1", the checksum is calculated, and the calculated checksum is saved.

FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing a power failure handling process executed by the management side CPU 112. Note that the power outage handling process is configured to be executed after the external output process in the management process (FIG. 22), and in the management process, after the identification end command is received from the main CPU 63 (step S606: YES), step S607. The history setting process, the external output process in step S608, and the power failure handling process are repeatedly executed in this order.

In the power failure handling process, when the output state of the calculation instruction signal received from the main CPU 63 becomes the HI level (step S2301: YES), the external output in the first embodiment is performed in steps S2302 to S2306. Similar to steps S1002 to S1006 of the processing (FIG. 28), the number of balls entered for each of the outlet 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special electricity winning device 32, the first working opening 33, and the second working opening 34 is calculated. .. Further, in step S2307, similarly to step S1007 of the external output process (FIG. 28) in the first embodiment, the number of various balls entered in the situation where the front door frame 14 is open is calculated. Further, in step S2308, as in step S1008 of the external output processing (FIG. 28) in the first embodiment, various parameters are calculated, and in step S2309, external output for the first embodiment is performed. Similar to step S1009 of the process (FIG. 28), the total time is calculated. Then, the information of the calculation result of step S2308 and the information of the calculation result of step S2309 are written to the calculation result memory 131 (step S2310). In this case, when the information of another operation result is already stored in the operation result memory 131, the operation result information should be written so as not to overwrite the already stored operation result information. To do. Further, the current date information and time information are read out from the RTC 115, and the read date information and time information are attached to the information of the calculation result written this time. As a result, it is possible to specify when the information of the calculation result written this time corresponds to the timing.

After that, in step S2311, similar to step S1011 of the external output process (FIG. 28) in the first embodiment, the number of various incoming balls in the open/close execution mode is calculated, and in step S2312, the first Similar to step S1012 of the external output process (FIG. 28) in the embodiment, the number of various balls entered in the open/close execution mode and the front door frame 14 is open is calculated. Further, in step S2313, various parameters are calculated as in step S1013 of the external output process (FIG. 28) in the first embodiment. Then, the information of the calculation result of step S2314 is written in the calculation result memory 131 (step S2314). In this case, the calculation result information is written so as not to overwrite other calculation result information already stored in the calculation result memory 131. Further, the current date information and time information are read out from the RTC 115, and the read date information and time information are attached to the information of the calculation result written this time. As a result, it is possible to specify when the information of the calculation result written this time corresponds to the timing.

After that, in step S2315, as in step S1015 of the external output processing (FIG. 28) in the first embodiment, the number of various incoming balls in the high probability mode is calculated, and in step S2316, the first number is entered. Similar to step S1016 of the external output process (FIG. 28) in the embodiment, the number of various balls entered in the high probability mode and the front door frame 14 is open is calculated. Further, in step S2317, various parameters are calculated as in step S1017 of the external output process (FIG. 28) in the first embodiment. Then, the information on the calculation result of step S2317 is written to the calculation result memory 131 (step S2318). In this case, the calculation result information is written so as not to overwrite other calculation result information already stored in the calculation result memory 131. Further, the current date information and time information are read out from the RTC 115, and the read date information and time information are attached to the information of the calculation result written this time. As a result, it is possible to specify when the information of the calculation result written this time corresponds to the timing. After that, an infinite loop is formed, and the operation waits until the supply of operating power to the management CPU 112 is completely stopped.

FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing an external output process executed by the management CPU 112. The external output process is executed in step S608 of the management process (FIG. 22).

When the output state of the output instruction signal from the main CPU 63 becomes the HI level (step S2401: YES), output processing of the calculation result is executed (step S2402). In the output process, various calculation results stored in the calculation result memory 131 are output to the reading terminal 102. As a result, the reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 can read the various calculation results stored in the calculation result memory 131. In this case, when only the various calculation results corresponding to the occurrence of one calculation trigger are stored in the calculation result memory 131, only the various calculation results corresponding to the occurrence of the one calculation trigger are stored in the reading device. When the operation result memory 131 stores various operation results corresponding to a plurality of occurrences of operation triggers, the reading device reads the various operation results corresponding to a plurality of occurrences of operation triggers. ..

After that, the output process of the history information is executed (step S2403). In the output process, all history information stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117 is sequentially output to the reading terminal 102. As a result, in the reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102, various history information stored in the history area 124 is read. By outputting not only the various calculation results but also the history information in this way, it becomes possible for a worker who uses the reading device to perform a detailed analysis of the various calculation results.

After that, clear processing is executed (step S2404). In the clear processing, all the history information storage area 125 of the history memory 117 is cleared to “0” and the pointer area 126 is cleared to “0”. As a result, the history area 124 is in the initialized state. Further, in the clearing process, all areas of the calculation result memory 131 are cleared to “0”. As a result, the operation result memory 131 is in the initialized state.

According to this embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are exhibited.

When the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped, the management CPU 112 calculates various parameters. This makes it possible to manage various parameters on a business day basis.

When the main CPU 63 specifies that the supply of the operating power is stopped, the output state of the calculation instruction signal is changed to the HI level, so that the management CPU 112 calculates various parameters. As a result, it becomes possible for the management-side CPU 112 to calculate various parameters based on an instruction from the main-side CPU 63.

Various parameters calculated by the management CPU 112 are sequentially written in the calculation result memory 131. As a result, various parameters can be accumulated in the management IC 66, and when various parameters are read by the reading device, various parameters for a plurality of business days can be collectively read.

When various parameters are written in the calculation result memory 131, information that allows specifying the time when the various parameters are calculated is written in the calculation result memory 131 along with the various parameters. This makes it possible to analyze various parameter information while grasping the time when various parameters are calculated.

Note that the history memory 117 may be cleared to “0” when the calculation trigger is generated and the calculation results of various parameters corresponding thereto are written in the calculation result memory 131. As a result, it becomes difficult for new history information to be written to the history memory 117 when the maximum number of history information that can be stored is already stored in the history memory 117.

Further, the target information to be externally output to the reading device is only the information of various parameters stored in the calculation result memory 131, and the history information stored in the history memory 117 may not be externally output. .. As a result, the amount of information output to the outside can be suppressed.

<Fourth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the processing configuration of the power failure handling processing executed by the management-side CPU 112 is different from that of the third embodiment. The configuration different from that of the third embodiment will be described below. The description of the same configuration as that of the third embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing a power failure handling process executed by the management-side CPU 112 in this embodiment.

When the output state of the calculation instruction signal received from the main CPU 63 becomes the HI level (step S2501: YES), various calculation processes are executed (step S2502). In various arithmetic processing, each processing of step S2302 to step S2309, step S2311 to step S2313, and step S2315 to step S2317 of the power failure handling processing (FIG. 53) in the third embodiment is executed.

After that, it is determined whether a predetermined parameter among the various parameters calculated in step S2502 is within the reference range (step S2503). In particular,
-Seventh parameter: (K3 x "number of prize balls for winning in special electric prize winning device 32" + K5 x "number of prize balls for winning in second working port 34")/total payout number of game balls (K2 x "general “Number of prize balls for winning in prize hole 31”+K3דNumber of prize balls for winning in special electric prize winning device 32”+K4דNumber of prize balls for prize in first operating port 33”+K5דSecond operating port 34” 8th parameter: K3 x "number of prize balls for winning in special electric prize winning device 32"/total number of game balls paid out (K2 x "for winning in general winning hole 31") "Number of prize balls" + K3 x "Number of prize balls for winning the special electric prize winning device 32" + K4 x "Number of prize balls for winning the first operating port 33" + K5 x "Number of prize balls for winning the second operating port 34" )) ratio is set as a parameter to be determined whether or not it is within the reference range. Then, when the value of the seventh parameter is 0.7 or less and the value of the eighth parameter is 0.6 or less, it is determined in step S2503 that the predetermined parameter is within the reference range.

The predetermined parameters are not limited to the seventh parameter and the eighth parameter, and instead of or in addition to these, other parameters may be set as the predetermined parameters. For example,
Second parameter: The ratio of the total number of game balls entering the general winning opening 31 K2/the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (K1+K2+K3+K4+K5) may be set as a predetermined parameter. .. In this case, for example, when the value of the second parameter is 0.1 or more and 0.2 or less, the predetermined parameter may be determined to be in the reference range. Further, only the predetermined parameter to be determined in step S2503 may be calculated by the various calculation processes in step S2502.

When the predetermined parameter is not within the reference range (step S2503: NO), the various parameters calculated in step S2502 are written in the calculation result memory 131 (step S2504). In this case, when the information of another operation result is already stored in the operation result memory 131, the operation result information should be written so as not to overwrite the already stored operation result information. To do. Further, the current date information and time information are read out from the RTC 115, and the read date information and time information are attached to the information of the calculation result written this time. As a result, it is possible to specify when the information of the calculation result written this time corresponds to the timing.

On the other hand, if the predetermined parameter is within the reference range (step S2503: YES), the process of step S2504 is not executed. As a result, only the various parameters in the case where the predetermined parameter is not within the reference range are written in the calculation result memory 131. Therefore, when an abnormal situation occurs, it is possible to reduce the storage capacity required for the operation result memory 131 while leaving the history in the operation result memory 131.

If an affirmative decision is made in step S2503, or if the processing of step S2504 has been executed, clear processing of the memory 117 for history is executed (step S2505). In the clearing process, all the history information storage area 125 of the history memory 117 is cleared to “0” and the pointer area 126 is cleared to “0”. As a result, the history area 124 is in the initialized state. After executing the processing of step S2505, an infinite loop is formed, and the operation waits until the supply of operating power to the management CPU 112 is completely stopped.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, it is determined whether or not the contents of various calculated parameters are included in the reference range, and only the various parameters that are determined to be included in the reference range are stored in the calculation result memory 131. Written. As a result, the amount of various parameters to be stored in the calculation result memory 131 can be suppressed, and the storage capacity required in the calculation result memory 131 can be suppressed.

<Fifth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the content of the operation trigger that causes the management-side CPU 112 to execute the operation of various parameters is different from that of the third embodiment. The configuration different from that of the third embodiment will be described below. The description of the same configuration as that of the third embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 56A is a flowchart showing the trigger specifying process executed by the main CPU 63. The trigger specifying process is executed as a process in the case where a positive determination is made in step S712 in the management output process (FIG. 24).

It is determined whether or not a game ball has entered any of the outlet 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, and the second operating opening 34 (step S2601). When an affirmative determination is made in step S2601, addition processing of the entry counter provided in the main RAM 65 is executed (step S2602). In the addition process, the number of game balls in which any one of the outlet 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, and the second operating opening 34 has entered is calculated as the current processing time. It is specified based on the number of times step S705 is executed in the management output process (FIG. 24). Then, the number of the specified game balls is added to the entrance counter.

After that, it is determined whether or not the value of the incoming ball counter is equal to or larger than the trigger reference number "500" (step S2603). If it is equal to or larger than "500" (step S2603: YES), the subtraction process of the entrance counter of the main RAM 65 is executed (step S2604). In the subtraction processing, the value of the entrance counter is subtracted by "500". After that, the output process of the calculation instruction signal is executed (step S2605). In the output process, the output state of the operation instruction signal input to the fifteenth buffer 122o in the input port 121 of the management-side I/F 111 is maintained at the HI level for a specific period. This specific period is a period sufficient for the management CPU 112 to recognize that the output state of the calculation instruction signal is at the HI level.

FIG. 56B is a flowchart showing the arithmetic processing executed by the management CPU 112. The arithmetic processing is processing that is executed instead of the power failure handling processing in the third embodiment. Therefore, the arithmetic processing is configured to be executed after the external output processing in the management processing (FIG. 22). In the management processing, after the identification end command is received from the main CPU 63 (step S606: YES), the processing of step S607 is executed. The history setting process, the external output process of step S608, and the calculation process are repeatedly executed in this order.

When the output state of the calculation instruction signal received from the main CPU 63 becomes the HI level (step S2701: YES), various calculation processes are executed (step S2702). In various arithmetic processing, the same processing as steps S2302 to S2318 of the power failure handling processing (FIG. 53) in the third embodiment is executed.

According to this embodiment described in detail above, every time the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA becomes equal to or larger than the trigger reference number, various parameters are calculated by the management-side CPU 112. In this case, various parameters are calculated each time a calculation trigger repeatedly occurs in a situation where the operating power is supplied to the main CPU 63, so that a game ball enters the game area PA within one business day. It is possible to manage the mode in detail.

In addition, since various parameters are calculated based on whether the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA is equal to or greater than the trigger reference number, various parameters are provided on the condition that the game is being executed. Is calculated. This makes it possible to prevent meaningless calculation of various parameters in a situation where the game is not continuously executed.

<Sixth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the content of the calculation trigger that causes the management-side CPU 112 to execute the calculation of various parameters is different from that of the fifth embodiment. The configuration different from that of the fifth embodiment will be described below. The description of the same configuration as that of the fifth embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing the trigger specifying process executed by the main CPU 63. The trigger specifying process is executed as a process in the case where a positive determination is made in step S712 in the management output process (FIG. 24).

It is determined whether or not a game ball has entered the out port 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, or the second operating opening 34 (step S2801). When a negative determination is made in step S2801, the value of the continuation counter provided in the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S2802). The continuation counter is a CPU 63 on the main side for a period in which the game ball does not enter any of the outlet 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33 and the second operating opening 34. It is a counter for specifying in.

When the value of the continuation counter after adding 1 is greater than or equal to the stop reference value (step S2803: YES), the time measurement flag provided in the main RAM 65 is cleared to "0" (step S2804). When the state in which the game ball does not enter any of the outlet 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special electricity winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, and the second operating opening 34 continues for 5 seconds, a positive determination is made in step S2803. The stop reference value is set so that The time measurement flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify whether or not to measure the time for specifying the timing of switching the output state of the calculation instruction signal to the HI level. When the value of is "0", the time is not measured, and when the value of the time measurement flag is "1", the time is measured. When an affirmative determination is made in step S2801, the time measurement flag is set to "1" (step S2805).

If a negative determination is made in step S2803, the process of step S2804 is executed, or the process of step S2805 is executed, "1" is set to the time measurement flag of the main RAM 65 as a condition ( Step S2806: YES), the value of the measurement counter provided in the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S2807). The measurement counter is a counter used for measuring the time for specifying the timing of switching the output state of the calculation instruction signal to the HI level.

It is determined whether or not the value of the measurement counter after adding 1 is equal to or larger than the instruction reference value (step S2808). The instruction reference value is set so that an affirmative determination is made in step S2808 when the time measured by the measurement counter reaches 10 hours. When an affirmative determination is made in step S2808, the value of the measurement counter is cleared to "0" (step S2809), and the calculation instruction signal output process is executed (step S2810). In the output process, the output state of the operation instruction signal input to the fifteenth buffer 122o in the input port 121 of the management-side I/F 111 is maintained at the HI level for a specific period. This specific period is a period sufficient for the management CPU 112 to recognize that the output state of the calculation instruction signal is at the HI level.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, since various parameters are calculated every time a predetermined period elapses, it is possible to easily adjust the calculation frequency of the various parameters only by adjusting the predetermined period. Become. In this case, the measurement for a predetermined period is stopped in the situation where the game is not executed, and when the game time is started, the measurement for the predetermined period is restarted from the state before the stop. As a result, it is possible to exclude the situation where the game is not executed from the calculation target of various parameters, and it is possible to appropriately derive the various parameters in the situation where the game is executed.

It should be noted that instead of the configuration in which the measurement counter is used to measure whether or not the predetermined period has elapsed, the RTC 115 may be used in the configuration to be measured.

<Seventh Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the content of the calculation trigger that causes the management-side CPU 112 to execute the calculation of various parameters is different from that of the first embodiment, and whether or not the calculation trigger has occurred is specified by the main-side CPU 63. Instead of the above, it is independently performed by the management side CPU 112. The configuration different from that of the first embodiment will be described below. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing the arithmetic processing executed by the management CPU 112. The calculation process is executed when an affirmative determination is made in step S812 in the history setting process (FIG. 25).

Corresponding to the occurrence of a game ball entering any of the outlet 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special electricity winning device 32, the first operating opening 33 and the second operating opening 34 in the history setting processing of the current processing time It is determined whether or not the history information to be stored is stored in the history memory 117 (step S2901). When an affirmative determination is made in step S2901, the addition processing of the entrance counter provided in the management side RAM 114 is executed (step S2902). In the addition process, the number of game balls in which any one of the outlet 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, and the second operating opening 34 has entered is calculated as the current processing time. In the history setting process, the history information corresponding to the occurrence of a game ball is identified based on the number of times stored. Then, the number of the specified game balls is added to the entrance counter.

After that, it is determined whether or not the value of the incoming ball counter is equal to or greater than the trigger reference number "500" (step S2903). When it is equal to or more than "500" (step S2903: YES), the subtraction process of the entry counter of the main RAM 65 is executed (step S2904). In the subtraction processing, the value of the entrance counter is subtracted by "500". After that, various arithmetic processes are executed (step S2905). In various arithmetic processing, the same processing as steps S2302 to S2318 of the power failure handling processing (FIG. 53) in the third embodiment is executed.

According to this embodiment described in detail above, every time the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA becomes equal to or larger than the trigger reference number, various parameters are calculated by the management-side CPU 112. In this case, various parameters are calculated each time a calculation trigger repeatedly occurs in a situation where the operating power is supplied to the main CPU 63, so that a game ball enters the game area PA within one business day. It is possible to manage the mode in detail.

In addition, since various parameters are calculated based on whether the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA is equal to or greater than the trigger reference number, various parameters are provided on the condition that the game is being executed. Is calculated. This makes it possible to prevent meaningless calculation of various parameters in a situation where the game is not continuously executed.

Further, the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA is measured by the management-side CPU 112, and the management-side CPU 112 determines whether or not the total number is equal to or greater than the trigger reference number. That is, the management side CPU 112 independently determines the trigger for calculation of various parameters. As a result, it is not necessary for the main CPU 63 to execute the processing for determining the timing of calculation of various parameters, and therefore the processing load on the main CPU 63 can be reduced.

<Eighth Embodiment>
In this embodiment, the processing configuration of the history setting process executed by the management CPU 112 is different from that of the first embodiment. The configuration different from that of the first embodiment will be described below. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

In the present embodiment, the calculation result memory 131 is provided in the management IC 66 as in the third embodiment (see FIG. 50). When the calculation trigger occurs, the management side CPU 112 calculates various parameters using the history information stored in the history memory 117, and writes the various parameters of the calculation results to the calculation result memory 131. Further, in the present embodiment, a signal indicating that the opening/closing execution mode has been started, a signal indicating that the opening/closing execution mode has ended, a signal indicating that the high-probability mode has started, and the high-probability mode ended. A signal indicating that the opening of the front door frame 14 has started, and a signal indicating that the opening of the front door frame 14 has ended are individually transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66. To be done.

FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing the history setting process executed by the management CPU 112 in this embodiment.

First, the number of buffers to be confirmed in the management CPU 112 among the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o is set in the confirmation target counter of the management RAM 114 (step S3001). Specifically, of the first to fifteenth correspondence relation areas 123a to 123o in the correspondence relation memory 116, the number of correspondence relation areas in which information other than information indicating blank is stored is specified, and the identification is performed. The information of the number that was set is set in the check target counter. In the present embodiment, information indicating that one of the first to seventh correspondence areas 123a to 123g corresponds to one of the ball entering portions is stored, and the eighth correspondence area 123h is used to start the opening/closing execution mode. Corresponding information is stored, information corresponding to the end of the open/close execution mode is stored in the ninth correspondence area 123i, and information corresponding to the start of the high probability mode is stored in the tenth correspondence area 123j. The information corresponding to the end of the high probability mode is stored in the eleventh correspondence area 123k, the information corresponding to the opening start of the front door frame 14 is stored in the twelfth correspondence area 123l, and Information corresponding to the end of opening the front door frame 14 is stored in the 13 correspondence area 123m. Therefore, in step S3001, "13" is set in the confirmation target counter.

After that, confirm whether or not the numerical information stored in the buffer corresponding to the current value of the check target counter among the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o has been changed from "0" to "1". Then, it is determined whether or not the output state of the input signal from the main CPU 63 to the buffer has been switched from the LOW level to the HI level (step S3002). When the value of the check target counter is “n”, the nth buffers 122a to 122o are the check targets of the numerical information. For example, if the value of the check target counter is “10”, the tenth buffer 122j is the check target of the numerical information, and if the value of the check target counter is “5”, the fifth buffer 122e is the check target of the numerical information. ..

When an affirmative determination is made in step S3002, the RTC information that is the date information and the time information is read from the RTC 115 (step S3003). Then, the writing process to the history memory 117 is executed (step S3004). In the writing process, the pointer area 126 of the history memory 117 is referred to identify the pointer information of the history area 124 that is the current writing target, and the pointer information corresponding to the pointer information of the writing target is specified. The RTC information read in step S3003 is written in the history information storage area 125 of the history area 124. Further, the correspondence information is read from the correspondence areas 123a to 123o corresponding to the current value of the check target counter, and the correspondence information is written in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. In addition, when the value of the check target counter is “n”, the n-th correspondence area 123a to 123o is a target for reading correspondence information. For example, if the value of the check target counter is “10”, the tenth correspondence area 123j is the target for reading the correspondence information, and if the value of the check target counter is “5”, the fifth correspondence area 123e is the correspondence relationship. It is a target for reading information.

Then, the value of the target pointer is incremented by 1 (step S3005). Specifically, the numerical information stored in the pointer area 126 of the history memory 117 is read and the numerical information is incremented by 1. Then, it is determined whether the pointer information after the addition of 1 exceeds the maximum value of the pointer information in the history area 124 (step S3006).

When it exceeds the maximum value (step S3006: YES), various arithmetic processes are executed (step S3007). In various arithmetic processing, the same processing as step S1002 to step S1009, step S1011 to step S1013, and step S1015 to step S1017 of the external output processing (FIG. 28) in the first embodiment is executed. Then, the various parameters of the calculation result and the information of the total time are written in the calculation result memory 131 (step S3008). In this case, when the information of another operation result is already stored in the operation result memory 131, the operation result information should be written so as not to overwrite the already stored operation result information. To do. Further, the current date information and time information are read out from the RTC 115, and the read date information and time information are attached to the information of the calculation result written this time. As a result, it is possible to specify when the information of the calculation result written this time corresponds to the timing.

After that, the state information takeover process is executed (step S3009). In the handover processing, based on the history information stored in the history memory 117, whether the current state is the open/close execution mode, whether the high probability mode is in progress, and the front door frame 14 is open. Determine whether there is. Then, the status information is written in the management RAM 114.

After that, the history memory 117 is cleared (step S3010). In the clearing process, all the history information storage area 125 of the history memory 117 is cleared to “0” and the pointer area 126 is cleared to “0”. As a result, the history area 124 is in the initialized state. After executing the clearing process, the status information written in the management side RAM 114 in step S3009 is read out. Then, when the state information indicating that the open/close execution mode is being stored, the history information indicating that the open/close execution mode is being stored is stored in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. At the same time as writing, the pointer information to be written is incremented by 1. When the state information indicating that the high probability mode is in operation is stored, the history information indicating that the high probability mode is in progress is stored in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. At the same time as writing, the pointer information to be written is incremented by 1. When the state information indicating that the front door frame 14 is open is stored, the history information indicating that the front door frame 14 is open corresponds to the pointer information to be written. The pointer information to be written is incremented by 1 while being written in the history information storage area 125.

If a negative determination is made in step S3002, a negative determination is made in step S3006, or if the processing of step S3010 is executed, the value of the check target counter of the management side RAM 114 is decremented by 1 (step S3011). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the check target counter after the subtraction of 1 is "0" (step S3012). When the value of the check target counter is 1 or more (step S3012: NO), the process from step S3002 is executed on the check target corresponding to the new check target counter value.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, various parameters are calculated when the history information stored in the history memory 117 exceeds the upper limit number that can be stored in the history memory 117. As a result, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the history information becomes a storage target in excess of the maximum number that can be stored in the history memory 117 and various parameters cannot be accurately calculated.

Further, when various parameters are calculated, the history memory 117 is initialized and all history information is erased. This makes it possible to prevent the history information that has already been the calculation target of various parameters from becoming the calculation target of various parameters again.

Further, even if the history memory 117 is initialized, the state information takeover process is executed. This makes it possible to appropriately manage the state information.

<Ninth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the configuration of the history memory 117 and the processing configuration of the history setting process executed by the management-side CPU 112 are different from those in the first embodiment. The configuration different from that of the first embodiment will be described below. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 60 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the history memory 117 in this embodiment. The history memory 117 is provided with a total area 141, a first state area 142, a second state area 143, and a third state area 144. Each of these areas 141 to 144 is provided with first to fifteenth counters 141a to 141o, 142a to 142o, 143a to 143o, 144a to 144o. Information on the number of times the output state of the first signal input to the first buffer 122a is changed from the LOW level to the HI level is stored in the first counters 141a to 144a of each of the areas 141 to 144. Information on the number of times the output state of the second signal input to the second buffer 122b is changed from the LOW level to the HI level is stored in the second counters 141b to 144b of each of the areas 141 to 144. Information about the number of times the output state of the third signal input to the third buffer 122c is changed from the LOW level to the HI level is stored in the third counters 141c to 144c of each of the areas 141 to 144. Information on the number of times the output state of the fourth signal input to the fourth buffer 122d is changed from the LOW level to the HI level is stored in the fourth counters 141d to 144d of each of the areas 141 to 144. Information on the number of times the output state of the fifth signal input to the fifth buffer 122e is changed from the LOW level to the HI level is stored in the fifth counters 141e to 144e of each of the areas 141 to 144. The sixth counters 141f to 144f of the areas 141 to 144 store information on the number of times the output state of the sixth signal input to the sixth buffer 122f is changed from the LOW level to the HI level. Information on the number of times the output state of the seventh signal input to the seventh buffer 122g is changed from the LOW level to the HI level is stored in the seventh counters 141g to 144g of each of the areas 141 to 144. Information on the number of times the output state of the eighth signal input to the eighth buffer 122h is changed from the LOW level to the HI level is stored in the eighth counters 141h to 144h of each of the areas 141 to 144. Information on the number of times the output state of the ninth signal input to the ninth buffer 122i is changed from the LOW level to the HI level is stored in the ninth counters 141i to 144i of each area 141 to 144. Information on the number of times the output state of the tenth signal input to the tenth buffer 122j is changed from the LOW level to the HI level is stored in the tenth counters 141j to 144j of each of the areas 141 to 144. Information on the number of times the output state of the eleventh signal input to the eleventh buffer 122k is changed from the LOW level to the HI level is stored in the eleventh counters 141k to 144k in each of the areas 141 to 144. Information on the number of times the output state of the twelfth signal input to the twelfth buffer 122l is changed from the LOW level to the HI level is stored in the twelfth counters 141l to 144l of each of the areas 141 to 144. Information on the number of times the output state of the thirteenth signal input to the thirteenth buffer 122m is changed from the LOW level to the HI level is stored in the thirteenth counters 141m to 144m of each of the areas 141 to 144. The 14th counters 141n to 144n of the areas 141 to 144 store information on the number of times the output state of the 14th signal input to the 14th buffer 122n is changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The fifteenth counters 141o to 144o of the areas 141 to 144 store information on the number of times the output state of the fifteenth signal input to the fifteenth buffer 122o is changed from the LOW level to the HI level.

However, the measurement target using the first to fifteenth counters 141a to 141o, 142a to 142o, 143a to 143o, 144a to 144o is the outlet 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special electricity winning device 32, the first operation. It is the first to seventh buffers 122a to 122g to which a signal corresponding to the result of the ball entering either the mouth 33 or the second actuation opening 34 is input. Therefore, a signal corresponding to the status information such as whether the open/close execution mode is in operation, the high probability mode is in operation, or the front door frame 14 is in open state is input. The buffers 122h to 122j are excluded from the measurement target. The distinction between these measurement objects is performed based on the correspondence information stored in the correspondence areas 123a to 123o of the correspondence memory 116.

FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing the history setting process executed by the management CPU 112 in this embodiment.

First, the number of buffers to be confirmed in the management CPU 112 among the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o is set in the confirmation target counter of the management RAM 114 (step S3101). Specifically, of the first to fifteenth correspondence relation areas 123a to 123o in the correspondence relation memory 116, the number of correspondence relation areas in which information other than information indicating blank is stored is specified, and the identification is performed. The information of the number that was set is set in the check target counter. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, since information other than the information indicating that it is blank is stored in the first to tenth correspondence areas 123a to 123j as described above, "10" is set in the confirmation target counter in step S3101. To do.

Then, it is determined whether or not the buffers 122a to 122o corresponding to the current check target counter are buffers to which the signal of the status information is input (step S3102). Specifically, in the correspondence areas 123a to 123o corresponding to the current value of the check target counter, as correspondence information, information indicating the open/close execution mode, information indicating the high probability mode, and the front door. It is determined whether any of the information indicating the frame 14 is stored.

If a positive determination is made in step S3102, state information setting processing is executed (step S3103). In the setting process, when the output state of the eighth signal indicating whether or not the open/close execution mode is switched from the LOW level to the HI level, the information of the first state indicating that the open/close execution mode is set is displayed on the management side. When the output state of the eighth signal is switched from the HI level to the LOW level, it is stored in the RAM 114, and the information of the first state is deleted from the management side RAM 114. Further, when the output state of the ninth signal indicating whether or not in the high probability mode is switched from the LOW level to the HI level, information on the second state indicating that the high probability mode is in effect is stored in the management side RAM 114. Then, when the output state of the ninth signal is switched from the HI level to the LOW level, the information of the second state is erased from the management side RAM 114. In addition, when the output state of the tenth signal indicating whether the front door frame 14 is open is switched from the LOW level to the HI level, the third state information indicating that the front door frame 14 is open Is stored in the management RAM 114, and when the output state of the tenth signal is switched from the HI level to the LOW level, the information of the third state is erased from the management RAM 114.

When a negative determination is made in step S3102, the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o are stored in the buffer corresponding to the current value of the check target counter and to which the signal of the information different from the state information is input. Whether the output state of the input signal from the main CPU 63 to the relevant buffer has been switched from the LOW level to the HI level by checking whether the numerical information stored therein is changed from "0" to "1". It is determined whether or not (step S3104). If an affirmative decision is made in step S3104, addition processing of the corresponding counter for summation is executed (step S3105). In the addition process, the value of the counter corresponding to the current value of the check target counter among the total first to fifteenth counters 141a to 141o in the total area 141 of the history memory 117 is incremented by one. For example, if the value of the check target counter is "5", the fifth total counter 141e is the addition target, and if the value of the check target counter is "1", the first total counter 141a is the addition target. ..

After that, by referring to the state information of the management side RAM 114, it is determined whether or not it is in the first state, that is, whether or not it is in the open/close execution mode (step S3106). If it is in the first state (step S3106: YES), the corresponding counter for the first state is added (step S3107). In the addition processing, the value of the counter corresponding to the value of the current check target counter among the first to fifteenth counters 142a to 142o for the first state in the first state area 142 of the history memory 117 is incremented by 1. .. For example, if the value of the check target counter is "5", the fifth counter 142e for the first state is the addition target, and if the value of the check target counter is "1", the first counter 142a for the first state is the It will be added.

After that, by referring to the state information of the management side RAM 114, it is determined whether or not it is in the second state, that is, whether or not in the high probability mode (step S3108). When it is in the second state (step S3108: YES), the corresponding counter for the second state is added (step S3109). In the addition processing, the value of the counter corresponding to the current value of the check target counter among the first to fifteenth counters 143a to 143o for the second state in the second state area 143 of the history memory 117 is incremented by 1. .. For example, if the value of the check target counter is "5", the fifth counter 143e for the second state is the addition target, and if the value of the check target counter is "1", the first counter 143a for the second state is the addition target. It will be added.

After that, by referring to the state information of the management side RAM 114, it is determined whether or not it is in the third state, that is, whether or not the front door frame 14 is open (step S3110). If it is in the third state (step S3110: YES), the corresponding addition processing of the counter for the third state is executed (step S3111). In the addition processing, the value of the counter corresponding to the value of the current check target counter among the first to fifteenth counters 144a to 144o for the third state in the third state area 144 of the history memory 117 is incremented by 1. .. For example, if the value of the check target counter is “5”, the fifth counter 144e for the third state is the addition target, and if the value of the check target counter is “1”, the first counter 144a for the third state is the same. It will be added.

When the process of step S3103 is executed, the negative determination is made in step S3104, the negative determination is made in step S3110, or the process of step S3111 is executed, the value of the check target counter of the management side RAM 114 is set to 1 Subtract (step S3112). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the confirmation target counter after the subtraction of 1 is "0" (step S3113). When the value of the check target counter is 1 or more (step S3113: NO), the process from step S3102 is executed on the check target corresponding to the new check target counter value.

By executing the history setting process as described above, the history of the game balls entering the outlet 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special electricity winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, and the second operating opening 34 is changed to the above. Instead of being stored as history information as in the first embodiment, it is stored as information on the number of times a game ball is detected by each of the ball detection sensors 42a to 48a. This makes it possible to reduce the storage capacity required in the history memory 117, as compared with a configuration in which each history information is stored individually.

As described above, since the game balls are stored as the information on the number of times the game balls are detected by the respective ball detection sensors 42a to 48a, in the process for external output (FIG. 28) in the present embodiment, the outlet 24a such as step S1002. To calculate the number of game balls to enter the special electric prize winning device 32 such as step S1004, to calculate the number of game balls to the first operating port 33 to step S1005 The process of calculating and the process of calculating the number of game balls entering the second operation port 34, such as step S1006, are not required. This makes it possible to reduce the processing load for calculating various parameters.

In the process of calculating the number of game balls entering the general winning opening 31 such as step S1003, all of the first to third counters 141a to 141c, 142a to 142c, 143a to 143c, 144a to 144c are general winning openings. Since it corresponds to 31, it is necessary to execute a process of summing the values of the first to third counters 141a to 141c, 142a to 142c, 143a to 143c, 144a to 144c. Further, it is impossible to distinguish the number of balls entered in the situation where the front door frame 14 is open in the opening/closing execution mode from the number of balls entered in other situations. Therefore, the process of step S1012 is not executed in the external output process (FIG. 28) in the present embodiment. Similarly, it is impossible to distinguish the number of balls entered in the situation in which the front door frame 14 is open in the high probability mode from the number of balls entered in other situations. Therefore, the process of step S1016 is not executed in the external output process (FIG. 28) in the present embodiment.

<Tenth Embodiment>
In this embodiment, the storage means for storing the history information is different from that in the first embodiment. The configuration different from that of the first embodiment will be described below. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 62 is a block diagram for explaining the electrical configuration of the MPU 62 in this embodiment. Similar to the first embodiment, the MPU 62 is provided with a main CPU 63, a main ROM 64, a main RAM 65, a management IC 66, an I/F 101, and a reading terminal 102. Further, the management IC 66 is provided with a management side I/F 111, a management side CPU 112, a management side ROM 113, and a management side RAM 114, as in the first embodiment.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, unlike the first embodiment, the management IC 66 is not provided with the RTC 115, the correspondence memory 116, and the history memory 117. Instead, the management IC 66 is provided with a calculation result memory 131 as in the third embodiment. Since the management IC 66 is not provided with the RTC 115, the correspondence memory 116, and the history memory 117, history information is not stored in the management IC 66 in this embodiment. In the present embodiment, the entry history into the outlet 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33 and the second operating opening 34 is stored in the main RAM 65. That is, the main RAM 65, which temporarily stores information necessary for executing the program in the main CPU 63, is also used as a memory for storing the entry history. Then, the management IC 66 can access the main RAM 65 through the management I/F 111, and when the calculation trigger of various parameters occurs, the main IC RAM 65 is accessed to read the entry history and read it. Various parameters are calculated using the entry history. The calculated various parameters are stored in the calculation result memory 131. When the reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102, various parameters are provided from the calculation result memory 131 to the reading device, but the entry history stored in the main RAM 65 is not provided to the reading device. ..

FIG. 63 is a flow chart showing a ball entry detection process in the present embodiment executed by the main CPU 63. The incoming ball detection process is executed in step S209 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 12).

When it is confirmed that the state in which the information of “0” is stored for the 0th bit D0 is switched to the state in which the information of “1” is stored, the first winning opening detection sensor 42a outputs 1 It is determined that one game ball has been detected (step S3201: YES). In this case, 1 is added to the value of the general winning counter provided in the main RAM 65 (step S3202). The general winning counter is a counter for storing the number of balls entered into the general winning opening 31 as a history of entered balls. The value of the general winning counter is cleared to "0" when a reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 and various parameters are read from the calculation result memory 131 by the reading device. By the way, since the backup power is supplied to the main RAM 65 even when the supply of the operating power to the MPU 62 is stopped, even if the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, the value of the general winning counter is Retained. After that, the value of the counter for 10 prize balls of the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S3203).

When it is confirmed that the state in which the information of “0” is stored for the first bit D1 is switched to the state in which the information of “1” is stored, the second winning hole detection sensor 43a outputs 1 It is determined that the individual game balls have been detected (step S3204: YES). In this case, the value of the general winning counter of the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S3205). After that, the value of the counter for 10 prize balls in the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S3206).

When it is confirmed that the state in which the information of “0” is stored in the second bit D2 is switched to the state in which the information of “1” is stored, the third winning hole detection sensor 44a outputs 1 It is determined that one game ball has been detected (step S3207: YES). In this case, the value of the general winning counter of the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S3208). After that, the value of the counter for 10 prize balls of the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S3209).

When it is confirmed that the information "0" is stored for the third bit D3 and the information "1" is stored, one game is performed by the special electric detection sensor 45a. It is determined that a sphere has been detected (step S3210: YES). In this case, "1" is set to the special electricity winning flag of the main RAM 65 (step S3211). Further, the value of the special electric prize winning counter provided in the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S3212). The special electric prize winning counter is a counter for storing the number of balls entered into the special electric prize winning device 32 as a entering history. The value of the special electric prize winning counter is cleared to “0” when a reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 and various parameters are read from the calculation result memory 131 by the reading device. By the way, since the backup power is supplied to the main RAM 65 even when the supply of the operating power to the MPU 62 is stopped, even if the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, the value of the special prize winning counter is It is held in memory. Then, the value of the counter for 15 prize balls in the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S3213).

When it is confirmed that the state in which the information of “0” is stored for the fourth bit D4 is switched to the state in which the information of “1” is stored, the first working port detection sensor 46a outputs 1 It is determined that the individual game balls have been detected (step S3214: YES). In this case, the first operation winning flag of the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S3215). Further, the value of the first operation counter provided in the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S3216). The first operation counter is a counter for storing the number of balls entered into the first operation port 33 as a ball entry history. The value of the first operation counter is cleared to “0” when the reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 and various parameters are read from the calculation result memory 131 by the reading device. .. By the way, since backup power is supplied to the main RAM 65 even when the supply of operating power to the MPU 62 is stopped, even if the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, the value of the first operation counter Is stored. After that, the value of the one prize ball counter of the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S3217).

When it is confirmed that the state in which the information “0” is stored for the fifth bit D5 is switched to the state in which the information “1” is stored, the second working port detection sensor 47a outputs 1 It is determined that one gaming ball has been detected (step S3218: YES). In this case, the second operation winning flag of the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S3219). Further, the value of the second operation counter provided in the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S3220). The second operation counter is a counter for storing the number of balls entered into the second operation port 34 as a ball entry history. The value of the second operation counter is cleared to "0" when the reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 and various parameters are read from the calculation result memory 131 by the reading device. .. By the way, since the backup power is supplied to the main RAM 65 even when the supply of the operating power to the MPU 62 is stopped, even if the pachinko machine 10 is in the power-off state, the value of the second operation counter Is retained. Thereafter, the value of the one prize ball counter of the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S3221).

When it is confirmed that the state in which the information of “0” is stored for the sixth bit D6 is switched to the state in which the information of “1” is stored, one out-out detection sensor 48a detects It is determined that a game ball has been detected (step S3222: YES). In this case, the value of the out counter provided in the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S3223). The out counter is a counter for storing the number of balls entered into the outlet 24a as a history of entered balls. The value of the out counter is cleared to “0” when the reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 and various parameters are read from the calculation result memory 131 by the reading device. By the way, since the backup power is supplied to the main RAM 65 even when the supply of the operating power to the MPU 62 is stopped, the value of the out counter is stored even if the pachinko machine 10 is in the power-off state. Retained.

When it is confirmed that the situation where the information of "0" is stored for the seventh bit D7 is switched to the situation where the information of "1" is stored, one game is performed by the gate detection sensor 49a. It is determined that a sphere has been detected (step S3224: YES). In this case, the gate winning flag of the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S3225).

By performing the entrance detection process as described above, the entrance history into the outlet 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, and the second operating opening 34 is recorded in each entering portion. It is stored in the RAM 65 on the main side as the number of balls entered. As a result, a signal is sent from the main CPU 63 to the management CPU 112 each time a ball enters any of the outlet 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special electricity winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, and the second operating opening 34. No need to output. Therefore, the configuration for outputting a signal from the main CPU 63 to the management CPU 112 can be simplified.

In the present embodiment, when a calculation trigger occurs, the management-side CPU 112 reads the number of balls entered into the general winning opening 31 from the general winning award counter of the main RAM 65, and transfers the special power winning award counter of the main RAM 65 to the special electric winning device 32. The number of balls entered is read, the number of balls entered into the first operation port 33 is read from the first operation counter of the main RAM 65, the number of balls entered into the second operation port 34 is read from the second operation counter of the main RAM 65, The number of balls entered into the out port 24a is read from the out counter of the main RAM 65. Then, the first to eighth parameters described in the first embodiment are calculated by using the read respective numbers of incoming balls. However, the number of incoming balls is not measured in a state where the number of incoming balls when the front door frame 14 is open and the number of incoming balls when the front door frame 14 is closed are distinguished. Therefore, the first parameter to the eighth parameter are calculated in a state in which the number of balls entered when the front door frame 14 is open is also included. In addition, since the number of incoming balls in the open/close execution mode and the number of incoming balls in the high probability mode are not individually measured, the first parameter to the eighteenth parameter and the twenty-first parameter described in the first embodiment are described. The 26th parameter is not calculated. The calculated first to eighth parameters are written in the calculation result memory 131. Then, when the reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102, all the parameters written in the calculation result memory 131 at that time are provided to the reading device. At this time, the calculation result memory 131 is cleared to "0".

It should be noted that the management IC 66 does not access the main RAM 65 independently, but information on each number of incoming balls stored in the main RAM 65 as a ball entry history is transmitted to the management IC 66 by transfer control by the main CPU 63. May be configured. In this case, it is possible to reliably prevent the main RAM 65 from simultaneously accessing the main CPU 63 and the management CPU 112.

<Eleventh Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the configuration of the main control board 61, the types of signals output from the main CPU 63 to the management CPU 112, and the method of storing the entry history in each entry portion are different from those in the first embodiment. ing. The configuration different from that of the first embodiment will be described below. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 64 is a block diagram for explaining the electrical configuration of the main control board 61 in this embodiment. The MPU 62 is mounted on the main control board 61 as in the first embodiment. Similar to the first embodiment, the MPU 62 is provided with a main CPU 63, a main ROM 64, a main RAM 65, a management IC 66, an I/F 101, and a reading terminal 102. Further, the management IC 66 is provided with the management side I/F 111, the management side CPU 112, the management side ROM 113, the management side RAM 114, the correspondence memory 116, and the history memory 117 as in the first embodiment.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, unlike the first embodiment, the management IC 66 is not provided with the RTC 115. Also. In addition to the MPU 62, the main control board 61 is provided with a notification light emitting section 151. The notification light emitting unit 151 is directly controlled by the main CPU 63 to emit light. The main CPU 63 can access the history memory 117 of the management IC 66, and calculates various parameters by using the information of the history of entering the respective ball portions read from the history memory 117. Then, the light emitting state of the notification light emitting unit 151 is controlled according to the contents of the calculated various parameters. The light emitting unit 151 for notification is housed in the housing space of the substrate box 60a of the main control device 60. The substrate box 60a is formed transparent, and the light emitting state of the light emitting unit 151 for notification is set outside the substrate box 60a. The notification light emitting unit 151 is provided so that the visual confirmation can be performed. In this way, the gaming machine main body 12 is opened with respect to the outer frame 11 so that the main control device 60 can be visually confirmed, so that the notification light emitting unit 151 does not need to open the board box 60a. It is possible to visually check the light emitting state of.

FIG. 65 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the input port 121 of the management-side I/F 111 in this embodiment.

The same kind of signal as that of the first embodiment is input to the first to seventh buffers 122a to 122g and the 16th buffer 122p. Specifically, the first signal corresponding to the detection result of the first winning opening detection sensor 42a is input to the first buffer 122a, and the second signal corresponding to the detection result of the second winning opening detection sensor 43a is input to the second buffer 122b. A signal is input, a third signal corresponding to the detection result of the third winning opening detection sensor 44a is input to the third buffer 122c, and a fourth signal corresponding to the detection result of the special electric power detection sensor 45a is input to the fourth buffer 122d. Is input to the fifth buffer 122e, the fifth signal corresponding to the detection result of the first working opening detection sensor 46a is input, and the sixth buffer 122f corresponds to the detection result of the second working opening detection sensor 47a. Six signals are input, a seventh signal corresponding to the detection result of the outlet detection sensor 48a is input to the seventh buffer 122g, and an output instruction signal is input to the sixteenth buffer 122p.

On the other hand, in the first embodiment, the signal corresponding to the open/close execution mode is input to the eighth buffer 122h as the eighth signal, and the signal corresponding to the high probability mode is input to the ninth buffer 122i as the ninth signal. Although the signal corresponding to the door frame 14 is input to the tenth buffer 122j as the tenth signal, in the present embodiment, a signal corresponding to the opening/closing execution mode, a signal corresponding to the high probability mode, and the front door frame. The signal corresponding to 14 is not input to the input port 121. That is, no signal regarding the entry history is input to the eighth to fifteenth buffers 122h to 122o.

What kind of signal is input to the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o has not been determined at the design stage of the management IC 66, and these kinds of signals are determined by receiving an instruction from the main CPU 63. It is specified by the management CPU 112. The process for identifying the type of the signal is executed when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 and the management CPU 112 is started, as in the first embodiment. On the other hand, it is determined in the design stage of the management IC 66 that the output instruction signal is input to the 16th buffer 122p, and the management CPU 112 outputs the 16th buffer 122p to the 16th buffer 122p without receiving an instruction from the main CPU 63. It is possible to specify that the instruction signal is input.

FIG. 66 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the history memory 117 in this embodiment. The history memory 117 is provided with first to fifteenth buffer counters 152a to 152o. The first buffer counter 152a stores information on the number of times the output state of the first signal input to the first buffer 122a is changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The second buffer counter 152b stores information on the number of times the output state of the second signal input to the second buffer 122b is changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The third buffer counter 152c stores information on the number of times the output state of the third signal input to the third buffer 122c is changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The fourth buffer counter 152d stores information on the number of times the output state of the fourth signal input to the fourth buffer 122d is changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The fifth buffer counter 152e stores information on the number of times the output state of the fifth signal input to the fifth buffer 122e is changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The sixth buffer counter 152f stores information on the number of times the output state of the sixth signal input to the sixth buffer 122f is changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The seventh buffer counter 152g stores information on the number of times the output state of the seventh signal input to the seventh buffer 122g is changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The eighth buffer counter 152h stores information on the number of times the output state of the eighth signal input to the eighth buffer 122h is changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The ninth buffer counter 152i stores information on the number of times the output state of the ninth signal input to the ninth buffer 122i is changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The tenth buffer counter 152j stores information on the number of times the output state of the tenth signal input to the tenth buffer 122j is changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The eleventh buffer counter 152k stores information on the number of times the output state of the eleventh signal input to the eleventh buffer 122k is changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The twelfth buffer counter 152l stores information on the number of times the output state of the twelfth signal input to the twelfth buffer 122l is changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The 13th buffer counter 152m stores information on the number of times the output state of the 13th signal input to the 13th buffer 122m is changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The 14th buffer counter 152n stores information on the number of times the output state of the 14th signal input to the 14th buffer 122n has been changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The fifteenth buffer counter 152o stores information on the number of times the output state of the fifteenth signal input to the fifteenth buffer 122o is changed from the LOW level to the HI level.

However, the target to be measured using the first to fifteenth buffer counters 152a to 152o is any of the outlet 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special electricity winning device 32, the first working opening 33, and the second working opening 34. These are first to seventh buffers 122a to 122g to which signals corresponding to the result of entering the car are input. Therefore, the eighth to fifteenth buffers 122h to 122o are excluded from the measurement target. The distinction between these measurement objects is performed based on the correspondence information stored in the correspondence areas 123a to 123o of the correspondence memory 116.

FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing the history setting process executed by the management CPU 112. The history setting process is executed in step S607 of the management process (FIG. 22).

First, the number of buffers to be confirmed in the management CPU 112 among the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o is set in the confirmation target counter of the management RAM 114 (step S3301). Specifically, of the first to fifteenth correspondence relation areas 123a to 123o in the correspondence relation memory 116, the number of correspondence relation areas in which information other than information indicating blank is stored is specified, and the identification is performed. The information of the number that was set is set in the check target counter. As described above, the pachinko machine 10 stores information other than the information indicating that it is blank in the first to seventh response areas 123a to 123j, and therefore, in step S3301, the confirmation target counter is set to "7". To do.

After that, it should be confirmed whether the numerical value information stored in the buffer corresponding to the current value of the check target counter among the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o has been changed from "0" to "1". Then, it is determined whether or not the output state of the input signal from the main CPU 63 to the buffer has been switched from the LOW level to the HI level (step S3302). When the value of the check target counter is “n”, the nth buffers 122a to 122o are the check targets of the numerical information. For example, if the value of the check target counter is "5", the fifth buffer 122e is the check target of the numerical information, and if the value of the check target counter is "1", the first buffer 122a is the check target of the numerical information. ..

If an affirmative decision is made in step S3302, the addition processing of the corresponding buffer counters 152a to 152o is executed (step S3303). In the addition processing, the counter value corresponding to the current value of the check target counter among the counters of the first to fifteenth buffer counters 152a to 152o of the history memory 117 is incremented by 1. For example, if the value of the check target counter is “5”, the fifth buffer counter 152e is the addition target, and if the value of the check target counter is “1”, the first buffer counter 152a is the addition target.

If a negative determination is made in step S3302, or if the process of step S3303 is executed, the value of the check target counter of the management side RAM 114 is decremented by 1 (step S3304). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the check target counter after the subtraction of 1 is "0" (step S3305). When the value of the check target counter is 1 or more (step S3305: NO), the process from step S3302 is executed for the check target corresponding to the new check target counter value.

By executing the history setting process as described above, the history of the game balls entering the outlet 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special electricity winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, and the second operating opening 34 is changed to the above. Instead of being stored as history information as in the first embodiment, it is stored as information on the number of times a game ball is detected by each of the ball detection sensors 42a to 48a. This makes it possible to reduce the storage capacity required in the history memory 117, as compared with a configuration in which each history information is stored individually.

FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing the external output processing in this embodiment executed by the management CPU 112. The external output process is executed in step S608 of the management process (FIG. 22).

When the output state of the output instruction signal received from the main CPU 63 becomes the HI level (step S3401: YES), the output target counter provided in the management RAM 114 includes the first to fifteenth buffer counters 152a to 152a. Of the 152o, the management-side CPU 112 sets the number of counters to which the count information is output (step S3402). Specifically, of the first to fifteenth correspondence relation areas 123a to 123o in the correspondence relation memory 116, the number of correspondence relation areas in which information other than information indicating blank is stored is specified, and the identification is performed. The information of the number that was set is set in the check target counter. In the present embodiment, as already described, the first to seventh correspondence areas 123a to 123g store information other than the information indicating that it is blank, so that in step S3402, "7" is set in the output target counter. ..

After that, the correspondence relation information stored in the area corresponding to the current output target counter value among the first to fifteenth correspondence relation areas 123a to 123o in the correspondence relation memory 116 is read (step S3403), and the history relation is recorded. Of the first to fifteenth buffer counters 152a to 152o in the memory 117, the count information stored in the counter corresponding to the current output target counter is read (step S3404). In this case, when the value of the output target counter is “n”, the n-th correspondence relationship areas 123a to 123o are targets for reading correspondence relationship information, and the n-th buffer counters 152a to 152o read the number-of-times information. Be the target. For example, if the value of the output target counter is “5”, the fifth correspondence area 123e is the target of reading the correspondence information, the fifth buffer counter 152e is the target of reading the number of times information, and the value of the output target counter is If the value is "1", the first correspondence relationship area 123a is the target for reading the correspondence information and the first buffer counter 152a is the target for reading the number-of-times information.

After that, information output processing is executed (step S3405). In the information output process, the combination of the correspondence information read in step S3403 and the number-of-times information read in step S3404 is output to the reading terminal 102. As a result, the reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 reads the number-of-times information about the correspondence information that is the current output target.

After that, the value of the output target counter of the management RAM 114 is decremented by 1 (step S3406). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the output target counter after the subtraction of 1 is "0" (step S3407). When the value of the output target counter is 1 or more (step S3407: NO), the process from step S3403 is executed for the output target corresponding to the new output target counter value. If a positive determination is made in step S3407, the values of the first to fifteenth buffer counters 152a to 152o are cleared to "0".

FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing the parameter management process executed by the main CPU 63. The parameter management process is executed after the management output process of step S219 is executed in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 12).

First, it is determined whether or not there is a trigger for calculation of various parameters (step S3501). The calculation trigger is when the parameter management process is first executed after the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, and as in the fifth embodiment, the outlet 24a, the general winning opening 31, and the special prize winning. It occurs every time the total number of game balls entered into the device 32, the first operation port 33, and the second operation port 34 becomes 500 or more, which is the trigger reference number. Since the case where the parameter management process is first executed after the supply of the operating power is started is set as the calculation trigger, the power of the pachinko machine 10 is once turned off and then turned on again to calculate various parameters. The trigger can be easily generated. If an affirmative decision is made in step S3501, notification corresponding to the calculation results of various parameters will be executed as will be described later, so simply by turning the power supply off and on, the game area PA up to that point is displayed. It is possible to grasp the entering mode of the game ball. Further, by having a configuration in which a calculation trigger is generated every time the total number of entered balls of the game balls becomes 500 or more, which is the trigger reference number, it is possible to finely manage the entering mode of the game balls in the game area PA. Becomes

If a calculation trigger has occurred (step S3501: YES), the entry history is read from the counters of the first to fifteenth buffer counters 152a to 152o of the history memory 117, which are objects for storing the entry history (step S3501). S3502). Specifically, the numerical information of the first to seventh buffer counters 152a to 152g is read. In this case, the main CPU 63 can recognize the buffer counters 152a to 152o from which the entry history is read based on the programs and data stored in the main ROM 64.

After that, various arithmetic processes are executed (step S3503). In the various calculation processes, various parameters are calculated using the ball entry history read in step S3502 and the information on the number of prize balls corresponding to the ball entry history. The main CPU 63 uses the programs and data stored in the main ROM 64 to determine that each of the entry histories read out in step S3502 is the outlet 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special electricity winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, and the first operating opening 33. It is possible to specify which one of the two working ports 34 corresponds to, and it is also possible to specify information on the number of prize balls corresponding to each entry history read in step S3502. ..

Regarding the various parameters calculated in step S3503, specifically,
-Seventh parameter: (K3 x "number of prize balls for winning in special electric prize winning device 32" + K5 x "number of prize balls for winning in second working port 34")/total payout number of game balls (K2 x "general "Number of prize balls for winning in prize hole 31" + K3 x "Number of prize balls for winning in special electric prize winning device 32" + K4 x "Number of prize balls for winning in first working port 33" + K5 x "Second working port 34" 8th parameter: K3 x "number of prize balls for winning in special electric prize winning device 32" / total payout number of game balls (K2 x for winning in general winning hole 31) "Number of prize balls" + K3 x "Number of prize balls for winning the special electric prize winning device 32" + K4 x "Number of prize balls for winning the first operating port 33" + K5 x "Number of prize balls for winning the second operating port 34" )) is calculated.

Then, it is determined whether the calculated various parameters are within the first range (step S3504). If the value of the seventh parameter is 0.7 or less and the value of the eighth parameter is 0.6 or less, a positive determination is made in step S3504, assuming that the calculated various parameters are in the first range. When an affirmative determination is made in step S3504, the first notification state setting processing is executed (step S3505). In the setting process, the notification light emitting unit 151 is controlled to emit light so as to be in the first notification state. In this case, the notification light emitting unit 151 is in a blue light emitting state.

When a negative determination is made in step S3504, it is determined whether the calculated various parameters are in the second range (step S3506). When the condition that only one of the value of the seventh parameter exceeds 0.7 and the value of the eighth parameter exceeds 0.6 is satisfied, the calculated various parameters are A positive determination is made in step S3506 assuming that the range is two. When an affirmative determination is made in step S3506, the second notification state setting processing is executed (step S3507). In the setting process, the notification light emitting unit 151 is controlled to emit light so as to be in the second notification state. In this case, the notification light emitting unit 151 is in a yellow light emitting state.

A negative determination in step S3506 means that the value of the seventh parameter exceeds 0.7 and the value of the eighth parameter exceeds 0.6. In this case, the third notification state setting process is executed (step S3508). In the setting process, the notification light emitting unit 151 is controlled to emit light so as to be in the third notification state. In this case, the notification light emitting unit 151 is in a red light emitting state.

Regarding the light emission state set in step S3505, step S3507, or step S3508, the supply of operating power to the light emission section 151 for notification is stopped until a new notification state is set for the light emission section 151 for notification. Continue until. Further, since the notification state of the notification light emitting unit 151 is stored and held in the main RAM 65 and backup power is supplied to the main RAM 65, the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped and the notification light emitting unit 151 is stopped. Even if 151 is turned off once, when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is resumed, the light emitting state corresponding to the type of information of the notification state stored in the main RAM 65 is set. The light emission control of the notification light emitting unit 151 is executed.

According to this embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are exhibited.

The entry history of the game ball into the outlet 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, and the second operating opening 34 is stored as history information as in the first embodiment. Instead, it is stored as information on the number of times a game ball is detected by each of the entrance detection sensors 42a to 48a. This makes it possible to reduce the storage capacity required in the history memory 117, as compared with a configuration in which each history information is stored individually.

An informing light emitting unit 151 for informing the contents corresponding to various parameters calculated by the management CPU 112 is provided. As a result, the contents corresponding to various parameters are notified by the pachinko machine 10 itself, so that the manager of the game hall or the like does not need to read the information stored in the memory 117 for history to read the game balls in the game area PA. It is possible to grasp the entering mode.

The main control board 61 housed in the board box 60a is provided with the notification light emitting section 151 together with the MPU 62. This makes it difficult to make unauthorized access to the communication path between the MPU 62 and the notification light emitting unit 151.

The calculation of various parameters and the light emission control of the notification light emitting unit 151 are executed by the main CPU 63 instead of the management CPU 112. This makes it possible to increase the reliability of the notification content in the notification light emitting unit 151.

When the calculation results of various parameters correspond to the first range, the first notification state is set. When the calculation results of various parameters correspond to the second range, the second notification state is set. The third notification state is set when neither the first range nor the second range is supported. That is, the various parameters are not reported as they are, but the content corresponding to the range including the various parameters is reported. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the notification light emitting unit 151 from having too many notification patterns, and it is possible to reduce the load for controlling the notification light emitting unit 151.

Immediately before the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped by continuing the power supply to the notification light emitting unit 151 even when the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped. The light emitting state may be maintained. In this case, even if the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped, by checking the notification light emitting unit 151, it is possible to grasp the entering mode of the game ball in the game area PA. ..

Further, instead of the configuration, when the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped, the notification light emitting unit 151 is turned off, but when the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started. Alternatively, the notification light emitting unit 151 may be controlled to emit light so that the light emitting state corresponds to the result of various parameters calculated before the supply of the operating power is stopped. In this case, for example, by checking the notification light emitting unit 151 before the start of business in the game hall, it becomes possible to grasp the entering mode of the game ball on the last business day.

The notifying means for notifying the calculation results of various parameters is not limited to the notification light emitting unit 151, and may be a display device having a display surface such as the symbol display device 41, and the speaker unit 54. May be Further, it may be configured that signals corresponding to the calculation results of various parameters are externally output to the hall computer HC of the game hall through the external terminal board 97.

The special figure display part 37a of the special figure unit 37 or the general figure display part 38a of the general figure unit 38 may also function as the notification light emitting section 151. For example, various parameters are calculated when the supply of the operating power to the MPU 62 is started, and the calculation result is included in the first range, the second range as in the above embodiment, or other than them. Alternatively, the notification corresponding to the calculation result may be executed on the special figure display unit 37a or the general figure display unit 38a immediately after the supply of the operating power is started. In this case, the notification may be terminated when the start condition of the variable display of the pattern on the special figure display part 37a or the start condition of the variable display of the pattern on the general figure display part 38a is satisfied. The configuration may be such that when the variable display start condition is satisfied, it is temporarily suspended, and when the variable display of the pattern is finished, it is restarted. According to this configuration, it is possible to use the special figure display portion 37a or the general figure display portion 38a as an informing means for informing the entry mode of the game ball in the game area PA.

The notification light emitting unit 151 may be provided at a position visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10 in a state where the gaming machine main body 12 and the front door frame 14 are closed. For example, the notification light emitting unit 151 may be provided at a position behind the window panel 52 and visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the window panel 52. In this case, it is possible to confirm the notification content corresponding to the calculation result of various parameters without requiring the opening operation of the gaming machine main body 12 or the front door frame 14.

<Twelfth Embodiment>
The present embodiment is different from the first embodiment in the configuration for providing the information of each entrance result to the management IC 66. The configuration different from that of the first embodiment will be described below. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 70 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a configuration of a signal path for allowing the detection results of the respective ball detection sensors 42a to 48a to be input to the main CPU 63 and the management IC 66.

The detection result of the first winning opening detection sensor 42a is input to the main CPU 63 through the first signal path SL11. The detection result of the second winning opening detection sensor 43a is input to the main CPU 63 through the second signal path SL12. The detection result of the third winning opening detection sensor 44a is input to the main CPU 63 through the third signal path SL13. The detection result of the special electric power detection sensor 45a is input to the main CPU 63 through the fourth signal path SL14. Further, the detection result of the first working port detection sensor 46a is input to the main CPU 63 through the fifth signal path SL15. The detection result of the second working port detection sensor 47a is input to the main CPU 63 through the sixth signal path SL16. The detection result of the outlet detection sensor 48a is input to the main CPU 63 through the seventh signal path SL17.

A first branch path SL21 is formed so as to branch from an intermediate position of the first signal path SL11, and the first branch path SL21 is electrically connected to the management IC 66. Further, the second branch path SL22 is formed so as to branch from the middle position of the second signal path SL12, and the second branch path SL22 is electrically connected to the management IC 66. Further, a third branch path SL23 is formed so as to branch from an intermediate position of the third signal path SL13, and the third branch path SL23 is electrically connected to the management IC 66. Further, a fourth branch path SL24 is formed so as to branch from an intermediate position of the fourth signal path SL14, and the fourth branch path SL24 is electrically connected to the management IC 66. A fifth branch path SL25 is formed so as to branch from an intermediate position of the fifth signal path SL15, and the fifth branch path SL25 is electrically connected to the management IC 66. Further, a sixth branch path SL26 is formed so as to branch from an intermediate position of the sixth signal path SL16, and the sixth branch path SL26 is electrically connected to the management IC 66. Further, a seventh branch path SL27 is formed so as to branch from an intermediate position of the seventh signal path SL17, and the seventh branch path SL27 is electrically connected to the management IC 66.

With the above configuration, the detection results of the respective ball detection sensors 42a to 48a are input to the management IC 66 without intervention of the processing by the main CPU 63. As a result, the main CPU 63 executes a process for causing the management CPU 112 to recognize the result of entering each of the outlet 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special electricity winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, and the second operating opening 34. Since it is not necessary to do so, it is possible to reduce the processing load of the main CPU 63.

Further, branch points of the branch paths SL21 to SL27 from the signal paths SL11 to SL17 are present in the MPU 62. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to access the branch point and each of the branch paths SL21 to SL27 from the outside, and it is possible to prevent an illegal act in which an abnormal entry result is input only to the management IC 66. ..

<Thirteenth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the execution mode of the open/close execution mode differs depending on whether the big hit result is a low probability result or the big hit result is a high probability result. Hereinafter, an execution mode of the open/close execution mode in this embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 71 is a time chart for explaining an execution mode of the opening/closing execution mode in this embodiment. 71(a1) and 71(a2) show the execution period of the open/close execution mode, FIGS. 71(b1) and 71(b2) show the execution period of the round game, and FIGS. 71(c1) and 71( c2) indicates a period during which the special electric winning device 32 is in an open state. 71(a1), 71(b1), and 71(c1) show opening/closing in case of 2R low accuracy result, 4R low accuracy result, 6R low accuracy result, 10R low accuracy result, and 16R low accuracy result. 71(a2), 71(b2), and 71(c2) show the 2R high-accuracy result, 4R high-accuracy result, 6R high-accuracy result, 10R high-accuracy result, and 16R high-accuracy result. The execution mode of the opening/closing execution mode in a certain case is shown.

In either of the open/close execution mode in the case of the low accuracy result and the open/close execution mode in the case of the high accuracy result, the open/close execution is performed at the timing of t1 as shown in FIGS. 71(a1) and 71(a2). The mode is started, and the first round game is executed from timing t2 to timing t3 as shown in FIGS. 71(b1) and 71(b2). In each of the open/close execution mode when the result is low and the open/close execution mode when the result is high, the execution mode of each round game is the same except the round game of the last execution time. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 71 (c1) and FIG. 71 (c2), the special electric prize winning device 32 is opened once in each round game, and the opening duration of the special electric prize winning device 32 in each round game is a game. It is set to 29 seconds, which is a period longer than the product of the ball firing cycle (0.6 seconds) and the maximum winning number of round games (10).

Then, in the open/close execution mode in the case of a low certainty result, the last round game is executed as shown in FIG. 71(b1) from the timing of t4 to the timing of t5. The execution mode of this round game is the same as the execution mode of the previous round game. In other words, the special electric prize winning device 32 is opened once in each round game, and the opening duration of the special electric prize device 32 in each round game is the firing cycle (0.6 seconds) of the game ball and the maximum winning number of the round game ( It is set to 29 seconds, which is a longer period than the product of 10 pieces). Then, the ending period occurs from the timing of t5 to the timing of t6, and the opening/closing execution mode of this time is ended.

In the opening/closing execution mode in the case of a highly accurate result, the last round game of the execution time is executed as shown in FIG. 71(b2) from the timing of t4 to the timing of t5, but in the round game, a predetermined round game is executed. The special prize winning device 32 is opened and closed a plurality of times so as to sandwich the interval period. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 71(c2), timing t4 to timing t11, timing t12 to timing t13, timing t14 to timing t15, timing t16 to timing t17, timing t18. The special electric prize winning device 32 is opened at each of the timing from t19 to the timing from t20 to the timing from t5. Then, the ending period occurs from the timing of t5 to the timing of t6, and the opening/closing execution mode of this time is ended.

In this case, at the timing of t4 to t11, the timing of t12 to the timing of t13, the timing of t14 to the timing of t15, the timing of t16 to the timing of t17, and the timing of t18 to the timing of t19, the special power winning device 32 is selected. The open duration is longer than the game ball firing cycle (0.6 seconds) and shorter than the product of the game ball firing cycle (0.6 seconds) and the maximum winning number of round games (10). The time is set to 1 second. In this relatively short open duration, the number of winnings to the special electric prize winning device 32 is about one, and it is possible that no prize is won to the special electric prize winning device 32. Further, since the special electric prize winning device 32 is opened five times, which is less than the number of winning upper limit numbers, by the relatively short opening continuation period, it is the timing when the final opening time is ended by the relatively short opening continuation period. At the timing of t19, it is unlikely that the special electric prize winning device 32 has won the game balls of the maximum number of winning prizes in the final round game. Therefore, the opening of the special electric winning device 32 after the timing of t20 occurs with a high probability.

Further, the relatively short opening duration is supplied from the receiving portion 231 of the guide member 203 to the right end of the guide plate portion 214 of the opening/closing member 202 in a situation where the opening/closing member 202 of the special electric winning device 32 is arranged in the open position. The game sphere is set to a period during which it can reach the predetermined range X of the guide plate portion 214. Then, the game ball that has reached this predetermined range X can fall below the opening/closing member 202 and win the through gate 35 when the opening/closing member 202 moves from the open position to the closed position in that situation. As a result, every time the special electric winning device 32 is opened for a relatively short duration, a chance of winning a game ball to the through gate 35 is generated.

The opening duration of the special electric winning device 32 at the timing of t20 to the timing of t5 is set to be longer than the relatively short opening duration. This relatively long open duration is set to a period equal to or longer than the product of the game cycle of the game ball (0.6 seconds) and the maximum winning number of round games (10), specifically 6 seconds. Is set to. It can be expected that the special electric winning device 32 wins the upper limit number of game balls during the relatively long open duration. In addition, when the game ball is awarded to the special electric prize winning device 32 in the opening time of the special electric prize winning device 32 by the relatively short opening continuation period, the special electric prize winning by the relatively long opening continuation period is performed. In the middle of the opening times of the device 32, there is a high possibility that the number of winning prizes to the special electric prize winning device 32 in the final round game of the execution time will reach the winning upper limit number.

In the round game of the last execution times of the opening/closing execution mode in the case of a highly accurate result, the special electric prize winning device 32 is opened 5 times by the relatively short opening duration as described above, and then the relatively long opening is continued. The special electric prize winning device 32 is opened once according to the period, and there is an interval period during which the special electric prize winning device 32 is closed. That is, as shown in FIG. 71(c2), timing t11 to timing t12, timing t13 to timing t14, timing t15 to timing t16, timing t17 to timing t18, and timing t19 to timing t20. The special electric prize winning device 32 is maintained in the closed state over the timing. This interval period is the same in each case, and is specifically set to 1 second.

In the situation where the game ball is placed on the guide plate portion 214 of the opening/closing member 202 of the special prize winning device 32 due to the opening and closing of the special prize winning device 32 occurring a plurality of times in the last round game of the execution as described above. The opening/closing member 202 often moves from the open position to the closed position. As a result, it is possible to give many opportunities to win the through gate 35 in the opening/closing execution mode in the case of a highly accurate result. In addition, it is possible to increase the advantage of obtaining a high-accuracy result as compared with a low-accuracy result.

In addition, the opening and closing of the special electric winning device 32 in the last round game of the execution times is performed with a relatively short open duration, so that the duration of the last round game of the execution times becomes extremely long. It becomes possible not to. In addition, before the opening times of the special electric prize winning device 32 due to the relatively short opening duration are all completed, the winning number of game balls to the special electric winning device 32 in the final round game does not reach the winning upper limit number. It becomes possible to

Next, a processing configuration of the main CPU 63 that enables the execution mode of the opening/closing execution mode as described above will be described. FIG. 72 is a flow chart showing the special power start process in this embodiment. The special electric power start process is executed in step S1209 of the special electric power control process (FIG. 38). Perform the same processing. When the opening period of the opening/closing execution mode has elapsed (step S3604: YES), a round number setting process is executed (step S3605). In the round number setting process, the number of rounds in the current open/close execution mode is set in the round counter provided in the main RAM 65. The round counter is a counter for the main CPU 63 to specify the remaining number of round games in the open/close execution mode this time. Specifically, if the 2R low-accuracy result or the 2R high-accuracy result is set, "2" is set to the round counter, and if the 4R low-accuracy result or the 4R high-accuracy result is set, "4" is set to the 6R. If the low accuracy result or 6R high accuracy result is set to "6", the round counter is set to "10". If the 10R low accuracy result or 10R high accuracy result is set, the round counter is set to "10". If it is a positive result, "16" is set in the round counter. Also, if any of the small hit results, the value of the round counter is cleared to "0".

After that, the setting process of the number of times of opening and closing is executed (step S3606). In the process of setting the number of times of opening and closing in the special electric power starting process, if any of the jackpot results, the opening and closing number counter of the main RAM 65 is set to "1" as the number of opening and closing of the special electric winning device 32 in the first round game of execution. If the game result this time is the first small hit result, "1" is set to the open/close counter of the main RAM 65, and if the game result is the second small hit result, the open/close counter of the main RAM 65 is set to "1". "5" is set, and if the current game result is the third small hit result, "10" is set to the opening/closing counter of the main RAM 65. Thereafter, in steps S3607 to S3610, the same processes as steps S1606 to S1609 of the special electric power starting process (FIG. 42) in the first embodiment are executed.

FIG. 73 is a flow chart showing the special electric power releasing processing in the present embodiment. Note that the special electric power releasing processing is executed in step S1210 of the special electric power control processing (FIG. 38).

When a prize has been generated to the special electric prize winning device 32 (step S3701: YES), the value of the prize counter of the main RAM 65 is decremented by 1 (step S3702). Then, if the value of the winning counter after subtracting 1 is "0" (step S3703: YES), it is necessary to end the round game of this time if it is a big hit result, and this opening/closing if it is a small hit result. You need to exit the run mode. Therefore, the value of the open/close counter of the main RAM 65 is cleared to "0" (step S3704).

After that, on condition that the current open/close execution mode is one of the jackpot results (step S3705: YES), the value of the round counter of the main RAM 65 is decremented by 1 (step S3706). Then, the opening/closing frequency setting process is executed (step S3707). In the setting process, if the current value of the round counter is "0", the value is not set in the open/close counter of the main RAM 65. In the setting process, if the current value of the round counter is “1”, the open/close counter of the main RAM 65 is set to “1” when the trigger of the open/close execution mode this time is a low probability result. On the other hand, if the opening/closing execution mode this time is a highly accurate result, the opening/closing counter of the main RAM 65 is set to "6". Further, in the setting process, if the current value of the round counter is 2 or more, "1" is set in the open/close counter of the main RAM 65. In addition, the setting process of the maximum winning number is executed (step S3708). In the setting process, if the value of the current round counter is “0”, the value is not set to the winning counter of the main RAM 65, and if the value of the current round counter is 1 or more, the prize of the main RAM 65 is won. "10" is set in the counter as the winning upper limit number of the new round game. After that, in steps S3709 to S3711, the processes of steps S1703 to S1705 of the special electric power releasing process (FIG. 43) in the first embodiment are executed.

When a negative determination is made in step S3701 or step S3703, by determining whether or not the value of the special map special power timer counter is “0”, the open duration period of the current open time of the special power winning device 32 is determined. It is determined whether the time has passed (step S3712). If an affirmative decision is made in step S3712, the value of the open/close counter of the main RAM 65 is decremented by 1 (step S3713). If the value of the opening/closing counter after subtracting 1 is “0” (step S3714: YES), and the execution timing of the opening/closing execution mode this time is one of the jackpot results (step S3715: YES), The value of the round counter of the main RAM 65 is decremented by 1 (step S3716). Also, the opening/closing frequency setting process is executed (step S3717). In the setting process, if the current value of the round counter is "0", the value is not set in the open/close counter of the main RAM 65. In the setting process, if the current value of the round counter is “1”, the open/close counter of the main RAM 65 is set to “1” when the trigger of the open/close execution mode this time is a low probability result. On the other hand, if the opening/closing execution mode this time is a highly accurate result, the opening/closing counter of the main RAM 65 is set to "6". Further, in the setting process, if the current value of the round counter is 2 or more, "1" is set in the open/close counter of the main RAM 65. In addition, the setting processing of the maximum winning number is executed (step S3718). In the setting process, if the value of the current round counter is “0”, the value is not set to the winning counter of the main RAM 65, and if the value of the current round counter is 1 or more, the prize of the main RAM 65 is won. "10" is set in the counter as the winning upper limit number of the new round game. After that, the processes of steps S3709 to S3711 are executed.

FIG. 74 is a flow chart showing the special electric power closing process in this embodiment. The special electric power closing process is executed in step S1211 of the special electric power control processing (FIG. 38).

In steps S3801 to S3804, the same processing as steps S1801 to S1804 of the special electric power closing processing (FIG. 44) in the first embodiment is executed. When a negative determination is made in step S3801, or when the processing of step S3804 is executed, it is determined whether both the round counter of the main RAM 65 and the open/close counter of the main RAM 65 are “0” ( Step S3805). When a negative determination is made in step S3805, it is determined whether or not the interval period has elapsed by determining whether or not the value of the special figure special power timer counter is "0" (step S3806). If the interval period has elapsed (step S3806: YES), the open duration setting process is executed (step S3807). In the setting process, if the opening/closing execution mode this time is the second small hit result, the information (specifically 2 seconds) of the open duration for the second small hit result is set in the special map special electric timer counter. If the opening/closing execution mode this time is the third small hit result, information (specifically, 1 second) of the opening duration for the third small hit result is set in the special figure special power timer counter. Further, in the setting process, when the trigger of the current open/close execution mode is any of the uncertain results, the information of the longest opening duration (specifically 29 seconds) is set in the special figure special power timer counter. .. In the setting process, if the trigger of the current open/close execution mode is any highly accurate result and the value of the round counter is 2 or more, the information of the longest opening duration (specifically 29 seconds) is displayed. Tokudetsu Set to special timer timer counter. In the setting process, if the current open/close execution mode is triggered by any highly accurate result and the value of the round counter is "1", the value of the open/close counter of the main RAM 65 is "6". In the case of “2”, the information of the relatively short opening duration (specifically, 1 second) is set in the special figure special electric timer counter, and when the value of the opening/closing number counter of the main side RAM 65 is “1”. Sets a relatively long open duration information (specifically 6 seconds) in the special figure special power timer counter.

After that, in steps S3808 to S3809, the same processing as steps S1810 to S1811 of the special electric power closing processing (FIG. 44) in the first embodiment is executed. On the other hand, if an affirmative decision is made in step S3805, then in steps S3810 to S3812 the same processing as steps S1812 to S1814 of the special electric power closing processing (FIG. 44) in the first embodiment is executed.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, by opening and closing the special electric prize winning device 32 a plurality of times in the last round game of execution, a game ball is placed on the guide plate portion 214 of the opening/closing member 202 of the special electric prize winning device 32. In many cases, the opening/closing member 202 moves from the open position to the closed position. As a result, it is possible to give many opportunities to win the through gate 35 in the opening/closing execution mode in the case of a highly accurate result. In addition, it is possible to increase the advantage of obtaining a high-accuracy result as compared with a low-accuracy result.

In addition, since the opening times on the first half side in the round game of the last execution times are performed using a relatively short opening duration, the duration of the round games of the last execution times does not become extremely long. It becomes possible to do so. In addition, before the opening times of the special electric prize winning device 32 due to the relatively short opening duration are all completed, the winning number of game balls to the special electric winning device 32 in the final round game does not reach the winning upper limit number. It becomes possible to

In the round game of the last execution times in the opening/closing execution mode triggered by the high-accuracy result, the opening duration of the last opening times of the special electric prize winning device 32 is longer than the relatively short opening duration. Is set to. This relatively long open duration is set to a period equal to or longer than the product of the game cycle of the game ball (0.6 seconds) and the maximum winning number of round games (10), specifically 6 seconds. Is set to. It can be expected that the special electric winning device 32 wins the upper limit number of game balls during the relatively long open duration. In addition, when the game ball is awarded to the special electric prize winning device 32 in the opening time of the special electric prize winning device 32 by the relatively short opening continuation period, the special electric prize winning by the relatively long opening continuation period is performed. In the middle of the opening times of the device 32, there is a high possibility that the number of winning prizes to the special electric prize winning device 32 in the final round game of the execution time will reach the winning upper limit number.

<Another form of the thirteenth embodiment>
The round game in which the special electric winning device 32 is opened a plurality of times is not limited to the last round game, and may be the first round game or an intermediate round game. Further, the special electric winning device 32 may be opened a plurality of times in a plurality of round games.

It is not limited to the configuration in which the opening times of the relatively long opening duration occur after the opening times of the relatively short opening duration occur in one round game, and the opening times of the relatively short opening duration The opening times may only occur a plurality of times.

-For a relatively short opening duration, the game ball can reach the position on the guide plate 214 where the through gate 35 can be won, but the ball enters the entrance 45b of the special electric winning device 32. However, it may be configured such that it is set to be impossible or difficult. In this case, it is possible to create a situation in which it is possible to win the through gate 35 in a situation where it is difficult to enter the entrance 45b of the special electric winning device 32. The configuration may be applied not to a configuration in which a plurality of opening times occur in one round game, but to a configuration in which only one opening time occurs in one round game.

<Fourteenth Embodiment>
In the first embodiment, the through gate 35 is provided below the special electric winning device 32, and the opening/closing member 202 moves from the open position to the closed position in the situation where the game ball is placed on the guide plate portion 214. In addition, the game ball is configured to be able to win the through gate 35, but in the present embodiment, the target to which the game ball can be won is a ball entering portion other than the through gate 35. Hereinafter, the different configuration will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 75 is a front view of the game board 24 in this embodiment.

Similar to the first embodiment, the special electric winning device 32 is provided in the right side area PA3 of the game area PA. The special prize winning device 32 includes a passage forming body 201, an opening/closing member 202, and a guide member 203 as in the first embodiment. When the opening/closing member 202 is arranged in the closed position, the game balls cannot enter the fourth discharge passage portion 45, and the opening 213 (see FIG. 30) formed in the opening/closing member 202 cannot pass through. Then, the game ball will flow down below the special electric prize winning device 32. When the opening/closing member 202 is arranged in the open position, the game ball can be placed on the guide plate portion 214 of the open/close member 202, and the game ball on the guide plate portion 214 is the fourth discharge passage. It becomes possible to enter the portion 45. Further, in the right side area PA3, the guide nail group 241 is provided on the upstream side of the special electric winning device 32 as in the first embodiment. As a result, the game ball flowing down the right side area PA3 is guided to the receiving portion 231 of the guide member 203 by the guide nail group 241. Then, the game ball guided to the receiving portion 231 reaches the right end portion of the opening/closing member 202.

The through gate 35 is not provided below the special electric winning device 32 in the right area PA3. In the present embodiment, the through gate 35 is provided in the left side area PA2 of the game area PA, and when the left side area PA2 is compared in the same launch operation mode in which the game ball flows down, The frequency of entering the game balls is constant regardless of the game state. Further, when the shooting operation is performed so that the game ball flows down the left side area PA2, the game ball can reach the position where the second operation port 34 is provided. Therefore, when the game ball is fired so as to flow down the left side area PA2, it becomes possible to win the through gate 35, and the second operating port 34 is opened when the winning in the through gate 35 is triggered. In the case of the state, it is possible to win the second working opening 34.

By the way, in the present embodiment, the low frequency support mode and the high frequency support mode are set as the support modes for controlling the state of the universal utility article 34a of the second working port 34. In the low-frequency support mode, the frequency of the general electric utility article 34a does not become open or in the general state electric utility object 34a is relatively low. Relatively high. If the result is low, the support mode after the end of the open/close execution mode is the low frequency support mode, and if the result is high, the support mode after the end of the open/close execution mode is the high frequency support mode. ..

A first special entrance 251 and a second special entrance 252 are provided below the special electric winning device 32 in the right area PA3. The first special ball entrance 251 and the second special ball entrance 252 are provided such that openings serving as ball entrances for game balls are opened vertically upward, and members for directly opening and closing these ball entrances. Is not provided. In addition, the game ball that has entered the first special ball entrance 251 is discharged from the game area PA by being led out to the back side of the game board 24, and the game ball that has entered the second special ball entrance 252. Is discharged from the game area PA by being led out to the back side of the game board 24. In addition, the first special entrance 251 and the second special entrance 252 are juxtaposed laterally so that the first special entrance 251 is on the left side and the second special entrance 252 is on the right side. ..

The first special entrance 251 is provided with a first special detection sensor 251a for detecting a game ball entered into the first special entrance 251 and the second special entrance 252 is concerned. A second special detection sensor 252a for detecting a game ball entering the second special entrance 252 is provided. The first special detection sensor 251a and the second special detection sensor 252a are electrically connected to the main CPU 63.

FIG. 76 is a flow chart showing the ball entry detection process executed by the main CPU 63. The ball inspection process is executed in step S209 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 12).

When one game ball is detected by the first special detection sensor 251a (step S3901: YES), the counter value for 10 prize balls provided in the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S3902). The ten prize ball counter is a counter for the main CPU 63 to specify the number of times that the payout of ten game balls should be executed. When the value of the counter for 10 award balls is 1 or more, the 10 award ball command is output to the award controller 77 in the payout output process of step S217 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 12), and the 10 award balls are paid out. When the command is output once, the value of the counter for 10 prize balls is decremented by 1. When the payout control device 77 receives the 10 prize ball command, it drives and controls the payout device 76 so that 10 game balls are paid out.

When one game ball is detected by the second special detection sensor 252a (step S3903: YES), the value of the five prize ball counter provided in the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S3904). The five prize ball counter is a counter for the main CPU 63 to specify the number of times the payout of five game balls should be executed. When the value of the counter for 5 award balls is 1 or more, the 5 award ball command is output to the payout controller 77 in the payout output process of step S217 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 12), and the 5 award balls are paid out. When the command is output once, the value of the counter for 5 prize balls is decremented by 1. When the payout control device 77 receives the five prize ball command, it drives and controls the payout device 76 so that five game balls are paid out.

Note that other processing is also executed in the ball detection processing (step S3905). In other processes, the same processes as the steps S301 to S325 of the entrance detection process (FIG. 14) in the first embodiment are executed.

Returning to the explanation of the game board 24 (FIG. 75), the first special ball entrance 251 is arranged on the downstream side of the special electric prize winning device 32 and closer to the passage forming body 201 of the special electric prize winning device 32. Further, a first guide nail group 253 is provided between the opening/closing member 202 of the special electric winning device 32 and the first special ball entrance 251 by a plurality of nails 24b. The first guide nail group 253 allows the game balls that are located on the left side of the first guide nail group 253 to enter the first special ball entrance 251 and from the first guide nail group 253. Also, the game ball existing on the right side is prohibited from entering the first special entrance 251. Accordingly, when the opening/closing member 202 moves from the open position to the closed position in the situation where the game ball exists on the first range X1 near the passage forming body 201 on the guide plate portion 214 of the opening/closing member 202, the game is played. The ball can enter the first special ball entrance 251 and the other game balls cannot enter the first special ball entrance 251.

The distance dimension along the guide plate portion 214 in the first range X1 is set to be larger than the diameter of the game ball, and specifically, is twice the diameter of the game ball. However, the configuration is not limited to this, and the distance dimension along the guide plate portion 214 on the first range X1 may be less than the diameter of the game ball, and may be greater than twice the diameter of the game ball. May be

The second special entrance 252 is arranged on the downstream side of the special electric prize winning device 32 at a position which is on the right side of the first special entrance 251 but is leftward of the right end of the opening/closing member 202. Further, a second guide nail group 254 is provided between the opening/closing member 202 of the special electric winning device 32 and the second special ball entrance 252 by the plurality of nails 24b. The second guide nail group 254 allows the game balls existing on the left side of the second guide nail group 254 to enter the second special ball entrance 252, and from the second guide nail group 254. Also, regarding the game ball existing on the right side, the ball cannot enter the second special ball entrance 252. As a result, when the opening/closing member 202 moves from the open position to the closed position in the situation where the game ball exists on the second area X2 near the center on the guide plate portion 214 of the opening/closing member 202, the game ball moves to the first position. It is possible to enter the second special entrance 252, and other game balls cannot enter the second special entrance 252. In this case, even if the opening/closing member 202 moves from the open position to the closed position in the situation where the game ball exists at a position on the right side of the second range X2 on the guide plate portion 214 of the opening/closing member 202, the game is played. The ball does not enter the second special entrance 252. Further, when the opening/closing member 202 is arranged in the closed position, the game ball passes through the opening 213 of the opening/closing member 202 at a position on the right side of the second range X2, so that the game ball is the second special entry. Do not enter the ball opening 252.

The distance dimension along the guide plate portion 214 in the second range X2 is set to be larger than the diameter of the game ball, specifically, 2.5 times the diameter of the game ball. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the distance dimension along the guide plate portion 214 on the second range X2 may be less than the diameter of the game ball, and may be more than 2.5 times the diameter of the game ball. It may be a large structure.

Next, how the game ball enters the first special entrance 251 or the second special entrance 252 in the opening/closing execution mode will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. 77. FIG. 77(a) shows a period in which the opening/closing member 202 of the special electric prize winning device 32 is arranged in the open position, and FIG. 77(b) shows a game ball in the first range X1 on the guide plate portion 214 of the opening/closing member 202. 77(c) shows the period in which the game ball exists in the second range X2 on the guide plate portion 214 of the opening/closing member 202, and FIG. 77(d) shows the first special entry. The timing at which the game ball enters the ball opening 251 is shown, and FIG. 77(e) shows the timing at which the game ball enters the second special ball opening 252.

First, a case where a game ball enters the first special entrance 251 will be described. At the timing of t1, the opening/closing member 202 is arranged at the open position as shown in FIG. 77(a). After that, from timing t2 to timing t3, as shown in FIG. 77(c), a game ball exists in the second range X2 on the guide plate portion 214, and the game ball further flows down on the guide plate portion 214. By doing so, the game ball exists in the first range X1 on the guide plate portion 214 as shown in FIG. 77(b) from the timing of t3 to the timing of t4. Then, at the timing of t4 when the game ball exists in the first range X1 on the guide plate portion 214, the opening/closing member 202 moves from the open position to the closed position as shown in FIG. 77(a). As a result, the game ball enters the first special entrance 251 as shown in FIG. 77(d) at the timing of t5. Then, when the game balls enter the first special ball inlet 251, 10 game balls are paid out.

Next, a case where a game ball enters the second special entrance 252 will be described. At the timing of t6, the opening/closing member 202 is arranged at the open position as shown in FIG. 77(a). After that, the game ball exists in the second range X2 on the guide plate portion 214 as shown in FIG. 77C from the timing of t7 to the timing of t8. Then, the opening/closing member 202 moves from the open position to the closed position as shown in FIG. 77(a) at the timing of t8 when the game ball exists in the second range X2 on the guide plate portion 214. As a result, the game ball enters the second special entrance 252 as shown in FIG. 77(e) at the timing of t9. Then, the game balls are inserted into the second special ball inlet 252, whereby the payout of the five game balls is executed.

According to this embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are exhibited.

By shifting to the opening/closing execution mode, it is possible not only to enter the game balls into the special electric prize winning device 32, but also to enter the game balls into the special ball entrances 251 and 252. Then, the payout of the game balls is executed not only when the game balls enter the special electric prize winning device 32 but also when the game balls enter the special ball entrances 251 and 252. This makes it possible to increase the number of game balls paid out in the opening/closing execution mode, and increase the advantage of the opening/closing execution mode.

The special ball entrances 251 and 252 are provided on the downstream side of the special electric prize winning device 32 and at positions where the special electric prize winning device 32 can enter the game balls at the timing of switching from one of the open state and the closed state to the other. ing. As a result, the game ball leaked as a target for the special electric prize winning device 32 enters the special entrance ports 251 and 252, and the game balls enter the special entrance ports 251 and 252, whereby the game balls are paid out. Will be executed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the player's disadvantageous feeling that a game ball leaked from the ball entry target of the special electric winning device 32 is generated.

When the opening/closing member 202 of the special electric prize winning device 32 moves from one of the open position and the closed position to the other, the game ball placed on the guide plate portion 214 of the opening/closing member 202 can enter the special entrance ports 251 and 252. Becomes As a result, in the opening/closing execution mode, the player does not only determine whether or not the game ball enters the fourth discharge passage portion 45 of the special electric winning device 32, but the game ball is placed on the guide plate portion 214. In this state, attention is paid to whether the opening/closing member 202 moves from one of the open position and the closed position to the other, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the open/close execution mode.

At the timing when the special electric winning device 32 switches from the open state to the closed state, an opportunity to enter a game ball into the special entrance ports 251 and 252 is generated. As a result, it is possible to increase the player's attention not only when the special electric winning device 32 is in the open state but also at the timing when it is switched to the closed state.

The guide plate portion 214 of the opening/closing member 202 is formed so that the game balls placed on the guide plate portion 214 flow down to the left along the guide plate portion 214. Then, the special ball entrances 251 and 252 are mounted when the opening/closing member 202 is moved from the open position to the closed position in the state where the game balls are mounted on the partial ranges X1 and X2 of the guide plate portion 214. The game ball is provided at a position where it can enter by dropping downward. In this case, in order for the game balls to enter the special ball inlets 251 and 252, not only the game balls are placed on the guide plate portion 214 in the situation where the opening/closing member 202 is placed in the open position, but also the placement thereof. It is necessary to move the opening/closing member 202 from the open position to the closed position at an exquisite timing when the playing game balls are present in the partial ranges X1 and X2. As a result, the player pays attention to the relationship between the position of the game ball on the guide plate portion 214 and the switching timing of the state of the opening/closing member 202, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the opening/closing execution mode. Becomes

A guide nail group 241 that guides the game ball that has flowed into the right side area PA3 to the right end side of the opening/closing member 202 is provided on the upstream side of the special electric winning device 32. Then, in the guide plate portion 214, the ranges X1 and X2 in which the game balls can enter the special ball inlets 251 and 252 are set to be biased to the left end side of the opening/closing member 202. Thereby, in order for the game ball to enter the special ball inlets 251 and 252, the opening/closing member 202 is moved from the open position to the closed position at an exquisite timing while the game ball is flowing down on the guide plate portion 214. Need to move. Therefore, the player pays attention to the movement of the game ball on the guide plate portion 214, and the interest of the game in the opening/closing execution mode can be improved.

In addition, the entrance portion 45b of the fourth discharge passage portion 45 in the special electric prize winning device 32 is located to the left of the ranges X1 and X2 in which the game balls can enter the special entrance ports 251 and 252 of the guide plate portion 214. Exists in. As a result, the game balls that have been placed on the guide plate portion 214 but have not reached the entrance portion 45b will enter the special entrance openings 251 and 252. Therefore, the player's disadvantageous feeling that the game ball placed on the guide plate portion 214 does not win the special electric prize winning device 32, conversely, the prize is given to the special ball entrances 251 and 252. It becomes possible to change into a profit.

A first special entrance 251 and a second special entrance 252 are provided as special entrances 251 and 252 that can be entered when the opening/closing execution mode is set, and the first special entrance 251 is provided. The number of game balls to be paid out is different depending on whether the game ball has entered the second special ball entrance 252 or not. Then, when the first condition is satisfied in the opening/closing execution mode, the game ball enters the first special entrance 251 and when the second condition is satisfied in the opening/closing execution mode, the game is played in the second special entrance 252. A ball enters. Thereby, the player not only expects the game balls to enter the special ball entrances 251 and 252 in the opening/closing execution mode, but also to the first special ball entrance 251 on the side where the number of payouts of the game balls is large. You will expect the game ball to enter. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the opening/closing execution mode.

The first special ball entrance 251 allows the game ball to enter when the opening/closing member 202 moves from the open position to the closed position while the game ball is placed in the first range X1 of the guide plate portion 214. It is provided in the position. In addition, the second special ball entrance 252 can enter the game ball when the opening/closing member 202 moves from the open position to the closed position while the game ball is mounted on the second range X2 of the guide plate portion 214. It is provided at the position. This not only expects that the opening/closing member 202 moves from the open position to the closed position in the state where the game ball is placed in either the first range X1 or the second range X2, but also in the first range X1. It is expected that the opening/closing member 202 moves from the open position to the closed position in the state where the game ball is placed, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In the configuration in which the game balls that have flowed into the right side area PA3 are guided to the right end side of the opening/closing member 202 by providing the guiding nail group 241, the second range X2 is set to the lateral center side of the opening/closing member 202. At the same time, the first range X1 is set at a position offset to the left end side of the opening/closing member 202. Further, the entrance portion 45b of the special prize winning device 32 is present on the left side of the opening/closing member 202. As a result, the game balls that are located closer to the entrance portion 45b of the special electric winning device 32 on the guide plate portion 214 are more likely to enter the first special entrance opening 251 in which the number of payouts is larger. In this case, it is possible to increase the profit for the player in a situation in which the disadvantageous feeling that the game ball has not entered the entrance portion 45b of the special electric prize winning device 32 regrettably increases.

<Another form of the fourteenth embodiment>
-Only one of the first special entrance 251 and the second special entrance 252 may be provided. Further, in addition to the first special entrance 251 and the second special entrance 252, a third special entrance is provided, and it opens and closes when the game ball is placed in the third range of the guide plate portion 214. When the member 202 moves from the open position to the closed position, the game ball may enter the third special ball entrance.

It is not limited to the configuration in which only the payout of the game ball is executed regardless of whether the game ball enters the first special entrance port 251 or the second special entrance port 252. For example, the first special entrance When a game ball enters the ball opening 251, the first hold information or the second hold information that triggers the win/loss determination process is acquired, and when the game ball enters the second special entrance 252, The payout of gaming balls may be executed. In this case, different benefits are provided depending on whether the game ball enters the first special entrance 251 or the second special entrance 252.

Further, for example, when a game ball enters the first special entrance 251 one of the first holding information and the second holding information is acquired, and the game ball enters the second special entrance 252. In this case, the other of the first hold information and the second hold information may be acquired. As a result, even if any of the special ball entrances 251 and 252 has a game ball, the hold information that triggers the winning/judgment determination process is acquired, but the type of the acquired hold information is the first special ball. There is a difference between the case where a game ball enters the mouth 251 and the case where a game ball enters the second special entrance port 252.

Further, for example, regardless of whether the game ball has entered the first special entrance 251 or the second special entrance 252, although the reservation information on the universal figure side is acquired, the acquired hold on the general figure side is acquired. A configuration may be adopted in which the probability that the second operating port 34 is in the universally open state differs with respect to the information.

The first range X1 is not limited to the configuration that is narrower than the second range X2, and the width of the first range X1 and the width of the second range X2 may be the same or substantially the same. The first range X1 may be wider than the second range X2.

-The game balls that have entered the special entrance ports 251 and 252 are not limited to the configuration in which they are led out to the back side of the game board 24, and the special entrance ports 251 and 252 are provided in a gate shape. Thus, the game balls that have entered the special ball inlets 251 and 252 may be configured to continue flowing down in the game area PA thereafter. This makes it easier for the game ball to reach the lower area PA4.

<Fifteenth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, instead of the special electric winning device 32, a first special electric winning device 261 and a second special electric winning device 262 are provided. Hereinafter, the different configuration will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 78 is a front view of the game board 24 in this embodiment.

In place of the special electric prize winning device 32, a first special electric prize winning device 261 and a second special electric prize winning device 262 are provided in the right area PA3 of the game area PA. The first special electric prize winning device 261 and the second special electric prize winning device 262 are vertically arranged side by side with the first special electric prize winning device 261 on the upper side and the second special electric prize winning device 262 on the lower side. Further, in the first embodiment, the through gate 35 is provided as a ball-in portion that causes the opening of the universal utility object 34a of the second operating port 34, but in the present embodiment, the universal gate is provided. A first through gate 263 and a second through gate 264 are provided as a ball entering portion that causes the object 34a to be opened. The first through gate 263 is provided on the left side of the first special electric winning device 261 and the second through gate 264 is provided on the left side of the second special electric winning device 262.

The configuration of the first special electric winning device 261 and the configuration of the first through gate 263 will be described with reference to FIGS. 79(a) and 79(b). 79(a) and 79(b) are sectional views taken along the line AA of FIG. 78.

A first special winning opening 265 is formed in the game board 24 so as to penetrate the game board 24 in the front-rear direction. The position where the first special winning opening 265 is formed is a position closer to the variable display unit 36 in the right side area PA3, but a position to the right of the first through gate 263. A first special electric winning device 261 is provided so as to prevent or allow the game balls to enter the first big winning opening 265. The first special prize winning device 261 includes a first guide plate 271 that is provided below the first special winning opening 265 so as to penetrate the game board 24 in the front-rear direction. The first guide plate 271 is provided so as to be movable in the front-rear direction by being driven by a driving unit (not shown), and a blocking position where the amount of protrusion from the board surface of the game board 24 to the front side of the pachinko machine 10 is minimized. The position is slid to the front of the pachinko machine 10 from the blocking position, and is moved to a guide position where the amount of protrusion from the board surface of the game board 24 to the front side of the pachinko machine 10 is maximum.

In the game board 24, a first ball receiving portion 272 is provided above the right end of the first guide plate 271, and in the right area PA3, above the first special electric prize winning device 261 from the upper area PA1 to the right. A first guide nail group 267 for guiding all the game balls that have flowed into the area PA3 to the first ball receiving portion 272 is provided (see FIG. 78). The first guide nail group 267 is formed by arranging a plurality of nails 24b so as to be inclined downward to the right. All the game balls that have flowed into the right side area PA3 by the first guide nail group 267 are guided to the first ball receiving portion 272. The distance dimension between the front end of the first ball receiving portion 272 and the window panel 52 is set to be larger than the diameter of the game ball. The upper surface of the first ball receiving portion 272 is inclined downward toward the front side of the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, the game ball that has reached the upper surface of the first ball receiving portion 272 will flow down toward the front side of the pachinko machine 10 by its own weight.

When the first guide plate 271 is arranged at the blocking position, as shown in FIG. 79(a), the distance dimension between the front end of the first guide plate 271 and the window panel 52 is larger than the diameter of the game ball. Is also a large size. Then, in this blocking position, the front end of the first guide plate 271 is present on the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 with respect to the front end of the first ball receiving portion 272. Therefore, the game ball that has reached the upper surface of the first ball receiving portion 272 in the situation where the first guide plate 271 is arranged at the blocking position is basically through the space between the first ball receiving portion 272 and the window panel 52. It will fall below the first ball receiving portion 272. In addition, the game ball guided by the first guide nail group 267 bounces on the first ball receiving portion 272 so that the pachinko machine 10 front side of the board surface of the game board 24 in the first guide plate 271 arranged at the blocking position. It is also envisioned that it will rest on the upper surface of the region that projects into. On the other hand, in the first guide plate 271 arranged at the blocking position, the upper surface of the region projecting to the front side of the pachinko machine 10 with respect to the board surface of the game board 24 is inclined downward to the front side of the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, even if the game ball is placed on the upper surface of the first guide plate 271 arranged at the blocking position, the game ball does not enter the first big winning opening 265 and the first through gate 263, and the first guide plate. It will fall below the first guide plate 271 from between the front end of 271 and the window panel 52. With the above configuration, when the first guide plate 271 is arranged at the blocking position, the occurrence of the prize in the first special winning opening 265 is prevented and the occurrence of the prize in the first through gate 263 is prevented. To be done.

When the first guide plate 271 is arranged at the guide position, as shown in FIG. 79(b), the distance between the front end of the first guide plate 271 and the window panel 52 is smaller than the radius of the game ball. Is also a small size. At this guiding position, the front end of the first guide plate 271 is located on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 with respect to the front end of the first ball receiving portion 272. Therefore, the game ball that has reached the upper surface of the first ball receiving portion 272 in the situation where the first guide plate 271 is arranged at the guide position projects toward the front side of the pachinko machine 10 with respect to the board surface of the game board 24 in the first guide plate 271. It will be placed on the upper surface of the area.

On the upper surface of the projecting area 273 projecting to the front side of the pachinko machine 10 with respect to the board surface of the game board 24 when being arranged at the guiding position in the first guide plate 271, a boundary portion for changing the inclination direction of the upper surface. 274 is formed. With the boundary portion 274 as a boundary, the upper surface of the projecting area 273 is the first guiding area 275 existing in front of the first ball receiving portion 272 and the left side of the first guiding area 275 and the first big winning. It is divided into a second guiding region 276 leading to the mouth 265 and a third guiding region 277 left of the first guiding region 275 and in front of the second guiding region 276 and leading to the first through gate 263. There is. The upper surface of the first guiding region 275 is inclined downward to the left. The left end of the first guide area 275 is in contact with both the right end of the second guide area 276 and the right end of the third guide area 277. As a result, the game ball guided from the first ball receiving portion 272 to the first guiding region 275 flows down to the second guiding region 276 or the third guiding region 277 by its own weight. In this case, the range in which the left end of the first guide region 275 is in contact with the right end of the second guide region 276 is wider than the range in which the left end of the first guide region 275 is in contact with the right end of the third guide region 277. Therefore, the game ball guided by the first guide area 275 is more likely to flow into the second guide area 276 than the third guide area 277. However, the game balls guided by the first guide area 275 flow into the third guide area 277 at a predetermined frequency (specifically, one out of four).

The second guiding area 276 has an upper surface inclined downward to the left rear so as to guide the game ball placed on the upper surface of the second guiding area 276 to the first special winning opening 265. Thereby, the game ball placed on the upper surface of the second guiding area 276 easily wins the first big winning opening 265. The game ball that has won the first special winning opening 265 is detected by a detection sensor (not shown) provided corresponding to the first special winning opening 265. This detection sensor is electrically connected to the main CPU 63, and the main CPU 63 identifies whether or not there is a winning at the first special winning opening 265 based on the detection result of the detection sensor. Then, in the opening/closing execution mode triggered by the round game or the small hit result in which the first special winning opening 265 is an opening target, it is specified that one gaming ball has entered the first special winning opening 265. In this case, the value of the winning counter of the main RAM 65 is decremented by 1. When the value of the winning counter becomes "0", it is specified that the winning of the upper limit number of winnings has occurred similarly to the first embodiment, and the opening/closing execution mode is triggered by the result of the round game or the small hit. To finish.

The third guidance region 277 is inclined downward to the left. Here, when the first guide plate 271 is arranged at the guide position, the first guide plate 271 exists in the lateral position from the right end of the right area PA3 to the right end of the first through gate 263. Will be done. Further, as described above, the distance dimension between the front end portion of the first guide plate 271 arranged at the guide position and the window panel 52 is smaller than the radius of the game ball. Therefore, unless the game ball placed on the upper surface of the third guidance region 277 moves to the second guidance region 276 for some reason on the way, it flows down toward the first through gate 263 by its own weight and reaches the first through gate 263. It will be a prize. The game ball that has won the first through gate 263 is detected by a detection sensor (not shown) provided corresponding to the first through gate 263. This detection sensor is electrically connected to the main side CPU 63, and the main side CPU 63 specifies whether or not there is a winning in the first through gate 263 based on the detection result of the detection sensor. Then, when it is specified that one game ball has entered the first through gate 263, the general-university reservation area 65c does not store the maximum number of general-purpose-side reservation information items, The numerical value information of the random number counter C4 is stored in the universal figure holding area 65c as holding information on the side of the universal figure.

With the above configuration, in the opening/closing execution mode triggered by the round game in which the first special electric prize winning device 261 is controlled or the small hit result in which the first special electric prize winning device 261 is controlled, the first guide plate 271 is When arranged in the guide position, the game ball flowing into the right side area PA3 is guided to one of the first big winning opening 265 and the first through gate 263, and the first big winning opening 265 and the first through gate 263. The winning of one of them will surely occur. When the winning in the first big winning opening 265 occurs, 1 is subtracted from the remaining number of the winning upper limit number as in the first embodiment, and the payout of 15 game balls, which is the specific number, is executed. R. When the winning of the first through gate 263 occurs, a trigger for acquiring the hold information on the universal figure side occurs. As a result, when the first special electric winning device 261 is controlled, the player can win both the first big winning opening 265 and the first through gate 263. It is expected, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Next, the configuration of the second special electric winning device 262 and the configuration of the second through gate 264 will be described with reference to FIG. 80(a). 80A is a cross-sectional view taken along the line BB of FIG. 78.

A second special winning opening 266 is formed in the game board 24 so as to penetrate the game board 24 in the front-rear direction. The position where the second special winning opening 266 is formed is a position below the first special electric winning device 261 and the first through gate 263, and a position vertically below the first special winning opening 265. The position where the second special winning opening 266 is formed is a position closer to the variable display unit 36 in the right side area PA3, but a position to the right of the second through gate 264.

A second special electric winning device 262 is provided so as to prevent or allow a game ball to enter the second special winning opening 266. The second special electric winning device 262 includes a second guide plate 281 which is provided below the second special winning opening 266 so as to penetrate the game board 24 in the front-rear direction. The second guide plate 281 is provided so as to be movable in the front-rear direction by being driven by a driving unit (not shown), and has a blocking position where the amount of protrusion from the board surface of the game board 24 to the front side of the pachinko machine 10 is minimized. The position is slid to the front of the pachinko machine 10 from the blocking position, and is moved to a guide position where the amount of protrusion from the board surface of the game board 24 to the front side of the pachinko machine 10 is maximum.

In the game board 24, a second ball receiving portion 282 is provided above the right end of the second guide plate 281, and in the right area PA3, above the second special electric prize winning device 262, the first big prize. A second guide nail group 268 is provided for guiding all of the game balls that have flowed in below the first special electric winning device 261 without winning the mouth 265 and the first through gate 263 to the second ball receiving portion 282. (See FIG. 78). The second guide nail group 268 is formed by arranging a plurality of nails 24b so as to be inclined downward to the right. All the game balls flowing down below the first special electric winning device 261 in the right side area PA3 are guided to the second ball receiving portion 282 by the second guide nail group 268. The distance between the front end of the second ball receiving portion 282 and the window panel 52 is set to be larger than the diameter of the game ball. The upper surface of the second ball receiving portion 282 is inclined downward toward the front side of the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, the game ball that has reached the upper surface of the second ball receiving portion 282 will flow down toward the front side of the pachinko machine 10 by its own weight.

When the second guide plate 281 is arranged at the blocking position, the distance dimension between the front end portion of the second guide plate 281 and the window panel 52 is larger than the diameter of the game ball, like the first guide plate 271. It will be a large size. Then, in this blocking position, the front end of the second guide plate 281 is located on the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 with respect to the front end of the second ball receiving portion 282. Therefore, the game ball that has reached the upper surface of the second ball receiving portion 282 in the situation where the second guide plate 281 is arranged at the blocking position is basically through the space between the second ball receiving portion 282 and the window panel 52. It will fall below the second ball receiving portion 282. In addition, the game ball guided by the second guide nail group 268 bounces on the second ball receiving portion 282, so that the pachinko machine 10 front side of the board surface of the game board 24 in the second guide plate 281 arranged at the blocking position. It is also envisioned that it will rest on the upper surface of the region that projects into. On the other hand, in the second guide plate 281 arranged at the blocking position, the upper surface of the region projecting to the front side of the pachinko machine 10 with respect to the board surface of the game board 24 is inclined downward toward the front side of the pachinko machine 10. .. Therefore, even if the game ball is placed on the upper surface of the second guide plate 281 arranged at the blocking position, the game ball does not enter the second big winning opening 266 and the second through gate 264, and the second guide plate It will fall below the second guide plate 281 from between the front end of 281 and the window panel 52. With the above configuration, when the second guide plate 281 is arranged at the blocking position, the generation of a prize in the second special winning opening 266 and the generation of a prize in the second through gate 264 are blocked. To be done.

When the second guide plate 281 is arranged at the guide position, as shown in FIG. 80(a), the distance between the front end of the second guide plate 281 and the window panel 52 is smaller than the radius of the game ball. Is also a small size. Then, at this guiding position, the front end of the second guide plate 281 is located on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 with respect to the front end of the second ball receiving portion 282. Therefore, the game ball that has reached the upper surface of the second ball receiving portion 282 in the situation where the second guide plate 281 is arranged in the guide position protrudes toward the front side of the pachinko machine 10 from the board surface of the game board 24 in the second guide plate 281. It will be placed on the upper surface of the area.

On the upper surface of the projecting region 283 projecting to the front side of the pachinko machine 10 with respect to the board surface of the game board 24 when the second guide plate 281 is arranged at the guide position, a boundary portion for changing the inclination direction of the upper surface. 284 is formed. With the boundary portion 284 as a boundary, the upper surface of the projecting area 283 is the first guiding area 285 existing in front of the second ball receiving portion 282 and the left side of the first guiding area 285 and the second big winning prize. It is divided into a second guiding area 286 leading to the mouth 266 and a third guiding area 287 to the left of the first guiding area 285 and in front of the second guiding area 286 and leading to the second through gate 264. There is. The upper surface of the first guiding region 285 is inclined downward to the left. The left end of the first guide area 285 is in contact with both the right end of the second guide area 286 and the right end of the third guide area 287. As a result, the game ball guided from the second ball receiving portion 282 to the first guide area 285 flows down to the second guide area 286 or the third guide area 287 by its own weight. In this case, the range in which the left end of the first guide region 285 is in contact with the right end of the second guide region 286 is wider than the range in which the left end of the first guide region 285 is in contact with the right end of the third guide region 287. Therefore, the game ball guided by the first guide area 285 is more likely to flow into the second guide area 286 than the third guide area 287. However, the game balls guided by the first guide area 285 flow into the third guide area 287 at a predetermined frequency (for example, one out of seven).

The second guiding area 286 has an upper surface inclined downward to the left rear so as to guide the game ball placed on the upper surface of the second guiding area 286 to the second special winning opening 266. As a result, the game ball placed on the upper surface of the second guide area 286 is likely to win the second big winning opening 266. The game ball that has won the second special winning opening 266 is detected by a detection sensor (not shown) provided corresponding to the second special winning opening 266. This detection sensor is electrically connected to the main CPU 63, and the main CPU 63 specifies whether or not there is a winning at the second special winning opening 266 based on the detection result of the detection sensor. Then, in the opening/closing execution mode triggered by the round game or the small hit result in which the second special winning opening 266 is an opening target, it is specified that one game ball has entered the second special winning opening 266. In this case, the value of the winning counter of the main RAM 65 is decremented by 1. When the value of the winning counter becomes "0", it is specified that the winning of the upper limit number of winnings has occurred similarly to the first embodiment, and the opening/closing execution mode is triggered by the result of the round game or the small hit. To finish.

The third guidance region 287 is inclined downward to the left. Here, when the second guide plate 281 is arranged at the guide position, the second guide plate 281 is present in the lateral position from the right end of the right area PA3 to the right end of the second through gate 264. Will be done. Further, as described above, the distance dimension between the front end portion of the second guide plate 281 arranged at the guide position and the window panel 52 is smaller than the radius of the game ball. Therefore, unless the game ball placed on the upper surface of the third guidance region 287 moves to the second guidance region 286 for some reason on the way, it flows down toward the second through gate 264 by its own weight, and onto the second through gate 264. It will be a prize. The game ball that has won the second through gate 264 is detected by a detection sensor (not shown) provided corresponding to the second through gate 264. This detection sensor is electrically connected to the main CPU 63, and the main CPU 63 specifies whether or not there is a winning in the second through gate 264 based on the detection result of the detection sensor. Then, when it is specified that one game ball has entered the second through gate 264, the general electric power is held on condition that the maximum number of general-use-side holding information is not stored in the general-use holding area 65c. The numerical value information of the random number counter C4 is stored in the universal figure holding area 65c as holding information on the side of the universal figure.

With the above configuration, in the opening/closing execution mode triggered by the round game in which the second special electric prize winning device 262 is a control target or the small hit result in which the second special electric prize winning device 262 is a control target, the second guide plate 281 is When arranged in the guide position, the game ball that has flowed into the right side area PA3 is guided to either the second special winning opening 266 or the second through gate 264, and the second large winning opening 266 or the second through gate 264. The winning of one of them will surely occur. When a prize is generated in the second special winning opening 266, the remaining number of the upper limit number of winnings is subtracted by 1 and the payout of 15 game balls, which is a specific number, is executed as in the first embodiment. It When a prize is awarded to the second through gate 264, a trigger for acquiring the hold information on the universal figure side occurs. As a result, when the second special electric winning device 262 is a control target, the player can both win the second special winning opening 266 and win the second through gate 264. It is expected, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Here, the first special electric prize winning device 261 and the second special electric prize winning device 262 will be compared with reference to FIG. 80( a) and FIG. 80( b ). FIG. 80(a) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line BB of FIG. 78 as already described, showing the second special electricity winning device 262 when the second guide plate 281 is arranged at the guide position, and FIG. 80(b). 78A is a sectional view taken along the line AA in FIG. 78 and shows the first special electric prize winning device 261 when the first guide plate 271 is arranged at the guide position.

As shown in FIGS. 80A and 80B, the size of the left end of the first guide area 275 in the first guide plate 271 and the size of the left end of the first guide area 275 in the second guide plate 281 are the same. Or, they are almost the same. In this case, the ratio of the range in which the right end of the third guide region 277 is in contact with the entire left end of the first guide region 275 in the first guide plate 271, is the ratio of the range of the first guide region 285 in the second guide plate 281. It is larger than the ratio of the range in which the right end of the third guiding region 287 is in contact with the entire left end. And in relation to the configuration, when the first special electric winning device 261 is in an open state (that is, when the first guide plate 271 is arranged at the guide position), the game placed on the upper surface of the first guide plate 271. The probability that the ball is guided to the first through gate 263 is that the second special charging device 262 is in the open state (that is, the second guiding plate 281 is arranged at the guiding position). It is higher than the probability that the game ball placed on the upper surface is guided to the second through gate 264. On the contrary, when the first special electric prize winning device 261 is in the open state (that is, when the first guide plate 271 is arranged at the guide position), the game ball placed on the upper surface of the first guide plate 271 is the first big prize. The probability of being guided to the mouth 265 is a game placed on the upper surface of the second guide plate 281 when the second special electric winning device 262 is in the open state (that is, when the second guide plate 281 is arranged at the guide position). It is lower than the probability that the ball is guided to the second special winning opening 266. As a result, according to the type of the special electric prize winning device to be controlled among the first special electric prize winning device 261 and the second special electric prize winning device 262, the easiness of winning a prize in the special winning openings 265 and 266 and the through gate 263. , 264 can be made different in easiness of winning.

As described above, the first guide nail group 267 is provided above the first special electric winning device 261. The first guide nail group 267 is located from the right end of the variable display unit 36 to the front of the first ball receiving portion 272. It extends over (see FIG. 78). On the other hand, the first through gate 263 is provided below the first guide nail group 267 in the right side area PA3 and on the left side of the first special electricity winning device 261. Therefore, the game ball that has flowed into the right side area PA3 will not win the first through gate 263 without passing through the area where the first special electric winning device 261 is provided.

On the other hand, the second guide nail group 268 provided between the first special electric prize winning device 261 and the second special electric prize winning device 262 has a game ball that has flowed into the lower part of the first special electric prize winning device 261 and is placed in the second ball receiving portion 282. Although provided so as to be guided, the second guide nail group 268 does not enter the first through gate 263 side from the left end of the first special electric winning device 261 (see FIG. 78). Then, a second through gate 264 is provided at a position vertically below the first through gate 263, and the first through gate 263 is configured such that the game ball passes through a gate hole penetrating in the vertical direction. Therefore, the game ball that wins the first through gate 263 can win the second through gate 264, and not only that, the game ball that wins the first through gate 263 can easily win the second through gate 264. When one game ball wins the first through gate 263 and wins the second through gate 264, it is a general condition that the upper limit number of reservation information on the general map side is not acquired in the general map reservation area 65c. Two pieces of pending information on the figure side are acquired. Therefore, from this point as well, the holding information on the universal figure side is more easily acquired when the first special electric prize winning device 261 is the control target than when the second special electric prize winning device 262 is the control target.

Next, the contents of the hit/miss table in this embodiment will be described with reference to the explanatory diagram of FIG. 81. 81A shows a low probability table for the first special figure, FIG. 81B shows a high probability table for the first special figure, and FIG. 81C shows a table for the second special figure. FIG. 81(d) shows a high-probability/probability table for the second special figure.

Similar to the first embodiment, as the win/loss table for the first special figure, as shown in FIGS. 81(a) and 81(b), the low certainty win/loss table for the first special figure and the first special figure High-accuracy/probability table for use. Only the big hit result and the out-of-match result are set as the game results in the low-probability/probability table for the first special map and the high-probability/probability table for the first special map. The probability that the jackpot result is selected is set higher than that in the low probability table for the first special figure.

Similar to the first embodiment, as the win/loss table for the second special figure, as shown in FIG. 81(c) and FIG. 81(d), the low certainty win/no table for the second special figure and the second special figure And a highly accurate hit/miss table for use. In the low accuracy hit/miss table for the second special figure and the high accuracy hit/miss table for the second special figure, a big hit result, a first small hit result, and a second small hit result are set as a game result. .. The probability of selecting the jackpot result is set to be higher in the high probability hit table for the second special figure than in the low probability hit table for the second special figure. On the other hand, the probability of selecting either the first small hit result or the second small hit result is set to be higher in the low probability table for the second special figure than in the high probability table for the second special figure. ing.

Next, an execution mode of the open/close execution mode will be described. 82(a) and 82(b) are explanatory views for explaining an execution mode of the opening/closing execution mode.

Also in the present embodiment, as in the first embodiment, as a jackpot result, as shown in FIG. 82(a), 2R low accuracy result, 2R high accuracy result, 4R low accuracy result, 4R high accuracy result, 6R There are low accuracy results, 6R high accuracy results, 10R low accuracy results, 10R high accuracy results, 16R low accuracy results, and 16R high accuracy results. The number of round games in the opening/closing execution mode, the upper limit number of winnings in the round games, the open duration period and the interval period of each round game when the respective jackpot results are obtained are the same as those in the first embodiment. On the other hand, in the opening/closing execution mode, the types of the special electric prize winning devices 261 and 262 to be controlled differ depending on the type of the jackpot result. Specifically, in the opening and closing execution mode triggered by any of the 2R high-accuracy result, the 4R high-accuracy result, the 6R high-accuracy result, the 10R high-accuracy result and the 16R high-accuracy result, the first special electric prize winning device in each round game. 261 becomes the control target, while in the open/close execution mode triggered by any of 2R low accuracy result, 4R low accuracy result, 6R low accuracy result, 10R low accuracy result and 16R low accuracy result, each round game is executed. The second special electric winning device 262 is the control target. As a result, the hold information on the universal figure side is more likely to be acquired in the opening/closing execution mode when the high-accuracy result is obtained than when the low-accuracy result is obtained. On the other hand, when the high-accuracy result is obtained, it is less likely that a prize is won in the special winning openings 265 and 266 in the opening/closing execution mode.

Here, the open duration of each round game is set to 29 seconds, and the winning upper limit number of each round game is set to 10. In this case, since the game ball has a firing cycle of 0.6 seconds, about 48 game balls can be supplied to the position of the first special electric prize winning device 261 by the time the opening continuation period of each round game elapses. On the other hand, as already described, three game balls out of the four game balls guided to the first guide area 275 of the first guide plate 271 in the first special electric winning device 261 have the first big winning opening 265. And one gaming ball wins the first through gate 263. Then, 36 out of 48, which is 3/4, is calculated to be guided to the first special winning opening 265, and this number is larger than the upper limit number of winning. Therefore, even if the first special electric prize winning device 261 is controlled, the upper limit number of game balls in each round game can be won in the first special winning opening 265. By the way, in each round game, while the guide plates 271,281 of the special electric prize winning devices 261 and 262 are held in the guide position, the game balls that have reached the ball receiving portions 272 and 282 are guided to the corresponding through gates 263 and 264. When the game ball reaches the ball receiving portion 272, 282, it is set to a period longer than the shortest period required to drop from the left end of the guide plate 271, 281 toward the corresponding through gate 263, 264 when the game ball is reached. Has been done.

As described above, in the present embodiment, as the small hit result, the first small hit result and the second small hit result are set as shown in FIG. 82(b). When the small hit result is obtained, the upper limit number of winnings in the opening/closing execution mode, the opening continuation period, the number of opening times, and the interval period are all the same. On the other hand, in the open/close execution mode, the types of the special electric prize winning devices 261 and 262 to be controlled differ depending on the type of the small hit result. Specifically, in the opening/closing execution mode triggered by the result of the first small hit, the first special electric winning device 261 is controlled, whereas in the opening/closing execution mode triggered by the result of the second small hit, the second special electric The winning device 262 is the control target. As a result, when the first small hit result is obtained, the holding information on the universal figure side is more easily acquired in the opening/closing execution mode than when the second small hit result is obtained. On the other hand, when the result of the first small hit is smaller than that of the result of the second small hit, it is less likely that the winning at the special winning openings 265, 266 will occur in the opening/closing execution mode. By the way, during each opening time of the opening and closing execution mode triggered by the small hit result, the game balls that have reached the ball receiving portions 272, 282 during the period in which the guide plates 271, 281 of the special electric prize winning devices 261 and 262 are held in the guide position. When the game balls are guided to the corresponding through gates 263, 264, the game balls reach the ball receiving portions 272, 282, and then fall out from the left ends of the guide plates 271, 281 toward the corresponding through gates 263, 264. It is set to be longer than the shortest period required until.

FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing a special electric open setting process executed by the main CPU 63. The opening setting process is executed in step S1608 of the special electric power start process (FIG. 42) and step S1810 of the special electric power closing process (FIG. 44).

First, it is determined whether or not the control target this time is the first special electric prize winning device 261 (step S4001). When the opening/closing execution mode of this time is triggered by any high-accuracy result or the first small hit result, the first special electric prize winning device 261 is the control target, and the opening/closing execution mode of this time is any low-accuracy result or When the second small hit result is used as an opportunity, the second special electric prize winning device 262 is a control target.

When a positive determination is made in step S4001, the opening setting process of the first special electric prize winning device 261 is executed (step S4002). Specifically, a drive signal is transmitted to the drive means of the first special electric prize winning device 261 so that the first guide plate 271 of the first special electric prize winning device 261 is arranged at the guiding position. On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in step S4001, the opening setting process of the second special electric winning device 262 is executed (step S4003). Specifically, a drive signal is transmitted to the drive means of the second special electric prize winning device 262 so that the second guide plate 281 of the second special electric prize winning device 262 is arranged at the guiding position. As a result, the special electric prize winning devices 261 and 262 corresponding to the big hit result or the small hit result that triggered the opening/closing execution mode are opened.

According to this embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are exhibited.

Since it is possible to enter the game balls into the through gates 263, 264 when the special electric prize winning devices 261 and 262 are in the open state, when the special electric prize winning devices 261 and 262 are in the open state, the game is played. The person expects to win both the special electric prize winning devices 261 and 262 and the through gates 263 and 264. Therefore, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game in a situation where the special electric prize winning devices 261 and 262 are in the open state.

The through gates 263 and 264 are game balls placed on the guide plates 271 and 272 arranged at the guide positions, and the game flows down to a side different from the special winning opening 265 and 266 side on the guide plates 271 and 272. It is provided at a position where a ball can enter. As a result, the player's attention to the game balls placed on the guide plates 271, 272 can be increased, and the interest of the game can be improved.

The game ball that has flowed into the right side area PA3 is guided to the right end side of the guide plates 271 and 272 by the guide nail groups 267 and 268. In this case, the special winning openings 265, 266 and the through gates 263, 264 are provided on the left side of the guide plates 271, 272. As a result, it becomes possible for the player to pay attention to how the game ball flows down on the guide plates 271, 272.

The area of the guide plates 271, 272 that allows the game balls to enter the through gates 263, 264 is to the left of the special winning openings 265, 266, that is, the tip of the game balls on the guide plates 271, 272 in the direction of flow down. Exists on the side. As a result, the player's disadvantageous feeling that the game balls placed on the guide plates 271, 272 did not win the big winning openings 265, 266, and conversely, the winning of the through gates 263, 264 occurs. It becomes possible to change it to a sense of profit.

A first special electric prize winning device 261 and a second special electric prize winning device 262 are provided as the special electric prize winning devices 261 and 262, and a first through gate 263 and a second through gate 264 are provided as through gates 263 and 264. There is. By being guided by the first guide plate 271 of the first special electric prize winning device 261, it becomes possible to win the first through gate 263, and by being guided by the second guide plate 272 of the second special electric prize winning device 262. It is possible to win the second through gate 264. In this case, by changing the types of the special electric prize winning devices 261 and 262 to be subjected to the opening and closing control in the opening and closing execution mode, the ratio of the game balls entering the special electric prize winning devices 261 and 262 and the through gates 263 and 264, respectively. Can be made different.

The probability that the game ball on the first guide plate 271 enters the first through gate 263 and the probability that the game ball on the second guide plate 272 enters the second through gate 264 are different. .. This makes it possible to increase the player's attention to the special electric prize winning devices 261 and 262, which are the targets of the opening/closing control.

For example, the 2R low-accuracy result and the 2R high-accuracy result differ in the types of the special electric prize winning devices 261 and 262 to be the targets of the opening/closing control in the opening/closing execution mode. This makes it possible to increase the player's attention to the type of game result that triggers execution of the opening/closing execution mode.

The second through gate 264 exists downstream of the first through gate 263 in the downflow direction of the game ball. As a result, when the first special electric winning device 261 is subjected to the opening/closing control, not only the game ball can enter the first through gate 263, but also the game ball enters the second through gate 264. You will get it. Therefore, the player who expects to obtain the hold information on the universal figure side expects that the first special electric prize winning device 261 becomes an execution target of the opening/closing control.

Whether the game ball enters the first through gate 263 or the game ball enters the second through gate 264, the same privilege of acquiring the reservation information on the universal figure side is given. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling a disadvantage regardless of whether the execution target of the opening/closing control is the first special electric prize winning device 261 or the second special electric prize winning device 262.

<Another form of the fifteenth embodiment>
The type of the special electric prize winning devices 261 and 262 to be subjected to the opening/closing control may be changed in the middle of one opening/closing execution mode. Thereby, it becomes possible to change the ratio of the expected degree of winning of the special winning openings 265, 266 and the through gates 263, 264 in the middle of the opening/closing execution mode.

The game ball that has entered the first through gate 263 is not limited to the configuration that can enter the second through gate 264, and the game ball that entered the first through gate 263 is the second through gate 264. It is not possible to enter the ball, and the game ball that entered the second through gate 264 may not enter the first through gate 263.

The members for directly opening and closing the special winning openings 265, 266 are not provided, but the members for directly opening and closing the special winning openings 265, 266 may be provided. For example, when the first guide plate 271 is arranged at the blocking position, the first guide plate 271 faces the first prize hole 265 so as to close the first prize hole 265 from the front side, and the first guide plate 271 faces the first prize plate 265. When 271 is arranged at the guiding position, the first guiding plate 271 has a position that does not obstruct the flow of the game ball toward the first big winning opening 265 or the first through gate 263, the first guiding. It may be configured to be provided on the plate 271. In this case, it is possible to prevent the game ball from entering the first special winning opening 265 in the situation where the first guide plate 271 is arranged at the blocking position.

<Sixteenth Embodiment>
In the first embodiment, the through gate 35 is provided below the special electric winning device 32, and the opening/closing member 202 moves from the open position to the closed position in the situation where the game ball is placed on the guide plate portion 214. Although the game ball is configured to be able to win the through gate 35, in the present embodiment, the through gate 35 is not provided below the special prize winning device 32, but two special prize winning devices 32 are arranged vertically. It is set up. Hereinafter, the different configuration will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 84 is a front view of the game board 24 in this embodiment.

In the present embodiment, the through gate 35 is provided in the left side area PA2 of the game area PA, and when the left side area PA2 is compared in the same launch operation mode in which the game ball flows down, The frequency of entering the game balls is constant regardless of the game state. Further, when the shooting operation is performed so that the game ball flows down the left side area PA2, the game ball can reach the position where the second operation port 34 is provided. Therefore, when the game ball is fired so as to flow down the left side area PA2, it becomes possible to win the through gate 35, and the second operating port 34 is opened when the winning in the through gate 35 is triggered. In the case of the state, it is possible to win the second working opening 34.

By the way, in the present embodiment, the low frequency support mode and the high frequency support mode are set as the support modes for controlling the state of the universal utility article 34a of the second working port 34. In the low-frequency support mode, the frequency of the general electric utility article 34a does not become open or in the general state electric utility object 34a is relatively low. Relatively high. If the result is low, the support mode after the end of the open/close execution mode is the low frequency support mode, and if the result is high, the support mode after the end of the open/close execution mode is the high frequency support mode. ..

In the right area PA3, two special electric winning devices 32 are vertically arranged side by side. The special prize winning device 32 includes the passage forming body 201, the opening/closing member 202, and the guide member 203 as in the first embodiment. When the opening/closing member 202 is arranged in the closed position, the game balls cannot enter the fourth discharge passage portion 45, and the opening 213 (see FIG. 30) formed in the opening/closing member 202 cannot pass through. Then, the game ball will flow down below the special electric prize winning device 32. When the opening/closing member 202 is arranged in the open position, the game ball can be placed on the guide plate portion 214 of the open/close member 202, and the game ball on the guide plate portion 214 is the fourth discharge passage. It becomes possible to enter the portion 45. In addition, in the following description, the special electric prize winning device 32 on the upper side is referred to as a first special electric prize winning device 291 and the special electric prize winning device 32 on the lower side is referred to as a second special electric prize winning device 292.

The first special electric winning device 291 extends above the second special electric winning device 292 from the right end of the variable display unit 36 to the right end of the game area PA. In the right side area PA3, the guide nail group 241 is provided on the upstream side of the first special electric winning device 291 as in the first embodiment. Thereby, the game ball flowing down the right side area PA3 is guided to the receiving portion 231 of the guide member 203 of the first special prize winning device 291 by the guide nail group 241. Then, the game ball guided to the receiving portion 231 reaches the right end portion of the opening/closing member 202. In this case, when the opening/closing member 202 of the first special electric prize winning device 291 is arranged in the open position and the first special electric prize winning device 291 is in the open state, the game ball flowing into the right side area PA3 is the first. When the downward flow of the special prize winning device 291 is basically blocked, the opening/closing member 202 of the first special prize winning device 291 is arranged in the closed position, and the first special prize winning device 291 is in the closed state. Is allowed to flow down the game ball flowing into the right side area PA3 below the first special electric winning device 291.

The second special electric winning device 292 extends from the right end of the variable display unit 36 to the right end of the game area PA. A lower guide nail group 293 is provided between the first special electric winning device 291 and the second special electric winning device 292 in the right area PA3. The lower guide nail group 293 guides the game balls, which have flowed into the lower side of the first special electric winning device 291 to the right end side of the second special electric winning device 292, from the passage forming body 201 side of the first special electric winning device 291. It is formed by arranging a plurality of nails 24b in the right downward direction over the right end side of the 2 special electric winning device 292. As a result, the game balls that have flowed into the lower side of the first special electric winning device 291 are guided to the receiving portion 231 of the guide member 203 of the second special electric winning device 292 by the lower guide nail group 293. Then, the game ball guided to the receiving portion 231 reaches the right end portion of the opening/closing member 202. In this case, when the opening/closing member 202 of the second special electric winning device 292 is arranged in the open position and the second special electric winning device 292 is in the open state, the game ball that has flown into the right side area PA3 is the second. When the downward flow of the special prize winning device 292 is basically prevented, the opening/closing member 202 of the second special prize winning device 292 is arranged in the closed position, and the second special prize winning device 292 is in the closed state. Is allowed to flow down the game ball that has flowed into the right side area PA3 below the second special electric winning device 292.

FIG. 85(a) is a flowchart showing the special electric open setting process executed by the main CPU 63. The special electric open setting process is executed in step S1608 of the special electric power starting process (FIG. 42) and step S1810 of the special electric power closing process (FIG. 44).

In the opening setting process for special electric power, the opening setting process of the first special electric winning device 291 is first executed (step S4101). In the opening setting process, data setting is performed so that the first special electric winning device 291 is in an open state. In addition, subsequently, the opening setting process of the second special electric winning device 292 is executed (step S4102). In the opening setting process, data setting is performed so that the second special electric winning device 292 is in the opened state. As a result, the first special electric winning device 291 and the second special electric winning device 292 are opened at the same time or substantially the same time. In other words, in the present embodiment, if the opening/closing execution mode is triggered by the big hit result, each round game is started, and if the opening/closing execution mode is triggered by the small hit result, each special electric prize winning device 291 or 292 is opened. At the start, both the first special electric prize winning device 291 and the second special electric prize winning device 292 are opened.

FIG. 85(b) is a flowchart showing a special electric closing setting process executed by the main CPU 63. The special electric close setting process is executed in step S1704 of the special electric open process (FIG. 43).

In the closing setting process for special electric power, first, the closing setting process of the first special electric winning device 291 is executed (step S4201). In the closing setting process, data setting is performed so that the first special electric winning device 291 is in the closed state. In addition, subsequently, the closing setting process of the second special electric winning device 292 is executed (step S4202). In the closing setting process, data setting is performed so that the second special electric winning device 292 is in the closed state. As a result, the first special electric winning device 291 and the second special electric winning device 292 are closed at the same time or substantially the same time. In other words, in the present embodiment, if the opening/closing execution mode is triggered by the jackpot result, at the end of each round game, if the opening/closing execution mode is triggered by the jackpot result, the special electric prize winning devices 291 and 292 are opened. At the end, both the first special electric winning device 291 and the second special electric winning device 292 are closed.

By the way, although not described by way of illustration, in the process of opening special electricity (FIG. 43), in the case where a game ball has been won in either the first special electricity winning device 291 or the second special electricity winning device 292, in step S1706. Make an affirmative decision. In this case, if a prize is simultaneously generated in the first special electric prize winning device 291 and the second special electric prize winning device 292, the value of the prize counter is decremented by 2 in step S1707, and one of the prizes is generated. If so, the value of the winning counter is decremented by 1 in step S1707. In addition, in the special electricity closing process (FIG. 44), if the result is a small hit, and if a game ball has been won in either the first special electricity winning device 291 or the second special electricity winning device 292, the process proceeds to step S1801. And make an affirmative decision. In this case, if a prize is simultaneously generated in the first special electric prize winning device 291 and the second special electric prize winning device 292, the value of the prize counter is decremented by 2 in step S1802, and the prize is generated in either one of them. If so, the value of the winning counter is decremented by 1 in step S1802.

Next, with reference to the time chart of FIG. 86, the manner in which the first special electric prize winning device 291 and the second special electric prize winning device 292 are opened and closed will be described. 86(a) shows the execution period of the round game, FIG. 86(b) shows the period when the first special electric prize winning device 291 is in the open state, and FIG. 86(c) shows the second special electric prize winning device 292. FIG. 86(d) shows a period in which the game balls are placed on the guide plate portion 214 of the first special electric prize winning device 291 and reach the guide plate portion 214 of the second special electric prize winning device 292. The shortest expected period is shown.

As shown in FIG. 86(a), the round game is executed at each of the timing of t1 to the timing of t2, the timing of t3 to the timing of t5, and the timing of t6 to the timing of t8. In this case, as shown in FIG. 86(b) and FIG. 86(c), both the first special electricity winning device 291 and the second special electricity winning device 292 are simultaneously operated at the timing of t1, the timing of t3, and the timing of t6. Both the first special prize winning device 291 and the second special prize winning device 292 are simultaneously closed at the timing of t2, the timing of t5, and the timing of t8.

In the configuration, it is assumed that the game ball is placed on the guide plate portion 214 of the opening/closing member 202 of the first special electric prize winning device 291 at the timing of t2 and the timing of t5 when the first special electric prize winning device 291 is closed. To be done. This game ball will fall downward without winning the first special electric winning device 291. In this case, the shortest period assumed as a period required for the game ball on the guide plate portion 214 of the first special electric prize winning device 291 to reach the guide plate portion 214 of the second special electric prize winning device 292 is each special electric train. The distance between the first special electric prize winning device 291 and the second special electric prize winning device 292 is set so that the period is longer than the interval period between one opening of the winning devices 291 and 292 and the next opening. Has been done. Further, as described above, the lower guide nail group 293 is provided between the first special electric prize winning device 291 and the second special electric prize winning device 292, and the game balls flowing into the lower side of the first special electric prize winning device 291 are The position of the second special electric winning device 292 is reached by lowering the inclination on the lower guide nail group 293 by its own weight. As a result, the period required for the game ball on the guide plate portion 214 of the first special electric prize winning device 291 to reach the guide plate portion 214 of the second special electric prize device 292 is longer than when the game ball falls vertically. It has been for a long time.

With the above configuration, the game ball dropped from the guide plate portion 214 of the first special electric prize winning device 291 toward the second special electric prize winning device 292 at the timing of t2 is shown in FIGS. 86(c) and 86(d). As shown in the figure, the second special electric prize winning device 292 reaches the second special electric prize winning device 292 at the timing of t4, which is a timing after the timing of t3 when the second special electric winning device 292 is opened again. In addition, the game ball dropped from the guide plate portion 214 of the first special electric winning device 291 toward the second special electric winning device 292 at the timing of t5, as shown in FIGS. 86(c) and 86(d), The second special electric prize winning device 292 will arrive at the second special electric prize winning device 292 at the timing of t7, which is a timing after the timing of t6 when the second special electric winning device 292 is again opened.

In each round game, when the first special electric prize winning device 291 is closed, the maximum number of game balls on the guide plate 214 of the first special electric prize winning device 291 is less than the maximum prize winning number. .. Therefore, the second special electric prize winning device 292 is not closed before the game ball dropped from the first special electric prize winning device 291 wins the second special electric prize winning device 292.

According to the above configuration, in the configuration in which the first special electric prize winning device 291 and the second special electric prize winning device 292 are vertically aligned in the right side area PA3, the first special electric prize winning device 291 is opened and closed in each opening/closing execution mode. Also, a period occurs in which both the second special electricity winning device 292 is in the open state. As a result, the game ball that has failed to enter the first special electric prize winning device 291 in the open state can enter the second special electric prize device 292 in the open state. Therefore, in the opening/closing execution mode, it is difficult for the ball to leak into the special electric prize winning devices 291 and 292.

At the timing when each opening time ends, a game ball that has not reached the position of the first special electric winning device 291 even though it has reached the position of the first special electric winning device 291 is the next opening time. The first special electric prize winning device 291 and the second special electric prize winning device 292 are provided so as to be able to enter the second special electric prize winning device 292. As a result, the game balls that have leaked into the first special electric prize winning device 291 at a predetermined opening time can enter the second special electric prize winning device 292 at the next opening time, and the special electric prize device 291 in the opening/closing execution mode. It is difficult for the ball to leak into 292.

In one opening/closing execution mode, the game ball reaches the position of the second special electric prize winning device 292 from the position of the first special electric prize winning device 291 for the period from the end of the predetermined opening time to the start of the next opening time. It is set to a shorter period than the time required to do. As a result, the game balls that have leaked into the first special electric prize winning device 291 in a predetermined opening time can enter the second special electric winning device 292 in the next opening time. Further, it is possible to realize a configuration for making it difficult for such a ball leakage to occur by adjusting the positional relationship between the first special electric prize winning device 291 and the second special electric prize winning device 292.

In the above configuration, when the opening/closing member 202 of the first special electric prize winning device 291 is arranged at the open position, the inflow of the game balls to the downstream side of the opening/closing member 202 is blocked, and the second special electric prize winning. When the opening/closing member 202 of the device 292 is arranged at the open position, the game sphere is prevented from flowing into the downstream side of the opening/closing member 202. Then, when each opening time is started, the first special electric prize winning device 291 and the second special electric prize winning device 292 are in the open state at the same time, and when each opening time is finished, the first special electric prize winning device 291 and the second special electric prize. The winning device 292 is simultaneously closed. As a result, it is possible to suppress the number of game balls that are discharged to the outlet 24a without winning the special electric winning device 291 or 292 in the opening/closing execution mode.

The first special electric winning device 291 and the second special electric winning device 292 are simultaneously opened and closed at the same time. As a result, it is possible to achieve the above-described excellent effects while suppressing an increase in the processing load for controlling the opening and closing of the special electric winning devices 291 and 292.

<Another form of the 16th embodiment>
The first special electric prize winning device 291 and the second special electric prize winning device 292 are not limited to the configuration in which they are simultaneously in the open state at the start of each opening time, and are distinguished by the appearance although the timing of the open state is slightly different. The configurations may be substantially the same to the extent that they are difficult, or the timings of opening may be different so that they can be visually distinguished. In this configuration, in order to enter the game balls that have leaked into the first special electric prize winning device 291 into the second special electric prize winning device 292, the timing when the second special electric prize winning device 292 is opened is the first special electric prize winning. It is preferable to precede the timing when the device 291 is opened.

The first special electric prize winning device 291 and the second special electric prize winning device 292 are not limited to the configuration in which they are simultaneously closed at the end of each opening time, and are distinguished by the appearance although the timing of the closed state is slightly different. The configuration may be substantially the same to the extent that it is difficult, or the configuration may be such that the timing of the closed state is different so that it can be visually distinguished.

-When the first special electric prize winning device 291 is in an open state, the game ball flowing down the right side area PA3 may be surely prevented from flowing down to the downstream side of the first special electric prize winning device 291. For example, the opening/closing member 202 is a plate shape having no opening 213 like the guide plates 271, 281 in the fifteenth embodiment, and when the opening/closing member 202 is arranged in the closed position, the opening/closing member 202 is a game board. When it is located behind the board surface of 24 and is located at the open position, the opening/closing member 202 may exist between the board surface of the game board 24 and the window panel 52. As a result, when the first special electric prize winning device 291 is in the open state, except for the game ball placed on the opening/closing member 202 at the timing when the first special electric prize winning device 291 switches from the open state to the closed state, the right side The game ball flowing down the area PA3 will surely win the first special electric winning device 291.

In addition to or instead of the configuration, when the second special electric prize winning device 292 is in an open state, it is certain that the game ball flowing down the right side area PA3 flows down to the downstream side of the second special electric prize winning device 292. It may be configured to be blocked by. For example, the opening/closing member 202 is a plate shape having no opening 213 like the guide plates 271, 281 in the fifteenth embodiment, and when the opening/closing member 202 is arranged in the closed position, the opening/closing member 202 is a game board. When it is located behind the board surface of 24 and is located at the open position, the opening/closing member 202 may exist between the board surface of the game board 24 and the window panel 52. As a result, when the second special electric prize winning device 292 is in the open state, except for the game ball on the opening/closing member 202 at the timing when the second special electric prize winning device 292 is switched from the open state to the closed state, the right side The game ball flowing down the area PA3 will surely win the second special electric winning device 292.

It is not limited to the configuration in which the lower guide nail group 293 is provided between the first special electric prize winning device 291 and the second special electric prize winning device 292, and the lower guide nail group 293 is not provided. It may be configured. Even in this case, the game ball reaches the position of the second special electric prize device 292 from the position of the first special electric prize device 291 to the distance between the first special electric prize device 291 and the second special electric prize device 292. By setting such that the shortest period required until is longer than the interval period of each opening time of the special electric prize winning devices 291, 292, the second game ball that leaks into the first special electric prize winning device 291 is set. It is possible to enter the special electric prize winning device 292.

<17th Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the configuration for causing all the game balls flowing down the right side area PA3 in the opening/closing execution mode to win the special electric winning device is different from the sixteenth embodiment. Hereinafter, the different configuration will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the sixteenth embodiment is basically omitted. In addition, there is no small hit result in the present embodiment.

FIG. 87 is a vertical cross-sectional view of the game board 24 for explaining the configurations of the special electric prize winning devices 301 and 302 in the present embodiment.

In the right area PA3 of the game board 24, a first special electric prize winning device 301 and a second special electric prize winning device 302 are vertically arranged side by side. Each of the special electric prize winning devices 301 and 302 includes large winning openings 301a and 302a through which game balls can enter, and opening and closing doors 301b and 302b that open and close the large winning openings 301a and 302a. The opening/closing doors 301b and 302b can be switched between the open position and the closed position by being driven by the special electric drive units 301c and 302c. When the opening/closing doors 301b, 302b are arranged in the closed position, it is impossible to enter the game balls into the special winning openings 301a, 302a. It is possible to enter the game ball into the mouths 301a and 302a. The game balls that have entered the special winning openings 301a and 302a are detected by the detection sensors 301d and 302d. Even in the present embodiment, both the first special electric prize winning device 301 and the second special electric prize winning device 302 are simultaneously opened at the start of the round game as in the sixteenth embodiment, and at the end of the round game the first special electric prize. Both the winning device 301 and the second special electric winning device 302 are closed at the same time.

Although illustration is omitted in the present embodiment, when the first special electric prize winning device 301 is in an open state, the game balls flowing into the right side area PA3 are surely won in the first special electric prize winning device 301. An area on the upstream side of the first special electric winning device 301 is set in the right area PA3. In addition, the game ball that has flowed down below the first special electric prize winning device 301 is a right area so as to surely win the second special electric prize winning device 302 when the second special electric prize winning device 302 is in an open state at that time. In PA3, an area between the first special electric prize winning device 301 and the second special electric prize winning device 302 is set.

In the right area PA3, a downflow prevention member 303 is provided between the first special electric winning device 301 and the second special electric winning device 302. The flow-down prevention member 303 is driven by the prevention drive unit 304 so as to be movable between a retracted position that does not protrude forward from the board surface of the game board 24 and a stop position that protrudes forward from the board surface of the game board 24. ing. When the downflow prevention member 303 is arranged in the retracted position, the game balls that flow down to the lower side of the first special electricity winning device 301 are directed to the second special electricity winning device 302 side without being disturbed by the downflow preventing member 303. And flows down. On the other hand, when the downflow blocking member 303 is arranged at the blocking position, all the game balls that have flowed down below the first special prize winning device 301 are placed on the upper surface of the downflow blocking member 303, and the second special charging device 302 It is prevented from flowing down to the side.

FIG. 88 is a flow chart showing the flow-down prevention control processing executed by the main CPU 63. The downflow prevention control process is repeatedly executed in the open/close execution mode.

When this round game is a round game different from the final round game (step S4301: YES), and the blocking start period (specifically, 2 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of this round game (Step S4302: YES), drive control processing for starting blocking is executed (step S4303). As a result, the downflow prevention member 303 is arranged from the retracted position to the prevention position. Since the blocking start period is set to be shorter than the product of the game cycle of the game ball (specifically 0.6 seconds) and the maximum winning number of each round game (specifically 10). The round game does not end before the prevention start period elapses.

If a negative determination is made in step S4301, a negative determination is made in step S4302, or if the processing of step S4303 is executed, a blocking end period (specifically, 1 second) elapses from the start timing of the round game. It is determined whether or not (step S4304). If an affirmative decision is made in step S4304, drive control processing for termination of blocking is executed (step S4305). As a result, the flow-down blocking member 303 is placed in the retracted position from the blocking position. The blocking end period is set to be shorter than the blocking start period.

Next, the relationship between the open/closed states of the special electric prize winning devices 301 and 302 and the operating position of the downflow prevention member 303 will be described. FIG. 89 is a time chart for explaining the relationship. 89(a) shows the execution period of the round game, FIG. 89(b) shows the period during which the first special electric prize winning device 301 is in the open state, and FIG. 89(c) shows the second special electric prize winning device 302. 89(d) shows a period in which the flow-down prevention member 303 is arranged at the prevention position. 90(a) to 90(c) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the relationship between the open/closed states of the special electric prize winning devices 301 and 302 and the operating position of the flow-down blocking member 303. The case of the open/close execution mode in which the round game occurs three times will be described.

The first round game is executed at the timing of t1 as shown in FIG. 89(a). At the timing of t1, as shown in FIGS. 89(b) and 89(c), the first special electric prize winning device 301 and the second special electric prize winning device 302 are simultaneously opened. In this case, as shown in FIG. 90(c), both the first special electric prize winning device 301 and the second special electric prize winning device 302 are in an open state, and the downflow prevention member 303 is in a retracted position.

At the timing of t2, which is the timing when the blocking start period has elapsed from the timing of t1 when the first round game was started, the downflow blocking member 303 is arranged from the retracted position to the blocking position as shown in FIG. 89(d). In this case, as shown in FIG. 90(a), both the first special electric prize winning device 301 and the second special electric prize winning device 302 are in the open state, and the flow-down blocking member 303 is in the blocking position.

Then, at the timing of t3, the first round game ends as shown in FIG. 89(a). At the timing of t3, as shown in FIGS. 89(b) and 89(c), the first special electric prize winning device 301 and the second special electric prize winning device 302 are simultaneously closed. However, even in this situation, the downflow prevention member 303 is maintained in the state of being arranged at the prevention position. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 90( b ), both the first special electric prize winning device 301 and the second special electric prize winning device 302 are in the closed state, and the downflow prevention member 303 is in the state of being arranged in the prevention position. As a result, the game balls that have passed the front of the first special electric prize device 301 at the timing when the first special electric prize device 301 is closed and the game balls that have passed the front of the first special electric prize device 301 in the interval period flow down. When it is placed on the upper surface of the blocking member 303, further downflow is blocked.

Then, at the timing of t4, the next round game is started as shown in FIG. 89(a), so that at the timing of t4, the first special electric prize winning as shown in FIGS. 89(b) and 89(c). The device 301 and the second special electric prize winning device 302 are simultaneously opened. In this case, as shown in FIG. 90(a), both the first special electric prize winning device 301 and the second special electric prize winning device 302 are in the open state, and the flow-down blocking member 303 is in the blocking position.

Then, when the blocking end period elapses after the round game is started at the timing of t5, the flow-down blocking member 303 is arranged from the blocking position to the retracted position as shown in FIG. 89(d). In this case, as shown in FIG. 90(c), both the first special electric prize winning device 301 and the second special electric prize winning device 302 are in an open state, and the downflow prevention member 303 is in a retracted position. As a result, the game balls placed on the upper surface of the flow-down prevention member 303 start to flow downward, and all the game balls are won in the second special electricity winning device 302.

After that, the same operation as the timing from t2 to the timing from t5 is repeated at the timing from t6 to the timing from t9. Then, at the timing of t10, the final round game ends as shown in FIG. 89(a). In this case, as shown in FIG. 89(b) and FIG. 89(c), the first special electric prize winning device 301 and the second special electric prize winning device 302 are simultaneously closed. Further, as shown in FIG. 89(d), the downflow prevention member 303 is arranged at the retracted position.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, even if a ball leaks into the first special electric winning device 301, the flow-down blocking member 303 blocks the leaked game ball from flowing into the downstream side. Then, when the second special electric winning device 302 is in an open state, the blocking by the downflow blocking member 303 is released, so that the game ball that has been blocked from flowing into the downstream side by the downflow blocking member 303. The player will enter the second special electric prize winning device 302. Therefore, it becomes possible to suppress the occurrence of leakage of the ball to the special electric prize winning devices 301 and 302 in the opening/closing execution mode.

<Eighteenth embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the position where the combination of the special electric prize winning device 32 and the through gate 35 is provided is different from that in the first embodiment. In addition to the through gate 35, a ball entry unit that triggers acquisition of the hold information on the universal figure side is provided. The configuration different from that of the first embodiment will be described below. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 91 is a front view of the game board 24 in the present embodiment.

In the first embodiment, the combination of the special electric prize winning device 32 and the through gate 35 is provided in the right area PA3 of the game area PA, but in the present embodiment, the special electric prize winning device 32 is provided in the left area PA2 of the game area PA. A combination with the through gate 35 is provided. The configuration of the special electric winning device 32 is the same as that of the first embodiment, except that the left-right positional relationship is reversed. In other words, the special electric winning device 32 extends from the left end of the left area PA2 to the left end of the center frame 36a at a midway position in the vertical direction of the left area PA2, and the passage forming body in which the fourth discharge passage portion 45 is formed. 201 is provided in the left frame portion 36d of the center frame 36a, and the receiving portion 231 of the guide member 203 is present at the left end of the left side area PA2. The upper surface of the guide plate portion 214 of the opening/closing member 202 is inclined downward to the right. The game balls flowing down the left side area PA2 reach the area where the special electric winning device 32 is provided, except for the game balls entering the entrance portion 36e of the warp passage.

A guide nail group 241 is provided by arranging a plurality of nails 24b above the special electric winning device 32 in the left area PA2. The guide nail group 241 guides to the receiving portion 231 the game balls that have flowed into the left side area PA2 and have not entered the entrance portion 36e of the warp passage. As a result, the game ball flowing down the left side area PA2 and reaching the special electric winning device 32 is first guided to the receiving portion 231, and then reaches the left end of the opening/closing member 202. When the opening/closing member 202 is arranged at the open position, the upper surface of the guide plate portion 214 of the opening/closing member 202 can be lowered to the right to win the fourth discharge passage portion 45. On the other hand, when the opening/closing member 202 is located at the closed position, it flows down below the opening/closing member 202 through the opening 213 (see FIG. 30) of the opening/closing member 202. Also, when the opening/closing member 202 moves from the open position to the closed position in the state where the game ball is placed on the guide plate portion 214, the game ball flows down from the mounted position to below the open/close member 202.

In the left side area PA2, a through gate 35 is provided below the special electric winning device 32 and at a position near the center frame 36a. Further, between the special power winning device 32 and the through gate 35, a restriction nail group 242 for guiding the game ball existing in a predetermined range on the right side on the guide plate portion 214 to the through gate 35 is provided. .. As a result, when the opening/closing member 202 moves from the open position to the closed position in the situation where the game ball exists in the predetermined area on the right side on the guide plate portion 214, the game ball will win the through gate 35. Becomes Then, as a result of the winning in the through-gate 35, as in the case of the above-described first embodiment, a general figure is held on condition that the maximum number of pieces of general-purpose holding information is not stored in the general-drawing holding area 65c. Side hold information is obtained.

In the present embodiment, an unexpected gate 311 is provided in addition to the through gate 35 as a ball entry portion that triggers the acquisition of the hold information on the universal figure side. The sudden gate 311 is provided above the guide nail group 241 in the left side area PA2. When a prize is given to the sudden gate 311, as in the case where a prize is given to the through gate 35, the upper limit number of the hold information on the general map side is not stored in the general map reservation area 65c. The reservation information on the universal figure side is acquired under the condition. Note that, like the through gate 35, the sudden gate 311 has a through gate that penetrates in the vertical direction, and the winning game ball continues to flow down in the game area PA as it is, but is not limited to this. The game balls that have won the abrupt gate 311 may be discharged to the back side of the game board 24 without any problem.

Here, a limiting nail 312 is provided on the upstream side of the sudden gate 311 so as to make it difficult for the winning to the sudden gate 311. Since the restriction nail 312 is provided, the probability that the game ball flowing down the left side area PA2 will win the sudden gate 311 is the probability that the game ball supplied to the lower area PA4 will win the first working opening 33. Has a lower probability than. Further, the probability that the game ball flowing down the left side area PA2 will win the sudden gate 311 is lower than the probability that the game ball flowing down below the special electric winning device 32 in the left side area PA2 will win the general winning opening 31. Is becoming Further, the probability that the game ball flowing down the left side area PA2 will win the sudden gate 311 is lower than the probability that the game ball will win the special electric prize device 32 when the special electric prize device 32 is in the open state. In addition, the probability is lower than the probability that the game ball wins the through gate 35 in the opening/closing execution mode. In addition, the probability that the game ball flowing down the left side area PA2 will win the sudden gate 311 is higher than the probability that the game ball will win the second operating port 34 when the second operating port 34 is in the open state. It has a low probability. For example, when 1000 game balls flow into the left side area PA2, one game ball has a probability of being able to win the abrupt gate 311.

By the way, in the present embodiment, when the general-university-side hold information is acquired, the general-university-open state is surely triggered by the general-purpose-side hold information. That is, when a prize is generated in the through gate 35 or the sudden gate 311 and the holding information on the universal figure side is acquired, the second operating port 34 is surely opened after that. As a result, it is possible to increase the degree of advantage with respect to the acquisition of the reservation information on the general-purpose side.

Even if the special electric prize winning device 32, the through gate 35 and the sudden gate 311 are provided in the left area PA2 as described above, it is required that the game balls flowing down the left area PA2 do not win the special electric prize winning device 32. Flows into the lower area PA4. Then, the game balls that have flowed into the lower area PA4 can reach a position where the first operating port 33 can be won, and if the second operating port 34 is in an open state, the second operating port 34 is won. You can reach possible positions. Further, it is possible to reach a position where the general winning opening 31 can be won. As a result, by continuing the shooting operation of the game ball so as to flow down the left side area PA2, the general winning opening 31, the special electricity winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, the second operating opening 34, the through gate 35, and the sudden opening It is possible to aim for a prize for all of the gates 311.

On the other hand, in the right side area PA3, the nail 24b is provided but the ball entry portion is not provided. In addition, the game ball flowing down the right side area PA3 flows into the lower area PA4, and the inflowing game ball can reach a position where the first operating port 33 can win and the second operating port 34 is in an open state. If so, it is possible to reach a position where a prize can be won in the second operating port 34. In this case, due to the fact that the ball entering portion is not provided in the right side area PA3 as described above, the firing operation is performed so as to flow down the right side area PA3 rather than the case where the firing operation is performed so as to flow down the left side area PA2. When the game is performed, a prize is more likely to be generated in the open second operating port 34. Thereby, for example, when a prize is generated in the sudden gate 311 and the open state of the second operation port 34 suddenly occurs, by performing a game ball launching operation so as to flow down the right side area PA3, It is possible to easily generate a prize in the second working port 34.

FIG. 92 is a flow chart showing the process of acquiring the reservation information on the universal figure side executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the process of acquiring the reservation information on the universal figure side is executed in step S1101 in the universal figure universal communication control process (FIG. 37).

When the winning to the through gate 35 has occurred (step S4401: YES), and the number of reservation information on the universal figure side stored in the universal figure reservation area 65c is less than the upper limit storage number (step S4402: YES). ), the value of the public figure holding counter provided in the main side RAM 65 is incremented by 1 so that the main side CPU 63 can grasp the number of unprocessed public side holding information stored in the general figure holding area 65c. (Step S4403). Incidentally, the display content of the universal figure pending display section 38b in the universal figure unit 38 is adjusted according to the value of the universal figure pending counter. As a result, the display content of the universal figure pending display section 38b corresponds to the number of pending information on the universal figure side stored in the universal figure pending area 65c. After that, the value of the ordinary electric random number counter C4 is stored in the first storage area of the universal figure holding area 65c, that is, the storage area corresponding to the number of holding storages that is incremented by 1 in step S4403 (step S4404).

After that, the universal figure hold command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 81 (step S4405). When the sound emission control device 81 receives the universal figure holding command, it transmits a command corresponding to the command to the display control device 82. In the symbol display device 41, an image display for notifying the number of holding information on the universal figure side stored in the universal figure holding area 65c is displayed, and the display control device 82 displays a command corresponding to the universal figure holding command. By receiving the information, the content of the image display is updated to the content corresponding to the increase in the number of reservation information on the universal figure side by one. It should be noted that when the variable display of the picture on the universal figure display unit 38a triggered by the pending information on the universal figure side is started, the content of the image display corresponds to that the number of the pending information on the universal figure side has decreased by one. The content is updated.

The display contents of the symbol display device 41 will be described with reference to the explanatory view of FIG. 93(a). On the lower edge of the display surface of the symbol display device 41, a first reserved display area 313 for notifying the number of the first reserved information stored in the first special map reserved area 85, and a second special map. A second hold display area 314 for notifying the number of second hold information stored in the hold area 86 is set. In the first hold display area 313, the same number of unit display areas as the number of the first hold information that can be stored in the first special figure hold area 85 are arranged side by side in the horizontal direction, and the number of the first hold information increases. Accordingly, the reserved image 315 is sequentially displayed from the left unit display area, and the reserved image 315 is sequentially deleted from the right unit display area as the number of the first suspension information decreases. Further, in the second hold display area 314, the same number of unit display areas as the number of second hold information that can be stored in the second special figure hold area 86 are arranged side by side in the horizontal direction, and the number of second hold information is The reserved image 315 is sequentially displayed from the unit display area on the left side as the number thereof increases, and the reserved image 315 is sequentially deleted from the unit display area on the right side as the number of the second suspension information decreases. Since the first hold display area 313 is set, the number of the first hold information can be clearly understood through the display content of the symbol display device 41, and the second hold display area 314 is set. Thereby, the number of the second hold information can be clearly understood through the display content of the symbol display device 41.

In the upper left corner of the display surface of the symbol display device 41, a universal figure holding display area 316 for notifying the number of holding information of the regular figure side stored in the universal figure holding area 65c is set. There is. In the universal figure hold display area 316, the same number of unit display areas as the number of hold information on the universal figure side that can be stored in the universal figure hold area 65c are arranged side by side in the horizontal direction, and The pending image 315 is sequentially displayed from the unit display area on the left side as the number thereof increases, and the reserved image 315 is erased from the unit display area on the right side as the number of the holding information on the universal figure side decreases. Since the universal figure hold display area 316 is set, it is possible to clearly grasp the number of hold information on the universal figure side through the display content of the symbol display device 41.

It should be noted that the display control device 82 increases the number of the reserved images 315 displayed in the universal figure pending display area 316 by one when the command corresponding to the universal figure pending command is received. Further, the display control device 82 transmits from the voice light emission control device 81 based on the command indicating that the variable display of the picture is started in the universal figure display portion 38a is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the voice light emission control device 81. When the command is received, the number of the reserved images 315 displayed in the universal figure reservation display area 316 is decreased by one.

Returning to the explanation of the reservation information acquisition process (FIG. 92) on the general-purpose side, if a negative determination is made in step S4401, a negative determination is made in step S4402, or the process of step S4405 is executed, On the condition that a winning has occurred in the sudden gate 311 (step S4406: YES), and the number of reservation information on the universal figure side stored in the universal figure reservation area 65c is less than the upper limit storage number ( In step S4407: YES), the value of the universal figure holding counter in the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S4408). As described above, the display content of the universal figure pending display section 38b in the universal figure unit 38 is adjusted according to the value of the universal figure pending counter. After that, the value of the ordinary electric random number counter C4 is stored in the first storage area of the universal figure holding area 65c, that is, the storage area corresponding to the number of holding storages incremented by 1 in step S4408 (step S4409).

After that, if the current state is the open/close execution mode (step S4410: YES), or if the value of the universal figure hold counter of the main RAM 65 is 2 or more, although not in the open/close execution mode, that is, the universal figure hold area 65c is opened When two or more pieces of hold information on the side are stored (step S4410 and step S4411: NO), the universal figure hold command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 81 (step S4412). The processing contents of the sound emission control device 81 and the display control device 82 in this case are the same as those in the case where the universal figure holding command is transmitted in step S4405.

On the other hand, when the current state is not the open/close execution mode (step S4410: NO) and the value of the universal figure hold counter in the main RAM 65 is "1", that is, the universal figure hold area 65c stores 1 side of the universal figure hold information. When only the individual pieces are stored (step S4411: YES), the sudden hold command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 81 (step S4413). When the sound emission control device 81 receives the sudden suspension command, it transmits a command corresponding to the command to the display control device 82. When the display control device 82 receives the command, it updates the display content of the universal figure pending display area 316 in the same manner as when the command corresponding to the universal figure pending command is received. Further, when the display control device 82 receives a command corresponding to the sudden command, as shown in the explanatory view of FIG. 93(b), as a special notification, a prize is given to the second working port 34 on the display surface of the symbol display device 41. A special notification image 317 that prompts the user to perform a shooting operation aiming at is displayed. By displaying the special notification image 317, the player will perform a shooting operation aiming at winning in the second operating port 34, and it is possible to cause the acquisition of the second hold information.

When it is time to display the special notification image 317 in the situation in which the symbol display device 41 is performing the game diverting effect on the display control device 82, in the upper right corner portion of the display surface of the symbol display device 41. The reduced display area 318 is set, and the effect for game play is reduced and displayed in the reduced display area 318 and continues. This makes it possible to display the special notification image 317 in a predetermined size even when the sudden hold command is transmitted from the main CPU 63 in the situation where the effect for game use is being executed. It is possible to make the player easily recognize the notification image 317.

Next, the manner in which the reservation information on the universal figure side is acquired will be described with reference to the time chart in FIG. FIG. 94(a) shows the execution period of the opening/closing execution mode, FIG. 94(b) shows the period during which the special electric prize winning device 32 is in the open state, and FIG. 94(c) shows the occurrence of a prize in the through gate 35. FIG. 94(d) shows the timing of generation of a prize in the sudden-use gate 311 and FIG. 94(e) shows the timing at which the reservation information on the universal figure side is acquired.

As shown in FIG. 94(d), a prize is awarded to the abrupt gate 311 at the timing of t1 when the opening/closing execution mode is not executed. As a result, at the timing of t1, as shown in FIG. 94(e), the reservation information on the universal figure side is acquired. The second working port 34 is opened in response to the obtained holding information on the universal figure side, and the second holding information obtained based on the winning of the second working port 34 in the open state is the game time. As a result of the start of the game and the end of the game time thereof, the opening/closing execution mode triggered by the second small hit result is executed from the timing of t2 to the timing of t9 as shown in FIG. 94(a). .. Here, in the present embodiment, when the second small hit result is obtained, the number of times the special electric winning device 32 is opened is set to two.

In the opening/closing execution mode, as shown in FIG. 94(b), the special electric prize winning apparatus 32 is in the open state from the timing t3 to the timing t4 and the timing t6 to the timing t7. In this case, the opening/closing member 202 moves from the open position to the closed position in a state where the game ball is placed on the guide plate portion 214 at each of the timings t4 and t7. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 94(c), a prize is awarded to the through gate 35 at each of the timings t5 and t8, and as shown in FIG. 94(e) at each of the timings t5 and t8. On the other hand, the reservation information on the universal figure side is acquired. As a result, the opportunity for the second operating port 34 to open again occurs, the winning of the second operating port 34 in the open state occurs, and the second hold information is acquired. As shown in (a), the opening/closing execution mode is triggered again by the second small hit result from the timing t10 to the timing t16.

In the opening/closing execution mode, as shown in FIG. 94(b), the special electric prize winning device 32 is in the open state at each of the timing t11 to the timing t12 and the timing t13 to the timing t14. Further, at the timing of t14, the opening/closing member 202 moves from the open position to the closed position while the game ball is placed on the guide plate portion 214. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 94(c), a prize is awarded to the through gate 35 at the timing of t15, and at the timing of t15, the holding information on the general figure side is acquired as shown in FIG. 94(e). As a result, the trigger for opening the second operating port 34 again occurs, the winning is generated for the second operating port 34 in the open state, and the second hold information is acquired. Occurs.

According to this embodiment described in detail above, the following effects can be obtained in addition to the effects of the first embodiment.

Even in a situation where the opening/closing execution mode is not set, the game ball enters the gate 311 for sudden use, so that the hold information on the universal figure side can be acquired and the second operation port 34 can be opened. Then, the game ball enters the opened second operating port 34, and then the opening/closing execution mode is entered. As a result, it is possible to cause a situation in which the open/close execution mode is generated based on the entry of the game ball into the second operation port 34 not only in the open/close execution mode but also in the open/close execution mode.

A restriction nail 312 is provided on the upstream side of the gate 311 for sudden use so that the probability of the game ball entering the sudden gate 311 is lower than the probability of the game ball entering the through gate 35 in the opening/closing execution mode. ing. As a result, it is possible to suppress the probability that the open/close execution mode will occur based on the entry of the game ball into the sudden gate 311 in a situation other than the open/close execution mode. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the player's satisfaction with the occurrence of the transition to the open/close execution mode based on the entry of the game ball into the gating gate 311 when the open/close execution mode is not set.

Further, the limiting nail 312 is provided so that the probability of entering the game ball into the sudden gate 311 is lower than the probability of entering the game ball into the first actuation opening 33. From this point as well, it is possible to enhance the player's satisfaction with the occurrence of the transition to the open/close execution mode based on the entry of the game ball into the sudden gate 311 in a situation other than the open/close execution mode.

When the second working port 34 is opened due to the entry of the game ball into the gate 311 for sudden occurrence and the holding information on the universal figure side is acquired, the special notification image 317 corresponding to it is displayed on the symbol display device. 41 is displayed. As a result, although the game ball enters the sudden gate 311 and the second operating port 34 is opened, the game ball enters the second operating port 34 without noticing it. It is possible to make it difficult for the event of losing the ball opportunity to occur.

In the opening/closing execution mode, since it is possible for the game ball to enter the through gate 35, it is highly likely that the player's consciousness is directed to the opening of the second operation port 34, but in the opening/closing execution mode, In a situation where the game ball does not enter the through gate 35 in a situation where there is no such situation, there is a possibility that the player's consciousness that the second operation port 34 is in the open state is low. In this case, since the special notification image 317 is displayed when the game ball enters the unexpected gate 311 and the holding information on the universal figure side is acquired in a situation other than the opening/closing execution mode, the second information is displayed in the situation. It becomes possible to direct the player's consciousness to the opening of the operating port 34. In addition, by displaying the special notification image 317 by preventing the special notification image 317 from being displayed in the opening/closing execution mode in which the player is likely to be aware that the second operation port 34 is in the open state. Can be prevented from becoming annoying to the player.

The special notification image 317 is displayed when the reservation information on the universal figure side is acquired based on the entry of the game ball into the sudden-use gate 311 in a situation where the reservation information on the general figure side has not been acquired. As a result, the special notification image 317 can be displayed in a situation in which the player is less conscious of the opening of the second operating port 34.

The special electric prize winning device 32, the through gate 35, and the sudden gate 311 are provided in a region where the game ball flowing down the left side area PA2 or the flown down game ball can enter. As a result, it is possible to aim for winning the special electric prize winning device 32, the through gate 35, and the sudden gate 311 by the same mode of launch operation.

The game ball flowing down the right side area PA3 is easier to reach the position of the second operating port 34 than the game ball flowing down the left side area PA2. As a result, when the second operating port 34 is in the open state in a state not in the open/close execution mode, the game ball is ejected so as to flow down the right side area PA3, and the game to the second operating port 34 is performed. It is possible to make it easier for a ball to enter.

<Another form of the eighteenth embodiment>
The combination of the special electric prize winning device 32 and the through gate 35 and the sudden gate 311 may be set in a positional relationship in which if one of the winnings is aimed, the other winning cannot be aimed. For example, the combination of the special electric prize winning device 32 and the through gate 35 may be provided in the left area PA2 and the sudden gate 311 may be provided in the right area PA3. May be provided in the right side area PA3 and the burst gate 311 may be provided in the left side area PA2.

The same as in the first embodiment, the ordinary electric drawing lottery process is executed on the holding information on the ordinary figure side, and when the ordinary electric current open state wins, the ordinary electric current open state is established and the second working port 34 is opened. It may be configured to be in a state. In this case, even if a game ball enters the gate 311 for sudden use, a situation may occur in which the second operating port 34 is not opened. In this configuration, the holding information on the universal figure side obtained based on the game ball entering the through gate 35 and the holding information on the public figure side obtained based on the game ball entering the sudden gate 311 In addition to the above, the former general-purpose-side holding information and the latter general-purpose-side holding information may have different probabilities that the general electric open state wins in the general electric open lottery process.

For example, the holding information on the public figure side acquired based on the game ball entering the gate 311 for sudden use is more common than the hold information on the public figure side acquired based on the game ball entering the through gate 35. A configuration may be adopted in which it is easy to win the ordinary electric open state by the electric open lottery process. As a result, it is possible to enhance the player's satisfaction with the entry of the game ball into the sudden gate 311.

On the other hand, the holding information on the universal figure side acquired based on the game ball entering the sudden gate 311 is more than the hold information on the universal figure side acquired based on the game ball entering the through gate 35. It may be configured such that it is unlikely that the ordinary train open state wins in the regular train open lottery process. In this case, since the probability that the game ball enters the sudden gate 311 becomes the normal electric power open state, the probability that the game ball enters the sudden gate 311 does not have to be lowered.

・Division of the holding information on the universal figure side obtained based on the entry of the game ball into the through gate 35 and the holding information on the universal figure side obtained based on the entry of the game ball into the gate 311 for the accident. In addition to handling separately, one of these holding information sets the second working port 34 to the normal power open state without executing the normal power open lottery process, and the other is the normal power open state winning in the normal power open lottery process. As a result, the second operating port 34 may be configured to be in the normal electrical open state. For example, with respect to the holding information on the universal figure side acquired based on the fact that a game ball has entered the gate 311 for sudden use, the ordinary operation lottery process is not executed and the second operation port 34 is in the ordinary electricity open state. As for the holding information on the universal figure side obtained based on the entry of the game ball into the through gate 35, the universal port open lottery process causes the universal port open state to be selected, and the second working port 34 opens the universal line. It may be configured to be in a state. As a result, it is possible to enhance the player's satisfaction with the entry of the game ball into the sudden gate 311.

The probability of entering the sudden gate 311 is the probability of entering the general winning opening 31, the probability of entering the special electric winning device 32 in the open state, the probability of entering the first operating opening 33, and the second operating opening 34. It is not limited to the lower probability than the probability of entering the ball and the probability of entering the through gate 35 in the opening/closing execution mode. For example, the unexpected gate 311 has a higher probability of winning than the general winning opening 31. May be Further, the burst gate 311 may have a higher probability of entering the ball than the first actuation port 33.

-Instead of the gate 311 for burst, the 2nd actuation port for burst may be provided. In this case, by not providing an opening/closing member for preventing or allowing the entry of the game ball into the sudden second operation port, the sudden second operation port is provided with a game for the sudden second operation port. The ball entry probability does not fluctuate according to the game state, and when the game ball enters the sudden second operating port, the same as when the game ball enters the second operating port 34. The second hold information is acquired. As a result, it becomes possible to cause a situation in which the opening/closing execution mode suddenly occurs when the game ball enters the sudden second operation port.

In addition, in the configuration, the average fluctuation display period of the game times triggered by the second hold information acquired based on the fact that the game ball enters the sudden second operation port, the game ball in the second operation port 34 It may be configured to be shorter than the average variation display period of the game times triggered by the second hold information acquired based on the fact that the player has entered. This makes it possible to shorten the time required from when the game ball enters the sudden second operation port until the opening/closing execution mode is started.

<19th Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, a special electric prize winning device 321 is provided instead of the special electric prize winning device 32. Hereinafter, the different configuration will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 95 is a front view of the game board 24 in this embodiment.

In the right area PA3 of the game area PA, a special electric prize winning device 321 is provided in place of the special electric prize winning device 32. The special electric prize winning device 321 is provided over the entire horizontal direction at a midway position in the vertical direction of the right side area PA3. Therefore, the game ball flowing down the right side area PA3 will surely pass through the area where the special electric winning device 321 is provided. Further, a through gate 35 is provided at a position below the special electric winning device 321 in the right side area PA3 and near the variable display unit 36.

The configuration of the special power winning device 321 will be described with reference to FIGS. 96(a) and 96(b). 96(a) and 96(b) are sectional views taken along the line AA of FIG.

A special winning opening 322 is formed on the game board 24 so as to penetrate the game board 24 in the front-rear direction. The position where the special winning opening 322 is formed is a position closer to the variable display unit 36 in the right side area PA3. A special electric winning device 321 is provided so as to prevent or allow a game ball to enter the special winning opening 322. The special electric winning device 321 is provided with a guide plate 323 provided so as to penetrate the game board 24 in the front-rear direction at a position below the special winning opening 322. The guide plate 323 is provided so as to be movable in the front-rear direction by being driven by a driving unit (not shown), and a blocking position where the amount of protrusion from the board surface of the game board 24 to the front side of the pachinko machine 10 is minimized. It is moved to a position where the pachinko machine 10 is slid forward of the blocking position, and a guide position where the amount of protrusion from the board surface of the game board 24 to the front side of the pachinko machine 10 is maximum.

In the game board 24, a ball receiving portion 324 is provided above the right end portion of the guide plate 323, and in the right area PA3, above the special electricity winning device 321 a game flows from the upper area PA1 into the right area PA3. A guide nail group 241 for guiding all the balls to the ball receiving portion 324 is provided (see FIG. 95). The guide nail group 241 is formed by arranging a plurality of nails 24b so as to be inclined downward to the right. All the game balls that have flowed into the right side area PA3 are guided to the ball receiving portion 324 by the guide nail group 241. The distance dimension between the front end of the ball receiving portion 324 and the window panel 52 is set to be larger than the diameter of the game ball. The upper surface of the ball receiving portion 324 is inclined downward toward the front side of the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, the game ball that has reached the upper surface of the ball receiving portion 324 will flow down toward the front side of the pachinko machine 10 by its own weight.

When the guide plate 323 is arranged at the blocking position, as shown in FIG. 96(a), the distance between the front end of the guide plate 323 and the window panel 52 is larger than the diameter of the game ball. Become. At this blocking position, the front end of the guide plate 323 is located on the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 with respect to the front end of the ball receiving portion 324. Therefore, the game balls that have reached the upper surface of the ball receiving portion 324 with the guide plate 323 arranged in the blocking position are basically below the ball receiving portion 324 through the space between the ball receiving portion 324 and the window panel 52. Will fall to. Further, the projection size of the guide board 323 arranged at the blocking position from the board surface of the game board 24 to the front side is less than the radius of the game ball. Therefore, even if the game ball guided by the guide nail group 241 bounces on the ball receiving portion 324 and heads toward the guide plate 323 disposed at the blocking position, the guide plate 323 and the window do not rest on the guide plate 323. It will fall below the guide plate 323 through the space between it and the panel 52. With the above configuration, when the guide plate 323 is arranged at the blocking position, the generation of the winning at the special winning opening 322 is blocked. Further, as described above, the through gate 35 is provided at a position close to the variable display unit 36, and the position is to the left with respect to the ball receiving portion 324 so that the game ball bounced in the ball receiving portion 324 is hard to reach. It is in the separated position. Therefore, when the guide plate 323 is arranged at the blocking position, the occurrence of a prize in the through gate 35 is also blocked.

When the guide plate 323 is arranged at the guide position, as shown in FIG. 96(b), the distance between the front end of the guide plate 323 and the window panel 52 is smaller than the radius of the game ball. Become. Further, at this guiding position, the front end of the guide plate 323 is located on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 with respect to the front end of the ball receiving portion 324. Therefore, the game ball that has reached the upper surface of the ball receiving portion 324 in the situation where the guide plate 323 is arranged at the guide position is on the upper surface of the area of the guide plate 323 projecting to the front side of the pachinko machine 10 with respect to the board surface of the game board 24. Will be listed.

When the guide plate 323 is arranged at the guide position, two partition walls 326, 327 are provided at intermediate positions in the lateral direction on the upper surface of the projecting region 325 projecting to the front side of the pachinko machine 10 with respect to the board surface of the game board 24. Is provided. The first partition wall 326 existing on the right side of these partition walls 326 and 327 extends from the front end of the guide plate 323 toward the rear side of the pachinko machine 10, and the guide plate 323 is arranged at the guide position. In this situation, the rear end of the first partition wall 326 and the board surface of the game board 24 are separated from each other by a dimension larger than the diameter of the game ball. Further, the second partition wall 327 existing on the left side extends from the board surface of the game board 24 toward the front side of the pachinko machine 10 in the situation where the guide plate 323 is arranged at the guide position. However, the front end of the second partition wall 327 is present on the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 by a size larger than the diameter of the game ball than the front end of the guide plate 323. In the configuration in which the first partition wall 326 and the second partition wall 327 are formed in this way, the upper surface of the projecting region 325 is inclined downward to the left as a whole. Further, on the upper surface of the projecting region 325, to the left of the ball receiving portion 324 and to the position of the first partition wall 326, there is a downward slope toward the rear side of the pachinko machine 10, and from the position of the first partition wall 326 to the second position. Up to the position of the partition wall 327, it is inclined downward toward the front side of the pachinko machine 10, and from the position of the second partition wall 327 to the position of the special winning opening 322, it is inclined downward toward the rear side of the pachinko machine 10. That is, the upper surface of the projecting region 325, while the game ball on the upper surface of the projecting region 325 flows down toward the left in the situation where the guide plate 323 is arranged at the guiding position, the first partition wall 326 and the game board. It is inclined so as to meander in the front-back direction so as to flow down so as to pass through the space between the board surface of 24 and the space between the second partition wall 327 and the front end of the guide plate 323.

In the situation where the guide plate 323 is arranged in the guide position, the distance between the front end of the guide plate 323 and the window panel 52 is less than the radius of the game ball, so the guide plate 323 is in the guide position. The window panel 52 prevents the game ball on the upper surface of the projecting region 325 from falling from the front end portion of the guide plate 323 toward the lower side of the guide plate 323 in the arranged state. In addition, the left end of the guide plate 323 faces the center frame 36a of the variable display unit 36 at a position close to each other, and the distance between the left end of the guide plate 323 and the center frame 36a is the radius of the game ball. It is less than. Therefore, in the situation where the guide plate 323 is arranged at the guide position, it is possible that the game ball placed on the upper surface of the projecting region 325 falls from the left end portion of the guide plate 323 toward the lower side of the guide plate 323. It is blocked by the frame 36a.

With the above configuration, when the guide plate 323 is arranged at the guide position, the game ball flows down the projecting region 325 by its own weight along the meandering path on the projecting region 325, so that the game ball gets a big prize. It will enter the mouth 322. The game ball that has won the special winning opening 322 is detected by a detection sensor (not shown) provided corresponding to the special winning opening 322. This detection sensor is electrically connected to the main CPU 63, and the main CPU 63 specifies whether or not there is a winning in the special winning opening 322 based on the detection result of the detection sensor. Then, in the opening/closing execution mode triggered by the round game or the small hit result in which the special winning opening 322 is the opening target, when it is determined that one gaming ball has entered the special winning opening 322, The value of the winning counter of the side RAM 65 is decremented by 1. When the value of the winning counter becomes "0", it is specified that the winning of the upper limit number of winnings has occurred similarly to the first embodiment, and the opening/closing execution mode is triggered by the result of the round game or the small hit. To finish.

When a game ball is placed on the guide plate 323 arranged at the guide position, when the game ball of the upper limit number of game balls is entered in the special winning opening 322, the guide plate 323 is placed in the state where the game ball is placed. Move from the guiding position to the blocking position. In this case, the game ball on the guide plate 323 follows the movement of the guide plate 323 toward the rear side of the pachinko machine 10, moves toward the rear side of the pachinko machine 10, and hits the board surface of the game board 24 from the front. When the guide plate 323 comes into contact with the guide plate 323 and is prevented from moving further rearward, the guide plate 323 finally does not receive the guide plate 323 from below and falls downward.

As described above, the through gate 35 is provided below the special electric winning device 321. The position of the through gate 35 is the first partition wall 326 and the second partition wall 327 of the guide plate 323 in the lateral positional relationship. It is in the same position as the area between. In addition, between the special power winning device 321 and the through gate 35, the game balls that were on the inter-partition area Y between the first partition wall 326 and the second partition wall 327 of the guide plate 323 are allowed by the guide plate 323. A restriction nail group 242 for guiding the falling game ball toward the through gate 35 is provided so that the through gate 35 is won when the ball drops by moving from the position to the blocking position (see FIG. 95). .. As a result, when the guide plate 323 moves from the allowable position to the blocking position in the situation where the game ball is placed in the inter-zone area Y, a win to the through gate 35 occurs. Incidentally, the inter-section area Y is separated from the ball receiving portion 324 to the left by a size larger than the diameter of the game ball, more specifically, a size larger than three times the diameter of the game ball. Therefore, in the situation where the guide plate 323 is arranged at the blocking position, it is prevented that the game ball that has reached the ball receiving portion 324 is won in the through gate 35.

The game ball that has won the through gate 35 is detected by a detection sensor (not shown) provided corresponding to the through gate 35. This detection sensor is electrically connected to the main side CPU 63, and the main side CPU 63 specifies whether or not there is a prize in the through gate 35 based on the detection result of the detection sensor. When it is specified that one game ball has entered the through gate 35, the general-university random number counter is provided on the condition that the maximum number of reservation information on the universal figure side is not stored in the universal figure reservation area 65c. The numerical information of C4 is stored in the universal figure holding area 65c as holding information on the side of the universal figure.

Here, when the game ball is fired in the shortest firing cycle (specifically, 0.6 seconds) by the same firing mode in which the game ball flows down the right side area PA3, the guide plate 323 is in the guide position. In order to increase the possibility that a game ball having the next firing order is present in the inter-zone area Y with respect to the game ball that has entered the special winning opening 322 in the situation where the inter-zone area Y is arranged, The position of is set. As a result, when the game ball is placed on the guide plate 323 arranged at the guide position, when the game ball of the winning upper limit number of game balls enters the special winning opening 322, it is placed on the guide plate 323. It becomes easy for the game ball to win the through gate 35.

In addition, a meandering passage that not only extends in the lateral direction but also meanders in the front-rear direction is formed in the protruding region 325 of the guide plate 323. It is set. As a result, it is possible to set the inter-compartment area Y in which it is easy to generate a prize in the through gate 35 while suppressing an increase in the lateral size of the guide plate 323.

<Another form of the nineteenth embodiment>
The combination of the special electric prize winning device 32 and the through gate 35 in the first embodiment and the combination of the special electric prize winning device 321 and the through gate 35 in the nineteenth embodiment are both provided, and serve as a trigger for executing the opening/closing execution mode. A configuration may be adopted in which the type of the special electric winning device 32, 321 to be subjected to the opening/closing control is changed according to the type of game result. In this case, when the special electric prize winning device 321 in the nineteenth embodiment is subjected to the opening/closing control, the special electric prize winning device 32 in the first embodiment is subjected to the opening/closing control. The player is likely to expect that the special electric prize winning apparatus 321 in the nineteenth embodiment will be the target of execution of the opening/closing control.

<Other Embodiments>
It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the description of the above-described embodiment, and various modifications and improvements can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. For example, you may change as follows. By the way, the configuration of the following another mode may be applied individually or in combination with the configuration of the above embodiment.

(1) In each of the above-described embodiments, the outlet 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special electricity winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, and the second operating opening 34 are all targets for storing history information (or entry history). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and only a part of the outlet 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special electricity winning device 32, the first working opening 33, and the second working opening 34 is the history information storage target. The configuration may be set as follows. For example, the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, and the second operating opening 34 may be the target of storing history information, or the general winning opening 31 may be the target of storing history information. It’s good. Even in this case, it is possible to grasp the entering mode of the game ball in a predetermined period for the entering part for which the history information is stored.

(2) In each of the above-described embodiments, information corresponding to the result of entering a game ball is transmitted in association with each of the first winning opening detection sensor 42a, the second winning opening detection sensor 43a, and the third winning opening detection sensor 44a. Although the signal paths 118a to 118c for setting are set, the present invention is not limited to this, and the information corresponding to the ball entry result for the same type of ball entering portion is the same type of ball entering portion. It is possible to have a configuration in which there are a plurality of ball entry detection sensors and a plurality of ball entry detection sensors corresponding thereto, or a configuration in which they are transmitted as one type of information. This makes it possible to reduce the number of types of information transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66.

(3) In the first embodiment and the like, correspondence information indicating the correspondence between the types of information transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 and the buffers 122a to 122o is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the correspondence information may be stored in advance in the management IC 66. In this case, since it is not necessary to execute the processing for causing the management IC 66 to recognize the correspondence information, it is possible to reduce the processing load of the main CPU 63.

(4) In the first embodiment and the like, the correspondence information indicating the correspondence between the types of information transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 and the buffers 122a to 122o is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66. However, the configuration is performed when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, bidirectional communication between the main CPU 63 and the management IC 66 is possible, and the management IC 66 handles The correspondence information may be transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 when a signal requesting transmission of the relationship information is received. In this case, the correspondence memory 116 is provided as a non-volatile memory and is used for both reading and writing, and the correspondence information provided from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 after the pachinko machine 10 is shipped to the main CPU 63. Even if the supply of operating power is stopped, the correspondence relationship memory 116 stores and holds it. This makes it possible to reduce the frequency with which the correspondence information is transmitted.

(5) In the first embodiment and the like, the correspondence information indicating the correspondence between the types of information transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 and the buffers 122a to 122o is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66. However, the configuration is performed using the signal paths 118a to 118g for transmitting the information of the detection results of the respective ball detection sensors 42a to 48a, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the correspondence information is mainly used. A dedicated signal path for transmitting from the side CPU 63 to the management IC 66 may be provided. As a result, the management IC 66 can grasp which type of information is being received from the main CPU 63 by the type of the buffers 122a to 122o that receive the information.

(6) In the first embodiment and the like, the main CPU 63 transmits information to the management IC 66, but the management IC 66 does not transmit information to the main CPU 63. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, information may be transmitted from the management IC 66 to the main CPU 63. For example, various parameters calculated by the management-side CPU 112 based on the history information may be transmitted to the main-side CPU 63. In this case, the main CPU 63 may be configured to directly execute the notification control of the notification means as in the eleventh embodiment so that the notification corresponding to the contents of the received various parameters is performed. By transmitting a command corresponding to the contents of the various parameters received by the main CPU 63 to the voice emission control device 81, the display light emitting unit 53, the speaker unit 54 and the symbol display device 41 are used to change the contents of the various parameters. The configuration may be such that the corresponding notification is executed.

(7) When the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, various parameters are calculated by the main CPU 63 or the management CPU 112 based on the history information stored in the history memory 117, and the calculated parameters are calculated. The contents of various parameters may be notified by using the display light emitting unit 53, the speaker unit 54, the symbol display device 41, and the like. In this case, it is possible to confirm whether or not the entering mode of the game ball in the game area PA on the last business day is normal at the start of the game hall business.

(8) When various parameters calculated based on the history information stored in the history memory 117 are abnormal results, the pachinko machine 10 cannot start the game until the prohibition cancel operation is performed. May be As a configuration that prevents the game from being started, for example, a configuration in which the game ball is prohibited to be launched, a configuration in which each of the ball detection sensors 42a to 49a may be invalidated, and a first operation opening It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the win/no determination process is not executed even if a win is generated in 33 or the second operating port 34. In addition, the prohibition canceling operation may be an operation of turning the power of the pachinko machine 10 on again while the RAM erasing switch is turned on, and can be operated when the gaming machine main body 12 is opened to the outer frame 11. The operation means may be operated. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game from being played as it is in a situation where the game balls in the game area PA are in an abnormal mode.

(9) Although the history information corresponding to the detection results of the ball detection sensors 42a to 48a is stored in the history memory 117, calculation of various parameters using the history information is performed by either the main CPU 63 or the management CPU 112. The configuration may be such that it is not executed. In this case, the history information may be read by a reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102, and the operator of the reading operation may perform calculation of various parameters using the read history information. Of course, the reading device may be configured to execute various parameters using the read history information. In this case, the processing load on the main CPU 63 and the management CPU 112 can be reduced.

(10) The management IC 66 may not be provided, and the main CPU 63 may have the function of executing the storage process of the history information and the function of calculating various parameters in each of the above embodiments. The configuration may be included in the CPU 92, or may be included in the voice emission control device 81. When the payout side CPU 92 or the voice emission control device 81 is provided with these functions, the information of the detection result of each of the ball detection sensors 42a to 48a is transmitted from the main side CPU 63 to the control subject having the function. It will be.

(11) The management IC 66 is provided with a power source separate from the main CPU 63, and even if the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped, the management IC 66 calculates various parameters using history information. Alternatively, the history information or the information of various parameters may be output. As a result, even when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped, the history information and various parameters can be read by the reading device.

(12) The reading terminal 102 used for reading the program from the main ROM 64 is also used as a terminal used for reading history information or various parameters by the reading device, but the present invention is not limited to this. Alternatively, the terminal used for reading the history information or various parameters by the reading device may be provided separately from the reading terminal 102 for reading the program from the main ROM 64. In this case, the terminal used to read the history information or various parameters may be provided in the MPU 62, or may be provided in a position different from the MPU 62 in the main control board 61.

(13) The correspondence relationship memory 116, the history memory 117, and the operation result memory 131 in each of the above embodiments are not limited to the configuration provided as a non-volatile storage means such as a flash memory. Any one of 116, 117, and 131 is provided as a volatile storage unit that requires power supply to store and hold information, and backup power is supplied to the memory, whereby operating power to the main CPU 63 is increased. The information may be stored and held even if the supply of the information is stopped. In this case, a dedicated backup power device may be provided for that memory, or a configuration in which backup power is supplied to the memory from a power supply/launch control device 78 that supplies backup power to the main RAM 65. Good.

(14) The history information is not limited to the configuration in which various parameters are calculated, the history information is not stored and held, and the game ball is detected by any of the entry detection sensors 42a to 48a. Various parameters may be calculated and updated each time they are newly detected. In this case, although the calculation frequency of various parameters increases, it becomes possible to extract various parameters at arbitrary timing.

(15) The management IC 66 includes the management-side CPU 112 as a general-purpose CPU, and is not limited to the configuration in which the history-information storage processing and various parameter calculation processing are executed based on the programs and data stored in the management-side ROM 113. Alternatively, a hard circuit designed to have these functions may be formed in the management IC 66. More specifically, regarding the configuration, for example, in the case of the first embodiment, when the hardware circuit receives from the main CPU 63 a signal indicating that one of the detection sensors 42a to 48a has detected a game ball. The correspondence relation information corresponding to the buffer that received the signal is stored in the history memory 117 from the correspondence relation memory 116, and the RTC 115 information at that time is stored in the history memory 117. To do. Further, for example, in the case of the ninth embodiment, when the hardware circuit receives from the main CPU 63 a signal indicating that any of the detection sensors 42a to 48a has detected a game ball, that hardware circuit receives the signal. The value of the counter corresponding to the buffer is incremented by 1. In addition, the hardware circuit calculates various parameters by using the history information at the time when the calculation trigger in the first embodiment or the like occurs. Further, when an external output trigger to the reading terminal 102 occurs, the hardware circuit externally outputs various parameters that are calculation results and history information.

(16) In addition to or in place of the configuration in which the information on the detection results of the ball entrance detection sensors 42a to 48a is stored as history information, the configuration in which the occurrence of the transition to the open/close execution mode is also stored as history information The timing of transition to the open/close execution mode and the end timing may be stored as history information, or the history of transition to the high-frequency support mode may be stored as history information. The occurrence of may be stored as history information. Further, by using the history information as described above, the transition probability to the open/close execution mode may be calculated, or the transition probability to the high-frequency support mode may be calculated. The frequency of occurrence may be calculated. The history information and various parameters may be readable by a reading device.

(17) The main CPU 63 and the management IC 66 may be provided as separate chips, may be provided as a separate board, or may be provided as a separate control device.

(18) In the first embodiment, etc., the number of game balls to be entered into the out port 24a is measured, while the general prize hole 31, the special electricity prize device 32, the first actuation port 33, and History information including RTC information may be stored for paying out prize balls of game balls such as the second operating port 34 or entering a privilege-triggered ball part that triggers the winning/non-winning determination process. As a result, it is possible to calculate the frequency of game balls entering each privilege opportunity ball unit with respect to the total number of discharged game balls, while allowing the history of game balls entering the privilege opportunity ball unit to be extracted. Become.

(19) As a target to be left as history information, a structure other than those in each of the above embodiments may be included. For example, at least one of the timing when the lower plate 56a becomes full, the timing when the full state is started, and the timing when the full state is released may be stored as history information. At least one of the time when the non-ball state is started, the timing when the no-ball state is started, and the timing when the no-ball state is released may be stored as history information, and the dispensing device 76 is in an abnormal state. That is, at least one of the timing at which the abnormal state of the dispensing device 76 is started and the timing at which the abnormal state of the dispensing device 76 is released may be stored as history information. In this case, it is possible to grasp the occurrence frequency of these events.

(20) In the first embodiment and the like described above, the configuration in which the 16th buffer 122p of the input port 121 in the management-side I/F 111 corresponds to the output instruction signal is preset in the design stage of the management IC 66. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the fact that the sixteenth buffer 122p corresponds to the output instruction signal is also recognized by the management IC 66 when the type identification command is transmitted from the main CPU 63. It may be configured. In this case, it is not necessary to previously set the correspondence between the buffers 122a to 122p and the types of signals input to the buffers 122a to 122p in the management IC 66 in advance.

(21) The number of game balls entered into a predetermined ball-entering portion that has occurred when the front door frame 14 is in an open state is stored as history information, and the number of entered balls grasped by using the history information is stored. May be externally output to the reading device. As a result, it is possible to know the number of game balls that have entered the predetermined ball entrance portion in the situation where the front door frame 14 is in the open state, and it is possible to know whether or not there is any illegality. In addition, the number of balls entered into a predetermined ball entering portion, which is generated when the front door frame 14 is in the open state, is calculated when a predetermined calculation trigger occurs, and the calculated number of entered balls is an abnormal number. In some cases, the abnormality notification may be executed. As a result, it is possible to deal with an illegal act in which the front door frame 14 is illegally opened to enter the game ball into a predetermined ball entrance portion.

(22) The management IC 66 may be configured to send a normal operation signal to the main CPU 63 when it is operating normally. In this case, it becomes possible for the main CPU 63 to monitor whether the management IC 66 is operating normally.

(23) In the first embodiment and the like, the management CPU 112 may perform the confirmation processing of the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o in the opposite order to the first embodiment and the like. In this case, the order in which the main CPU 63 executes the process of changing the output state of each signal and the order in which the management CPU 112 executes the confirmation process of the buffers 122a to 122o match.

(24) When the information stored in the main ROM 64 is externally output using the reading terminal 102, one of the program and the data may be selectively externally output, and a predetermined program may be used. Only one of them may be externally output. In this case, the information to be analyzed can be selectively read by the reading device. As a configuration for selectively outputting the information to the outside, the main CPU 63 selects the information to be the external output target from the selection information received from the reading device through the reading terminal 102, and outputs the selected information to the outside. Is possible.

(25) Other information to be externally output through the reading terminal 102 for externally outputting the program stored in the main ROM 64 is not limited to history information and various parameters. For example, when an abnormality occurs, The history information on the occurrence of the abnormality may be stored in advance, and the stored history information may be externally output through the reading terminal 102.

(26) Detection sensors 42a to 48a are individually provided for the outlet 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special electricity winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, and the second operating opening 34, and the detection sensors 42a to 48a are provided. Although the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA is grasped by totaling the number of detected game balls, the number is not limited to this. For example, all the game balls discharged from the game area PA. It is also possible to provide a passage area in which the game spheres pass one by one and to provide a discharge detection sensor for detecting the game spheres passing through the passage area. In this case, it is possible to grasp the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA by using the detection result of the discharge detection sensor. Further, in the configuration, similarly to each of the above-described embodiments, a detection sensor for detecting the number of entered game balls of each of the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, and the second operating opening 34. By providing 42a to 47a, it is possible to calculate the ratio of the number of game balls entering each ball entry part to the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA.

(27) In the first embodiment described above, the through gate 35 is not provided on the downstream side of the special electric winning device 32, but an operating port serving as a trigger for acquiring pending information on the special drawing side is provided. Good. For example, an operation port that is not provided with the general electric auditors product 34a and is not provided with a member that directly blocks or allows the entry of a game ball, and is provided with an operation port that triggers the acquisition of the second hold information. It may be configured to have. In this case, the special electric prize winning device 32 is opened/closed in the open/close execution mode, which causes the acquisition of the second hold information. Further, in the configuration, when the second hold information is the target of the hit determination, the opening/closing execution mode is surely generated, so that in the opening/closing execution mode a game ball enters the operation opening. The open/close execution mode is surely generated. As a result, the importance of the game ball entering the operation opening in the open/close execution mode is increased. The present configuration may be applied to embodiments other than the first embodiment.

(28) In the first embodiment, by providing the through gate 35 on the downstream side of the special electric prize winning device 32, it is possible to enter the game ball into the through gate 35 when the special electric prize winning device 32 is opened and closed. However, the configuration for providing the ball entering portion that allows the game ball to enter in the open/close execution mode is not limited to this. For example, the special electric open/close member of the special electric prize winning device 32 has a configuration similar to that of the universal electric accessory 34a of the second operation port 34, and the special electric open/close member is arranged from the closed position to the open position, thereby As a configuration in which a part presses a ball entrance opening/closing member of a predetermined ball entrance part and the ball entrance opening/closing member moves from a closed position to an open position, a game ball can enter the predetermined ball entrance part. Good. In this case, when the special electric opening/closing member returns from the open position to the closed position, the pressing of the special electric opening/closing member on the ball opening/closing member is released, and the special ball opening/closing member returns from the open position to the closed position. .. Even with this configuration, it is possible to enter a game ball into a predetermined ball entrance portion in the opening/closing execution mode.

(29) Even if the special electric prize winning device 32 is not opened and closed, the game ball can be reached when the game ball is at a position where the special electric prize winning device 32 can be reached and a shooting operation is performed. The through gate 35 may be provided at the position, and an electric opening/closing member may be provided to prevent or allow a game ball to enter the through gate 35. Then, when the opening/closing execution mode is started, the electrically driven opening/closing member holds the game ball in the through gate 35 at a blocking position for preventing the game ball from entering the through gate 35 at a constant cycle. Is allowed to move to and from an allowable position. Even with this configuration, the game ball can enter the through gate 35 in the opening/closing execution mode. The present configuration may be applied to embodiments other than the first embodiment.

(30) In the first embodiment, when the game ball enters the through gate 35 and the holding information on the universal figure side is acquired, the universal opening state of the second working port 34 is surely generated. May be The present configuration may be applied to embodiments other than the first embodiment.

(31) In the above-described first embodiment, when the special electric prize winning device 32 is switched from the open state to the closed state, the game ball placed on the guide plate portion 214 can enter the through gate 35. The present invention is not limited to this, and when the special electric prize winning device 32 switches from the closed state to the open state, the game ball placed on the guide plate portion 214 may be able to enter the through gate 35. In other words, in this configuration, even if the special electric prize winning device 32 is in the closed state, it is impossible to win the special electric prize winning device 32, but the game ball can be placed on the guide plate portion 214, and the guide plate portion 214 is provided. When the special ball winning device 32 is switched from the closed state to the open state while the game ball is placed on the game ball, the game ball can drop toward the through gate 35. In this case, the player pays attention to whether or not the game ball is placed on the guide plate portion 214 in the situation where the special electric prize winning device 32 is closed, and even if the special electric prize winning device 32 is closed, the special electric prize It is possible to increase the player's attention to the winning device 32. The present configuration may be applied to embodiments other than the first embodiment.

(32) When the special electric prize winning device 32 is switched from the closed state to the open state, the game ball on the guide plate 214 can enter the through gate 35, and the special electric prize winning device 32 is closed from the open state. When the game is switched to, the game ball on the guide plate 214 may be able to enter the through gate 35. This allows the player to pay attention to the start timing and the end timing of the opening times of the special electric winning device 32. Further, it is possible to generate many opportunities for the game ball to enter the through gate 35. The present configuration may be applied to embodiments other than the first embodiment.

(33) In the first embodiment, when the special electric prize winning device 32 is in an open state, it is surely prevented that the game ball flowing down the right side area PA3 flows down to the downstream side of the special electric prize winning device 32. May be For example, the opening/closing member 202 is a plate shape having no opening 213 like the guide plates 271, 281 in the fifteenth embodiment, and when the opening/closing member 202 is arranged in the closed position, the opening/closing member 202 is a game board. When it is located behind the board surface of 24 and is located at the open position, the opening/closing member 202 may exist between the board surface of the game board 24 and the window panel 52. As a result, except for the game ball on the opening/closing member 202 at the timing when the special electric prize winning device 32 switches from the open state to the closed state, the special electric prize winning device 32 flows down the right side area PA3 when the special electric prize winning device 32 is in the open state. The game ball to be played will surely win the special electric prize winning device 32. The present configuration may be applied to embodiments other than the first embodiment.

(34) In the first embodiment, when the game ball enters the through gate 35 and is in the universal electric open state, the second operating port 34 is electrically opened, but this is not the case. There is no limitation, and for example, when a game ball enters the through gate 35, the second working port 34 is opened by mechanically interlocking with the pressing force of the entered game ball. The configuration in which the second working port 34 is returned to the closed state by mechanically interlocking by using the pressing force of the game ball by entering one or two game balls into the second working port 34 May be The present configuration may be applied to embodiments other than the first embodiment.

(35) In the first embodiment, the game ball that has entered the through gate 35 is configured to continue flowing down in the game area PA after that. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the game ball enters the through gate 35. The game ball may be discharged from the game area PA by being led out to the back side of the game board 24. The present configuration may be applied to embodiments other than the first embodiment.

(36) The configuration of the special electric prize winning device 32 of the first embodiment and the configuration of the special electric prize winning devices 261 and 262 of the fifteenth embodiment are applied to the second operating port 34, and the second operating port is also applied. A predetermined ball entrance portion may be provided at a position where the ball can enter only when 34 is opened and closed. In this case, the predetermined ball entrance portion may be a ball entrance portion in which the payout of the game ball is performed by entering the game ball, and by the entry of the game ball, the holding information on the special map side or the holding on the general figure side It may be used as a ball entry unit from which information is acquired.

(37) In the open/close execution mode, it may be configured such that the reservation information on the universal figure side is not consumed. As a result, the transition to the universally open state of the second operation port 34 for the acquisition of the holding information on the universal figure side in the opening/closing execution mode occurs after the opening/closing execution mode ends. It is possible for the player to aim the game ball into the second operation port 34. The present configuration may be applied to embodiments other than the first embodiment.

(38) Even in the opening/closing execution mode, although the holding information on the universal figure side is consumed, the variable display of the pattern on the universal figure display portion 38a started in the opening/closing execution mode is continued until the opening/closing execution mode ends. It may be configured. Even in this case, it becomes possible for the player to aim the game ball into the second operation port 34 after the opening/closing execution mode. The present configuration may be applied to embodiments other than the first embodiment.

(39) When the second hold information is the target of the hit determination processing, not only the big hit result and the small hit result but also the miss result may be adopted. Further, the small hit result may be obtained even when the first hold information is the target of the hit determination processing.

(40) A plurality of types of support modes may be set so that the modes of support by the general electric accessory 34a are different from each other. Specifically, in the support mode, when compared with the situation in which the game balls are continuously emitted in the same manner in the game area PA, the universal utility object 34a of the second working port 34 is opened per unit time. The high frequency support mode and the low frequency support mode are set so that the frequency of the state becomes relatively high and low.

In the high-frequency support mode and the low-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the ordinary electric open state in the ordinary electric open lottery using the ordinary electric random number counter C4 is the same (for example, both are 4/5). In the frequency support mode, the number of times that the ordinary electric accessory 34a is in the open state when the ordinary electric open state is won is set to a larger number than in the low frequency support mode, and one opening time is set longer. There is. In this case, in the high-frequency support mode, the general electric open state is won, and when the general electric auditors a thing 34a is opened a plurality of times, from the end of one open state to the start of the next open state. The closing time is set shorter than one opening time. Furthermore, in the high-frequency support mode, the minimum securing time (that is, in the general map The one-time display duration on the display section 38a is set to be short.

As described above, in the high frequency support mode, the probability of winning the second operation opening 34 is higher than in the low frequency support mode. In other words, in the low frequency support mode, the probability of winning a prize in the first operation port 33 is higher than in the second operation port 34, but in the high frequency support mode, the second operation is performed more than the first operation port 33. The probability of winning a prize in the mouth 34 increases. Then, when a winning is generated in the second operating port 34, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out, so in the high frequency support mode, the player plays the game while not reducing the number of balls that he or she holds. It can be carried out.

The configuration for increasing the frequency of the high frequency support mode per unit time to the normal power open state more than the low frequency support mode is not limited to the above-mentioned one. It may be configured to increase the probability that the ordinary electric open state wins. In addition, a securing time that is secured when the next ordinary electric train open lottery is performed after the first ordinary electric train open lottery is performed (for example, it is executed in the universal map display portion 38a based on the winning of the through gate 35). In a configuration in which multiple types of variable display time) are provided, the high-frequency support mode is set so that a shorter securing time can be selected more easily or the average securing time is shorter than in the low-frequency support mode. Good. Furthermore, the number of times of opening is increased, the time of opening is lengthened, and the securing time that is secured when the next ordinary electric train opening lottery is performed after one ordinary electric train opening lottery is shortened. The advantage of the high frequency support mode over the low frequency support mode may be increased by applying any one condition or a condition of any combination of shortening the averaging time and increasing the winning probability.

(41) When the special electric prize winning device 32 is in an open state, it is possible to enter a game ball into the special electric prize winning device 32, and when the special electric prize winning device 32 is in a closed state, a game ball to the special electric prize winning device 32. Is not limited to the configuration in which the special ball winning device 32 is closed, and even if the special electric prize winning device 32 is closed, it is possible to enter the game ball into the special electric prize winning device 32, but it is in the open state. It may be configured such that it is more difficult for game balls to enter the special electric prize winning device 32 than in the case. The present configuration may be applied to embodiments other than the first embodiment.

(42) When the second operating port 34 is in the open state, it is possible to enter the game ball into the second operating port 34, and when the second operating port 34 is in the closed state, the second operating port 34 It is not limited to the configuration in which the game ball cannot enter the second operation port 34, and the game ball can enter the second operation port 34 even when the second operation port 34 is closed. It may be configured such that the game ball does not easily enter the second operation port 34 as compared with the case where the game ball is in the open state. The present configuration may be applied to embodiments other than the first embodiment.

(43) It is not possible for the player to replenish the pachinko machine 10 with game balls, the game balls circulate in the pachinko machine 10, and information on the number of game balls that the player can use is stored and held. The configuration of each of the above embodiments may be applied to a configuration in which the game balls can be launched within the range of the information on the number of usable game balls stored and held.

(44) Display control based on a command transmitted from the main control device 60 instead of the configuration in which the display control device 82 is controlled by the sound emission control device 81 based on the command transmitted from the main control device 60. The device 82 may control the audio emission control device 81. Further, instead of the configuration in which the sound emission control device 81 and the display control device 82 are separately provided, both control devices may be provided as one control device, and the function of one of the both control devices may be provided. May be integrated in the main control device 60, and both functions of the both control devices may be integrated in the main control device 60. Further, the configuration of the command transmitted from the main control device 60 to the sound emission control device 81 and the configuration of the command transmitted from the sound emission control device 81 to the display control device 82 are also arbitrary.

(45) Other types of pachinko machines different from the above embodiments, such as a pachinko machine in which an electric accessory opens a predetermined number of times when a game ball enters a specific area of a special device, or a game ball in a specific area of a special device. The present invention is also applicable to gaming machines such as pachinko machines in which a right is generated and a big hit is generated, pachinko machines equipped with other accessories, arrange ball machines, and sparrow balls.

Also, a non-ball-ball type gaming machine, for example, provided with a plurality of reels with a plurality of types of symbols attached in the circumferential direction, the rotation of the reel is started by inserting a medal and operating the start lever, and the stop switch is operated. After the reels stop after a predetermined time has elapsed, if a specific symbol or a combination of specific symbols is established on the effective line visible from the display window, a bonus such as payout of medals is given to the player. The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine.

In addition, the game machine main body that is openably and closably supported by the outer frame is provided with a storage unit and a loading device, and the start lever is operated after a predetermined number of game balls stored in the storage unit are loaded by the loading device. The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated, in which the reel starts to rotate.

When the present invention is applied to a slot machine or a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, for example, the result of the lottery processing of the winning combination executed when one game is started based on the operation of the start lever is history information. It may be configured such that the actual winning probability of each winning combination is calculated using the history information, and when a transition to a special control state such as a bonus game occurs, it is stored as history information and is stored as the history. The information may be used to calculate the actual transition probability to the special control state, or the ratio of the number of stay games in the special control state to the total number of exhausted games may be calculated. Then, the history information and various parameters may be read by a reading device, or a notification corresponding to the calculation result of various parameters may be performed by the gaming machine itself.

(46) The characteristic configurations of the first to nineteenth embodiments may be mutually applied in any combination. For example, the characteristic configuration of the first embodiment, the characteristic configuration of the sixth embodiment, and the characteristic configuration of the twelfth embodiment may be combined, and the characteristic configuration of the second embodiment may be combined. The characteristic configuration of the embodiment, the characteristic configuration of the fourth embodiment, and the characteristic configuration of the eighth embodiment may be combined, and the characteristic configuration of the first embodiment may be combined. The configuration, the characteristic configuration of the thirteenth embodiment, and the characteristic configuration of the fourteenth embodiment may be combined, and the characteristic configuration of the first embodiment and the fifteenth configuration may be combined. The characteristic configuration of the embodiment and the characteristic configuration of the nineteenth embodiment may be combined. Further, in addition to the configuration in which the characteristic configurations of the above-described first to nineteenth embodiments are applied in a predetermined combination, the configuration in the above-described another mode may be applied in an arbitrary combination.

<Regarding invention groups extracted from the above embodiments>
The features of the invention group extracted from each of the above-described embodiments will be described below, showing effects and the like as necessary. It should be noted that, in the following, for ease of understanding, the configurations corresponding to the above-described embodiments are appropriately shown in parentheses or the like, but the present invention is not limited to the specific configurations shown in brackets or the like.

<Feature A group>
Features A1. Predetermined ball entering means (out port 24a, general winning opening 31, special electric winning device 32, first operating opening 33, second operating opening 34) into which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter.
When a game ball enters the predetermined ball entering means, specific storage executing means (the main CPU 63 executes the entrance detecting process) that causes the corresponding information to be stored in the specific storing means (main RAM 65). Function),
A privilege to execute a process for giving a privilege to a player based on the fact that the information corresponding to the game ball entering the predetermined ball entering device is stored in the specific storage device. Giving means (a function of the main CPU 63 for executing the process of step S217, a payout CPU 92 for executing the process of step S408),
In a gaming machine equipped with
When a game ball enters the predetermined ball entering means, the corresponding information is stored in the predetermined storage means (the history memory 117 in the first to ninth and eleventh to twelfth embodiments, the tenth embodiment). Then, it is executed in the main RAM 65), and the predetermined information (first number) that allows the number of balls entered into the predetermined ball entering means or the frequency of entering the balls to be specified by the game machine or a device external to the game machine. -Predetermined storage execution means (first storage means) for storing history information in the eighth and twelfth embodiments and numerical information measured by a counter in the ninth to eleventh embodiments) ~ In the ninth and eleventh to twelfth embodiments, a function of executing history setting processing in the management side CPU 112, and in the tenth embodiment, steps S3202, S3205, S3208, S3212, S3216 in the main CPU63, A game machine having a function of executing the processing of step S3220 and step S3223).

According to the characteristic A1, when the game ball enters the predetermined ball entering means, the corresponding information is stored in the specific storage means, and when the information is stored in the specific storage means, the player is provided with a privilege. To be done. As a result, the player will play the game while expecting the game ball to enter the predetermined ball entering means. In the configuration, when a game ball enters the predetermined ball entering means, the corresponding information is stored in the predetermined storing means, and the number of the game balls entering the predetermined ball entering means or the frequency of the ball entering. Predetermined information that allows the control means of the game machine or a device outside the game machine to specify the information is stored in the predetermined storage means. As a result, it becomes possible for the gaming machine to store and hold information for managing the number of balls or the frequency of entering the game balls into the predetermined ball entering means, and by using this managed information, the predetermined information can be stored. It is possible to appropriately manage the entering mode of the game ball into the entering device. In addition, by storing and holding the predetermined information in the gaming machine itself, it becomes possible to prevent unauthorized access or unauthorized modification of the predetermined information.

Feature A2. The gaming machine according to feature A1, wherein the predetermined information does not trigger execution of a process for granting a privilege to the player.

According to the characteristic A2, the predetermined information does not trigger the execution of the process for granting the privilege to the player, so that it is aimed to appropriately manage the entering mode of the game ball into the predetermined entering means. It is possible to store and hold the predetermined information in the information form.

Features A3. It is provided with a specific entering means (out opening 24a, a general winning opening 31, a special electric winning device 32, a first operating opening 33, a second operating opening 34) into which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter.
When the game ball enters the specific ball entering means, the predetermined memory executing means causes the predetermined memory means to store information corresponding to the game ball, so that the game ball enters the specific ball entering means. Specific information (the history information in the first to eighth and twelfth embodiments, the counter in the ninth to eleventh embodiments) that enables the control means of the gaming machine or a device outside the gaming machine to specify the number of balls. The game machine according to feature A1 or A2, characterized in that the measured numerical information) is stored in the predetermined storage means.

According to the characteristic A3, not only the predetermined information corresponding to the predetermined ball entering means but also the specific information corresponding to the specific ball entering means is stored in the predetermined storage means. As a result, it is possible to manage not only the entering mode of the game ball into the predetermined entering device but also the entering form of the game ball into the specific entering device. Further, by using both the predetermined information and the specific information, it becomes possible to manage the ratio of the frequency of entering the ball between the predetermined ball entering means and the specific ball entering means.

Features A4. All of the ball entering means, including the predetermined ball entering means, for ejecting the entered game ball from the game area are objects to be stored in the predetermined storage means of information corresponding to the occurrence of the ball entering the game ball. The game machine according to any one of the features A1 to A3, which is a ball entering means.

According to the characteristic A4, all the ball entering means for ejecting the game ball from the game area are subject to management using the information stored in the predetermined storage means, so that the ball entering frequency for any ball entering means. Can be managed by using the information stored in the predetermined storage means. Further, it is possible to manage the ratio of the number of game balls to the predetermined ball entering means with respect to the number of game balls to be discharged from the game area, using the information stored in the predetermined storage means.

Features A5. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A4, wherein the predetermined information includes information corresponding to a timing when a game ball enters the predetermined ball entering means.

According to the feature A5, since the predetermined information includes information corresponding to the timing at which the game ball enters the predetermined ball entering means, by using the predetermined information, the game ball entering the predetermined ball entering means It is possible to grasp the entry history in detail.

Features A6. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A5, characterized in that the predetermined information is counting information of the number of game balls entered in the predetermined entering means.

According to the characteristic A6, the predetermined information is the counting information of the number of game balls that have entered the predetermined ball entering means, so that the amount of the predetermined information can be suppressed and the mode of entering the game ball into the predetermined ball entering means can be suppressed. Can be managed.

Features A7. The predetermined storage execution means is a means for causing the predetermined storage means to store information that enables identification of whether or not a game ball has entered the predetermined ball insertion means in a predetermined situation (first). In the first to seventh embodiments, the function of executing the processing of steps S804 and S809 in the management-side CPU 112, in the eighth embodiment, the function of performing the processing of step S3004 in the management-side CPU 112, and in the ninth embodiment, management The game machine according to any one of features A1 to A6, which is provided with a function of executing the process of step S3103 in the side CPU 112.

According to the feature A7, it is possible to manage whether or not the game ball enters the predetermined ball entering means by distinguishing whether or not it is in a predetermined situation.

Feature A8. Any one of features A1 to A7 characterized in that it is provided with an external output unit (a function for executing an external output process in the management-side CPU 112) that outputs the information stored in the predetermined storage unit to a device outside the gaming machine. The gaming machine described in 1.

According to the characteristic A8, it becomes possible to read the information stored in the predetermined storage means from the gaming machine, and use the read information to analyze the entry mode of the game ball into the predetermined entry means.

Features A9. A program output unit (a function for executing the process of step S903 in the main CPU 63) that outputs a control program to a device outside the gaming machine using the information output unit (reading terminal 102) is provided.
The game machine according to feature A8, wherein the external output means outputs the information stored in the predetermined storage means to a device outside the game machine, using the information output unit.

According to the characteristic A9, it is possible to output the information stored in the predetermined storage means to the outside by using the information output unit for outputting the control program to the outside. This makes it possible to output the information stored in the predetermined storage means to the outside while preventing the configuration from becoming complicated.

Feature A10. Means for identifying whether the information to be output from the information output unit is the information stored in the predetermined storage unit or the control program, and outputting the information corresponding to the identification result (mainly (A function of executing the process of step S902 in the side CPU 63) The gaming machine according to feature A9.

According to the characteristic A10, in the configuration in which the information output unit for externally outputting the control program is used to externally output the information stored in the predetermined storage unit, the information to be externally output is the control program and the predetermined information. Which of the information stored in the storage means is specified on the gaming machine side, and the specified information is output to the outside. This makes it possible to read out only the necessary information even if the information output section is also used.

Feature A11. First control means (main CPU 63) having the specific storage execution means,
Second control means (management side CPU 112) having the predetermined storage execution means,
The gaming machine according to any one of the features A1 to A10, characterized in that

According to the characteristic A11, the second control means provided separately from the first control means having the specific storage execution means has the predetermined storage execution means, so that the processing load of the first control means is extremely increased. It is possible to obtain the excellent effect as already described while preventing the occurrence of the above.

Feature A12. The gaming machine according to Feature A11, wherein the first control unit and the second control unit are provided on the same chip.

According to the characteristic A12, since the first control means and the second control means are provided in the same chip, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to the communication path between the first control means and the second control means. It becomes possible to prevent it.

Feature A13. It is provided with a specific entering means (out opening 24a, a general winning opening 31, a special electric winning device 32, a first operating opening 33, a second operating opening 34) into which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter.
When the game ball enters the specific ball entering means, the predetermined memory executing means causes the predetermined memory means to store information corresponding to the game ball, so that the game to the specific ball entering means is executed. Specific information (the history information in the first to eighth and twelfth embodiments, the ninth to the ninth in the first to eighth and twelfth embodiments, which enables the control means of the game machine or a device outside the game machine to specify the number of balls entered or the frequency of entering the balls. In the eleventh embodiment, the numerical information measured by the counter is stored in the predetermined storage means,
The first control means is
First transmitting means (first to seventh signals of the main CPU 63 for transmitting the first information to the second control means using the first signal path when the game ball enters the predetermined ball entering means) Function to output either),
Second transmitting means for transmitting second information to the second control means by using a second signal path when a game ball enters the specific ball entering means (first to seventh signals of the main CPU 63) Function to output either),
The gaming machine according to the feature A11 or A12, which is characterized by comprising:

According to the characteristic A13, not only the predetermined information corresponding to the predetermined ball entering means but also the specific information corresponding to the specific ball entering means is stored in the predetermined storage means. As a result, it is possible to manage not only the entering mode of the game ball into the predetermined entering device but also the entering form of the game ball into the specific entering device. Further, by using both the predetermined information and the specific information, it becomes possible to manage the ratio of the frequency of entering the ball between the predetermined ball entering means and the specific ball entering means.

Further, when the game ball enters the predetermined ball entering means, the first information is transmitted to the second control means using the first signal path, and when the game ball enters the specific ball entering means. The second information is transmitted to the second control means using the second signal path. As a result, the type of information to be transmitted corresponds to the signal path, and it is possible to simplify the configuration for distinguishing each type of information in the second control means.

Feature A14. The first control means transmits, to the second control means, identification information that enables the second control means to identify whether or not a predetermined situation is present, using the third route. (In the first, third to ninth and twelfth embodiments, the function of outputting any of the eighth to tenth signals in the main CPU 63, in the second embodiment, the open/close execution mode signal in the main CPU63, The gaming machine according to Feature A13, which is provided with a function of outputting either a high frequency support mode signal or a door opening signal.

According to the characteristic A14, it is possible to manage whether the game ball enters the predetermined ball entering means and the game ball enters the specific ball entering means by distinguishing whether or not the situation is a predetermined situation. Further, since the specifying information that can specify whether or not the situation is the predetermined condition is transmitted to the second control means using the third route, the second control means converts the specifying information into the first information and the first information. It is possible to simplify the configuration for distinguishing it from other information such as 2 information.

Feature A15. The first control means provides the second control means with identification information indicating that the first information corresponds to the predetermined ball entering means and the second information corresponds to the specific ball entering means. The gaming machine according to feature A13 or A14, which is provided with an identification information transmitting unit (a function for executing a recognition process in the main CPU 63) for transmitting.

According to the characteristic A15, the identification information indicating that the first information corresponds to the predetermined entrance means and the second information corresponds to the specific entrance means is transmitted from the first control means to the second control means. Therefore, it is not necessary to previously store the correspondence relationship between these pieces of information in the second control means. This makes it possible to increase the versatility of the second control means.

Feature A16. The gaming machine according to Feature A15, wherein the identification information transmitting unit transmits the identification information to the second control unit when supply of operating power to the first control unit is started.

According to the characteristic A16, when the supply of the operating power to the first control means is started, the identification information is transmitted from the first control means to the second control means. Therefore, the predetermined ball entry means and the specific ball entry means In a situation in which a game ball may enter the game ball, it is possible to enable the second control device to specify the correspondence between the information transmitted from the first control device and the game device. Become.

Features A17. The identification information transmission means transmits the identification information to the second control means by using at least one of the first signal path and the second signal path. Amusement machine.

According to the characteristic A17, since the identification information is transmitted to the second control means by using at least one of the first signal path and the second signal path, a dedicated signal path for transmitting the identification information is provided. It is possible to simplify the configuration related to communication as compared with.

Feature A18. When the identification information is received, the second control means can specify that the first information corresponds to the predetermined ball entering means and the second information corresponds to the specific ball entering means. Any of the features A15 to A17 characterized by including a unit (a function for executing the correspondence relation setting process in the management side CPU 112) for storing the correspondence relation information in the correspondence relation storage unit (correspondence relation memory 116). The gaming machine described in 1.

According to the characteristic A18, the correspondence between the information transmitted from the first control means and the ball entry means is stored in the second control means. Thus, the second control means is provided with information that enables the second control means to specify the ball entry means corresponding to the information to be transmitted, every time the first control means transmits the first information or the second information. You don't have to. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the information amount of the first information and the second information.

Features A19. The first control means transmits third information, which enables the second control means to specify whether or not a predetermined situation is present, to the second control means by using a third route. (In the first, third to ninth and twelfth embodiments, the function of outputting any of the eighth to tenth signals in the main CPU 63, in the second embodiment, the open/close execution mode signal in the main CPU63, High frequency support mode signal or door open signal))
The feature A15 characterized in that the second control means can recognize the third information as information that can identify whether or not the predetermined situation is present, without receiving the identification information. The gaming machine according to any one of A to A18.

According to the characteristic A19, it is possible to manage whether the game ball enters the predetermined ball entering means and the game ball enters the specific ball entering means by distinguishing whether or not the situation is a predetermined situation. Also, the fact that the third information is information that can identify whether or not the predetermined condition is present can be identified by the second control means without receiving the identification information from the first control means. .. This makes it possible to prevent the information form of the identification information from becoming complicated.

Feature A20. The second control means is a receiving unit capable of receiving information from the first control means, and the number of types of information that needs to be transmitted from the first control means to the second control means is larger than the number of types of information. The gaming machine according to any one of features A13 to A19, characterized in that a large number of receiving units (buffers 122a to 122p) are provided.

According to the characteristic A20, since the second control means is provided with the number of receiving units that is larger than the number of types of information that needs to be transmitted from the first control means to the second control means, Accordingly, even when the number of types of the information increases or decreases, it is possible to deal with the information without changing the configuration of the receiving unit. Therefore, the versatility of the second control means can be improved.

Feature A21. First external output means (management) for outputting information of a combination of the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage means and information that makes it possible to recognize that it corresponds to the predetermined ball entering means to a device outside the gaming machine. Function for executing external output processing in the side CPU 112),
Second external output means (management) for outputting information of a combination of the specific information stored in the predetermined storage means and information that makes it possible to recognize that it corresponds to the specific ball entering means to a device outside the gaming machine. Function for executing external output processing in the side CPU 112),
The gaming machine according to any one of features A13 to A20, which is characterized by comprising:

According to the feature A21, the information stored in the predetermined storage means is read from the gaming machine, and the read information is used to enter the game ball into the predetermined ball entering means and the game ball to the specific ball entering means. It is possible to specify the entering mode. Further, when the external output is performed, the information of the combination of the predetermined information and the information that makes it possible to recognize that it corresponds to the predetermined ball entering means is externally output, and the specific information and the specific ball entering means are also supported. The information of the combination with the information that makes it possible to recognize that the information is output is output to the outside. Thereby, it is possible to specify each incoming mode by using the information read from the predetermined storage means.

Feature A22. Information calculating means (first, second, sixth, eighth, ninth, ninth) for calculating aspect information corresponding to the entering aspect of the game ball in the game area in a predetermined period using the predetermined information. In the tenth and twelfth embodiments, the function of executing the processes of step S1008, step S1013, and step S1017 in the management-side CPU 112, and in the third embodiment, the processes of step S2308, step S2313, and step S2317 in the management-side CPU 112 is executed. Function, the function of executing the process of step S2502 in the management CPU 112 in the fourth embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S2702 in the management CPU 112 in the fifth embodiment, and the function of executing the process in step S2702 in the management CPU 112 in the seventh embodiment. The game machine according to any one of the features A1 to A21, which has a function of executing the process of step S2905, and a function of executing the process of step S3503 in the main CPU 63 in the eleventh embodiment. ..

According to the characteristic A22, the mode information corresponding to the entering mode of the game ball is calculated by the game machine using the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage means. As a result, for example, it becomes possible for the gaming machine itself to perform a process corresponding to the entering mode of the game ball, or it is possible to externally output the mode information which is the result of the calculation using the predetermined information. ..

Feature A23. The predetermined storage execution means is a means for causing the predetermined storage means to have information for identifying whether or not the game ball has entered the predetermined ball insertion means in a predetermined situation (first). ~ A function of executing the processing of steps S804 and S809 in the management CPU 112 in the seventh embodiment, a function of executing the processing of step S3004 in the management CPU 112 in the eighth embodiment, and a management side in the ninth embodiment. A function of executing the process of step S3103 in the CPU 112),
The information calculation means is means for calculating the aspect information by extracting or excluding the predetermined information corresponding to the entry of the game ball into the predetermined entry means in the predetermined situation (first, second, and second). In the sixth, eighth, ninth, tenth, and twelfth embodiments, the function of executing the processes of step S1008, step S1013, and step S1017 in the management CPU 112, in the third embodiment, step S2308 in the management CPU 112, A function of executing the processing of steps S2313 and S2317, a function of executing the processing of step S2502 in the management-side CPU 112 in the fourth embodiment, and a function of executing the processing of step S2702 in the management-side CPU 112 in the fifth embodiment. A characteristic A22 characterized by having a function of executing the processing of step S2905 in the management side CPU 112 in the seventh embodiment and a function of executing the processing of step S3503 in the main side CPU 63 in the eleventh embodiment) The game machine described.

According to the feature A23, it becomes possible to calculate the mode information corresponding to the entering mode of the game ball by distinguishing whether or not it is the predetermined situation.

Feature A24. A means for erasing the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage means when the aspect information is calculated by the information calculation means (first, second, eighth, ninth, tenth and twelfth embodiments In the embodiment, the management side CPU 112 has a function of executing the process of step S1019, and in the fourth embodiment, the management side CPU 112 has a function of executing the process of step S2505). Amusement machine.

According to the characteristic A24, when the aspect information is calculated, the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage means is deleted, so that it is difficult for the predetermined information to exceed the storage capacity of the predetermined storage means. It becomes possible.

Feature A25. Even if the aspect information is calculated by the information calculation means, the state in which the predetermined information used when calculating the aspect information is stored in the predetermined storage means is maintained. Or the game machine described in A23.

According to the characteristic A25, even if the mode information is calculated, the predetermined information used when calculating the mode information is stored and held in the predetermined storage means, so that the mode information is read and the game ball enters the ball. When analyzing the aspect, it is possible to refer not only to the aspect information but also to the predetermined information that is the basis of the calculation of the aspect information.

Feature A26. The information calculation means, when the supply of operating power to the control means having the specific storage execution means is stopped, or when the supply of operating power to the control means having the specific storage execution means is started, The gaming machine according to any one of features A22 to A25, wherein the aspect information is calculated.

According to the characteristic A26, the aspect information is calculated when the supply of the operating power to the control means is stopped or when the supply of the operating power to the control means is stopped. Therefore, the aspect information is calculated for each business day. It becomes possible to manage.

Feature A27. Characteristic A22 to A22, wherein the information calculation means calculates the aspect information when a calculation trigger that may occur repeatedly occurs in a situation where operating power is being supplied to the control means having the specific storage execution means. The gaming machine according to any one of A26.

According to the characteristic A27, the mode information is calculated every time a calculation trigger repeatedly occurs in the situation where the operating power is being supplied to the control means. Therefore, the mode information should be managed finely within the range of one business day. Is possible.

Feature A28. The information calculation unit calculates the aspect information every time the period measured by the period measurement unit (measurement counter provided in the main RAM 65) reaches a predetermined period,
The period measuring means stops the measurement of the period when the game is not being executed, and restarts the measurement of the period from the state before the stop when the game is started in the situation where the measurement of the period is stopped. The gaming machine according to any one of features A22 to A27.

According to the characteristic A28, since the aspect information is calculated every time the predetermined period elapses, it is possible to easily adjust the calculation frequency of the aspect information only by adjusting the predetermined period. In this case, in a situation where the game is not executed, the measurement for the predetermined period is stopped, and when the game is started, the measurement for the predetermined period is restarted from the state before the stop. This makes it possible to exclude the situation where the game is not executed from the calculation target of the situation information, and it is possible to appropriately derive the situation information in the situation where the game is being executed.

Feature A29. Features A22 to A28, which are provided with an external output unit (a function for executing an external output process in the management side CPU 112) that outputs the aspect information calculated by the information calculation unit to a device outside the gaming machine. The gaming machine according to any one of 1.

According to the characteristic A29, the aspect information is output to the device outside the gaming machine, so that the entering aspect of the game ball can be easily grasped.

Feature A30. The game machine according to feature A29, wherein the external output means outputs the predetermined information to a device outside the game machine when the aspect information is output to a device outside the game machine.

According to the characteristic A30, not only the aspect information but also the predetermined information is output to the device outside the gaming machine, so that when the aspect information is read and the entry mode of the game ball is analyzed, not only the aspect information but also the aspect information It is possible to refer to the predetermined information that is the basis of the calculation of the aspect information.

Feature A31. First control means (main CPU 63) having the specific storage execution means,
Second control means (management side CPU 112) having the external output means,
Equipped with
The external output means outputs the aspect information to a device external to the gaming machine when the second control means receives the output instruction information transmitted from the first control means, A29 or A game machine described in A30.

According to the characteristic A31, in the configuration in which the processing load of the first control means is reduced by providing the second control means having the external output means separately from the first control means, the aspect based on the instruction from the first control means The information can be output to a device outside the gaming machine.

Feature A32. The information calculation means calculates the aspect information each time a predetermined calculation trigger occurs,
Result storage executing means for sequentially storing the mode information calculated by the information calculating means in the calculation result storage means (calculation result memory 131) (steps S2310, S2314 and S2318 in the management CPU 112 in the third embodiment). The game machine according to any one of features A22 to A31, which is provided with a function of executing the process of step S2504 in the management-side CPU 112 in the fourth embodiment.

According to the characteristic A32, it becomes possible to accumulate the aspect information in the gaming machine. This makes it possible to collectively read out a plurality of aspect information when managing the entry aspect of the game ball.

Feature A33. The result storage executing means,
Means for determining whether the aspect information is storage target information (a function of the management-side CPU 112 for executing the processing of step S2503);
Means for storing the mode information in the calculation result storage means when the mode information is the storage target information (function for executing the process of step S2504 in the management side CPU 112);
A gaming machine according to feature A32, which is characterized by comprising:

According to the feature A33, when the aspect information of the calculated result corresponds to the storage target information, the aspect information is stored in the calculation result storage means. As a result, it becomes possible to limit the form information to be stored in the calculation result storage means, and it is possible to reduce the storage capacity required in the calculation result storage means.

Feature A34. The game according to feature A32 or A33, characterized in that the result storage execution means stores information in the operation result storage means in association with the aspect information, which makes it possible to specify the time when the aspect information was calculated. Machine.

According to the characteristic A34, the information that enables the time when the aspect information is calculated is associated with the aspect information. This makes it possible to analyze each aspect information while grasping the time when each aspect information is calculated.

Feature A35. First control means (main CPU 63) having the specific storage execution means,
Second control means (management side CPU 112) having the information calculation means,
Equipped with
The information calculation means calculates the aspect information when the second control means receives the calculation trigger information transmitted from the first control means. Aspect A22 to A34, Game machine.

According to Feature A35, in the configuration in which the processing load of the first control means is reduced by providing the second control means having the information calculation means separately from the first control means, an aspect based on an instruction from the first control means The information can be calculated by the second control means.

Feature A36. A notification control unit (a function for executing the processes of steps S3505, S3507, and S3508 in the main CPU 63) that controls the notification unit (the notification light emitting unit 151) to notify the content corresponding to the aspect information is provided. The gaming machine according to any one of the features A22 to A35.

According to the characteristic A36, the content corresponding to the aspect information is notified by the gaming machine itself. As a result, the manager of the game hall or the like can grasp the management result of the entering mode of the game ball without reading the mode information from the gaming machine.

Feature A37. The control board (main control board 61) provided with the notification control means is housed in a board box,
The gaming machine according to feature A36, wherein the notification unit is provided on the control board.

According to the feature A37, it becomes possible to make it difficult to illegally access the communication path between the notification control unit and the notification unit.

Feature A38. First control means (main CPU 63) having the specific storage execution means,
Second control means (management side CPU 112) having the predetermined storage execution means,
Equipped with
The game machine according to feature A36 or A37, wherein the first control means includes the information calculation means and the notification control means.

According to Feature A38, in a configuration in which the processing load of the first control means is reduced by providing the second control means having the predetermined storage means separately from the first control means, the function of calculating the aspect information and the calculation result thereof. It is possible to integrate the function for executing the notification corresponding to the first control means.

Feature A39. The notification control means controls the notification means so that the first notification is executed when the aspect information is the information of the first range, and when the aspect information is the information of the second range, The gaming machine according to any one of features A36 to A38, characterized in that the notifying means is controlled so that the second notification is executed.

According to the feature A39, the aspect information is not notified as it is, but the content corresponding to the range including the aspect information is notified. As a result, it is possible to prevent the notification pattern in the notification means from becoming too large, and it is possible to reduce the load for controlling the notification means.

Feature A40. Features A1 to A1, which are provided with a unit (a function of executing the process of step S218 in the main CPU 63) for externally outputting corresponding information when a game ball enters the predetermined ball entering unit. The gaming machine according to any one of A39.

According to the characteristic A40, the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined storage means in a configuration in which when the game ball enters the predetermined ball entering means, the corresponding information corresponding thereto is externally output. With this, by using the correspondence information, the predetermined number of game balls to the predetermined ball entering means can be easily grasped, and the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage means can be used. It is possible to accurately grasp the number of game balls entering the ball means and the frequency of entering the balls.

Feature A41. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A40, wherein the predetermined storage execution means or the second control means is provided as a dedicated circuit.

According to the characteristic A41, it is possible to obtain the excellent effects as already described in the configuration in which the predetermined storage executing means or the second control means is provided as a dedicated circuit.

It should be noted that features A1 to A41, features B1 to B20, features C1 to C4, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E7, features F1 to F45, features G1 to G18, and features H1 to the configurations of the features A1 to A41. Any one or a plurality of configurations of H8, features I1 to I11, features J1 to J9, and features K1 to K9 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to exert a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Feature B group>
Feature B1. When a predetermined event occurs as a result of the game, the storage of information corresponding to the predetermined event is stored in a predetermined storage means (the history memory 117 in the first to ninth and eleventh to twelfth embodiments, the main side in the tenth embodiment). The predetermined information (history information in the first to eighth and twelfth embodiments, numerical information measured by the counter in the ninth to eleventh embodiments) is executed by the RAM 65) so that the predetermined information can be obtained. Predetermined storage execution means to be stored in the storage means (function of executing history setting processing in the management side CPU 112 in the first to ninth and eleventh to twelfth embodiments, main side CPU 63 in the tenth embodiment). In step S3202, step S3205, step S3208, step S3212, step S3216, step S3220 and step S3223)).
Information calculating means for calculating aspect information corresponding to a result of a game in a predetermined period using the predetermined information (first, second, sixth, eighth, ninth, tenth, twelfth embodiment In the third embodiment, the function of executing the processing of steps S1008, S1013, and S1017 in the management CPU 112, and the function of executing the processing of steps S2308, S2313, and S2317 in the management CPU 112 in the third embodiment, the fourth embodiment. A function of executing the process of step S2502 in the management CPU 112, a function of executing the process of step S2702 in the management CPU 112 in the fifth embodiment, and a process of step S2905 of the management CPU 112 in the seventh embodiment. Function, in the eleventh embodiment, a function of executing the process of step S3503 in the main CPU 63),
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the characteristic B1, when the predetermined event occurs, the storage of the information corresponding to the predetermined event is executed in the predetermined storage means, and the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined storage means. This makes it possible for the gaming machine to store and hold information for managing the number of occurrences or the frequency of occurrence of a predetermined event, and by using this managed information, it is possible to appropriately manage the occurrence mode of the predetermined event. It becomes possible to do it. In addition, by storing and holding the predetermined information in the gaming machine itself, it becomes possible to prevent unauthorized access or unauthorized modification of the predetermined information.

Further, using the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage means, the mode information corresponding to the result of the game in the predetermined period is calculated in the gaming machine. Thereby, for example, it becomes possible for the gaming machine itself to perform a process corresponding to the result of the game in a predetermined period, or it is possible to externally output the mode information which is the result of the calculation using the predetermined information. Become.

Feature B2. The predetermined storage execution means is means for causing the predetermined storage means to store information that enables identification of whether or not the occurrence of the predetermined event is in a predetermined situation (in the first to seventh embodiments, A function of the management-side CPU 112 to execute the processing of steps S804 and S809, a function of the management-side CPU 112 to execute the processing of step S3004 in the eighth embodiment, and a processing of step S3103 of the management-side CPU 112 in the ninth embodiment. Function to execute)
The information calculation means is means for calculating the aspect information by extracting or excluding the predetermined information corresponding to the occurrence of the predetermined event in the predetermined situation (first, second, sixth, eighth, eighth). In the ninth, tenth, and twelfth embodiments, the function of executing the processes of step S1008, step S1013, and step S1017 in the management-side CPU 112, and in the third embodiment, the processes of step S2308, step S2313, and step S2317 in the management-side CPU 112. Function for executing step S2502 in the management-side CPU 112 in the fourth embodiment, function for executing step S2702 in the management-side CPU 112 in the fifth embodiment, management in the seventh embodiment The game machine according to Feature B1 having a function of executing the process of step S2905 in the side CPU 112, and a function of executing the process of step S3503 in the main CPU 63 in the eleventh embodiment).

According to the feature B2, it is possible to calculate whether or not the situation is the predetermined situation, and to calculate the mode information corresponding to the result of the game in the predetermined period.

Feature B3. A means for erasing the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage means when the aspect information is calculated by the information calculation means (first, second, eighth, ninth, tenth and twelfth embodiments Form B1 or B2, which has a function of executing the process of step S1019 in the management-side CPU 112 in the embodiment, and a function of executing the process of step S2505 in the management-side CPU 112 in the fourth embodiment). Amusement machine.

According to the characteristic B3, when the mode information is calculated, the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage means is deleted, and thus it is difficult for the predetermined information to exceed the storage capacity of the predetermined storage means. It becomes possible.

Feature B4. A feature B1 characterized in that, even if the aspect information is calculated by the information calculation means, the state in which the predetermined information used when calculating the aspect information is stored in the predetermined storage means is maintained. Alternatively, the gaming machine described in B2.

According to the feature B4, even if the mode information is calculated, the predetermined information used when calculating the mode information is stored and held in the predetermined storage means, so that the mode information is read and the game in the predetermined period is played. When analyzing the result of (3), not only the aspect information but also the predetermined information which is the basis of the calculation of the aspect information can be referred to.

Feature B5. A feature B1 characterized in that the information computing means computes the aspect information when the supply of the operating power to the control means (MPU 62) is stopped or when the supply of the operating power to the control means is started. A gaming machine according to any one of to B4.

According to the feature B5, the aspect information is calculated when the supply of the operating power to the control means is stopped or when the supply of the operating power to the control means is started. Therefore, the aspect information is calculated for each business day. It becomes possible to manage.

Feature B6. One of the features B1 to B5 characterized in that the information computing unit computes the aspect information when a computation trigger that may occur repeatedly occurs in a situation where operating power is being supplied to the control unit (MPU 62). The gaming machine described in 1.

According to the feature B6, the mode information is calculated every time a calculation trigger repeatedly occurs in the situation where the operating power is supplied to the control means, and therefore the mode information is finely managed within the range of one business day. Is possible.

Feature B7. The information calculation unit calculates the aspect information every time the period measured by the period measurement unit (measurement counter provided in the main RAM 65) reaches a predetermined period,
The period measuring means stops the period measurement in a situation where the game is not executed, and restarts the period measurement from the state before the stop when the game is started in the situation where the period measurement is stopped. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B6.

According to the feature B7, since the aspect information is calculated every time the predetermined period elapses, it is possible to easily adjust the calculation frequency of the aspect information only by adjusting the predetermined period. In this case, in a situation where the game is not executed, the measurement for the predetermined period is stopped, and when the game is started, the measurement for the predetermined period is restarted from the state before the stop. This makes it possible to exclude the situation where the game is not executed from the calculation target of the situation information, and it is possible to appropriately derive the situation information in the situation where the game is being executed.

Feature B8. Features B1 to B7 characterized by including an external output unit (a function for executing an external output process in the management side CPU 112) that outputs the aspect information calculated by the information calculation unit to a device outside the gaming machine. The gaming machine according to any one of 1.

According to the feature B8, the aspect information is output to the device outside the gaming machine, so that the entering aspect of the game ball can be easily grasped.

Feature B9. The game machine according to feature B8, wherein the external output unit outputs the predetermined information to a device outside the game machine when the aspect information is output to a device outside the game machine.

According to the feature B9, not only the aspect information but also the predetermined information is output to the device outside the gaming machine, so that when the aspect information is read and the entering aspect of the game ball is analyzed, not only the aspect information but also the aspect information It is possible to refer to the predetermined information that is the basis of the calculation of the aspect information.

Feature B10. First control means (main CPU 63) having the specific storage execution means,
Second control means (management side CPU 112) having the external output means,
Equipped with
The external output means outputs the aspect information to a device outside the gaming machine when the second control means receives the output instruction information transmitted from the first control means B8 or A gaming machine described in B9.

According to Feature B10, the second control means having the external output means is provided separately from the first control means to reduce the processing load of the first control means, and the aspect is based on the instruction from the first control means. The information can be output to a device outside the gaming machine.

Feature B11. The information calculation means calculates the aspect information each time a predetermined calculation trigger occurs,
Result storage executing means for sequentially storing the mode information calculated by the information calculating means in the calculation result storage means (calculation result memory 131) (steps S2310, S2314 and S2318 in the management CPU 112 in the third embodiment). The game machine according to any one of the features B1 to B10, which has a function of executing the process of step S2504 in the management-side CPU 112 in the fourth embodiment.

According to the feature B11, it becomes possible to accumulate the mode information in the gaming machine. As a result, it becomes possible to collectively read out a plurality of mode information when managing the mode of the result of the game in a predetermined period.

Feature B12. The result storage executing means is provided with means (a function of executing the process of step S2504 in the management side CPU 112) for storing the mode information in the calculation result storage means when the mode information is storage target information. A gaming machine described in Feature B11.

According to the characteristic B12, when the aspect information of the calculated result corresponds to the storage target information, the aspect information is stored in the arithmetic result storage means. As a result, it becomes possible to limit the form information to be stored in the calculation result storage means, and it is possible to reduce the storage capacity required in the calculation result storage means.

Feature B13. The game according to the feature B11 or B12, wherein the result storage execution means stores information in the operation result storage means in association with the aspect information, which makes it possible to specify the time when the aspect information is calculated. Machine.

According to the feature B13, the information that enables the time when the aspect information is calculated is attached to the aspect information. This makes it possible to analyze each aspect information while grasping the time when each aspect information is calculated.

Feature B14. First control means (main CPU 63) having the specific storage execution means,
Second control means (management side CPU 112) having the information calculation means,
Equipped with
The information computing means computes the aspect information when the second control means receives the computation trigger information transmitted from the first control means. Game machine.

According to Feature B14, in the configuration in which the processing load of the first control means is reduced by providing the second control means having the information calculation means separately from the first control means, the aspect based on the instruction from the first control means The information can be calculated by the second control means.

Feature B15. A notification control unit (a function for executing the processes of steps S3505, S3507, and S3508 in the main CPU 63) that controls the notification unit (the notification light emitting unit 151) to notify the content corresponding to the aspect information is provided. The gaming machine according to any one of the features B1 to B14.

According to the feature B15, the content corresponding to the aspect information is notified by the gaming machine itself. Thereby, the manager of the game hall or the like can grasp the management result of the game in a predetermined period without reading the mode information from the game machine.

Feature B16. The control board (main control board 61) provided with the notification control means is housed in a board box,
The gaming machine according to Feature B15, wherein the notification unit is provided on the control board.

According to the feature B16, it becomes possible to make it difficult to illegally access the communication path between the notification control unit and the notification unit.

Feature B17. First control means (main CPU 63) having the information calculation means and the notification control means,
Second control means (management side CPU 112) having the predetermined storage execution means,
The gaming machine according to the feature B15 or B16, which is provided with.

According to Feature B17, in a configuration in which the processing load of the first control means is reduced by providing the second control means having the predetermined storage means separately from the first control means, the function of calculating the aspect information and the calculation result thereof It is possible to integrate the function for executing the notification corresponding to the first control means.

Feature B18. The notification control means controls the notification means so that the first notification is executed when the aspect information is the information of the first range, and when the aspect information is the information of the second range, The gaming machine according to any one of features B15 to B17, characterized in that the notifying means is controlled so that the second notification is executed.

According to the feature B18, the contents corresponding to the range including the form information are notified, not the form information as it is. As a result, it is possible to prevent the notification pattern in the notification means from becoming too large, and it is possible to reduce the load for controlling the notification means.

Feature B19. Predetermined ball entering means (out port 24a, general winning opening 31, special electric winning device 32, first operating opening 33, second operating opening 34) into which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter.
When a game ball enters the predetermined ball entering means, the corresponding information is stored in the predetermined storage means (the history memory 117 in the first to ninth and eleventh to twelfth embodiments, the tenth embodiment). Then, the predetermined information (history information in the first to eighth and twelfth embodiments, numerical information measured by the counter in the ninth to eleventh embodiments) is executed by being executed in the main RAM 65). Is stored in the predetermined storage means (in the first to ninth and eleventh to twelfth embodiments, a function of executing history setting processing in the management CPU 112, in the tenth embodiment, A function of executing steps S3202, S3205, S3208, S3212, S3216, S3220, and S3223 in the main CPU 63),
Information calculating means (first, second, sixth, eighth, ninth, ninth In the tenth and twelfth embodiments, the function of executing the processes of step S1008, step S1013, and step S1017 in the management-side CPU 112, and in the third embodiment, the processes of step S2308, step S2313, and step S2317 in the management-side CPU 112 is executed. Function, the function of executing the process of step S2502 in the management CPU 112 in the fourth embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S2702 in the management CPU 112 in the fifth embodiment, and the function of executing the process of step S2702 in the management CPU 112 in the seventh embodiment. A function of executing the process of step S2905, a function of executing the process of step S3503 in the main CPU 63 in the eleventh embodiment),
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the characteristic B19, when a game ball enters the predetermined ball entering means, a storage process of information corresponding to the game ball is executed in the predetermined storing means, and the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined storing means. Become. As a result, it becomes possible for the gaming machine to store and hold information for managing the number of balls or the frequency of entering the game balls into the predetermined ball entering means, and by using this managed information, the predetermined information can be stored. It is possible to appropriately manage the entering mode of the game ball into the entering device. In addition, by storing and holding the predetermined information in the gaming machine itself, it becomes possible to prevent unauthorized access or unauthorized modification of the predetermined information.

Further, using the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage means, the mode information corresponding to the entering mode of the game ball is calculated in the game machine. As a result, for example, it becomes possible for the gaming machine itself to perform a process corresponding to the entering mode of the game ball, or it is possible to externally output the mode information which is the result of the calculation using the predetermined information. ..

Feature B20. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B19, wherein the predetermined storage execution means or the second control means is provided as a dedicated circuit.

According to the feature B20, it is possible to obtain the excellent effect as already described in the configuration in which the predetermined storage executing means or the second control means is provided as a dedicated circuit.

In addition, with respect to the configurations of the features B1 to B20, the features A1 to A41, the features B1 to B20, the features C1 to C4, the features D1 to D10, the features E1 to E7, the features F1 to F45, the features G1 to G18, and the features H1 to H1. Any one or a plurality of configurations of H8, features I1 to I11, features J1 to J9, and features K1 to K9 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to exert a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic C group>
Feature C1. Program output means (a function of executing the process of step S903 in the main CPU 63) that outputs a control program to a device outside the gaming machine by using the information output unit (reading terminal 102),
An information output unit that outputs special information using the information output unit (a function of executing external output processing in the management-side CPU 112);
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the characteristic C1, it is possible to output the special information to the outside by using the information output unit for outputting the control program to the outside. This makes it possible to output the special information to the outside while preventing the configuration from becoming complicated.

Feature C2. Selection means for specifying whether the information to be output from the information output unit is the special information or the control program and outputting the information corresponding to the specification result (step S902 in the main CPU 63) The game machine according to the feature C1 is provided with a function of executing the process of.

According to the characteristic C2, in the configuration in which the special information is externally output by using the information output unit for externally outputting the control program, the information targeted for external output is either the control program or the special information. Is specified on the gaming machine side, and the specified information is output to the outside. This makes it possible to read out only the necessary information even if the information output section is also used.

Feature C3. The selection means determines which of the special information and the control program the information to be output from the information output unit is based on information received from an external device electrically connected to the information output unit. The game machine according to feature C2, which is characterized by being specified.

According to the characteristic C3, which information is to be output from the information output unit is specified based on the information received from the external device electrically connected to the information output unit. As a result, it is possible to prevent the configuration related to the selection of information to be output from becoming complicated.

Feature C4. Any one of features C1 to C3 characterized in that a chip (MPU 62) having a program storage means (main side ROM 64) for storing the control program in advance has the information output section and the information output means. Gaming machine described in.

According to the characteristic C4, the signal paths for the information output unit can be integrated in the chip. As a result, it is possible to obtain the excellent effects as already described while making it difficult to illegally access the signal path to the information output unit.

In addition, with respect to the configurations of the features C1 to C4, the features A1 to A41, the features B1 to B20, the features C1 to C4, the features D1 to D10, the features E1 to E7, the features F1 to F45, the features G1 to G18, and the features H1 to H1. Any one or a plurality of configurations of H8, features I1 to I11, features J1 to J9, and features K1 to K9 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to exert a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Feature D group>
Feature D1. A first control means (main CPU 63) and a second control means (management CPU 112),
The first control means is
A privilege giving means (a function for executing the process of step S217 in the main CPU 63, a function for executing the process of step S408 in the payout CPU 92) for giving a privilege to the player when a predetermined event occurs,
An information transmitting unit (a function for executing management output processing in the main CPU 63) which transmits predetermined event information corresponding to the predetermined event when the predetermined event occurs;
Equipped with
When the second control means receives the predetermined event information, the second control means stores predetermined information (corresponding to the predetermined event information in the first to ninth and eleventh to twelfth embodiments in the history memory 117 and the tenth memory). In the embodiment, by being executed in the main side RAM 65), predetermined information (first to eighth) that allows the number of times or frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event to be specified by the gaming machine or a device outside the gaming machine. The predetermined storage execution means (first to ninth storage means) is configured to store history information in the twelfth embodiment and numerical information measured by a counter in the ninth to eleventh embodiments) in the predetermined storage means. The function of executing the history setting process in the management side CPU 112 in the 11th to 12th embodiments, and the step S3202, step S3205, step S3208, step S3212, step S3216, step S3220 in the main side CPU 63 in the tenth embodiment. A game machine having a function of executing the process of step S3223).

According to the characteristic D1, the bonus is given to the player when a predetermined event occurs. As a result, the player will play the game while expecting that a predetermined event will occur. In the configuration, when a predetermined event occurs, information corresponding to the predetermined event is stored in the predetermined storage means, and the number of times or frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event can be specified by the gaming machine or a device outside the gaming machine. The predetermined information to be stored is stored in the predetermined storage means. This makes it possible for the gaming machine to store and hold information for managing the number of occurrences or the frequency of occurrence of a predetermined event, and by using this managed information, it is possible to appropriately manage the occurrence mode of the predetermined event. It becomes possible to do it. In addition, by storing and holding the predetermined information in the gaming machine itself, it becomes possible to prevent unauthorized access or unauthorized modification of the predetermined information.

Further, since the second control means provided separately from the first control means having the privilege granting means has the predetermined storage executing means, the processing load of the first control means is not extremely increased. However, it is possible to obtain the excellent effects as already described.

Feature D2. The gaming machine according to feature D1, wherein the first control means and the second control means are provided on the same chip.

According to the characteristic D2, since the first control means and the second control means are provided on the same chip, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to the communication path between the first control means and the second control means. It becomes possible to prevent it.

Feature D3. When the specific event occurs, the predetermined storage execution means executes a storage process of information corresponding to the specific event in the predetermined storage means to determine the number of occurrences or the frequency of occurrence of the specific event of the gaming machine or the outside of the gaming machine. Specific information (history information in the first to eighth and twelfth embodiments, numerical information measured by a counter in the ninth to eleventh embodiments) that can be specified by the device is stored in the predetermined storage means. So that
The first control means is
First transmitting means for transmitting the first information to the second control means using the first signal path when the predetermined event occurs (function of outputting any one of the first to seventh signals in the main CPU 63) )When,
Second transmission means for transmitting the second information to the second control means using the second signal path when the specific event occurs (function of outputting any one of the first to seventh signals in the main CPU 63) )When,
The gaming machine according to the feature D1 or D2, which is characterized by comprising:

According to the characteristic D3, not only the predetermined information corresponding to the predetermined event but also the specific information corresponding to the specific event is stored in the predetermined storage means. This makes it possible to manage not only the occurrence mode of the predetermined event but also the occurrence mode of the specific event. Further, by using both the predetermined information and the specific information, it is possible to manage the ratio of the occurrence frequency between the predetermined event and the specific event.

Further, when a predetermined event occurs, the first information is transmitted to the second control means using the first signal path, and when a specific event occurs, the second information is transmitted using the second signal path. It is transmitted to the second control means. As a result, the type of information to be transmitted corresponds to the signal path, and it is possible to simplify the configuration for distinguishing each type of information in the second control means.

Feature D4. The first control means transmits, to the second control means, identification information that enables the second control means to identify whether or not a predetermined situation is present, using the third route. (In the first, third to ninth and twelfth embodiments, the function of outputting any of the eighth to tenth signals in the main CPU 63, in the second embodiment, the open/close execution mode signal in the main CPU63, The gaming machine according to Feature D3, which is provided with a function of outputting either a high frequency support mode signal or a door opening signal).

According to the characteristic D4, it is possible to manage the occurrence mode of the predetermined event and the occurrence mode of the specific event by distinguishing whether or not the situation is the predetermined situation. Further, since the specifying information that can specify whether or not the situation is the predetermined condition is transmitted to the second control means using the third route, the second control means converts the specifying information into the first information and the first information. It is possible to simplify the configuration for distinguishing it from other information such as 2 information.

Feature D5. The first control means transmits identification information indicating that the first information corresponds to the predetermined event and the second information corresponds to the specific event, to the second control means. The gaming machine described in the feature D3 or D4, which is provided with a transmission unit (a function of executing a recognition process in the main CPU 63).

According to the characteristic D5, the identification information indicating that the first information corresponds to the predetermined event and the second information corresponds to the specific event is transmitted from the first control means to the second control means. It is not necessary for the second control means to store the correspondence of these pieces of information in advance. This makes it possible to increase the versatility of the second control means.

Feature D6. The gaming machine according to Feature D5, wherein the identification information transmitting unit transmits the identification information to the second control unit when supply of operating power to the first control unit is started.

According to the characteristic D6, when the supply of the operating power to the first control means is started, the identification information is transmitted from the first control means to the second control means, so that the predetermined event and the specific event may occur. In the situation, it becomes possible for the second control means to be able to specify the correspondence between the information transmitted from the first control means and the ball entry means.

Feature D7. The identification information transmitting unit transmits the identification information to the second control unit by using at least one of the first signal path and the second signal path. Amusement machine.

According to the characteristic D7, since the identification information is transmitted to the second control means by using at least one of the first signal path and the second signal path, a dedicated signal path for transmitting the identification information is provided. It is possible to simplify the configuration related to communication as compared with.

Feature D8. Correspondence relation information that enables the second control means to specify that the first information corresponds to the predetermined event and the second information corresponds to the specific event when the identification information is received. The correspondence storage unit (correspondence memory 116) is provided with a unit (a function for executing the correspondence setting process in the management CPU 112) according to any one of the features D5 to D7. Amusement machine.

According to the characteristic D8, the correspondence relationship between the information transmitted from the first control means and the type of event is stored in the second control means. Thereby, the second control means is provided with information that enables the second control means to specify the type of event corresponding to the information to be transmitted, every time the first information or the second information is transmitted from the first control means. You don't have to. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the information amount of the first information and the second information.

Feature D9. The first control means transmits third information, which enables the second control means to specify whether or not a predetermined situation is present, to the second control means by using a third route. (In the first, third to ninth and twelfth embodiments, the function of outputting any of the eighth to tenth signals in the main CPU 63, in the second embodiment, the open/close execution mode signal in the main CPU63, High frequency support mode signal or door open signal))
A feature D5 characterized in that the second control means can recognize the third information as information that can identify whether or not the predetermined situation is present, without receiving the identification information. The gaming machine according to any one of D8 to D8.

According to the feature D9, it is possible to manage the occurrence mode of the predetermined event and the occurrence mode of the specific event by distinguishing whether or not the situation is the predetermined situation. Also, the fact that the third information is information that can identify whether or not the predetermined condition is present can be identified by the second control means without receiving the identification information from the first control means. .. This makes it possible to prevent the information form of the identification information from becoming complicated.

Feature D10. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D9, wherein the second control means is provided as a dedicated circuit.

According to the characteristic D10, it is possible to obtain the excellent effects as already described in the configuration in which the second control means is provided as a dedicated circuit.

It should be noted that features A1 to A41, features B1 to B20, features C1 to C4, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E7, features F1 to F45, features G1 to G18, and features H1 to the configurations of the features D1 to D10. Any one or a plurality of configurations of H8, features I1 to I11, features J1 to J9, and features K1 to K9 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to exert a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

According to the inventions related to the characteristic group A, the characteristic group B, the characteristic group C, and the characteristic group D, the following problems can be solved.

Pachinko gaming machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, in a pachinko game machine, a dish storage unit for storing the game balls given to the player is provided on the front face of the game machine, and the game balls stored in the dish storage unit are guided to the game ball launching device. , Is fired toward the game area in accordance with the player's firing operation. Then, for example, when a game ball enters a ball entering portion provided in the game area, the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the dish storage unit, for example. In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine, a configuration is also known in which an upper plate storage part and a lower plate storage part are provided as a plate storage part. In this case, the game balls stored in the upper plate storage part are game ball launches. Guided by the device, the excess game balls in the upper dish storage section are discharged to the lower dish storage section.

Here, in the gaming machine as illustrated above, it is necessary to manage the gaming machine appropriately, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Feature E group>
Feature E1. First control means (main side CPU 63),
Second control means (management side CPU 112) for receiving the information transmitted from the first control means,
Equipped with
The first control means is
First transmitting means for transmitting the first information to the second control means using the first signal path when the first event occurs (function of outputting any one of the first to seventh signals in the main CPU 63) )When,
Second transmission means for transmitting the second information to the second control means by using the second signal path when the second event occurs (function of outputting any one of the first to seventh signals in the main CPU 63) )When,
Identification information transmitting means (main side) for transmitting to the second control means identification information indicating that the first information corresponds to the first event and the second information corresponds to the second event. A function of executing recognition processing in the CPU 63),
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the characteristic E1, the first information is transmitted to the second control means using the first signal path when the first event occurs, and the second signal path is used when the second event occurs. Then, the second information is transmitted to the second control means. As a result, the type of information to be transmitted corresponds to the signal path, and it is possible to simplify the configuration for distinguishing each type of information in the second control means.

Further, since the identification information indicating that the first information corresponds to the first event and the second information corresponds to the second event is transmitted from the first control unit to the second control unit, these information items are transmitted. It is not necessary for the second control means to previously store the correspondence relationship of. This makes it possible to increase the versatility of the second control means.

Feature E2. The gaming machine according to feature E1, wherein the identification information transmission means transmits the identification information to the second control means when supply of operating power to the first control means is started.

According to the characteristic E2, when the supply of the operating power to the first control means is started, the identification information is transmitted from the first control means to the second control means, so the predetermined ball entering means and the specific ball entering means. In a situation in which a game ball may enter the game ball, it is possible to enable the second control device to specify the correspondence between the information transmitted from the first control device and the game device. Become.

Feature E3. The feature E1 or E2 characterized in that the identification information transmission means transmits the identification information to the second control means by using at least one of the first signal path and the second signal path. Amusement machine.

According to the feature E3, since the identification information is transmitted to the second control means by using at least one of the first signal path and the second signal path, a dedicated signal path for transmitting the identification information is provided. It is possible to simplify the configuration related to communication as compared with.

Feature E4. When the identification information is received, the second control means can specify that the first information corresponds to the first event and the second information corresponds to the second event. Any one of the features E1 to E3 characterized by including a unit (a function for executing the correspondence relation setting process in the management side CPU 112) for storing the relation information in the correspondence relation storage unit (correspondence relation memory 116). The game machine described.

According to the characteristic E4, the correspondence between the information transmitted from the first control means and the ball entry means is stored in the second control means. With this, it is necessary to provide the second control means with information that enables the second control means to identify the event corresponding to the information to be transmitted, every time the first control means transmits the first information or the second information. Disappears. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the information amount of the first information and the second information.

Feature E5. The first control means transmits third information, which enables the second control means to specify whether or not a predetermined situation is present, to the second control means by using a third route. (In the first, third to ninth and twelfth embodiments, the function of outputting any of the eighth to tenth signals in the main CPU 63, in the second embodiment, the open/close execution mode signal in the main CPU63, High frequency support mode signal or door open signal))
The feature E1 characterized in that the second control means can recognize that the third information is information that can identify whether or not the predetermined condition is present, without receiving the identification information. The gaming machine according to any one of to E4.

According to the characteristic E5, it is possible to manage the occurrence mode of the first event and the occurrence mode of the second event by distinguishing whether or not the situation is the predetermined situation. Also, the fact that the third information is information that can identify whether or not the predetermined condition is present can be identified by the second control means without receiving the identification information from the first control means. .. This makes it possible to prevent the information form of the identification information from becoming complicated.

Feature E6. As a signal path capable of transmitting information from the first control unit to the second control unit, the number of types of information that is greater than the number of types of information that needs to be transmitted from the first control unit to the second control unit is used. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E5, characterized in that a signal path is provided.

According to the feature E6, since the number of signal paths is greater than the number of types of information that needs to be transmitted from the first control means to the second control means, the information of the information can be changed according to the model of the gaming machine. Even if the number of types increases or decreases, it is possible to cope with the change without changing the configuration related to the signal path. Therefore, the versatility of the second control means can be improved.

Feature E7. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E6, wherein the second control means is provided as a dedicated circuit.

According to the feature E7, it is possible to obtain the excellent effect as already described in the configuration in which the second control means is provided as a dedicated circuit.

It should be noted that features A1 to A41, features B1 to B20, features C1 to C4, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E7, features F1 to F45, features G1 to G18, and features H1 to the configurations of the features E1 to E7. Any one or a plurality of configurations of H8, features I1 to I11, features J1 to J9, and features K1 to K9 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to exert a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

According to the invention related to the above characteristic E group, the following problems can be solved.

Pachinko gaming machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, in a pachinko game machine, a dish storage unit for storing the game balls given to the player is provided on the front face of the game machine, and the game balls stored in the dish storage unit are guided to the game ball launching device. , Is fired toward the game area in accordance with the player's firing operation. Then, for example, when a game ball enters a ball entering portion provided in the game area, the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the dish storage unit, for example. In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine, a configuration is also known in which an upper plate storage part and a lower plate storage part are provided as a plate storage part. In this case, the game balls stored in the upper plate storage part are game ball launches. Guided by the device, the excess game balls in the upper dish storage section are discharged to the lower dish storage section.

Here, in the gaming machine as illustrated above, it is necessary to make the configuration related to communication suitable, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Feature F group>
Feature F1. The game ball is provided in a game area (gaming area PA) where the game ball flows down, and the game ball can enter the ball, or the game ball can easily enter the first state, and the game ball cannot enter or the game ball cannot enter easily. The variable ball entering means provided so as to be switchable between each of the second state (the first to fourteenth and eighteenth embodiments, the special electric prize winning device 32, and the fifteenth embodiment, the first special electric prize winning device 261 and the second special electric prize winning device 261). Tokuden prize winning device 262),
Special control means for executing special control for bringing the variable ball entrance means into the second state after the variable ball entrance means is in the first state (special electric open setting processing and special electric close setting processing in the main CPU 63 is executed. Function),
Transition means (function for executing special figure finalizing processing in the main CPU 63) for shifting the game state to a special control state (opening/closing execution mode) in which the special control is executed,
In a predetermined game state that is not the special control state, the entry of the game ball is restricted, and in the special control state, the special ball entry means that allows the entry of the game ball (first to thirteenth and eighteenth implementations) The through gate 35 in the embodiment, the first special entrance 251 and the second special entrance 252 in the fourteenth embodiment, and the first through gate 263 and the second through gate 264) in the fifteenth embodiment,
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature F1, by shifting the game state to the special control state, it becomes possible or easy to enter the game ball into the variable ball entering means, and also the game ball into the special ball entering means. It is possible to enter. As a result, it is possible to increase the profit of the game state shifting to the special control state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature F2. The gaming machine according to feature F1, wherein the gaming ball can enter the special ball entering means when a predetermined condition is satisfied in the special control state.

According to the feature F2, even if the game state shifts to the special control state, if the predetermined condition is not satisfied, the game ball does not enter the special ball entering means. As a result, the player expects that a predetermined condition is established in addition to the game ball entering the variable ball entering means in the special control state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the special control state. Becomes

Feature F3. The gaming machine according to feature F1 or F2, wherein at least one condition necessary for generating the special control state is satisfied based on the fact that a game ball has entered the special ball entering means.

According to the feature F3, when the special control state occurs, the game ball can enter the special ball entering means, and the special control state can occur again when the game ball enters the special ball entering means. .. As a result, it is possible to create a situation in which special control states occur consecutively, and it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

Feature F4. The transition means is means for generating the special control state irrespective of the entry of the game ball into the special entry means (the result of executing the hit/miss determination process of step S1405 for the first hold information in the main CPU 63). The game machine according to feature F3, which is provided with a function of shifting to the open/close execution mode.

According to the feature F4, the special control state can occur even if the game ball does not enter the special ball entering means. The special control state is provided, and the special control state is generated, so that the game ball can enter the special admission means, and the special control state is established by the game ball entering the special admission means. Can happen again. In this case, the player expects that the special control state will be started in a situation that is not the special control state, and that the special control state will be continuously executed in the special control state. ..

Feature F5. At least a predetermined ball entering means (first operating port 33) that allows a game ball to enter in the predetermined game state,
At least one required for generating the special control state based on the fact that the game ball has entered the predetermined ball entering means even if the game ball has not entered the special ball entering means. The gaming machine according to feature F3 or F4, characterized in that the condition is met.

According to the characteristic F5, the special control state can occur in the predetermined game state which is not the special control state, based on the fact that the game ball enters the predetermined ball entering means. The special control state is provided, and the special control state is generated, so that the game ball can enter the special admission means, and the special control state is established by the game ball entering the special admission means. Can happen again. In this case, the player expects that the game ball will enter the predetermined ball entering means in the predetermined game state which is not the special control state, and in the special control state, not only the variable ball entering means but also the special ball entering The player expects the game ball to enter the means.

Feature F6. Of the probability that the special control state occurs based on the game ball entering the special ball entering means, rather than the probability that the special control state occurs due to the game ball entering the predetermined ball entering means. The gaming machine according to feature F5, which is higher.

According to the feature F6, the game ball enters the special ball entering means in the special control state rather than the probability that the game ball enters the predetermined ball entering means and the special control state occurs in the predetermined game state that is not the special control state. The probability that a special control state will occur continuously after entering a ball is higher. This makes it possible to increase the player's expectation that the game ball will enter the special ball entering means in the special control state.

Feature F7. A means for acquiring special trigger information when a game ball enters the special ball entering means (a function for executing the process of step S1101 in the main CPU 63 in the first to fifteenth embodiments, in the eighteenth embodiment) A function of executing the process of step S4404 in the main CPU 63),
When the special trigger information is acquired, at least one condition necessary for generating the special control state is satisfied,
The gaming machine according to any one of features F3 to F6, wherein an expected value that the special control state occurs after the special opportunity information is acquired does not change according to a gaming state.

According to the characteristic F7, since the expected value at which the special control state occurs after the special trigger information is acquired does not change according to the gaming state, the expected value is changed according to the gaming state. The processing configuration can be simplified and the expected value can be easily managed as compared with the above. However, in such a configuration in which the expected value does not change according to the game state, it becomes difficult to give a tonation to the game. On the other hand, since it has the configuration of the characteristic F1 and allows the game ball to enter the special entry means in the special control state, the intonation is given to the opportunity to obtain the special opportunity information. As a result, it becomes possible to inflate the game as a result.

Feature F8. Equipped with a trigger ball entering means (second actuation port 34) that allows the game ball to enter based on the game ball entering the special ball entering means,
The game machine according to any one of features F1 to F7, characterized in that a trigger for shifting to the special control state is generated based on the fact that a game ball has entered the trigger ball means.

According to the feature F8, the game ball can enter the trigger ball means by entering the game ball into the special ball means, and the game ball can enter the trigger ball means in the special control state. The trigger to move to occurs. As a result, in order to continuously generate the special control state, it is necessary to enter the game ball into the special ball entering means in the special control state and further enter the game ball into the trigger ball entering means. Become. Therefore, the uncertainty of continuous occurrence of the special control state is increased, and as a result, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

Feature F9. In the region where the game ball flows down when performing the firing operation in a predetermined mode, the variable ball entering means, the special ball entering means and the trigger ball entering means are provided in the feature F8. The game machine described.

According to the characteristic F9, by continuing the firing operation in a predetermined mode, the game ball enters the variable ball entering means, the game ball enters the special ball entering means, and the game enters the trigger ball entering means. It becomes possible to aim for the ball to enter.

Feature F10. Means (main CPU 63) for controlling the trigger ball entering means to be in a ball enterable state in which the game ball can enter, with at least one condition that the game ball has entered the special ball entering means. Function for executing the processing of step S1108 to step S1110 in
Characteristic F8 or F9, characterized in that, with respect to the entry of a game ball into the special entry means, the frequency at which the trigger entry means is in the entry possible state is constant regardless of the game state. Game machine.

According to the feature F10, the frequency with which the opportunity ball entering means is ready to enter the game ball into the special ball entering means is constant regardless of the game state, so that the special ball entering means is provided with a game. The expected value for which the special control state occurs after the ball has entered does not change according to the game state. As a result, the processing configuration can be simplified as compared with the configuration in which the expected value is changed according to the gaming state, and the expected value can be easily managed. However, in such a configuration in which the expected value does not change according to the game state, it becomes difficult to give a tonation to the game. On the other hand, since the game ball is allowed to enter the special ball entering means in the special control state with the structure of the above-mentioned feature F1, the opportunity for the game ball to enter the special ball entering means is provided. It is possible to give intonation, and as a result, it is possible to give intonation to the game.

Feature F11. The special control states include a first special control state (for example, 2R high-accuracy result) and a second special control state (for example, 16R high-accuracy result),
The game according to any one of features F1 to F10, wherein the first special control state and the second special control state are different in ease of entering a game ball into the special ball entering means. Machine.

According to the characteristic F11, the ease of entering the game ball into the special ball entering means is different between the first special control state and the second special control state, so that the game ball enters the special ball entering means. The player who expects to expect the occurrence of a special control state in which the game ball is likely to enter the special ball entering means. As a result, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature F12. When the variable ball entering means switches from one of the first state and the second state to the other, it is possible to enter a game ball into the special ball entering means.
The gaming machine according to feature F11, wherein the number of times the special control is executed is different between the first special control state and the second special control state.

According to the feature F12, when the variable ball entering means is switched from one of the first state and the second state to the other, it is possible to enter the game ball into the special ball entering means. It is possible to increase the player's attention to the timing of switching the state. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the target that the player should pay attention to in the special control state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the special control state.

In this case, the number of times of switching of the above state in the variable ball entering means is different between the first special control state and the second special control state. As a result, the easiness of entering the game ball into the special ball entering means is different between the first special control state and the second special control state, and it is expected that the game ball is entering the special ball entering means. The player expects the occurrence of a special control state in which the game ball is likely to enter the special ball entering means. Therefore, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature F13. When the variable ball entering means switches from one of the first state and the second state to the other, it is possible to enter a game ball into the special ball entering means.
The gaming machine is
In the special control state, means for executing a round game for which the special control is executed a predetermined number of times (function for executing special electric power start processing, special electric power open processing and special electric power closing processing in the main CPU 63),
In one round game, when the number of game balls entering the variable ball entering means reaches a predetermined number, a means for ending the round game (function of making a positive determination in step S3703 in the main CPU 63),
A plurality of times executing means for executing the special control a plurality of times in a predetermined round game (a function of executing the processing of step S3707 when the round counter in the main CPU 63 is 1),
The gaming machine according to any one of the features F1 to F12, characterized by comprising:

According to the feature F13, when the variable ball entering means is switched from one of the first state and the second state to the other, it is possible to enter the game ball into the special ball entering means. It is possible to increase the player's attention to the switching timing of this state. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the target that the player should pay attention to in the special control state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the special control state.

In this case, in the predetermined round game, switching of the above states in the variable ball entering means occurs a plurality of times. Thereby, as a round game, it becomes possible to generate a predetermined round game in which the entry of the game ball into the special ball entering means is likely to occur. Therefore, the player expects the occurrence of a predetermined round game, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Feature F14. As the execution mode of the special control, at least a high-expectancy mode and a low-expectancy mode in which the expectation of entering a game ball into the variable ball-entering means is relatively high or low are set,
The plural times executing means is characterized in that the special control in the high expectation mode is executed after the special control in the low expectation mode is executed in the predetermined round game. The game machine according to feature F13.

According to the feature F14, since the special control that is the high-expectation mode is executed after the special control that is the low-expectation mode is executed in the predetermined round game, the state in the variable ball entry means in the predetermined round game is executed. It is possible to allow a plurality of game balls to enter the variable ball entering means in the predetermined round game while ensuring that the switching of a plurality of times occurs.

Feature F15. In the feature F14, the high expectation mode is a mode in which the upper limit period during which the variable ball entering means is in the first state is a period equal to or longer than the product of the firing cycle of the game balls and the predetermined number. The game machine described.

According to the feature F15, a predetermined number of game balls enter the variable ball entering means in the predetermined round game while ensuring that the state of the variable ball entering means changes a plurality of times in the predetermined round game. It is possible to get it.

Feature F16. A feature that the game ball can enter the special ball entering means when the variable ball entering means switches from one of the first state and the second state to the other The gaming machine according to any one of F1 to F15.

According to the feature F16, when the variable ball entry means is switched from one of the first state and the second state to the other, it is possible to enter the game ball into the special ball entry means. It is possible to increase the player's attention to the timing of switching the state. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the target that the player should pay attention to in the special control state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the special control state.

Feature F17. The special ball entry means is downstream of the variable ball entry means in the flow down direction of the game ball in the game area, and the variable ball entry means is one of the first state and the second state The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F16, which is provided at a position where a game ball can flow in at a timing of switching to.

According to the feature F17, the special ball entering means is provided at a position where the game ball can flow in at a timing when the variable ball entering means switches from one of the first state to the other of the second state. When the variable ball entering means switches from one of the first state and the second state to the other, the game ball can enter the special ball entering means. As a result, it becomes possible to increase the player's attention to the switching timing of this state. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the target that the player should pay attention to in the special control state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the special control state. In addition, it is possible to obtain the above-described excellent effects only by setting the positional relationship of the special ball entering means to the variable ball entering means to the above relationship.

Feature F18. The variable ball entering means becomes a first corresponding state in one of the first state and the second state, and the game ball that has flowed down from the upstream side of the variable ball entering means is placed on the variable ball entering means. The game ball is prevented from flowing down in a predetermined direction by being in the state, and the variable ball entering means becomes the second corresponding state in the other state of the first state and the second state. Having a displacement portion (guide plate portion 214) that allows the game ball to flow down in the predetermined direction,
The special ball entering means causes the game ball to flow down in the predetermined direction when the displacement part switches from the first corresponding state to the second corresponding state while the game ball is placed on the displacement part. The gaming machine according to any one of the features F1 to F17, characterized in that it is provided at a position where the game ball can flow in.

According to the characteristic F18, when the displacement portion switches from the first corresponding state to the second corresponding state, the game ball placed on the displacement portion can enter the special ball entering means. Accordingly, in the special control state, the player does not only determine whether or not the game ball enters the variable ball entering means, but the displacement unit makes the first correspondence when the game ball is placed on the displacement unit. By paying attention to whether or not the state is switched to the second corresponding state, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the special control state.

Feature F19. The gaming machine according to Feature F18, wherein the one state is the first state of the variable ball entering means and the other state is the second state of the variable ball entering means.

According to the feature F19, a trigger for entering the game ball into the special ball entering means occurs at the timing when the variable ball entering means switches from the first state to the second state. This makes it possible to raise the player's attention not only when the variable ball entering means is in the first state but also when the variable ball entering means is switched to the second state.

Feature F20. The displacement portion is formed so that the game ball placed on the displacement portion flows down in a specific direction along the displacement portion in the first corresponding state,
The special ball entering means is provided when the displacement part is switched from the first corresponding state to the second corresponding state in a state where the game ball is placed in a predetermined range which is a part of the displacement part. The gaming machine according to feature F18 or F19, wherein the gaming ball is provided at a position where the gaming ball can flow in when flowing down in the predetermined direction.

According to the characteristic F20, in order for the game ball to enter the special ball entering means, not only the game ball is placed on the displacement portion in the first corresponding state, but also the game on which it is placed. It is necessary for the displacement portion to switch from the first corresponding state to the second corresponding state at an exquisite timing when the sphere exists within a predetermined range. As a result, the player pays attention to the relationship between the position of the game ball placed on the displacement portion and the switching timing of the state of the displacement portion, and the interest of the game in the special control state can be improved.

Feature F21. On the upstream side in the flow-down direction of the game ball with respect to the displacement part, a means (guide nail group 241) for guiding the game ball flowing down the game area toward a specific range of the displacement part is provided,
The gaming machine according to Feature F20, wherein the predetermined range exists on the side of the specific direction with respect to the specific range.

According to the feature F21, the predetermined range, which is a range in which the special ball entering means can enter the displacement section, is on the displacement section rather than the specific range where the game ball first reaches in the displacement section. It exists on the front side in the downflow direction of the game ball. As a result, in order to cause the game ball to enter the special ball entering means, the displacement portion changes from the first correspondence state to the second correspondence state at an exquisite timing while the game ball is flowing down on the displacement portion. Need to switch to state. Therefore, the player pays attention to the movement of the game ball on the displacement portion, and the interest of the game in the special control state can be improved.

Feature F22. The one state is the first state of the variable ball entering means, the other state is the second state of the variable ball entering means,
The game machine according to feature F21, wherein the ball entry portion (entrance portion 45b) of the variable ball entry means is present on the specific direction side with respect to the predetermined range.

According to the feature F22, a trigger for entering the game ball into the special ball entering means occurs at the timing when the variable ball entering means switches from the first state to the second state. This makes it possible to raise the player's attention not only when the variable ball entering means is in the first state but also when the variable ball entering means is switched to the second state.

In this case, the ball-in portion of the variable ball-in means is located ahead of the predetermined direction, which is the range in which the special ball-in means can be entered in the displacement portion, in the downward direction of the game ball on the displacement portion. Existing. As a result, the game ball, which is placed on the displacement portion but has not reached the ball entering portion of the variable ball entering means, enters the special ball entering means. Therefore, the player's disadvantageous feeling that the game ball placed on the displacement portion did not enter the variable ball entering means, on the contrary, the benefit feeling that the player enters the special ball entering means. It is possible to change.

Feature F23. The predetermined range is a range in which a game ball in the next firing order is present at the timing when one game ball reaches the ball entrance portion when the game balls are supplied to the specific range at a predetermined firing cycle. The gaming machine according to feature F22, which is set to.

According to the characteristic F23, at the timing when the game ball enters the ball entrance portion of the variable ball entrance means and the displacement portion switches to the second corresponding state, the game ball may exist in the predetermined range of the displacement portion. Becomes higher. Therefore, when the displacement portion changes from the first corresponding state to the second corresponding state, it is possible to increase the possibility that the game ball will enter the special ball entering means.

Feature F24. As the special ball entrance means, a first special ball entrance means (first special ball entrance 251) and a second special ball entrance means (second special ball entrance 252) are provided.
The gaming machine has means for giving a first profit when the game ball enters the first special ball entering means (function of executing the process of step S3902 in the main CPU 63),
Means for giving a second profit when a game ball enters the second special entrance means (function of executing the process of step S3904 in the main CPU 63),
Equipped with
When the first condition is satisfied in the special control state, the game ball can enter the first special ball entering means,
The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F23, wherein a game ball can enter the second special ball means when the second condition is satisfied in the special control state.

According to the feature F24, the first special entrance means and the second special entrance means are the special entrance means to be entered depending on whether the condition satisfied in the special control state is the first condition or the second condition. And will be different. Further, the profits to be given are different when the game ball enters the first special ball entering means and when the game ball enters the second special ball entering means. As a result, the player not only expects that either the first condition or the second condition is satisfied in the special control state, but also allows the game ball to enter the more profitable special ball entering means. We expect that the conditions to be met will be met. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the special control state.

Feature F25. The variable ball entering means becomes a first corresponding state in one of the first state and the second state, and the game ball that has flowed down from the upstream side of the variable ball entering means is placed on the variable ball entering means. The game ball is prevented from flowing down in a predetermined direction by being in the state, and the variable ball entering means becomes the second corresponding state in the other state of the first state and the second state. Having a displacement portion (guide plate portion 214) that allows the game ball to flow down in the predetermined direction,
The displacement portion is formed so that the game ball placed on the displacement portion flows down in a specific direction along the displacement portion in the first corresponding state,
The first special ball entering means, when the game ball is placed in a first predetermined range (first range X1) which is a part of the displacement part, the displacement part moves from the first corresponding state to the first corresponding range. 2 When the game ball is switched to the corresponding state, the game ball is provided in a position where the game ball can flow in by flowing down in the predetermined direction,
The second special ball entering means, when the game ball is placed in a second predetermined range (second range X2) which is a part of the displacement section, the displacement section moves from the first corresponding state to the first corresponding state. The gaming machine according to feature F24, wherein the gaming ball is provided at a position where the gaming ball can flow in the predetermined direction when the gaming ball is switched to the two-compatible state.

According to the characteristic F25, when the game ball is placed on the displacement portion in the first corresponding state, the displacement occurs in a range in which it is possible to enter the special entry means with higher profit. The position of the game ball placed on the displacement part is focused on in the expectation that the part will switch from the first corresponding state to the second corresponding state.

Feature F26. The one state is the first state of the variable ball entering means, the other state is the second state of the variable ball entering means,
It is more advantageous for the player to enter the game ball into the first special entrance means than to enter the game ball into the second special entrance means,
On the upstream side in the flow-down direction of the game ball with respect to the displacement part, a means (guide nail group 241) for guiding the game ball flowing down the game area toward a specific range of the displacement part is provided,
The second predetermined range exists on the side of the specific direction with respect to the specific range,
The first predetermined range is on the side of the specific direction with respect to the second predetermined range,
The game machine according to feature F25, wherein the ball entry portion of the variable ball entry means is present on the side of the specific direction with respect to the first predetermined range.

According to the feature F26, a trigger for entering the game ball into the special ball entering means occurs at the timing when the variable ball entering means switches from the first state to the second state. This makes it possible to raise the player's attention not only when the variable ball entering means is in the first state but also when the variable ball entering means is switched to the second state.

In this case, the first predetermined range, which is a range in which the displacing portion can enter the first special sphere, is a range in which the displacing portion can enter the second special sphere. 2 While existing on the front side in the downward direction of the game ball on the displacement part beyond the predetermined range, the ball entrance part of the variable ball entrance means is ahead of the downward direction of the game ball on the displacement part beyond the first predetermined range. Exists on the side. Then, it is more advantageous for the player to enter the game ball into the first special ball entering means than to enter the game ball into the second special ball entering means. Then, the game ball that is located closer to the ball entrance portion of the variable ball entrance means on the displacement portion is more likely to enter the first special ball entrance means, which is advantageous to the player, and thus the variable ball entrance means. It is possible to increase the profit for the player in a situation where the player feels a disadvantage that the game ball has not entered the player's ball.

Feature F27. One of the features F1 to F26 characterized in that it is a configuration that allows a game ball to enter the special ball entering means when the variable ball entering means is in the first state. Game machine.

According to the feature F27, when the variable ball entering means is in the first state, it becomes possible to enter the game ball into the special ball entering means, so that the variable ball entering means is in the first state. Therefore, the player expects both the entry of the game ball into the variable entry means and the entry of the game ball into the special entry means. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the situation where the variable ball entering means is in the first state.

Feature F28. The variable ball entering means,
With a ball entering portion (first big winning opening 265, second big winning opening 266) into which a game ball can enter,
The game ball flowing down from the upstream side can be placed, and the loaded game ball can be guided to the ball entering portion, and the game ball flowing down from the upstream side is in front. Guide means (first guide plate 271, second guide plate 281) provided so as to be switchable to each of the non-guided states in which the guide ball portion is not guided,
Equipped with
When the guide means is in the guide state, the variable ball entering means is in the first state, and when the guide means is in the non-guide state, the variable ball entering means is in the second state,
When the guide means is in the guide state, the special ball is placed at a position where the game ball placed on the guide means and flowing down to another area different from the ball entering portion can enter the ball. The gaming machine according to any one of the features F1 to F27, characterized in that means are provided.

According to the characteristic F28, when the variable ball entering means is in the first state due to the guiding means being in the guiding state, the game ball placed on the guiding means is either the variable ball entering means or the special ball entering means. Will be guided to As a result, it becomes possible to increase the degree of attention of the player to the game ball placed on the guide means, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature F29. On the upstream side in the flow-down direction of the game ball than the guide means, means for guiding the game ball flowing down the game area toward the guide start range of the guide means (first guide nail group 267, second guide nail). Group 268),
The guide means is formed so that the game ball placed on the guide means flows down in a predetermined guide direction along the guide means in the guide state,
The gaming machine according to feature F28, wherein the ball entrance portion and the different area are present on the side of the predetermined guidance direction with respect to the guidance start range.

According to the feature F29, both the ball entrance portion and the different area are present on the leading side in the flow-down direction of the game ball in the guide means, relative to the guide start range where the game ball first reaches in the guide means. There is. This allows the player to pay attention to how the game ball flows down in the guide means.

Feature F30. The gaming machine according to Feature F29, wherein the different region is present on the side of the predetermined guiding direction with respect to the ball entering portion.

According to the feature F30, the game ball which has been placed on the guiding means in the guiding state but has passed through without entering the ball entering portion enters the special entering means. As a result, the player's disadvantageous feeling that the game ball placed on the guiding means does not enter the variable ball entering means, on the contrary, becomes the benefit feeling that the player enters the special ball entering means. It is possible to change.

Feature F31. As the variable ball entering means, a first variable ball entering means (first special electric prize winning device 261) and a second variable ball entering means (second special electric prize winning device 262) are provided.
As the special ball entering means, a first special ball entering means (first through gate 263) and a second special ball entering means (second through gate 264) are provided,
When the first guiding means (first guiding plate 271), which is the guiding means of the first variable ball entering means, is in the guiding state, it is the game ball placed on the first guiding means and is the first The first special ball entering means is provided at a position where the game ball that has flown into a first different area different from the first ball entering section which is the ball entering section of the variable ball entering means can enter the ball.
When the second guiding means (second guiding plate 281) which is the guiding means of the second variable ball entering means is in the guiding state, it is a game ball mounted on the second guiding means and is the second. The second special ball entering means is provided at a position where a game ball that has flown into a second different area different from the second ball entering portion which is the ball entering portion of the variable ball entering means can enter the ball. The gaming machine according to any one of the features F28 to F30.

According to the feature F31, there is a combination of the first variable ball entering means and the first special ball entering means, and a combination of the second variable ball entering means and the second special ball entering means. Thereby, it is possible to make the ratio of entering the game balls into the variable ball entering means and the special ball entering means different by changing the types of combinations to be executed in the special control in the special control state. ..

Feature F32. The probability that the game ball on the first guide means in the guide state will enter the first special ball means, and the game ball on the second guide means in the guide state The gaming machine according to feature F31, which is different in probability of entering the second special entry means.

According to the feature F32, the probability of entering the game ball into the special ball entering means can be made different by changing the type of the combination for which the special control is executed in the special control state. As a result, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the execution target of the special control.

Feature F33. The special control states include a first special control state (for example, a 2R low accuracy result) and a second special control state (for example, a 2R high accuracy result),
In the first special control state and the second special control state, the type of the variable ball entrance means to be the execution target of the special control, or the selection mode of the variable ball entrance means to be the execution target of the special control is The gaming machine according to feature F32, which is different.

According to the feature F33, it is possible to change the probability of the game ball entering the special ball entering means depending on the type of the special control state. In this case, the player's attention to the type of special control state can be increased.

Feature F34. The game machine according to any one of features F31 to F33, characterized in that the second special ball entering means is provided downstream of the first special ball entering means in the downflow direction of the game ball.

According to the feature F34, the second special ball entrance means is provided downstream of the first special ball entrance means in the flow down direction of the game ball, so that the first variable ball entrance means is an object of execution of special control. In this case, not only the game ball can enter the first special ball entering means, but also the game ball can enter the second special ball entering means. Therefore, the player expects that the first variable ball entering means will be the target of execution of the special control.

Feature F35. The same privilege is given regardless of whether a game ball enters the first special ball entering means or a game ball enters the second special ball entering means. The gaming machine according to any one of the features F31 to F34.

According to the feature F35, the same privilege is given regardless of whether the game ball enters the first special entrance means or the second special entrance means. It is possible to suppress the disadvantage feeling felt by the player regardless of which of the first variable ball entering means and the second variable ball entering means the special control is executed.

Feature F36. The number of game balls that can be used by the player is increased based on the fact that a game ball has entered the variable ball means, and can be used by the player based on the fact that a game ball has entered the special ball means. The gaming machine according to any one of the features F1 to F35, which is provided with a means for increasing the number of game balls (a function of executing the processes of steps S3902 and S3904 in the main CPU 63).

According to the feature F36, the number of game balls available to the player increases when the game ball enters the variable ball entering means, and the player also plays when the game ball enters the special ball entering means. The number of game balls that can be used increases. Further, by providing the configuration of the above characteristic F1, not only is it possible or easy for the game ball to enter the variable ball entering means by shifting the game state to the special control state, It becomes possible to enter the game balls into the special entrance means. Therefore, it is possible to increase the amount of increase in the number of game balls usable by the player in the special control state, and it is possible to increase the advantage in the special control state.

Feature F37. At least a corresponding acquisition ball entering means (ball 311 for emergence) capable of entering a game ball in the predetermined game state,
Information acquisition means (main CPU 63 that acquires special opportunity information when a game ball enters the special ball means, and acquires special opportunity information when a game ball enters the acquisition-compatible ball means. Function for executing the acquisition processing of the reservation information on the universal figure side shown in FIG.
Trigger ball entering means (second operating port 34) in which a game ball can be entered based on the fact that the special opportunity information has been acquired,
Equipped with
The game machine according to any one of features F1 to F36, characterized in that a trigger for shifting to the special control state is generated based on the fact that a game ball has entered the trigger ball means.

According to the feature F37, even when the game state is not the special control state and the predetermined game state, the special occasion information is acquired by the game ball entering the acquisition-corresponding entry means, and the special opportunity information is obtained, so that the game is entered. When the game ball enters the ball entering means, the opportunity to enter the special ball control state occurs. As a result, not only in the special control state but also in the predetermined game state, the opportunity entering means becomes ready to enter due to the acquisition of the special opportunity information, and the entering of the game ball into the opportunity entering means. It is possible to cause a situation in which the special control state occurs based on the.

Feature F38. A regulation means (restriction nail 312) is provided so that the probability of entering the game ball into the acquisition-compatible ball means is lower than the probability that the game ball enters the special ball means in the special control state. The gaming machine according to feature F37, which is characterized by being.

According to the feature F38, it is possible to suppress the probability that the transition to the special control state occurs based on the entry of the game ball into the acquisition-ready entry means in a predetermined game state. As a result, it is possible to enhance the player's satisfaction with the occurrence of the transition to the special control state based on the entry of the game ball into the acquisition-ready entry means in the predetermined game state.

Feature F39. At least a predetermined ball entering means (first operating port 33) that allows a game ball to enter in the predetermined game state,
A trigger for shifting to the special control state occurs without the special trigger information being acquired based on the fact that a game ball has entered the predetermined ball entering means,
A feature F38 characterized in that the regulation means makes the probability of a game ball entering the acquisition-ready entrance means lower than the probability of a game ball entering the predetermined entrance means. Game machine.

According to the feature F39, it is possible to enter the game ball in the predetermined game state, and the acquisition-corresponding ball unit is more likely to enter than the predetermined ball entering unit that allows the game ball to enter the special control state when the occurrence of the ball enters the special control state. The probability of entering a game ball is lower. As a result, it is possible to enhance the player's satisfaction with the occurrence of the transition to the special control state based on the entry of the game ball into the acquisition-ready entry means in the predetermined game state.

Feature F40. In the situation in which the opportunity entry means becomes the entry possible state based on the fact that the special opportunity information is obtained by the game ball entering the acquisition entry ball means, the acquisition entry notification is executed. The gaming machine according to any one of features F37 to F39, which is provided with a notification executing unit (a function of the main CPU 63 that executes the process of step S4413, the display control device 82).

According to the characteristic F40, execution of the acquisition correspondence notification that the entrance of the game ball into the acquisition correspondence entrance means occurs and the special opportunity information is acquired It is possible to notify the player through. As a result, despite the fact that the game ball has entered the acquisition-ready ball means and the trigger ball means has become ready to enter, the player does not notice it It is possible to make it difficult for the event of losing the chance to enter the ball to occur.

Feature F41. The notification execution means executes the acquisition correspondence notification on condition that the special opportunity information is acquired by the game ball entering the acquisition correspondence ball entering means in a situation that is not the special control state. A gaming machine according to feature F40, which is characterized in that.

In the special control state, since it is possible to enter the game ball into the special ball entering means, it is highly likely that the player's consciousness is directed to the trigger ball entering means being able to enter the ball, but the special control Since the game ball does not enter the special ball entering means in the predetermined game state that is not in the state, the player's consciousness that the trigger ball entering means is ready to enter may be low. In this case, according to the characteristic F41, when the special opportunity information is acquired by the game ball entering the acquisition corresponding ball entering means in the situation where the special control state is not obtained, the acquisition correspondence notification is executed, so the opportunity is given. It is possible to direct the player's consciousness to the ball entry means being ready for entry. In addition, the acquisition correspondence notification is not executed in the special control state in which the player is likely to be aware that the trigger-ball entering means is ready to enter, so that the acquisition correspondence notification can be executed. It is possible to prevent the player from becoming annoying.

Feature F42. The notification execution means, if the special opportunity information is acquired by the game ball entering the acquisition corresponding ball entering means in a situation where the special opportunity information has not been acquired, the acquisition response notification, The gaming machine according to feature F40 or F41, which is characterized by being executed.

According to the feature F42, it is possible to execute the acquisition correspondence notification in a situation where the player's consciousness that the opportunity entrance means is in the entry possible state is low.

Feature F43. Characteristic F37, characterized in that the variable ball entering means, the special ball entering means and the acquisition corresponding ball entering means are provided in a region where the game ball flows down when a shooting operation is performed in a predetermined mode. The gaming machine according to any one of to F42.

According to the feature F43, by continuing the firing operation according to the predetermined mode, the game ball enters the variable ball entering means, the game ball enters the special ball entering means, and the acquisition-ready ball entering means. It is possible to aim for a game ball to enter.

Feature F44. The triggering ball means is provided at a position where the game ball can easily reach the triggering ball means when the firing operation is performed in a specific mode than when the firing operation is performed in the predetermined mode. The game machine according to feature F43, which is characterized by being provided.

According to the feature F44, when the trigger ball means is in the ball enterable state in a situation other than the special control state, the launch operation is performed in a specific mode, so that the game ball enters the trigger ball means. It becomes possible to easily generate a sphere.

Feature F45. Trigger ball entering means (second operating port 34) that allows the game ball to enter based on the game ball entering the special ball entering means,
An award determination means (a function for executing the process of step S1405 in the main CPU 63) for performing an award determination based on the fact that the game ball has entered the trigger ball means.
Based on the result of the grant determination being the first grant correspondence result, the special control state is entered, and the game state after the end of the special control state is the game state before the start of the special control state. Means capable of different game states (function of executing the processing of steps S1904 and S1905 in the main CPU 63),
Based on the result of the grant determination being the second grant corresponding result, the special control means shifts to a predetermined game state in which the special control is executed, and the game state after the end of the predetermined game state is A means for maintaining the game state before the predetermined game state is executed (a function of making a negative determination in step S1902 in the main CPU 63),
Equipped with
The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F44, wherein a probability that the result of the grant determination is the second grant corresponding result is higher than a probability that the result is the first grant corresponding result.

According to the characteristic F45, when the game ball enters the trigger ball means, not only the first grant corresponding result but also the second grant corresponding result can be obtained, and the probability of becoming the second grant corresponding result is higher. It is higher than the probability of the first assignment correspondence result. As a result, it is possible to generate many opportunities for the variable ball entering means to enter the first state by causing the game ball to enter the trigger ball entering means. In this case, since the game ball can enter the special ball entering means in the special control state by providing the structure of the characteristic F1, the variable ball entering means is triggered by the occurrence of the special control state. It is possible to cause a situation in which there are many opportunities to become the first state.

In addition, with respect to the configurations of the features F1 to F45, the features A1 to A41, the features B1 to B20, the features C1 to C4, the features D1 to D10, the features E1 to E7, the features F1 to F45, the features G1 to G18, and the features H1 to H1. Any one or a plurality of configurations of H8, features I1 to I11, features J1 to J9, and features K1 to K9 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to exert a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Feature G group>
Features G1. The game ball is provided in a game area (gaming area PA) where the game ball flows down, and the game ball can enter the ball, or the game ball can easily enter the first state, and the game ball cannot enter or the game ball cannot enter easily. The variable ball entering means provided so as to be switchable between the second state and the second state (the special electric prize winning device 32 in the first to thirteenth and eighteenth embodiments, the first special electric prize winning device 261 and the second special electric prize winning device 261 in the fifteenth embodiment). Tokuden winning device 262),
Special control means for executing special control for bringing the variable ball entrance means into the second state after the variable ball entrance means is in the first state (special electric open setting processing and special electric close setting processing in the main CPU 63 is executed. Function),
Special ball entering means (a through gate 35 in the first to thirteenth and eighteenth embodiments, a first through gate 263 and a second through in the fifteenth embodiment) into which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter. Gate 264),
Trigger ball entering means (second operating port 34) in which a game ball can enter the game ball based on the game ball entering the special ball entering means.
An award determination means (a function for executing the process of step S1405 in the main CPU 63) for performing an award determination based on the fact that the game ball has entered the trigger ball means.
Based on the result of the grant determination being the first grant corresponding result, the special control is performed and the special control state (opening/closing execution mode triggered by the jackpot result) is changed to the special control state. Means capable of changing the game state after the end of the control state to a game state different from the game state before the start of the special control state (a function of the main CPU 63 for executing the processing of steps S1904 and S1905),
A predetermined game state in which the special control is executed by the special control means based on the result of the award determination being the second award corresponding result (opening/closing execution mode triggered by the small hit result) And means for maintaining the game state after the end of the predetermined game state in the game state before the execution of the predetermined game state (function of making a negative determination in step S1902 in the main CPU 63),
Equipped with
In the grant determination, the probability of being the second grant corresponding result is higher than the probability of being the first grant corresponding result,
A game machine characterized in that a game ball can enter the special ball entering means in a predetermined situation.

According to the feature G1, when the game ball enters the opportunity entering means, not only the first grant corresponding result but also the second grant corresponding result can be obtained, and the probability of becoming the second grant corresponding result is higher. It is higher than the probability of the first assignment correspondence result. As a result, it is possible to generate an opportunity for the variable ball entering means to enter the first state by causing the game ball to enter the opportunity entering means. In this case, it is possible in a predetermined situation to enter the special entry means that causes the opportunity entry means to enter the entry possible state. As a result, a player who expects a game ball to enter the opportunity entering means expects a predetermined situation to occur. Therefore, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

Features G2. With respect to the entry of the game ball into the special entry means, the frequency at which the trigger entry means is in the entry possible state is constant regardless of the game state, and the game according to the feature G1. Machine.

According to the characteristic G2, the frequency at which the triggering ball means is ready to enter the game ball into the special ball entering means is constant regardless of the game state, so that the special ball entering means is provided with a game. The expected value in which a state in which special control is executed after the ball has entered does not change in accordance with the game state. As a result, the processing configuration can be simplified as compared with the configuration in which the expected value is changed according to the gaming state, and the expected value can be easily managed. However, in such a configuration in which the expected value does not change according to the game state, it becomes difficult to give a tonation to the game. On the other hand, since the game ball is provided with the configuration of the above feature G1 and the game ball can be entered into the special ball entry means in a predetermined situation, the game ball is intoflected at the opportunity to enter the special ball entry means Can be given, and as a result, intonation can be given to the game.

Features G3. The game ball flowing down the game area is provided with a predetermined ball entering means (first operating port 33) into which the ball can enter,
The grant determination means executes the grant determination based on a game ball entering the trigger entrance means, and the grant determination based on a game ball entering the predetermined entrance means. Then
As a state in which the grant determination of the grant determination means is performed, a high-probability state and a low-probability state are set so that the probability of being the first grant corresponding result in the grant determination is relatively high or low,
The game machine controls the game time execution means such that the game time operation is started based on the determination of the grant and the game time operation is ended so that the game time operation ends when the operation continuation period elapses. A turn control means (a function for executing special figure variation start processing, special figure variation processing and special figure finalization processing in the main CPU 63);
Period determining means for determining the operation continuation period (function of executing the process of step S1414 in the main CPU 63);
Equipped with
The period determining means is the game revolving operation triggered by the grant determination executed based on the entry of the game ball into the trigger entry means in the low probability state, and the result of the grant determination is the result. In the case where the average duration of the operation continuation period of the game diverting operation when the first grant corresponding result is not obtained, the grant determination executed based on the game ball entering the predetermined ball entering means in the low probability state. It is the same as, approximately the same as or less than, the average period of the operation continuation period of the game playing operation in the case of the game playing operation triggered by the game and the result of the grant determination does not become the first grant corresponding result. Is configured to
The gaming machine according to feature G2, wherein the predetermined situation is different from the situation in which the grant determination is performed in the low probability state.

According to the feature G3, in the low-probability state, the game determination operation is triggered by the grant determination executed based on the entry of the game ball into the trigger entry means, and the result of the grant determination is the first grant corresponding result. When the average duration of the game continuation operation in the case of not being the case is the game continuation operation triggered by the awarding determination executed based on the entrance of the game ball into the predetermined entrance means in the low probability state, It is the same as, substantially the same as, or less than the average period of the operation continuation period of the game re-use operation when the result of the grant determination does not become the first grant corresponding result. As a result, it is possible to prevent the digestion rate of the former game circulation operation from becoming extremely worse than the digestion rate of the latter game circulation operation. However, in addition to the configuration, the feature G2 is provided with a configuration in which the frequency with which the opportunity ball entering means is ready to enter the game ball into the special ball entering means is constant regardless of the game state. In such a case, it is assumed that the game is played aiming at the entry of the game ball into the entry ball means in the low probability state. On the other hand, in the situation where the grant determination is performed in the low probability state, the game ball cannot enter the special ball entering means. Therefore, in the low probability state, it becomes possible to play the game aiming at the entry of the game ball into the predetermined entry means.

Features G4. Characteristic G1 to G1 which is characterized in that the variable ball entering means, the special ball entering means and the trigger ball entering means are provided in an area where the game ball flows down when a shooting operation is performed in a predetermined mode. The gaming machine according to any one of G3.

According to the feature G4, by continuing the firing operation in a predetermined manner, the game ball enters the variable ball entering means, the game ball enters the special ball entering means, and the opportunity entering ball means plays a game. It becomes possible to aim for the ball to enter.

Features G5. The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G4, wherein the predetermined situation is a state in which the special control is executed.

According to the characteristic G5, by shifting to the state where the special control is executed, not only is it possible or easy for the game ball to enter the variable ball entering means, but also the game for the special ball entering means. It is possible to enter a ball. As a result, it is possible to increase the profit of shifting to the state where the special control is executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Features G6. The gaming machine according to feature G5, wherein the gaming ball can enter the special ball entering means when a predetermined condition is satisfied in a state where the special control is executed.

According to the characteristic G6, even if the special control is executed, if the predetermined condition is not satisfied, the game ball does not enter the special ball entering means. As a result, the player expects that a predetermined condition is established separately from the game ball entering the variable ball entering means in the state where the special control is executed, and the game in the state where the special control is executed It is possible to improve the interest of the.

Features G7. The gaming machine according to the feature G5 or G6, wherein the special control state and the predetermined game state are different from each other in ease of entering the game ball into the special ball entering means.

According to the characteristic G7, the ease of entering the game ball into the special ball entering means is different between the special control state and the predetermined game state, so that the game ball is expected to enter the special ball entering means. The person expects the occurrence of a state in which a game ball is likely to enter the special ball entering means. As a result, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

Features G8. When the variable ball entering means switches from one of the first state and the second state to the other, it is possible to enter a game ball into the special ball entering means.
The gaming machine according to feature G7, wherein the number of times the special control is executed is different between the special control state and the predetermined game state.

According to the characteristic G8, when the variable ball entering means is switched from one of the first state and the second state to the other, it is possible to enter the game ball into the special ball entering means. It is possible to increase the player's attention to the timing of switching the state. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the target to be noticed by the player in the state where the special control is executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the state where the special control is executed.

In this case, the number of times the state is switched in the variable ball entering means is different between the special control state and the predetermined game state. As a result, the easiness of entering the game ball into the special ball entering means is different between the special control state and the predetermined game state, and the player who expects the game ball to enter the special ball entering means is special. It is expected that a special control execution state in which a game ball enters the ball entering means is likely to occur. Therefore, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

Features G9. When the game ball that has flowed down from the upstream side is placed in the first corresponding state, the game ball is prevented from flowing down in a predetermined direction, and the game ball is brought into the second corresponding state when the game ball is in the predetermined direction. It has a displacement part (guide plate part 214) that allows it to flow down to
The special ball entering means causes the game ball to flow down in the predetermined direction when the displacement part switches from the first corresponding state to the second corresponding state while the game ball is placed on the displacement part. The gaming machine according to any one of the features G1 to G8, which is provided at a position where the game ball can flow in.

According to the characteristic G9, when the displacement portion switches from the first corresponding state to the second corresponding state, the game ball placed on the displacement portion can enter the special ball entering means. As a result, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game by paying attention to whether the displacement portion switches from the first corresponding state to the second corresponding state while the game ball is placed on the displacement portion.

Feature G10. The displacement portion is formed so that the game ball placed on the displacement portion flows down in a specific direction along the displacement portion in the first corresponding state,
The special ball entering means is provided when the displacement part switches from the first corresponding state to the second corresponding state in a state where the game ball is placed in a predetermined range which is a part of the displacement part. The gaming machine according to feature G9, wherein the gaming ball is provided at a position where the gaming ball can flow in when flowing down in the predetermined direction.

According to the characteristic G10, in order for the game ball to enter the special ball entering means, not only the game ball is placed on the displacement portion in the first corresponding state, but also the game on which it is placed. It is necessary for the displacement portion to switch from the first corresponding state to the second corresponding state at an exquisite timing when the sphere exists within a predetermined range. As a result, the player pays attention to the relationship between the position of the game ball placed on the displacement portion and the switching timing of the state of the displacement portion, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Feature G11. On the upstream side in the flow-down direction of the game ball with respect to the displacement part, a means (guide nail group 241) for guiding the game ball flowing down the game area toward a specific range of the displacement part is provided,
The gaming machine according to feature G10, wherein the predetermined range exists on the side of the specific direction with respect to the specific range.

According to the characteristic G11, the predetermined range, which is the range in which the special ball entering means can be entered in the displacing section, is on the displacing section rather than the specific range in which the game ball first reaches in the displacing section. It exists on the front side in the downflow direction of the game ball. As a result, in order to cause the game ball to enter the special ball entering means, the displacement portion changes from the first correspondence state to the second correspondence state at an exquisite timing while the game ball is flowing down on the displacement portion. Need to switch to state. Therefore, the player pays attention to the movement of the game ball on the displacement portion, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Features G12. The target ball entering means which is one of the variable ball entering means and the ball entering means other than the variable ball entering means,
With a ball entering portion (first big winning opening 265, second big winning opening 266) into which a game ball can enter,
The game ball flowing down from the upstream side can be placed, and the loaded game ball can be guided to the ball entering portion, and the game ball flowing down from the upstream side is in front. Guide means (first guide plate 271, second guide plate 281) provided so as to be switchable to each of the non-guided states in which the guide ball portion is not guided,
Equipped with
When the guide means is in the guide state, the special ball is placed at a position where the game ball placed on the guide means and flowing down to another area different from the ball entering portion can enter the ball. The gaming machine according to any one of the features G1 to G11, characterized in that means are provided.

According to the characteristic G12, when the guiding means is in the guiding state, the game ball placed on the guiding means is guided to either the ball entering portion of the target ball entering means or the special ball entering means. As a result, it becomes possible to increase the degree of attention of the player to the game ball placed on the guide means, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Features G13. On the upstream side in the flow-down direction of the game ball than the guide means, means for guiding the game ball flowing down the game area toward the guide start range of the guide means (first guide nail group 267, second guide nail). Group 268),
The guide means is formed so that the game ball placed on the guide means flows down in a predetermined guide direction along the guide means in the guide state,
The gaming machine according to feature G12, wherein the ball entrance portion and the different area are present on the side of the predetermined guidance direction with respect to the guidance start range.

According to the feature G13, both of the ball entering portion and the separate area that allows the ball to enter the special ball entering means are in the guide means more than the guide start range where the game ball first reaches in the guide means. It exists on the front side in the downflow direction of the game ball. This allows the player to pay attention to how the game ball flows down in the guide means.

Features G14. The gaming machine according to Feature G13, wherein the different region is present on the side in the predetermined guiding direction with respect to the ball entering portion.

According to the characteristic G14, the game ball which has been placed on the guiding means in the guiding state but has passed through without entering the ball entering portion enters the special ball entering means. As a result, the player's disadvantageous feeling that the game ball placed on the guiding means has not entered the ball entering portion is changed to a profitable feeling that the player enters the special ball entering means. It becomes possible.

Feature G15. As the target ball entering means, a first target ball entering means (first special electric prize winning device 261) and a second target ball entering means (second special electric prize winning device 262) are provided,
As the special ball entering means, a first special ball entering means (first through gate 263) and a second special ball entering means (second through gate 264) are provided,
When the first guiding means (first guiding plate 271), which is the guiding means of the first target ball entering means, is in the guiding state, it is a game ball placed on the first guiding means and is the first The first special ball entering means is provided at a position where a game ball that has flowed into a first different area different from the first ball entering portion which is the ball entering portion of the target ball entering means can enter the ball.
When the second guiding means (second guiding plate 281) which is the guiding means of the second target ball entering means is in the guiding state, it is a game ball placed on the second guiding means and is the second. That the second special ball entering means is provided at a position where the game ball that has flown into a second different area different from the second ball entering portion that is the ball entering portion of the target ball entering means can enter the ball. The gaming machine according to any one of the features G12 to G14.

According to the feature G15, there is a combination of the first target ball entering means and the first special ball entering means, and a combination of the second target ball entering means and the second special ball entering means. With this, by changing the type of the combination for which the guidance control is executed in the state where the guidance control is executed, the ratio of the game balls entering the target entrance means and the special entrance means is made different. Is possible.

Feature G16. The probability that the game ball on the first guide means in the guide state will enter the first special ball means, and the game ball on the second guide means in the guide state The gaming machine according to feature G15, wherein the probability of entering the second special entry means is different.

According to the feature G16, it is possible to make the probability of entering the game ball into the special ball entering means different by changing the type of the combination for which the guide control is executed in the state where the guide control is executed. .. As a result, it is possible to increase the degree of attention of the player to the execution target of the guidance control.

Feature G17. The game machine according to feature G15 or G16, wherein the second special ball entering means is provided downstream of the first special ball entering means in the flow down direction of the game ball.

According to the feature G17, the second special ball entering means is provided downstream of the first special ball entering means in the downflow direction of the game ball, so that the first target ball entering means is an object for executing special control. In this case, not only the game ball can enter the first special ball entering means, but also the game ball can enter the second special ball entering means. Therefore, the player expects that the first target ball entry means will be the target of the guidance control.

Features G18. The same privilege is given regardless of whether a game ball enters the first special ball entering means or a game ball enters the second special ball entering means. The gaming machine according to any one of the features G15 to G17.

According to the feature G18, the same privilege is given regardless of whether the game ball enters the first special entrance means or the second special entrance means. It is possible to suppress the disadvantage feeling felt by the player regardless of which of the first target ball entry means and the second target ball entry means the guidance control is executed.

It should be noted that features A1 to A41, features B1 to B20, features C1 to C4, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E7, features F1 to F45, features G1 to G18, and features H1 to the configurations of the features G1 to G18. Any one or a plurality of configurations of H8, features I1 to I11, features J1 to J9, and features K1 to K9 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to exert a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Feature H group>
Features H1. When the game ball that has flowed down from the upstream side is placed in the first corresponding state, the game ball is prevented from flowing down in a predetermined direction, and the game ball is brought into the second corresponding state when the game ball is in the predetermined direction. A displacement portion (guide plate portion 214) that allows the water to flow down to
Inflow of the game sphere by flowing down the game sphere in the predetermined direction when the displacement part is switched from the first corresponding state to the second corresponding state while the game sphere is placed on the displacing part. Special ball entrance means (thru gate 35 in the first to thirteenth and eighteenth embodiments, a first special ball entrance 251 and a second special ball entrance in the fourteenth embodiments). 252, in the fifteenth embodiment, a first through gate 263 and a second through gate 264),
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature H1, when the displacement portion switches from the first corresponding state to the second corresponding state, the game ball placed on the displacement portion can enter the special ball entering means. As a result, the player pays attention to whether or not the displacement portion switches from the first corresponding state to the second corresponding state in the state where the game ball is placed on the displacement portion, and the interest of the game is improved. Is possible.

Features H2. The displacement portion is formed so that the game ball placed on the displacement portion flows down in a specific direction along the displacement portion in the first corresponding state,
The special ball entering means is provided when the displacement part switches from the first corresponding state to the second corresponding state in a state where the game ball is placed in a predetermined range which is a part of the displacement part. The gaming machine according to the feature H1, wherein the gaming ball is provided at a position where the gaming ball can flow in when the gaming ball flows down in the predetermined direction.

According to the characteristic H2, in order for the game ball to enter the special ball entering means, not only the game ball is placed on the displacement portion in the first corresponding state, but also the game on which it is placed. It is necessary for the displacement portion to switch from the first corresponding state to the second corresponding state at an exquisite timing when the sphere exists within a predetermined range. As a result, the player pays attention to the relationship between the position of the game ball placed on the displacement portion and the switching timing of the state of the displacement portion, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Features H3. On the upstream side in the flow-down direction of the game ball with respect to the displacement portion, a means (guide nail group 241) for guiding the game ball flowing down the game area toward a specific range of the displacement portion is provided,
The gaming machine according to feature H2, wherein the predetermined range exists on the side of the specific direction with respect to the specific range.

According to the feature H3, the predetermined range, which is a range that allows the special ball entering means in the displacing part, is on the displacing part, rather than the specific range in which the game ball first reaches in the displacing part It exists on the front side in the downflow direction of the game ball. As a result, in order to cause the game ball to enter the special ball entering means, the displacement portion changes from the first correspondence state to the second correspondence state at an exquisite timing while the game ball is flowing down on the displacement portion. Need to switch to state. Therefore, the player pays attention to the movement of the game ball on the displacement portion, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Features H4. The gaming machine according to feature H3, wherein the predetermined ball entrance portion (entrance portion 45b) is present on the specific direction side with respect to the predetermined range.

According to the characteristic H4, the predetermined ball entrance portion is present on the front side in the flow-down direction of the game ball on the displacement portion, as compared with the predetermined range which is a range in which the special ball entrance means is allowed in the displacement portion. doing. As a result, the game ball that has been placed on the displacement portion but has not reached the predetermined ball entrance portion will enter the special ball entry means. Therefore, the player's disadvantageous feeling that the game ball placed on the displacement portion does not enter the predetermined ball entering portion, on the contrary, the benefit feeling that the player enters the special ball entering means. It becomes possible to change to.

Features H5. The predetermined range is such that when a game ball is supplied to the specific range at a predetermined firing cycle, a game ball in the next firing order exists at the timing when one game ball reaches the predetermined ball entrance portion. The gaming machine according to feature H4, wherein the gaming machine is set in a range.

According to the feature H5, it is highly possible that the game ball exists in the predetermined range of the displacement portion at the timing when the game ball enters the predetermined insertion portion and the displacement portion switches to the second corresponding state. .. Therefore, when the displacement portion changes from the first corresponding state to the second corresponding state, it is possible to increase the possibility that the game ball will enter the special ball entering means.

Features H6. As the special ball entrance means, a first special ball entrance means (first special ball entrance 251) and a second special ball entrance means (second special ball entrance 252) are provided.
The gaming machine has means for giving a first profit when the game ball enters the first special ball entering means (function of executing the process of step S3902 in the main CPU 63),
Means for giving a second profit when a game ball enters the second special entrance means (function of executing the process of step S3904 in the main CPU 63),
Equipped with
The first special ball entering means, when the game ball is placed in a first predetermined range (first range X1) which is a part of the displacement part, the displacement part moves from the first corresponding state to the first corresponding range. 2 When the game ball is switched to the corresponding state, the game ball is provided in a position where the game ball can flow in by flowing down in the predetermined direction,
The second special ball entering means, when the game ball is placed in a second predetermined range (second range X2) which is a part of the displacement section, the displacement section moves from the first corresponding state to the first corresponding state. In any one of the features H1 to H5, the game ball is provided at a position where the game ball can flow in by flowing down in the predetermined direction when the game ball is switched to the corresponding state. The game machine described.

According to the characteristic H6, when the game ball is placed on the displacement portion in the first corresponding state, the displacement occurs in a range in which it is possible to enter the special ball entering means with a higher profit. The position of the game ball placed on the displacement part is focused on in the expectation that the part will switch from the first corresponding state to the second corresponding state.

Features H7. The displacement portion is formed so that the game ball placed on the displacement portion flows down in a specific direction along the displacement portion in the first corresponding state,
It is more advantageous for the player to enter the game ball into the first special entrance means than to enter the game ball into the second special entrance means,
On the upstream side in the flow-down direction of the game ball with respect to the displacement portion, a means (guide nail group 241) for guiding the game ball flowing down the game area toward a specific range of the displacement portion is provided,
The second predetermined range exists on the side of the specific direction with respect to the specific range,
The first predetermined range is on the side of the specific direction with respect to the second predetermined range,
The gaming machine according to Feature H6, wherein the predetermined ball entrance portion is present on the side of the specific direction with respect to the first predetermined range.

According to Characteristic H7, the first predetermined range, which is a range in which the displacement portion can enter the first special ball entering means, is a range in which the displacement portion can enter the second special ball entering means. The game ball exists on the displacement-direction front side of the displacement portion above a certain second predetermined range, and the predetermined entrance portion of the game ball flows down on the displacement portion beyond the first predetermined range. Exists in. Then, it is more advantageous for the player to enter the game ball into the first special ball entering means than to enter the game ball into the second special ball entering means. This makes it easier for the game ball, which is located closer to the predetermined ball entrance portion on the displacement portion, to enter the first special ball entrance means, which is advantageous for the player. It is possible to increase the profit for the player in a situation in which the disadvantageous feeling that the game ball has not entered increases.

Features H8. The gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H7, wherein a plurality of types of operation modes of the displacement portion are set.

According to the characteristic H8, a plurality of kinds of predetermined situations in which the frequency of entering the special entrance means is different are set because a plurality of types of operation modes of the displacement portion are set.

In addition, with respect to the configurations of the features H1 to H8, the features A1 to A41, the features B1 to B20, the features C1 to C4, the features D1 to D10, the features E1 to E7, the features F1 to F45, the features G1 to G18, and the features H1 to H1. Any one or a plurality of configurations of H8, features I1 to I11, features J1 to J9, and features K1 to K9 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to exert a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Feature group I>
Feature I1. The game ball is provided in a game area (gaming area PA) where the game ball flows down, and the game ball can enter the ball, or the game ball can easily enter the first state, and the game ball cannot enter or the game ball cannot enter easily. The variable ball entering means provided so as to be switchable between each of the second state (the first to fourteenth and eighteenth embodiments, the special electric prize winning device 32, and the fifteenth embodiment, the first special electric prize winning device 261 and the second special electric prize winning device 261). Tokuden prize winning device 262),
Special control means for executing special control for bringing the variable ball entrance means into the second state after the variable ball entrance means is in the first state (special electric open setting processing and special electric close setting processing in the main CPU 63 is executed. Function),
Transition means (function for executing special figure finalizing processing in the main CPU 63) for shifting the game state to a special control state (opening/closing execution mode) in which the special control is executed,
In a predetermined game state that is not the special control state, the entry of the game ball is restricted, and in the special control state, the game ball can be entered. Special entrance 252),
The number of game balls that can be used by the player is increased based on the fact that a game ball has entered the variable ball means, and can be used by the player based on that the game ball has entered the special ball means. Means for increasing the number of game balls (function of executing the processing of steps S3902 and S3904 in the main CPU 63),
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the characteristic I1, by shifting the game state to the special control state, it becomes possible or easy to enter the game ball into the variable ball entering means, and also the game ball into the special ball entering means. It is possible to enter. As a result, it is possible to increase the profit of the game state shifting to the special control state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In this case, when a game ball enters the variable ball entering means, the number of game balls available to the player increases, and when the game ball enters the special ball entering means, the player also uses it. The number of possible game balls increases. Further, by having the above-mentioned configuration, not only is it possible or easier for the game ball to enter the variable ball entering means by shifting the game state to the special control state, but also the special ball It becomes possible to enter a game ball into the means. Therefore, it is possible to increase the amount of increase in the number of game balls usable by the player in the special control state, and it is possible to increase the advantage in the special control state.

Feature I2. The special ball entry means is downstream of the variable ball entry means in the flow down direction of the game ball in the game area, and the variable ball entry means is one of the first state and the second state The gaming machine according to feature I1, which is provided at a position where a game ball can flow in at the timing of switching to.

According to the characteristic I2, when the variable ball entering means is switched from one of the first state and the second state to the other, the game ball which has not entered the variable ball entering means enters the special ball entering means. It will be possible. As a result, the game ball that has leaked as a target for the variable ball entering means enters the special ball entering means, and the number of usable game balls increases by entering the game ball into the special ball entering means. , It is possible to suppress the player's disadvantageous feeling that the game ball leaked from the ball entry target of the variable ball entry means.

Feature I3. The variable ball entering means becomes a first corresponding state in one of the first state and the second state, and the game ball that has flowed down from the upstream side of the variable ball entering means is placed on the variable ball entering means. The game ball is prevented from flowing down in a predetermined direction by being in the state, and the variable ball entering means becomes the second corresponding state in the other state of the first state and the second state. Having a displacement portion (guide plate portion 214) that allows the game ball to flow down in the predetermined direction,
The special ball entering means causes the game ball to flow down in the predetermined direction when the displacement part is switched from the first corresponding state to the second corresponding state while the game ball is placed on the displacement part. Therefore, the gaming machine according to the feature I1 or I2, which is provided at a position where the game ball can flow in.

According to the characteristic I3, when the displacement portion switches from the first corresponding state to the second corresponding state, the game ball placed on the displacement portion can enter the special ball entering means. Accordingly, in the special control state, the player does not only determine whether or not the game ball enters the variable ball entering means, but the displacement unit makes the first correspondence when the game ball is placed on the displacement unit. By paying attention to whether or not the state is switched to the second corresponding state, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the special control state.

Feature I4. The gaming machine according to feature I3, wherein the one state is the first state of the variable ball entering means and the other state is the second state of the variable ball entering means.

According to the characteristic I4, the trigger for entering the game ball into the special ball entering means occurs at the timing when the variable ball entering means switches from the first state to the second state. This makes it possible to raise the player's attention not only when the variable ball entering means is in the first state but also when the variable ball entering means is switched to the second state.

Feature I5. The displacement portion is formed so that the game ball placed on the displacement portion flows down in a specific direction along the displacement portion in the first corresponding state,
The special ball entering means is provided when the displacement part is switched from the first corresponding state to the second corresponding state in a state where the game ball is placed in a predetermined range which is a part of the displacement part. The gaming machine according to feature I3 or I4, wherein the gaming ball is provided at a position where the gaming ball can flow in when the gaming ball flows down in the predetermined direction.

According to the feature I5, in order for the game ball to enter the special ball entering means, not only the game ball is placed on the displacement portion in the first corresponding state, but also the game on which it is placed. It is necessary for the displacement portion to switch from the first corresponding state to the second corresponding state at an exquisite timing when the sphere exists within a predetermined range. As a result, the player pays attention to the relationship between the position of the game ball placed on the displacement portion and the switching timing of the state of the displacement portion, and the interest of the game in the special control state can be improved.

Feature I6. On the upstream side in the flow-down direction of the game ball with respect to the displacement part, a means (guide nail group 241) for guiding the game ball flowing down the game area toward a specific range of the displacement part is provided,
The gaming machine according to feature I5, wherein the predetermined range exists on the side of the specific direction with respect to the specific range.

According to the characteristic I6, the predetermined range, which is a range that allows the special ball entering means in the displacing section, is on the displacing section rather than the specific range in which the game sphere reaches first in the displacing section. It exists on the front side in the downflow direction of the game ball. As a result, in order to cause the game ball to enter the special ball entering means, the displacement portion changes from the first correspondence state to the second correspondence state at an exquisite timing while the game ball is flowing down on the displacement portion. Need to switch to state. Therefore, the player pays attention to the movement of the game ball on the displacement portion, and the interest of the game in the special control state can be improved.

Features I7. The one state is the first state of the variable ball entering means, the other state is the second state of the variable ball entering means,
The game machine according to feature I6, wherein the ball entrance portion (entrance portion 45b) of the variable ball entrance means is present on the specific direction side with respect to the predetermined range.

According to the characteristic I7, the trigger for entering the game ball into the special ball entering means occurs at the timing when the variable ball entering means switches from the first state to the second state. This makes it possible to raise the player's attention not only when the variable ball entering means is in the first state but also when the variable ball entering means is switched to the second state.

In this case, the ball-in portion of the variable ball-in means is located ahead of the predetermined direction, which is the range in which the special ball-in means can be entered in the displacement portion, in the downward direction of the game ball on the displacement portion. Existing. As a result, the game ball, which is placed on the displacement portion but has not reached the ball entering portion of the variable ball entering means, enters the special ball entering means. Therefore, the player's disadvantageous feeling that the game ball placed on the displacement portion did not enter the variable ball entering means, on the contrary, the benefit feeling that the player enters the special ball entering means. It is possible to change.

Feature I8. The predetermined range is a range in which a game ball in the next firing order is present at the timing when one game ball reaches the ball entrance portion when the game balls are supplied to the specific range at a predetermined firing cycle. The gaming machine according to feature I7, wherein the gaming machine is set to.

According to feature I8, at the timing when the game ball enters the ball entry part of the variable ball entry means and the displacement part switches to the second corresponding state, there is a possibility that the game ball exists in a predetermined range of the displacement part. Becomes higher. Therefore, when the displacement portion changes from the first corresponding state to the second corresponding state, it is possible to increase the possibility that the game ball will enter the special ball entering means.

Feature I9. As the special ball entrance means, a first special ball entrance means (first special ball entrance 251) and a second special ball entrance means (second special ball entrance 252) are provided.
The gaming machine has means for giving a first profit when the game ball enters the first special ball entering means (function of executing the process of step S3902 in the main CPU 63),
Means for giving a second profit when a game ball enters the second special entrance means (function of executing the process of step S3904 in the main CPU 63),
Equipped with
When the first condition is satisfied in the special control state, the game ball can enter the first special ball entering means,
The gaming machine according to any one of features I1 to I8, wherein the game ball can enter the second special ball means when the second condition is satisfied in the special control state.

According to the feature I9, the special ball-entering means to be the ball-entering target is the first special ball-entering means and the second special ball-entering means, depending on whether the condition satisfied in the special control state is the first condition or the second condition. And will be different. Further, the profits to be given are different when the game ball enters the first special ball entering means and when the game ball enters the second special ball entering means. As a result, the player not only expects that either the first condition or the second condition is satisfied in the special control state, but also allows the game ball to enter the more profitable special ball entering means. We expect that the conditions to be met will be met. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the special control state.

Feature I10. The variable ball entering means becomes a first corresponding state in one of the first state and the second state, and the game ball that has flowed down from the upstream side of the variable ball entering means is placed on the variable ball entering means. The game ball is prevented from flowing down in a predetermined direction by being in the state, and the variable ball entering means becomes the second corresponding state in the other state of the first state and the second state. Having a displacement portion (guide plate portion 214) that allows the game ball to flow down in the predetermined direction,
The displacement portion is formed so that the game ball placed on the displacement portion flows down in a specific direction along the displacement portion in the first corresponding state,
The first special ball entering means, when the game ball is placed in a first predetermined range (first range X1) which is a part of the displacement part, the displacement part moves from the first corresponding state to the first corresponding range. 2 When the game ball is switched to the corresponding state, the game ball is provided in a position where the game ball can flow in by flowing down in the predetermined direction,
The second special ball entering means, when the game ball is placed in a second predetermined range (second range X2) which is a part of the displacement section, the displacement section moves from the first corresponding state to the first corresponding state. The gaming machine according to feature I9, wherein the gaming ball is provided at a position where the gaming ball can flow in the predetermined direction when the gaming ball is switched to the two-compatible state.

According to the characteristic I10, when the game ball is placed on the displacement portion in the first corresponding state, the displacement occurs in a range in which it is possible to enter the special entry means with higher profit. The position of the game ball placed on the displacement part is focused on in the expectation that the part will switch from the first corresponding state to the second corresponding state.

Feature I11. The one state is the first state of the variable ball entering means, the other state is the second state of the variable ball entering means,
It is more advantageous for the player to enter the game ball into the first special entrance means than to enter the game ball into the second special entrance means,
On the upstream side in the flow-down direction of the game ball with respect to the displacement part, a means (guide nail group 241) for guiding the game ball flowing down the game area toward a specific range of the displacement part is provided,
The second predetermined range exists on the side of the specific direction with respect to the specific range,
The first predetermined range is on the side of the specific direction with respect to the second predetermined range,
The game machine according to feature I10, wherein the ball entry portion of the variable ball entry means is present on the side of the specific direction with respect to the first predetermined range.

According to the characteristic I11, a trigger for entering the game ball into the special ball entering means occurs at the timing when the variable ball entering means switches from the first state to the second state. This makes it possible to raise the player's attention not only when the variable ball entering means is in the first state but also when the variable ball entering means is switched to the second state.

In this case, the first predetermined range, which is a range in which the displacing portion can enter the first special sphere, is a range in which the displacing portion can enter the second special sphere. 2 While existing on the front side in the downward direction of the game ball on the displacement part beyond the predetermined range, the ball entrance part of the variable ball entrance means is ahead of the downward direction of the game ball on the displacement part beyond the first predetermined range. Exists on the side. Then, it is more advantageous for the player to enter the game ball into the first special ball entering means than to enter the game ball into the second special ball entering means. Then, the game ball that is located closer to the ball entrance portion of the variable ball entrance means on the displacement portion is more likely to enter the first special ball entrance means, which is advantageous to the player, and thus the variable ball entrance means. It is possible to increase the profit for the player in a situation where the player feels a disadvantage that the game ball has not entered the player's ball.

In addition, with respect to the configurations of the features I1 to I11, the features A1 to A41, the features B1 to B20, the features C1 to C4, the features D1 to D10, the features E1 to E7, the features F1 to F45, the features G1 to G18, and the features H1 to H1. Any one or a plurality of configurations of H8, features I1 to I11, features J1 to J9, and features K1 to K9 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to exert a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Feature J group>
Features J1. The game ball is provided in a game area (gaming area PA) where the game ball flows down, and the game ball can enter the ball, or the game ball can easily enter the first state, and the game ball cannot enter or the game ball cannot enter easily. The variable ball entering means provided so as to be switchable between each of the second state (the first to fourteenth and eighteenth embodiments, the special electric prize winning device 32, and the fifteenth embodiment, the first special electric prize winning device 261 and the second special electric prize winning device 261). Tokuden prize winning device 262),
Special control means for executing special control for bringing the variable ball entrance means into the second state after the variable ball entrance means is in the first state (special electric open setting processing and special electric close setting processing in the main CPU 63 is executed. Function),
Transition means (function for executing special figure finalizing processing in the main CPU 63) for shifting the game state to a special control state (opening/closing execution mode) in which the special control is executed,
The special ball entering means for restricting the entry of the game ball in the predetermined game state and allowing the game ball to enter in the game state other than the predetermined game state (first to thirteenth and eighteenth embodiments). Then, the through gate 35, the first special entrance 251 and the second special entrance 252 in the fourteenth embodiment, and the first through gate 263 and the second through gate 264) in the fifteenth embodiment,
At least a corresponding acquisition ball entering means (ball 311 for emergence) capable of entering a game ball in the predetermined game state,
Based on the fact that the game ball has entered the special ball entrance means, the game ball can enter the game ball, and the game ball enters the acquisition-ready ball means. An opportunity to enter a ball, which is a state in which the player can enter the ball (second operating port 34),
Equipped with
A game machine characterized in that a trigger for shifting to the special control state is generated on the basis of a game ball entering the opportunity entering means.

According to the feature J1, it is possible to enter the special entrance means that causes the opportunity entrance means to enter the enterable state in a gaming state that is not the predetermined gaming state. As a result, the player who expects the game ball to enter the opportunity entering means expects the occurrence of a game state other than the predetermined game state. Therefore, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

In this case, even if the game state is in a predetermined game state, the triggered ball entering means can enter the ball based on the game ball entering the acquisition corresponding ball entering means. Then, based on the fact that the game ball has entered the opportunity entering means which has entered the entry possible state, the opportunity to transition to the special control state occurs. As a result, not only in the game state that is not the predetermined game state, but also in the predetermined game state, the triggered ball entering means is ready to enter the ball, and the special control state is generated based on the entry of the game ball into the triggered ball entering means. It is possible to create a situation in which

Features J2. The game machine according to feature J1, wherein the special control state is included in a game state other than the predetermined game state.

According to the feature J2, by shifting the game state to the special control state, it becomes possible or easier to enter the game ball into the variable ball entering means, and also the game ball into the special ball entering means. It is possible to enter. As a result, it is possible to increase the profit of the game state shifting to the special control state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Features J3. Restriction means (restriction means) that makes the probability of entering the game ball into the acquisition-ready ball means lower than the probability that the game ball will enter the special ball means in a game state other than the predetermined game state. The game machine according to feature J1 or J2, characterized in that it is provided with a nail 312).

According to the feature J3, it is possible to suppress the probability that the transition to the special control state occurs based on the entry of the game ball into the acquisition-ready entry means in a predetermined game state. As a result, it is possible to enhance the player's satisfaction with the occurrence of the transition to the special control state based on the entry of the game ball into the acquisition-ready entry means in the predetermined game state.

Features J4. At least a predetermined ball entering means (first operating port 33) that allows a game ball to enter in the predetermined game state,
Occurrence of transition to the special control state based on the game ball entered the predetermined ball entering means,
The feature J3 is characterized in that the restriction means makes a probability of a game ball entering the acquisition-ready entrance means lower than a probability that a game ball enters the predetermined entrance means. Game machine.

According to the feature J4, the acquisition-corresponding ball-entering means can be used rather than the predetermined ball-entering means that allows the game ball to enter in the predetermined game state and the occurrence of the game ball entering the special control state triggers the transition to the special control state. Has a lower probability of entering a game ball. As a result, it is possible to enhance the player's satisfaction with the occurrence of the transition to the special control state based on the entry of the game ball into the acquisition-ready entry means in the predetermined game state.

Features J5. Notification execution means (main CPU 63) for executing acquisition correspondence notification in a situation in which the trigger ball entering means is ready to enter based on the fact that a game ball has entered the acquisition-ready entrance means. The game machine according to any one of features J1 to J4, which is provided with a function of executing the process of step S4413 in step S4413 and a display control device 82).

According to the feature J5, it is possible to notify the player through the execution of the acquisition support notification that the game ball has entered the acquisition support entrance means and the trigger entrance means is ready to enter. Becomes As a result, despite the fact that the game ball has entered the acquisition-ready ball means and the trigger ball means has become ready to enter, the player does not notice it It is possible to make it difficult for the event of losing the chance to enter the ball to occur.

Features J6. A feature J5 characterized in that the notification execution means is configured to execute the acquisition correspondence notification on condition that a game ball has entered the acquisition correspondence ball entering means in the predetermined game state. Game machine.

In a game state that is not the predetermined game state, it becomes possible for the game ball to enter the special ball entering means, so it is possible that the player's consciousness is better that the trigger ball entering means is ready to enter the ball. Although high, it is possible that the player's consciousness that the trigger ball means is ready to enter the ball because the game ball does not enter the special ball means in the predetermined game state. In this case, according to the feature J6, since the acquisition correspondence notification is executed on condition that the game sphere has entered the acquisition-corresponding ball entering means in the predetermined game state, the trigger-ball entering means is in the entry-enabled state. It becomes possible to direct the player's consciousness to what happens. In addition, it is highly possible that the player's consciousness is more likely that the trigger entry means is ready to enter the ball, so that the acquisition response notification is not executed in the game state that is not the predetermined game state It is possible to prevent the execution of the correspondence notification from becoming annoying to the player.

Features J7. A means for acquiring special opportunity information based on a game ball entering the special ball entering means, and acquiring the special opportunity information based on a game ball entering the acquisition-supporting ball entering means ,
The opportunity entrance means is configured to be in the entrance possible state based on the acquisition of the special opportunity information,
The notification execution means, if the special opportunity information has been acquired by the game ball entering the acquisition-ready ball entering means in a situation where the special opportunity information has not been acquired, the acquisition-ready notification is The gaming machine according to feature J5 or J6, which is characterized by being executed.

According to the feature J7, it is possible to execute the acquisition correspondence notification in a situation in which the player is less conscious of the opportunity entering means being in the entry enabled state.

Features J8. Characteristic J1 characterized in that the variable ball entering means, the special ball entering means, and the acquisition corresponding ball entering means are provided in the area where the game ball flows down when the shooting operation is performed in a predetermined mode. A gaming machine according to any one of J7 to J7.

According to the feature J8, by continuing the firing operation in the predetermined mode, the game ball enters the variable ball entering means, the game ball enters the special ball entering means, and the acquisition-ready ball entering means. It is possible to aim for a game ball to enter.

Features J9. The triggering ball means is provided at a position where the game ball can easily reach the triggering ball means when the firing operation is performed in a specific mode than when the firing operation is performed in the predetermined mode. The game machine according to feature J8, which is characterized by being provided.

According to the feature J9, when the trigger entry ball means is ready to enter the ball in the predetermined game state, the launch operation is performed in a specific mode to allow the entry of the game ball into the trigger entry ball means. It becomes possible to make it easy to occur.

In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features J1 to J9, the features A1 to A41, the features B1 to B20, the features C1 to C4, the features D1 to D10, the features E1 to E7, the features F1 to F45, the features G1 to G18, and the features H1 to H1. Any one or a plurality of configurations of H8, features I1 to I11, features J1 to J9, and features K1 to K9 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to exert a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

According to the inventions related to the characteristic group F, the characteristic group G, the characteristic group H, the characteristic group I and the characteristic group J, the following problems can be solved.

As a kind of gaming machine, a pachinko machine and a slot machine are known. In these gaming machines, a configuration is known in which a player is provided with a profit by shifting a game state to a special control state based on the satisfaction of a predetermined shift condition.

Regarding pachinko machines, specifically, a configuration that shifts to a special control state by a winning result in an internal lottery based on the entry of a game ball into the ball entry part provided in the game area, or a predetermined entry A configuration is known in which a game ball enters a part and shifts to a special control state. When the special control state is entered, for example, opening and closing of the ball entrance device provided in the game area is started, and the game ball is paid out based on the ball entering the ball entrance device.

Here, in the gaming machine as illustrated above, it is necessary to improve the interest of the game, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Characteristic K group>
Features K1. The game ball is provided in a game area (gaming area PA) where the game ball flows down, and the game ball can enter the ball, or the game ball can easily enter the first state. A first variable ball entering means (first special electric prize winning device 291) switchably provided in each of the second state,
Provided downstream of the first variable ball entering means, a first state in which a game ball can enter or a game ball can easily enter and a second state in which a game ball cannot enter or a game ball cannot enter easily And a second variable ball entering means (second special electric prize winning device 292) switchably provided in each of
In the unit control state, unit control means for controlling such that a period in which both the first variable ball entrance means and the second variable ball entrance means are in the first state occurs (Fig. 85(a) in the main CPU 63). A function for executing the special electric open setting process shown in Fig. 85 and a function for executing the special electric close setting process shown in Fig. 85B).
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the characteristic K1, the game ball that has failed to enter the first variable ball entering means in the first state in the unit control state can enter the second variable ball entering means in the first state. This makes it easier for the game ball to enter the variable ball entering means in the unit control state.

Features K2. The unit control state is provided with a means (function of executing special figure finalizing processing in the main CPU 63) for shifting the game state to a special control state (opening/closing execution mode) which is executed a plurality of times,
When the unit control state of one execution time ends, the game ball that started to flow down from the position of the first variable ball entering means toward the second variable ball entering means has the unit control state of the next execution time. The game machine according to the feature K1, wherein the game machine is configured to enter the second variable ball entering means in the first state.

According to the characteristic K2, the game ball that cannot reach the first variable ball entering means even though it has reached the position of the first variable ball entering means at the timing when the unit control state ends In the unit control state of the next execution time, the second variable ball entering means is entered. As a result, it is possible to suppress the number of game balls that do not enter the variable ball entering means in spite of the launching operation aiming at entering the game ball into the variable ball entering means in the special control state.

Features K3. The unit control means controls both the first variable ball entering means and the second variable ball entering means to be in the first state when the unit control state is started. The gaming machine described in K1 or K2.

According to the characteristic K3, when the unit control state is started, both the first variable ball entering means and the second variable ball entering means are controlled so as to be in the first state, so that these variable ball entering means are controlled. It is possible to reduce the processing load as compared with the configuration in which the timing of the first state is individually set. Also, in the unit control state of one execution time, the game sphere that has leaked into the first variable ball entering means can enter the second variable ball entering means in the unit control state of the next execution time.

Features K4. When the unit control state is started, both the first variable ball entering means and the second variable ball entering means are in the first state, and when the unit control state ends The gaming machine according to any one of features K1 to K3, characterized in that both the first variable ball entering means and the second variable ball entering means are controlled to be in the second state.

According to the characteristic K4, it is possible to reduce the processing load for controlling each variable ball entry means in the unit control state. In addition, according to this configuration, the object to enter the game ball in the unit control state is basically the first variable ball entry means, but the first variable ball entry means is entered in the unit control state of one execution time. The game ball which leaked the ball can enter the second variable ball entering means in the unit control state of the next execution time.

Features K5. The unit control state is provided with a means for shifting a game state to a special control state that is executed a plurality of times (a function for executing special figure finalization processing in the main CPU 63),
In the special control state, the period from the end of the unit control state of one execution time to the start of the unit control state of the next execution time is from the position of the first variable ball entrance means to the second The gaming machine described in the characteristic K3 or K4, which is shorter than the period required for the gaming ball to reach the position of the variable ball entering means.

According to the characteristic K5, the game ball that has leaked into the first variable ball entering means in the unit control state of one execution time can enter the second variable ball entering means in the unit control state of the next execution time. Becomes Further, it is possible to realize a configuration for making it difficult for such a ball leakage to occur by adjusting the positional relationship between the first variable ball entering means and the second variable ball entering means.

Features K6. The first variable ball entering means and the second variable ball entering means are configured so that a game ball flowing down a predetermined game area can enter the ball.
In the first variable ball entering means, when the first variable ball entering means is in the first state, the game ball flowing down the predetermined game area is guided to the ball entering portion of the first variable ball entering means. The characteristic K5 is characterized by having a first displacement portion (the guide plate portion 214 of the first special prize winning device 291) for preventing the game ball from flowing into the second variable ball entering means. The game machine described.

According to the characteristic K6, when the first variable ball entering means is in the first state, it is possible to prevent the game ball from leaking into the first variable ball entering means. Further, by providing the configuration of the above characteristic K5, even if a ball leak to the first variable ball entering means occurs at the end timing of the unit control state of one execution time, the game ball is the second variable ball. Easy to enter the ball entering means. Therefore, in the special control state, it is difficult for the ball to leak into the variable ball entering means.

Features K7. When the second variable ball entering means is in the first state, the second variable ball entering means is a game ball flowing down the predetermined game area and flows into the downstream side of the first variable ball entering means. The game ball is guided to the ball entering portion of the second variable ball entering means, the second displacing portion (second special electric prize winning device 292) for preventing the game ball from flowing into the downstream side of the second variable ball entering means. The game machine according to feature K6, which has a guide plate portion 214).

According to the characteristic K7, even if the leakage of the ball to the first variable ball entrance means occurs at the end timing of the unit control state of one execution time, the game ball enters the second variable ball entrance means. It will be.

Features K8. A blocking state, which is provided downstream of the first variable ball entry means and upstream of the second variable ball entry means, for blocking the inflow of the game ball flowing down from the upstream side to a further downstream side. , Any one of the features K1 to K7 characterized by including a blocking means (flow-down blocking member 303) that can be switched to a non-blocking state that does not block the flow of the game ball to the further downstream side. The gaming machine described in 1.

According to the characteristic K8, even if the ball leaks into the first variable ball entrance means, it is possible to prevent the leaked game ball from flowing into the downstream side by the blocking means. Then, in the situation that the second variable ball entering means is in the first state, the blocking means is switched from the blocking state to the non-blocking state, so that the game ball is prevented from flowing into the downstream side by the blocking state. It is possible to enter the second variable ball entering means.

Features K9. The blocking means is brought into the blocking state at a timing before the timing at which the first variable ball entry means is switched from the first state to the second state, and the second variable ball entry means is set to the second state. A blocking control unit (a function for executing a flow-down blocking control process in the main CPU 63) is provided to bring the blocking unit into the non-blocking state at a timing after the timing when the state is switched to the first state. A gaming machine according to feature K8, which is characterized in that

According to the characteristic K9, since the blocking means is in the blocking state at the timing before the timing when the first variable ball entering means is switched from the first state to the second state, the first variable ball entering means is It is possible to block the inflow of the game sphere that has leaked into the first variable ball entrance means to the further downstream side by the blocking means at the timing of switching from the first state to the second state. Then, the blocking means becomes the non-blocking state at a timing after the timing at which the second variable ball entering means is switched from the second state to the first state, so that the game ball blocked by the blocking means is changed to the second variable. It will enter the ball entering means. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the ball from leaking into the variable ball entering means by the blocking means.

In addition, with respect to the configurations of the features K1 to K9, the features A1 to A41, the features B1 to B20, the features C1 to C4, the features D1 to D10, the features E1 to E7, the features F1 to F45, the features G1 to G18, and the features H1 to H1. Any one or a plurality of configurations of H8, features I1 to I11, features J1 to J9, and features K1 to K9 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to exert a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

According to the invention related to the characteristic group K, it is possible to solve the following problems.

As a kind of gaming machine, a pachinko machine and a slot machine are known. In these gaming machines, a configuration is known in which a player is provided with a profit by shifting a game state to a special control state based on the satisfaction of a predetermined shift condition.

Regarding pachinko machines, specifically, a configuration that shifts to a special control state by a winning result in an internal lottery based on the entry of a game ball into the ball entry part provided in the game area, or a predetermined entry A configuration is known in which a game ball enters a part and shifts to a special control state. When the special control state is entered, for example, opening and closing of the ball entrance device provided in the game area is started, and the game ball is paid out based on the ball entering the ball entrance device.

Here, in the gaming machine as illustrated above, it is necessary to make the execution mode of the special control state suitable, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The following is a basic configuration of a gaming machine to which each of the above features can be applied or applied to each feature.

Pachinko gaming machine: operating means operated by a player, game ball launching means for launching a game ball based on the operation of the operating means, a ball passage for guiding the launched game ball to a predetermined game area, and a game A gaming machine that includes each game component arranged in the area, and gives a bonus to a player when a game ball passes through a predetermined passage portion of each of the game components.

Rotating type gaming machine such as slot machine: equipped with a pattern display device for variably displaying a plurality of patterns, the variable display of the plurality of patterns is started due to the operation of the starting operation means, and due to the operation of the stop operation means In addition, or after a lapse of a predetermined time, the variable display of the plurality of patterns is stopped, and a gaming machine which gives a privilege to the player according to the stopped patterns.

10... Pachinko machine, 32... Special electric prize winning device, 33... First operating port, 34... Second operating port, 35... Through gate, 45b... Entrance part, 63... Main CPU, 82... Display control device, 214... Induction Plate part, 241... Guide nail group, 251, 1st special ball entrance, 252... 2nd special ball entrance, 261, 1st special electric prize winning device, 262... 2nd special electric prize device, 263... 1st through gate, 264... Second through gate, 265... First big winning opening, 266... Second big winning opening, 267... First guide nail group, 268... Second guide nail group, 271... First guide plate, 281... Second Guide plate, 291... 1st special electric prize winning device, 292... 2nd special electric prize winning device, 303... Downflow blocking member, 311... Gate for emergence, 312... Restriction nail, PA... Game area.

Claims (2)

A predetermined detection means for detecting a game ball,
A game value giving means that is electrically connected to the predetermined detecting means and executes a process for giving a game value to a game;
A process execution unit that is electrically connected to the game value providing unit and executes a predetermined process;
In a gaming machine equipped with
The game value adding means,
First reference information storage means for storing reference information, which is information used for the processing for giving the game value and is referred to for detection by the predetermined detection means,
After the predetermined supply of electric power to the gaming machine is started and before the execution of the predetermined process for advancing the game is started, the reference information stored in the first reference information storage means is used. First transmitting means for transmitting a reference information signal corresponding to information to the processing executing means,
Second transmitting means for transmitting, to the processing executing means, a predetermined information signal based on ball entry information, which is information acquired based on the detection by the predetermined detecting means,
Equipped with
The processing execution means,
Second reference information storage means for storing reference information corresponding to the reference information signal transmitted from the game value giving means,
Execution means for executing the predetermined processing based on the predetermined information signal transmitted from the second transmission means and the reference information stored in the second reference information storage means;
Processing result information storage means for storing processing result information which is information relating to processing results of the predetermined processing by the execution means;
Equipped with
The game value adding means is a main control means for controlling the progress of the game,
Said processing execution means Ri presentation control means der for controlling the execution of the effect,
A game machine, wherein the predetermined process is a process corresponding to a state of the game machine and is different from a payout of a game ball . The gaming machine according to claim 1, which is a pachinko machine.

Images